 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| PIC16F/LF1946/47 Data Sheet 64-Pin Flash-Based, 8-Bit CMOS Microcontrollers with LCD Driver and nanoWatt XLP Technology 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: * * * Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip's Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as "unbreakable." * * Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip's code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer's risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, rfPIC and UNI/O are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. FilterLab, Hampshire, HI-TECH C, Linear Active Thermistor, MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, HI-TIDE, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, mTouch, Octopus, Omniscient Code Generation, PICC, PICC-18, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit, PICtail, PIC32 logo, REAL ICE, rfLAB, Select Mode, Total Endurance, TSHARC, UniWinDriver, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. (c) 2010, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. ISBN: 978-1-60932-049-2 Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California and India. The Company's quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC(R) MCUs and dsPIC(R) DSCs, KEELOQ(R) code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip's quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. DS41414A-page 2 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 64-Pin Flash-Based, 8-Bit CMOS Microcontrollers with LCD Driver with nanoWatt XLP Technology Devices Included In This Data Sheet: * PIC16F1946 * PIC16LF1946 * PIC16F1947 * PIC16LF1947 PIC16LF1946/47 Low-Power Features: * Standby Current: - 60 nA @ 1.8V, typical * Operating Current: - 7.0 A @ 32 kHz, 1.8V, typical (PIC16LF1946/47) - 75 A @ 1 MHz, 1.8V, typical (PIC16LF1946/47) * Timer1 Oscillator Current: - 600 nA @ 32 kHz, 1.8V, typical * Low-Power Watchdog Timer Current: - 500 nA @ 1.8V, typical (PIC16LF1946/47) High-Performance RISC CPU: * Only 49 Instructions to Learn: - All single-cycle instructions except branches * Operating Speed: - DC - 32 MHz oscillator/clock input - DC - 125 ns instruction cycle * Up to 16K x 14 Words of Flash Program Memory * Up to 1024 Bytes of Data Memory (RAM) * Interrupt Capability with Automatic Context Saving * 16-Level Deep Hardware Stack * Direct, Indirect and Relative Addressing modes * Processor Read Access to Program Memory Peripheral Features: * Up to 54 I/O Pins and 1 Input-only pin: - High-current source/sink for direct LED drive - Individually programmable Interrupt-on-pin change pins - Individually programmable weak pull-ups * Integrated LCD Controller: - Up to 184 segments - Variable clock input - Contrast control - Internal voltage reference selections * Capacitive Sensing Module (mTouchTM): - Up to 16 selectable channels * A/D Converter: - 10-bit resolution and up to 14 channels - Selectable 1.024/2.048/4.096V voltage reference * Timer0: 8-Bit Timer/Counter with 8-Bit Programmable Prescaler * Enhanced Timer1: - Dedicated low-power 32 kHz oscillator driver - 16-bit timer/counter with prescaler - External Gate Input mode with toggle and single shot modes - Interrupt-on-gate completion * Timer2, 4, 6: 8-Bit Timer/Counter with 8-Bit Period Register, Prescaler and Postscaler * Two Capture, Compare, PWM Modules (CCP): - 16-bit Capture, max. resolution 125 ns - 16-bit Compare, max. resolution 125 ns - 10-bit PWM, max. frequency 31.25 kHz * Three Enhanced Capture, Compare, PWM Modules (ECCP): - 3 PWM time-base options - Auto-shutdown and auto-restart - PWM steering - Programmable Dead-band Delay Special Microcontroller Features: * Precision Internal Oscillator: - Factory calibrated to 1%, typical - Software selectable frequency range from 32 MHz to 31 kHz * Power-Saving Sleep mode * Power-on Reset (POR) * Power-up Timer (PWRT) and Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) * Brown-out Reset (BOR): - Selectable between two trip points - Disable in Sleep option * Multiplexed Master Clear with Pull-up/Input Pin * Programmable Code Protection * High Endurance Flash/EEPROM cell: - 100,000 write Flash endurance - 1,000,000 write EEPROM endurance - Flash/Data EEPROM retention: > 40 years * Wide Operating Voltage Range: - 1.8V-5.5V (PIC16F1946/47) - 1.8V-3.6V (PIC16LF1946/47) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 1 PIC16F/LF1946/47 Peripheral Features (Continued): * Two Master Synchronous Serial Ports (MSSPs) with SPI and I2 CTM with: - 7-bit address masking - SMBus/PMBusTM compatibility - Auto-wake-up on start * Two Enhanced Universal Synchronous: Asynchronous Receiver Transmitters (EUSARTs) - RS-232, RS-485 and LIN compatible - Auto-Baud Detect * SR Latch (555 Timer): - Multiple Set/Reset input options - Emulates 555 Timer applications * 2 Comparators: - Rail-to-rail inputs/outputs - Power mode control - Software enable hysteresis * Voltage Reference Module: - Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) with 1.024V, 2.048V and 4.096V output levels - 5-bit rail-to-rail resistive DAC with positive and negative reference selection PIC16F/LF1946/47 Family Types Program Memory Flash (words) Data EEPROM (bytes) SRAM (bytes) Comparators CapSense (ch) 10-bit A/D (ch) I2CTM/SPI EUSART Timers 8/16-bit Device ECCP I/O's CCP PIC16F1946 PIC16LF1946 8192 256 256 512 1024 54 54 17 17 17 17 3 3 4/1 4/1 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 184/4 184/4 PIC16F1947 16384 PIC16LF1947 DS41414A-page 2 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. LCD PIC16F/LF1946/47 Pin Diagram - 64-Pin TQFP/QFN (PIC16F/LF1946/47) 64-pin TQFP, QFN RE2/P2B(1)/VLCD3 RE3/P3C(1)/COM0 RE4/P3B(1)/COM1 RE5/P1C(1)/COM2 RE6/P1B(1)/COM3 RE7/CCP2(1)/P2A(1)/SEG31 RD0/P2D(1)/SEG0 VDD VSS RD1/P2C(1)/SEG1 RD2/P2B(1)/SEG2 RD3/P3C(1)/SEG3 RD4/SDO2/P3B(1)/SEG4 RD5/SDI2/SDA2/P1C(1)/SEG5 RD6/SCK2/SCL2/P1B(1)/SEG6 RD7/SS2/SEG7 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 VLCD1/P2D(1)/RE0 SEG42/P3A/CCP3/RG0 SEG43/C3OUT/CK2/TX2/CPS15/AN15/RG1 SEG44/C3IN+/DT2/RX2/CPS14/AN14/RG2 SEG45/P3D/CCP4/C3IN0-/CPS13/AN13/RG3 VPP/MCLR/RG5 SEG26/P1D/CCP5/C3IN1-/CPS12/AN12/RG4 VSS VDD SEG25/SS1/C1IN3-/C2IN3-/C3IN3-/CPS5/AN5/RF7 SEG24/C1IN+/CPS11/AN11/RF6 SEG23/DACOUT/C1IN1-/C2IN1-/CPS10/AN10/RF5 SEG22/C2IN+/CPS9/AN9/RF4 SEG21/C1IN2-/C2IN2-/C3IN2-/CPS8/AN8/RF3 SEG20/SRQ/C1OUT/CPS7/AN7/RF2 VLCD2/P2C(1)/RE1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 RB0/INT/SRI/FLT0/SEG30 RB1/SEG8 RB2/SEG9 RB3/SEG10 RB4/SEG11 RB5/T1G/SEG29 RB6/ICSPCLK/ICDCLK/SEG38 VSS RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/SEG36 RA7/OSC1/CLKIN/SEG37 VDD RB7/ICSPDAT/ICDDAT/SEG39 RC5/SDO1/SEG12 RC4/SDI1/SDA1/SEG16 RC3/SCK1/SCL1/SEG17 RC2/CCP1/P1A/SEG13 PIC16F/LF1946/47 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 SEG19/SRNQ/C2OUT/CPS6/AN6/RF1 VCAP/SEG41/C1IN0-/C2IN0-/CPS16/AN16/RF0 AVDD AVSS SEG35/CPS3/VREF+/AN3/RA3 SEG34/CPS2/VREF-/AN2/RA2 SEG18/CPS1/AN1/RA1 SEG33/CPS0/AN0/RA0 VSS VDD SEG15/CPS4/AN4/RA5 SEG14/T0CKI/RA4 SEG32/CCP2(1)/P2A(1)//T1OSI/RC1 SEG40/T1CKI/T1OSO/RC0 SEG27/CK1/TX1/RC6 SEG28/DT1/RX1/RC7 Note 1: Pin location selected by APFCON register setting. 2: QFN package orientation is the same. No leads are present on the QFN package. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 3 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 1: 64-Pin TQFP, QFN ANSEL 64-PIN SUMMARY(PIC16F/LF1946/47) Comparator Cap Sense Reference SR Latch Interrupt USART Pull-up Timers MSSP RA0 RA1 RA2 RA3 RA4 RA5 RA6 24 23 22 21 28 27 40 Y Y Y Y -- Y -- AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 -- AN4 -- -- -- VREFVREF+ -- -- -- CPS0 CPS1 CPS2 CPS3 -- CPS4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- T0CKI -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SEG33 SEG18 SEG34 SEG35 SEG14 SEG15 SEG36 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- OSC2/ CLKOUT OSC1/ CLKIN -- -- -- -- -- -- ICSPCLK/ ICDCLK ICSPDAT/ ICDDAT -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RA7 RB0 RB1 RB2 RB3 RB4 RB5 RB6 39 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SRI -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- T1G -- -- FLT0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SEG37 SEG30 SEG8 SEG9 SEG10 SEG11 SEG29 SEG38 -- INT/ IOC IOC IOC IOC IOC IOC IOC -- Y Y Y Y Y Y Y RB7 37 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SEG39 IOC Y RC0 RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 RC6 RC7 RD0 RD1 RD2 RD3 RD4 RD5 RD6 RD7 30 29 33 34 35 36 31 32 58 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- T1OSO/ T1CKI T1OSI -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CCP2(1)/ P2A(1) CCP1/ P1A -- -- -- -- -- P2D(1) P2C(1) P2B(1) P3C(1) P3B(1) P1C(1) P1B(1) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TX1/ CK1 RX1/ DT1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SCK1/ SCL1 SDI1/ SDA1 SDO1 -- -- -- -- -- -- SDO2 SDI2 SDA2 SCK2/ SCL2 SS2 SEG40 SEG32 SEG13 SEG17 SEG16 SEG12 SEG27 SEG28 SEG0 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 SEG7 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Note 1: 2: 3: Pin functions can be moved using the APFCON register(s). Weak pull-up always enabled when MCLR is enabled, otherwise the pull-up is under user control. See Section 8.0. DS41414A-page 4 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Basic -- -- -- -- -- -- CCP LCD A/D I/O PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 1: 64-Pin TQFP, QFN ANSEL 64-PIN SUMMARY(PIC16F/LF1946/47) (Continued) Comparator Cap Sense Reference SR Latch Interrupt USART Pull-up Timers MSSP RE0 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 RE5 RE6 RE7 RF0 RF1 RF2 RF3 2 1 64 63 62 61 60 59 18 17 16 15 Y Y Y -- -- -- -- -- Y Y Y Y -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- AN16 AN6 AN7 AN8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CPS16 CPS6 CPS7 CPS8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- C1IN0C2IN0C2OUT C1OUT C1IN2C2IN2C3IN2C2IN+ C1IN1C2IN1C1IN+ C1IN3C2IN3C3IN3-- C3OUT C3IN+ C3IN0C3IN1-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SRNQ SRQ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P2D(1) P2C(1) P2B(1) P3C(1) P3B(1) P1C(1) P1B(1) CCP2(1)/ P2A(1) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- VLCD1 VLCD2 VLCD3 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG31 SEG41 SEG19 SEG20 SEG21 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- VCAP(3) -- -- -- RF4 RF5 RF6 RF7 14 13 12 11 Y Y Y Y AN9 AN10 AN11 AN5 -- DACOUT -- -- CPS9 CPS10 CPS11 CPS5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SS1 SEG22 SEG23 SEG24 SEG25 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RG0 RG1 RG2 RG3 RG4 RG5 VDD 3 4 5 6 8 7 10 26 38 57 9 25 41 56 19 20 -- Y Y Y Y -- -- -- AN15 AN14 AN13 AN12 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CPS15 CPS14 CPS13 CPS12 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CCP3 P3A -- -- CCP4 P3D CCP5 P1D -- -- -- TX2/ CK2 RX2/ DT2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SEG42 SEG43 SEG44 SEG45 SEG26 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Y(2) -- MCLR/ VPP VDD VSS -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- VSS AVDD AVSS -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- AVDD AVSS Note 1: 2: 3: Pin functions can be moved using the APFCON register(s). Weak pull-up always enabled when MCLR is enabled, otherwise the pull-up is under user control. See Section 8.0. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 5 Basic -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CCP LCD A/D I/O PIC16F/LF1946/47 Table of Contents 1.0 Device Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9 2.0 Enhanced Mid-range CPU ......................................................................................................................................................... 17 3.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 19 4.0 Device Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 53 5.0 Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)....................................................................................................................... 59 6.0 Resets ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 75 7.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 83 8.0 Low Dropout (LDO) Voltage Regulator ...................................................................................................................................... 99 9.0 Power-Down Mode (Sleep) ...................................................................................................................................................... 101 10.0 Watchdog Timer ....................................................................................................................................................................... 103 11.0 Data EEPROM and Flash Program Memory Control ............................................................................................................... 107 12.0 I/O Ports ................................................................................................................................................................................... 121 13.0 Interrupt-On-Change ................................................................................................................................................................ 147 14.0 Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) ............................................................................................................................................... 151 15.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module .............................................................................................................................. 153 16.0 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module .............................................................................................................................. 167 17.0 Comparator Module.................................................................................................................................................................. 173 18.0 SR Latch................................................................................................................................................................................... 181 19.0 Timer0 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 187 20.0 Timer1 Module with Gate Control............................................................................................................................................. 191 21.0 Timer2/4/6 Modules.................................................................................................................................................................. 203 22.0 Capture/Compare/PWM Modules ............................................................................................................................................ 207 23.0 Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP1 and MSSP2) Module .............................................................................................. 235 24.0 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) ............................................................... 289 25.0 Capacitive Sensing Module ...................................................................................................................................................... 317 26.0 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Driver Module ............................................................................................................................. 327 27.0 In-Circuit Serial ProgrammingTM (ICSPTM) ............................................................................................................................... 363 28.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 367 29.0 Electrical Specifications ........................................................................................................................................................... 381 30.0 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Charts ....................................................................................................................... 413 31.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 415 32.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 419 Appendix A: Data Sheet Revision History.......................................................................................................................................... 425 Appendix B: Migrating From Other PIC(R) Devices ............................................................................................................................. 425 Index .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 427 The Microchip Web Site ..................................................................................................................................................................... 435 Customer Change Notification Service .............................................................................................................................................. 435 Customer Support .............................................................................................................................................................................. 435 Reader Response .............................................................................................................................................................................. 436 Product Identification System............................................................................................................................................................. 437 DS41414A-page 6 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at docerrors@mail.microchip.com or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: * Microchip's Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com * Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) * The Microchip Corporate Literature Center; U.S. FAX: (480) 792-7277 When contacting a sales office or the literature center, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com/cn to receive the most current information on all of our products. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 7 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 8 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW The PIC16F/LF1946/47 are described within this data sheet. They are available in 64-pin packages. Figure 1-1 shows a block diagram of the PIC16F/LF1946/47 devices. Table 1-2 shows the pinout descriptions. Reference Table 1-1 for peripherals available per device. TABLE 1-1: DEVICE PERIPHERAL SUMMARY PIC16LF1946/47 PIC16F1946/47 ECCP1 ECCP2 ECCP3 CCP4 CCP5 C1 C2 C3 EUSART1 EUSART2 MSSP1 MSSP2 Timer0 Timer1 Timer2 Timer4 Timer6 Peripheral ADC Capacitive Sensing Module (CSM) Data EEPROM Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) LCD SR Latch Capture/Compare/PWM Modules Comparators EUSARTS Master Synchronous Serial Ports Timers 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 9 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 1-1: PIC16F/LF1946/47 BLOCK DIAGRAM Program Flash Memory RAM EEPROM PORTA OSC2/CLKO Timing Generation INTRC Oscillator CPU PORTB OSC1/CLKI Figure 2-1 MCLR PORTC PORTD PORTE PORTF SR Latch ADC 10-Bit Timer0 Timer1 Timer2 Timer4 Timer6 Comparators PORTG LCD ECCP1 ECCP2 ECCP3 CCP4 CCP5 MSSPx EUSARTx Note 1: See applicable chapters for more information on peripherals. DS41414A-page 10 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 1-2: PIC16F/LF1946/47 PINOUT DESCRIPTION Function RA0 AN0 CPS0 SEG33 RA1/AN1/CPS1/SEG18 RA1 AN1 CPS1 SEG18 RA2/AN2/VREF-/CPS2/SEG34 RA2 AN2 VREFCPS2 SEG34 RA3/AN3/VREF+/CPS3/SEG35 RA3 AN3 VREF+ CPS3 SEG35 RA4/T0CKI/SEG14 RA4 T0CKI SEG14 RA5/AN4/CPS4/SEG15 RA5 AN4 CPS4 SEG5 RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/SEG36 RA6 OSC2 CLKOUT SEG36 RA7/OSC1/CLKIN/SEG37 RA7 OSC1 CLKIN SEG37 RB0/INT/SRI/FLT0/SEG30 RB0 INT SRI FLT0 SEG30 RB1/SEG8 RB1 SEG8 Input Type TTL AN AN -- TTL AN AN -- TTL AN AN AN -- TTL AN AN AN -- TTL ST -- TTL AN AN -- TTL -- -- -- TTL XTAL CMOS -- TTL ST -- ST -- TTL -- Output Type CMOS General purpose I/O. -- -- AN -- -- AN -- -- -- AN -- -- -- AN -- AN -- -- AN XTAL AN -- -- AN A/D Channel 0 input. Capacitive sensing input 0. LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 1 input. Capacitive sensing input 1. LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 2 input. A/D Negative Voltage Reference input. Capacitive sensing input 2. LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 3 input. A/D Voltage Reference input. Capacitive sensing input 3. LCD Analog output. Timer0 clock input. LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 4 input. Capacitive sensing input 4. LCD Analog output. Crystal/Resonator (LP, XT, HS modes). LCD Analog output. Crystal/Resonator (LP, XT, HS modes). External clock input (EC mode). LCD Analog output. Description Name RA0/AN0/CPS0/SEG33 CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS FOSC/4 output. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS General purpose I/O. Individually controlled interrupt-on-change. Individually enabled pull-up. -- ST -- AN External interrupt. SR Latch input. ECCP Auto-shutdown Fault input. LCD analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. Individually controlled interrupt-on-change. Individually enabled pull-up. AN LCD Analog output. Legend: AN = Analog input or output CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output OD = Open Drain TTL = TTL compatible input ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I2CTM = Schmitt Trigger input with I2C HV = High Voltage XTAL = Crystal levels Note 1: Pin function is selectable via the APFCON register. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 11 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 1-2: PIC16F/LF1946/47 PINOUT DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) Function RB2 SEG9 RB3/SEG10 RB3 SEG10 RB4/SEG11 RB4 SEG11 RB5/T1G/SEG29 RB5 T1G SEG29 RB6/ICSPCLK/ICDCLK/SEG38 RB6 ICSPCLK ICDCLK SEG38 RB7/ICSPDAT/ICDDAT/SEG39 RB7 ICSPDAT ICDDAT SEG39 RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI/SEG40 RC0 T1OSO T1CKI SEG40 RC1/T1OSI/P2A(1)/CCP2(1)/ SEG32 RC1 T1OSI P2A CCP2 SEG32 RC2/CCP1/P1A/SEG13 RC2 CCP1 P1A SEG13 RC3/SCK/SCL/SEG17 RC3 SCK SCL SEG17 RC4/SDI1/SDA1/SEG16 RC4 SDI1 SDA1 SEG16 Input Type TTL -- TTL -- TTL -- TTL ST -- TTL ST ST -- TTL ST ST -- ST XTAL ST -- ST XTAL -- ST -- ST ST -- -- ST ST I2C -- ST ST I2C -- Output Type Description Name RB2/SEG9 CMOS General purpose I/O. Individually controlled interrupt-on-change. Individually enabled pull-up. AN LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. Individually controlled interrupt-on-change. Individually enabled pull-up. AN LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. Individually controlled interrupt-on-change. Individually enabled pull-up. AN LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. Individually controlled interrupt-on-change. Individually enabled pull-up. -- AN Timer1 Gate input. LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. Individually controlled interrupt-on-change. Individually enabled pull-up. -- -- AN Serial Programming Clock. In-Circuit Debug Clock. LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. Individually controlled interrupt-on-change. Individually enabled pull-up. CMOS ICSPTM Data I/O. CMOS In-Circuit Data I/O. AN XTAL -- AN XTAL LCD Analog output. Timer1 oscillator connection. Timer1 clock input. LCD Analog output. Timer1 oscillator connection. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS PWM output. CMOS Capture/Compare/PWM2. AN LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS Capture/Compare/PWM1. CMOS PWM output. AN LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS SPI clock. OD AN -- OD AN I2CTM clock. LCD Analog output. SPI data input. I2CTM data input/output. LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. Legend: AN = Analog input or output CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output OD = Open Drain TTL = TTL compatible input ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I2CTM = Schmitt Trigger input with I2C HV = High Voltage XTAL = Crystal levels Note 1: Pin function is selectable via the APFCON register. DS41414A-page 12 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 1-2: PIC16F/LF1946/47 PINOUT DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) Function RC5 SDO1 SEG12 RC6/TX1/CK1/SEG27 RC6 TX1 CK1 SEG27 RC7/RX1/DT1/SEG28 RC7 RX DT1 SEG28 RD0/P2D(1)/SEG0 RD0 P2D SEG0 RD1/P2C(1)/SEG1 RD1 P2C SEG1 RD2/P2B /SEG2 (1) Name RC5/SDO1/SEG12 Input Type ST -- -- ST -- ST -- ST ST ST -- ST -- -- ST -- -- ST -- -- ST -- -- ST -- -- -- ST ST IC -- -- ST ST I2C -- -- ST ST -- ST -- AN 2 Output Type CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS SPI data output. AN LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. Description CMOS USART1 asynchronous transmit. CMOS USART1 synchronous clock. AN -- AN LCD Analog output. USART1 asynchronous input. LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS USART1 synchronous data. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS PWM output. AN LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS PWM output. AN LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS PWM output. AN LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS PWM output. AN LCD analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS SPI data output. CMOS PWM output. AN -- OD AN LCD analog output. SPI data input. I2CTM data input/output. LCD analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. RD2 P2B SEG2 RD3/P3C(1)/SEG3 RD3 P3C SEG3 RD4/SDO2/P3B(1)/SEG4 RD4 SDO2 P3B SEG4 RD5/SDI2/SDA2/P1C(1)/SEG5 RD5 SDI2 SDA2 P1C SEG5 CMOS PWM output. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS SPI clock. OD AN -- AN I2CTM clock. LCD analog output. Slave Select input. LCD analog output. CMOS PWM output. CMOS General purpose I/O. RD6/SCK2/SCL2/P1B(1)/SEG6 RD6 SCK2 SCL2 P1B SEG6 RD7/SS2/SEG7 RD7 SS2 SEG7 RE0/P2D(1)/VLCD1 RE0 P2D VLCD1 CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS PWM output. -- LCD analog input. Legend: AN = Analog input or output CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output OD = Open Drain TTL = TTL compatible input ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I2CTM = Schmitt Trigger input with I2C HV = High Voltage XTAL = Crystal levels Note 1: Pin function is selectable via the APFCON register. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 13 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 1-2: PIC16F/LF1946/47 PINOUT DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) Function RE1 P2C VLCD2 RE2/P2B(1)/VLCD3 RE2 P2B VLCD3 RE3/P3C(1)/COM0 RE3 P3C COM0 RE4/P3B(1)/COM1 RE4 P3B COM1 RE5/P1C(1)/COM2 RE5 P1C COM2 RE6/P1B(1)/COM3 RE6 P1B COM3 RE7/CCP2(1)/P2A(1)/SEG31 RE7 CCP2 P2A SEG31 RF0/AN16/CPS16/C12IN0-/ SEG41/VCAP RF0 AN16 CPS16 C1IN0C2IN0SEG41 VCAP RF1/AN6/CPS6/C2OUT/SRNQ/ SEG19 RF1 AN6 CPS6 C2OUT SRNQ SEG19 RF2/AN7/CPS7/C1OUT/SRQ/ SEG20 RF2 AN7 CPS7 C1OUT SRQ SEG20 Input Type ST -- AN ST -- AN TTL -- -- TTL -- -- TTL -- -- TTL -- -- TTL ST -- -- TTL AN AN AN AN Name RE1/P2C(1)/VLCD2 Output Type CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS PWM output. -- LCD analog input. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS PWM output. -- -- AN -- AN -- AN -- AN -- LCD analog input. General purpose input. LCD Analog output. General purpose input. LCD Analog output. General purpose input. LCD Analog output. General purpose input. LCD Analog output. General purpose input. Description CMOS PWM output. CMOS PWM output. CMOS PWM output. CMOS PWM output. CMOS Capture/Compare/PWM2. CMOS PWM output. AN -- -- -- -- LCD analog output. A/D Channel 16 input. Capacitive sensing input 16. Comparator C1 negative input. Comparator C2 negative input. CMOS General purpose I/O. -- Power TTL AN AN -- -- -- TTL AN AN -- AN Power -- -- LCD Analog output. Filter capacitor for Voltage Regulator. A/D Channel 6 input. Capacitive sensing input 6. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS Comparator C2 output. CMOS SR Latch inverting output. AN -- -- LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 7 input. Capacitive sensing input 7. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS Comparator C1 output. CMOS SR Latch non-inverting output. AN LCD Analog output. -- -- Legend: AN = Analog input or output CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output OD = Open Drain TTL = TTL compatible input ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I2CTM = Schmitt Trigger input with I2C HV = High Voltage XTAL = Crystal levels Note 1: Pin function is selectable via the APFCON register. DS41414A-page 14 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 1-2: PIC16F/LF1946/47 PINOUT DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) Function RF3 AN8 CPS8 C1IN2C2IN2C3IN2SEG21 RF4/AN9/CPS9/C2IN+/SEG22 RF4 AN9 CPS9 C2IN+ SEG22 RF5/AN10/CPS10/C12IN1-/ DACOUT/SEG23 RF5 AN10 CPS10 C1IN1C2IN1DACOUT SEG23 RF6/AN11/CPS11/C1IN+/SEG24 RF6 AN11 CPS11 C1IN+ SEG24 RF7/AN5/CPS5/C123IN3-/SS1/ SEG25 RF7 AN5 CPS5 C1IN3C2IN3C3IN3SS1 SEG25 RG0/CCP3/P3A/SEG42 RG0 CCP3 P3A SEG42 RG1/AN15/CPS15/TX2/CK2/ C3OUT/SEG43 RG1 AN15 CPS15 TX2 CK2 C3OUT SEG43 Input Type TTL AN AN AN AN AN Name RF3/AN8/CPS8/C123IN2-/ SEG21 Output Type CMOS General purpose I/O. -- -- -- -- -- Description A/D Channel 8 input. Capacitive sensing input 8. Comparator C1 negative input. Comparator C2 negative input. Comparator C3 negative input. -- TTL AN AN AN AN -- -- -- LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 9 input. Capacitive sensing input 9. Comparator C2 positive input. CMOS General purpose I/O. -- TTL AN AN AN AN AN -- -- -- -- LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 10 input. Capacitive sensing input 10. Comparator C1 negative input. Comparator C2 negative input. CMOS General purpose I/O. -- -- TTL AN AN AN AN AN -- -- -- Voltage Reference output. LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 11 input. Capacitive sensing input 11. Comparator C1 positive input. CMOS General purpose I/O. -- TTL AN AN AN AN AN AN -- -- -- -- -- LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 5 input. Capacitive sensing input 5. Comparator C1negative input. Comparator C2 negative input. Comparator C3 negative input. CMOS General purpose I/O. ST -- ST ST -- -- ST AN AN -- ST -- -- -- AN Slave Select input. LCD Analog output. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS Capture/Compare/PWM3. CMOS PWM output. AN -- -- LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 15 input. Capacitive sensing input 15. CMOS General purpose I/O. CMOS USART2 asynchronous transmit. CMOS USART2 synchronous clock. CMOS Comparator C3 output. AN LCD Analog output. Legend: AN = Analog input or output CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output OD = Open Drain TTL = TTL compatible input ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I2CTM = Schmitt Trigger input with I2C HV = High Voltage XTAL = Crystal levels Note 1: Pin function is selectable via the APFCON register. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 15 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 1-2: PIC16F/LF1946/47 PINOUT DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) Function RG2 AN14 CPS14 RX2 DT2 C3IN+ SEG44 RG3/AN13/CPS13/C3IN0-/ CCP4/P3D/SEG45 RG3 AN13 CPS13 C3IN0CCP4 P3D SEG45 RG4/AN12/CPS12/C3IN1-/ CCP5/P1D/SEG26 RG4 AN12 CPS12 C3IN1CCP5 P1D SEG26 RG5/MCLR/VPP RG5 MCLR VPP VDD VSS VDD VSS Input Type ST AN AN ST ST AN Name RG2/AN14/CPS14/RX2/DT2/ C3IN+/SEG44 Output Type CMOS General purpose I/O. -- -- -- -- Description A/D Channel 14 input. Capacitive sensing input 14. USART2 asynchronous input. Comparator C3 positive input. CMOS USART2 synchronous data. AN -- -- -- -- ST AN AN AN LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 13 input. Capacitive sensing input 13. Comparator C3 negative input. CMOS General purpose I/O. ST -- -- ST AN AN AN CMOS Capture/Compare/PWM4. CMOS PWM output. AN -- -- -- LCD Analog output. A/D Channel 12 input. Capacitive sensing input 12. Comparator C3 negative input. CMOS General purpose I/O. ST -- -- TTL ST HV Power Power CMOS Capture/Compare/PWM5. CMOS PWM output. AN -- -- -- -- -- LCD Analog output. General purpose input. Master Clear with internal pull-up. Programming voltage. Positive supply. Ground reference. Legend: AN = Analog input or output CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output OD = Open Drain TTL = TTL compatible input ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I2CTM = Schmitt Trigger input with I2C HV = High Voltage XTAL = Crystal levels Note 1: Pin function is selectable via the APFCON register. DS41414A-page 16 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 2.0 ENHANCED MID-RANGE CPU This family of devices contain an enhanced mid-range 8-bit CPU core. The CPU has 49 instructions. Interrupt capability includes automatic context saving. The hardware stack is 16 levels deep and has Overflow and Underflow Reset capability. Direct, Indirect, and Relative addressing modes are available. Two File Select Registers (FSRs) provide the ability to read program and data memory. * * * * Automatic Interrupt Context Saving 16-level Stack with Overflow and Underflow File Select Registers Instruction Set 2.1 Automatic Interrupt Context Saving During interrupts, certain registers are automatically saved in shadow registers and restored when returning from the interrupt. This saves stack space and user code. See Section 7.5 "Automatic Context Saving", for more information. 2.2 16-level Stack with Overflow and Underflow These devices have an external stack memory 15 bits wide and 16 words deep. A Stack Overflow or Underflow will set the appropriate bit (STKOVF or STKUNF) in the PCON register, and if enabled will cause a software Reset. See section Section 3.4 "Stack" for more details. 2.3 File Select Registers There are two 16-bit File Select Registers (FSR). FSRs can access all file registers and program memory, which allows one data pointer for all memory. When an FSR points to program memory, there is 1 additional instruction cycle in instructions using INDF to allow the data to be fetched. General purpose memory can now also be addressed linearly, providing the ability to access contiguous data larger than 80 bytes. There are also new instructions to support the FSRs. See Section 3.5 "Indirect Addressing" for more details. 2.4 Instruction Set There are 49 instructions for the enhanced mid-range CPU to support the features of the CPU. See Section 28.0 "Instruction Set Summary" for more details. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 17 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 2-1: CORE BLOCK DIAGRAM 15 Configuration 15 Program Counter Flash Program Memory MUX Data Bus 8 16-LevelStack 8 Level Stack (15-bit) (13-bit) Program Memory Read (PMR) Direct Addr 7 5 BSR Reg FSR reg RAM Program Bus 14 12 Addr MUX RAM Addr Instruction Reg Instruction reg Indirect Addr 12 12 15 FSR0 Reg FSR reg FSR1 reg FSR Reg 15 8 3 STATUS reg STATUS Reg Power-up Timer Instruction Decode & Decode and Control Timing Generation Oscillator Start-up Timer Power-on Reset Watchdog Timer Brown-out Reset 8 MUX ALU OSC1/CLKIN OSC2/CLKOUT W Reg Internal Oscillator Block VDD VSS DS41414A-page 18 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 3.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION There are three types of memory in PIC16F/LF1946/47 devices: Data Memory, Program Memory and Data EEPROM Memory(1). * Program Memory * Data Memory - Core Registers - Special Function Registers - General Purpose RAM - Common RAM - Device Memory Maps - Special Function Registers Summary * Data EEPROM memory(1) Note 1: The data EEPROM memory and the method to access Flash memory through the EECON registers is described in Section 11.0 "Data EEPROM and Flash Program Memory Control". The following features are associated with access and control of program memory and data memory: * PCL and PCLATH * Stack * Indirect Addressing 3.1 Program Memory Organization The enhanced mid-range core has a 15-bit program counter capable of addressing 32K x 14 program memory space. Table 3-1 shows the memory sizes implemented for the PIC16F/LF1946/47 family. Accessing a location above these boundaries will cause a wrap-around within the implemented memory space. The Reset vector is at 0000h and the interrupt vector is at 0004h (see Figures 3-1, 3-1 and 3-2). TABLE 3-1: DEVICE SIZES AND ADDRESSES Device Program Memory Space (Words) 8,192 16,384 Last Program Memory Address 1FFFh 3FFFh PIC16F/LF1946 PIC16F/LF1947 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 19 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 3-1: PROGRAM MEMORY MAP AND STACK FOR PIC16F/LF1946 PC<14:0> CALL, CALLW RETURN, RETLW Interrupt, RETFIE 15 FIGURE 3-2: PROGRAM MEMORY MAP AND STACK FOR PIC16F/LF1947 PC<14:0> Stack Level 0 Stack Level 1 Stack Level 15 Reset Vector Interrupt Vector Page 0 07FFh 0800h On-chip Program Memory Page 1 0FFFh 1000h Page 2 17FFh 1800h 1FFFh 2000h 0000h 0004h 0005h CALL, CALLW 15 RETURN, RETLW Interrupt, RETFIE Stack Level 0 Stack Level 1 Stack Level 15 Reset Vector Interrupt Vector On-chip Program Memory Page 0 07FFh 0800h Page 1 0FFFh 1000h Page 2 17FFh 1800h 1FFFh 2000h 0000h 0004h 0005h Page 3 Rollover to Page 0 Page 3 Page 4 Page 7 Rollover to Page 0 3FFFh 4000h Rollover to Page 3 7FFFh Rollover to Page 7 7FFFh DS41414A-page 20 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 3.1.1 READING PROGRAM MEMORY AS DATA There are two methods of accessing constants in program memory. The first method is to use tables of RETLW instructions. The second method is to set an FSR to point to the program memory. 3.1.1.1 RETLW Instruction The RETLW instruction can be used to provide access to tables of constants. The recommended way to create such a table is shown in Example 3-1. EXAMPLE 3-1: constants brw RETLW INSTRUCTION ;Add Index in W to ;program counter to ;select data ;Index0 data ;Index1 data retlw retlw retlw retlw DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 my_function ;... LOTS OF CODE... movlw DATA_INDEX call constants ;... THE CONSTANT IS IN W The BRW instruction makes this type of table very simple to implement. If your code must remain portable with previous generations of microcontrollers, then the BRW instruction is not available so the older table read method must be used. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 21 PIC16F/LF1946/47 3.1.1.2 Indirect Read with FSR 3.2.1 CORE REGISTERS The program memory can be accessed as data by setting bit 7 of the FSRxH register and reading the matching INDFx register. The MOVIW instruction will place the lower 8 bits of the addressed word in the W register. Writes to the program memory cannot be performed via the INDF registers. Instructions that access the program memory via the FSR require one extra instruction cycle to complete. Example 3-2 demonstrates accessing the program memory via an FSR. The HIGH directive will set bit<7> if a label points to a location in program memory. The core registers contain the registers that directly affect the basic operation of the PIC16F/LF1946/47. These registers are listed below: * * * * * * * * * * * * INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0 Low FSR0 High FSR1 Low FSR1 High BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON Note: The core registers are the first 12 addresses of every data memory bank. EXAMPLE 3-2: ACCESSING PROGRAM MEMORY VIA FSR constants retlw DATA0 ;Index0 data retlw DATA1 ;Index1 data retlw DATA2 retlw DATA3 my_function ;... LOTS OF CODE... movlw LOW constants movwf FSR1L movlw HIGH constants movwf FSR1H moviw 0[FSR1] ;THE PROGRAM MEMORY IS IN W 3.2 Data Memory Organization The data memory is partitioned in 32 memory banks with 128 bytes in a bank. Each bank consists of (Figure 3-3): * * * * 12 core registers 20 Special Function Registers (SFR) Up to 80 bytes of General Purpose RAM (GPR) 16 bytes of common RAM The active bank is selected by writing the bank number into the Bank Select Register (BSR). Unimplemented memory will read as `0'. All data memory can be accessed either directly (via instructions that use the file registers) or indirectly via the two File Select Registers (FSR). See Section 3.5 "Indirect Addressing" for more information. DS41414A-page 22 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 3.2.1.1 STATUS Register The STATUS register, shown in Register 3-1, contains: * the arithmetic status of the ALU * the Reset status The STATUS register can be the destination for any instruction, like any other register. If the STATUS register is the destination for an instruction that affects the Z, DC or C bits, then the write to these three bits is disabled. These bits are set or cleared according to the device logic. Furthermore, the TO and PD bits are not writable. Therefore, the result of an instruction with the STATUS register as destination may be different than intended. For example, CLRF STATUS will clear the upper three bits and set the Z bit. This leaves the STATUS register as `000u u1uu' (where u = unchanged). It is recommended, therefore, that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF and MOVWF instructions are used to alter the STATUS register, because these instructions do not affect any Status bits. For other instructions not affecting any Status bits (Refer to Section 28.0 "Instruction Set Summary"). Note 1: The C and DC bits operate as Borrow and Digit Borrow out bits, respectively, in subtraction. REGISTER 3-1: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-5 bit 4 STATUS: STATUS REGISTER U-0 -- U-0 -- R-1/q TO R-1/q PD R/W-0/u Z R/W-0/u DC(1) R/W-0/u C(1) bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets q = Value depends on condition Unimplemented: Read as `0' TO: Time-out bit 1 = After power-up, CLRWDT instruction or SLEEP instruction 0 = A WDT time-out occurred PD: Power-down bit 1 = After power-up or by the CLRWDT instruction 0 = By execution of the SLEEP instruction Z: Zero bit 1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero 0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero DC: Digit Carry/Digit Borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW,SUBLW,SUBWF instructions)(1) 1 = A carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result C: Carry/Borrow bit(1) (ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW, SUBWF instructions)(1) 1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred For Borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the two's complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high-order or low-order bit of the source register. bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 23 PIC16F/LF1946/47 3.2.2 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER 3.2.5 DEVICE MEMORY MAPS The Special Function Registers are registers used by the application to control the desired operation of peripheral functions in the device. The registers associated with the operation of the peripherals are described in the appropriate peripheral chapter of this data sheet. The memory maps for the device family are as shown in Table 3-2. TABLE 3-2: Device PIC16F/LF1946/47 MEMORY MAP TABLES Banks 0-7 8-15 16-23 23-31 Table No. Table 3-3 Table 3-4, Table 3-7 Table 3-5 Table 3-6, Table 3-8 3.2.3 GENERAL PURPOSE RAM There are up to 80 bytes of GPR in each data memory bank. 3.2.3.1 Linear Access to GPR The general purpose RAM can be accessed in a non-banked method via the FSRs. This can simplify access to large memory structures. See Section 3.5.2 "Linear Data Memory" for more information. 3.2.4 COMMON RAM There are 16 bytes of common RAM accessible from all banks. FIGURE 3-3: BANKED MEMORY PARTITIONING Memory Region 7-bit Bank Offset 00h 0Bh 0Ch Core Registers (12 bytes) Special Function Registers (20 bytes maximum) 1Fh 20h General Purpose RAM (80 bytes maximum) 6Fh 70h Common RAM (16 bytes) 7Fh DS41414A-page 24 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 3-3: BANK 0 000h 001h 002h 003h 004h 005h 006h 007h 008h 009h 00Ah 00Bh 00Ch 00Dh 00Eh 00Fh 010h 011h 012h 013h 014h 015h 016h 017h 018h 019h 01Ah 01Bh 01Ch 01Dh 01Eh 01Fh 020h INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD PORTE PIR1 PIR2 PIR3 PIR4 TMR0 TMR1L TMR1H T1CON T1GCON TMR2 PR2 T2CON -- CPSCON0 CPSCON1 PIC16F/LF1946/1947 MEMORY MAP, BANKS 0-7 BANK 1 080h 081h 082h 083h 084h 085h 086h 087h 088h 089h 08Ah 08Bh 08Ch 08Dh 08Eh 08Fh 090h 091h 092h 093h 094h 095h 096h 097h 098h 099h 09Ah 09Bh 09Ch 09Dh 09Eh 09Fh 0A0h INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON TRISA TRISB TRISC TRISD TRISE PIE1 PIE2 PIE3 PIE4 OPTION PCON WDTCON OSCTUNE OSCCON OSCSTAT ADRESL ADRESH ADCON0 ADCON1 -- General Purpose Register 80 Bytes 0EFh 0F0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 16Fh 170h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 1FFh 100h 101h 102h 103h 104h 105h 106h 107h 108h 109h 10Ah 10Bh 10Ch 10Dh 10Eh 10Fh 110h 111h 112h 113h 114h 115h 116h 117h 118h 119h 11Ah 11Bh 11Ch 11Dh 11Eh 11Fh 120h DS41414A-page 25 PIC16F/LF1946/47 BANK 2 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON LATA LATB LATC LATD LATE CM1CON0 CM1CON1 CM2CON0 CM2CON1 CMOUT BORCON FVRCON DACCON0 DACCON1 SRCON0 SRCON1 -- APFCON CM3CON0 CM3CON1 General Purpose Register 80 Bytes 1EFh 1F0h 180h 181h 182h 183h 184h 185h 186h 187h 188h 189h 18Ah 18Bh 18Ch 18Dh 18Eh 18Fh 190h 191h 192h 193h 194h 195h 196h 197h 198h 199h 19Ah 19Bh 19Ch 19Dh 19Eh 19Fh 1A0h BANK 3 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON ANSELA -- -- -- ANSELE EEADRL EEADRH EEDATL EEDATH EECON1 EECON2 -- -- RC1REG TX1REG SP1BRGL SP1BRGH RC1STA TX1STA BAUD1CON General Purpose Register 80 Bytes 26Fh 270h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 27Fh 200h 201h 202h 203h 204h 205h 206h 207h 208h 209h 20Ah 20Bh 20Ch 20Dh 20Eh 20Fh 210h 211h 212h 213h 214h 215h 216h 217h 218h 219h 21Ah 21Bh 21Ch 21Dh 21Eh 21Fh 220h BANK 4 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- WPUB -- -- -- SSP1BUF SSP1ADD SSP1MSK SSP1STAT SSP1CON1 SSP1CON2 SSP1CON3 -- SSP2BUF SSP2ADD SSP2MSK SSP2STAT SSP2CON1 SSP2CON2 SSP2CON3 General Purpose Register 80 Bytes 2EFh 2F0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 2FFh 280h 281h 282h 283h 284h 285h 286h 287h 288h 289h 28Ah 28Bh 28Ch 28Dh 28Eh 28Fh 290h 291h 292h 293h 294h 295h 296h 297h 298h 299h 29Ah 29Bh 29Ch 29Dh 29Eh 29Fh 2A0h BANK 5 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON PORTF PORTG -- -- -- CCPR1L CCPR1H CCP1CON PWM1CON CCP1AS PSTR1CON -- CCPR2L CCPR2H CCP2CON PWM2CON CCP2AS PSTR2CON CCPTMRS0 CCPTMRS1 General Purpose Register 80 Bytes 300h 301h 302h 303h 304h 305h 306h 307h 308h 309h 30Ah 30Bh 30Ch 30Dh 30Eh 30Fh 310h 311h 312h 313h 314h 315h 316h 317h 318h 319h 31Ah 31Bh 31Ch 31Dh 31Eh BANK 6 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON TRISF TRISG -- -- -- CCPR3L CCPR3H CCP3CON PWM3CON CCP3AS PSTR3CON -- CCPR4L CCPR4H CCP4CON -- CCPR5L CCPR5H CCP5CON 380h 381h 382h 383h 384h 385h 386h 387h 388h 389h 38Ah 38Bh 38Ch 38Dh 38Eh 38Fh 390h 391h 392h 393h 394h 395h 396h 397h 398h 399h 39Ah 39Bh 39Ch 39Dh 39Eh BANK 7 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON LATF LATG -- -- -- -- -- -- IOCBP IOCBN IOCBF -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- General Purpose Register 80 Bytes(1) Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 31Fh -- 39Fh 320h General Purpose 3A0h Register 16 Bytes 32Fh 330h General Purpose Register 64 Bytes(1) 36Fh 3EFh 370h 3F0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 37Fh 3FFh 06Fh 070h General Purpose Register 96 Bytes Accesses 70h - 7Fh Accesses 70h - 7Fh 07Fh Legend: Note 1: 0FFh 17Fh = Unimplemented data memory locations, read as `0'. Not available on PIC16F1946. TABLE 3-4: BANK 8 400h 401h 402h 403h 404h 405h 406h 407h 408h 409h 40Ah 40Bh 40Ch 40Dh 40Eh 40Fh 410h 411h 412h 413h 414h 415h 416h 417h 418h 419h 41Ah 41Bh 41Ch 41Dh 41Eh 41Fh 420h INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON ANSELF ANSELG -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TMR4 PR4 T4CON -- -- -- -- TMR6 PR6 T6CON -- PIC16F/LF1946/1947 MEMORY MAP, BANKS 8-15 BANK 9 480h 481h 482h 483h 484h 485h 486h 487h 488h 489h 48Ah 48Bh 48Ch 48Dh 48Eh 48Fh 490h 491h 492h 493h 494h 495h 496h 497h 498h 499h 49Ah 49Bh 49Ch 49Dh 49Eh 49Fh 4A0h INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- WPUG -- -- -- RC2REG TX2REG SP2BRG SP2BRGH RC2STA TX2STA BAUDCON2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- General Purpose Register 80 Bytes(1) 4EFh 4F0h 56Fh 570h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 4FFh 57Fh Accesses 70h - 7Fh 5FFh 500h 501h 502h 503h 504h 505h 506h 507h 508h 509h 50Ah 50Bh 50Ch 50Dh 50Eh 50Fh 510h 511h 512h 513h 514h 515h 516h 517h 518h 519h 51Ah 51Bh 51Ch 51Dh 51Eh 51Fh 520h DS41414A-page 26 PIC16F/LF1946/47 BANK 10 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- General Purpose Register 80 Bytes(1) 5EFh 5F0h 580h 581h 582h 583h 584h 585h 586h 587h 588h 589h 58Ah 58Bh 58Ch 58Dh 58Eh 58Fh 590h 591h 592h 593h 594h 595h 596h 597h 598h 599h 59Ah 59Bh 59Ch 59Dh 59Eh 59Fh 5A0h BANK 11 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- General Purpose Register 80 Bytes(1) BANK 12 INDF0 600h INDF1 601h PCL 602h STATUS 603h FSR0L 604h FSR0H 605h FSR1L 606h FSR1H 607h BSR 608h WREG 609h PCLATH 60Ah INTCON 60Bh -- 60Ch -- 60Dh -- 60Eh -- 60Fh -- 610h -- 611h -- 612h -- 613h -- 614h -- 615h -- 616h -- 617h -- 618h -- 619h -- 61Ah -- 61Bh -- 61Ch -- 61Dh -- 61Eh -- 61Fh 620h General Purpose Register 48 Bytes(1) Unimplemented Read as `0' 680h 681h 682h 683h 684h 685h 686h 687h 688h 689h 68Ah 68Bh 68Ch 68Dh 68Eh 68Fh 690h 691h 692h 693h 694h 695h 696h 697h 698h 699h 69Ah 69Bh 69Ch 69Dh 69Eh 69Fh 6A0h BANK 13 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 700h 701h 702h 703h 704h 705h 706h 707h 708h 709h 70Ah 70Bh 70Ch 70Dh 70Eh 70Fh 710h 711h 712h 713h 714h 715h 716h 717h 718h 719h 71Ah 71Bh 71Ch 71Dh 71Eh 71Fh 720h BANK 14 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 780h 781h 782h 783h 784h 785h 786h 787h 788h 789h 78Ah 78Bh 78Ch 78Dh 78Eh 78Fh 790h 791h 792h 793h 794h 795h 796h 797h 798h 799h 79Ah 79Bh 79Ch 79Dh 79Eh 79Fh 7A0h BANK 15 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. See Table 3-7 General Purpose Register 80 Bytes(1) 46Fh 470h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 47Fh Legend: Note 1: Unimplemented Read as `0' 6EFh 6F0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 6FFh 77Fh 76Fh 770h Unimplemented Read as `0' 7EFh 7F0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 7FFh Accesses 70h - 7Fh 66Fh 670h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 67Fh Accesses 70h - 7Fh = Unimplemented data memory locations, read as `0' Not available on PIC16F1946. TABLE 3-5: BANK 16 800h 801h 802h 803h 804h 805h 806h 807h 808h 809h 80Ah 80Bh 80Ch 80Dh 80Eh 80Fh 810h 811h 812h 813h 814h 815h 816h 817h 818h 819h 81Ah 81Bh 81Ch 81Dh 81Eh 81Fh 820h INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- PIC16F/LF1946/47 MEMORY MAP, BANKS 16-23 BANK 17 880h 881h 882h 883h 884h 885h 886h 887h 888h 889h 88Ah 88Bh 88Ch 88Dh 88Eh 88Fh 890h 891h 892h 893h 894h 895h 896h 897h 898h 899h 89Ah 89Bh 89Ch 89Dh 89Eh 89Fh 8A0h INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 900h 901h 902h 903h 904h 905h 906h 907h 908h 909h 90Ah 90Bh 90Ch 90Dh 90Eh 90Fh 910h 911h 912h 913h 914h 915h 916h 917h 918h 919h 91Ah 91Bh 91Ch 91Dh 91Eh 91Fh 920h DS41414A-page 27 PIC16F/LF1946/47 BANK 18 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 980h 981h 982h 983h 984h 985h 986h 987h 988h 989h 98Ah 98Bh 98Ch 98Dh 98Eh 98Fh 990h 991h 992h 993h 994h 995h 996h 997h 998h 999h 99Ah 99Bh 99Ch 99Dh 99Eh 99Fh 9A0h BANK 19 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- A00h A01h A02h A03h A04h A05h A06h A07h A08h A09h A0Ah A0Bh A0Ch A0Dh A0Eh A0Fh A10h A11h A12h A13h A14h A15h A16h A17h A18h A19h A1Ah A1Bh A1Ch A1Dh A1Eh A1Fh A20h BANK 20 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- A80h A81h A82h A83h A84h A85h A86h A87h A88h A89h A8Ah A8Bh A8Ch A8Dh A8Eh A8Fh A90h A91h A92h A93h A94h A95h A96h A97h A98h A99h A9Ah A9Bh A9Ch A9Dh A9Eh A9Fh AA0h BANK 21 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B00h B01h B02h B03h B04h B05h B06h B07h B08h B09h B0Ah B0Bh B0Ch B0Dh B0Eh B0Fh B10h B11h B12h B13h B14h B15h B16h B17h B18h B19h B1Ah B1Bh B1Ch B1Dh B1Eh B1Fh B20h BANK 22 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B80h B81h B82h B83h B84h B85h B86h B87h B88h B89h B8Ah B8Bh B8Ch B8Dh B8Eh B8Fh B90h B91h B92h B93h B94h B95h B96h B97h B98h B99h B9Ah B9Bh B9Ch B9Dh B9Eh B9Fh BA0h BANK 23 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Unimplemented Read as `0' 86Fh 870h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 87Fh Legend: 8FFh 8EFh 8F0h Unimplemented Read as `0' 96Fh 970h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 97Fh Unimplemented Read as `0' 9EFh 9F0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh 9FFh Unimplemented Read as `0' A6Fh A70h Accesses 70h - 7Fh A7Fh Unimplemented Read as `0' AEFh AF0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh AFFh Unimplemented Read as `0' B6Fh B70h Accesses 70h - 7Fh B7Fh Unimplemented Read as `0' BEFh BF0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh BFFh Unimplemented Read as `0' Accesses 70h - 7Fh = Unimplemented data memory locations, read as `0'. TABLE 3-6: C00h C01h C02h C03h C04h C05h C06h C07h C08h C09h C0Ah C0Bh C0Ch C0Dh C0Eh C0Fh C10h C11h C12h C13h C14h C15h C16h C17h C18h C19h C1Ah C1Bh C1Ch C1Dh C1Eh C1Fh C20h INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- PIC16F/LF1946/47 MEMORY MAP, BANKS 24-31 BANK 25 C80h C81h C82h C83h C84h C85h C86h C87h C88h C89h C8Ah C8Bh C8Ch C8Dh C8Eh C8Fh C90h C91h C92h C93h C94h C95h C96h C97h C98h C99h C9Ah C9Bh C9Ch C9Dh C9Eh C9Fh CA0h INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- D00h D01h D02h D03h D04h D05h D06h D07h D08h D09h D0Ah D0Bh D0Ch D0Dh D0Eh D0Fh D10h D11h D12h D13h D14h D15h D16h D17h D18h D19h D1Ah D1Bh D1Ch D1Dh D1Eh D1Fh D20h DS41414A-page 28 PIC16F/LF1946/47 BANK 24 BANK 26 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- D80h D81h D82h D83h D84h D85h D86h D87h D88h D89h D8Ah D8Bh D8Ch D8Dh D8Eh D8Fh D90h D91h D92h D93h D94h D95h D96h D97h D98h D99h D9Ah D9Bh D9Ch D9Dh D9Eh D9Fh DA0h BANK 27 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- E00h E01h E02h E03h E04h E05h E06h E07h E08h E09h E0Ah E0Bh E0Ch E0Dh E0Eh E0Fh E10h E11h E12h E13h E14h E15h E16h E17h E18h E19h E1Ah E1Bh E1Ch E1Dh E1Eh E1Fh E20h BANK 28 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- E80h E81h E82h E83h E84h E85h E86h E87h E88h E89h E8Ah E8Bh E8Ch E8Dh E8Eh E8Fh E90h E91h E92h E93h E94h E95h E96h E97h E98h E99h E9Ah E9Bh E9Ch E9Dh E9Eh E9Fh EA0h BANK 29 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- F00h F01h F02h F03h F04h F05h F06h F07h F08h F09h F0Ah F0Bh F0Ch F0Dh F0Eh F0Fh F10h F11h F12h F13h F14h F15h F16h F17h F18h F19h F1Ah F1Bh F1Ch F1Dh F1Eh F1Fh F20h BANK 30 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- F80h F81h F82h F83h F84h F85h F86h F87h F88h F89h F8Ah F8Bh F8Ch F8Dh F8Eh F8Fh F90h F91h F92h F93h F94h F95h F96h F97h F98h F99h F9Ah F9Bh F9Ch F9Dh F9Eh F9Fh FA0h BANK 31 INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG PCLATH INTCON Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. See Table 3-8 Unimplemented Read as `0' C6Fh C70h Accesses 70h - 7Fh CFFh Legend: CFFh CEFh CF0h Unimplemented Read as `0' D6Fh D70h Accesses 70h - 7Fh D7Fh Unimplemented Read as `0' DEFh DF0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh DFFh Unimplemented Read as `0' E6Fh E70h Accesses 70h - 7Fh E7Fh Unimplemented Read as `0' EEFh EF0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh EFFh Unimplemented Read as `0' F6Fh F70h Accesses 70h - 7Fh F7Fh Unimplemented Read as `0' FEFh FF0h Accesses 70h - 7Fh FFFh Accesses 70h - 7Fh = Unimplemented data memory locations, read as `0'. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-7: PIC16F/LF1946/47 MEMORY MAP, BANK 15 Bank 15 791h 792h 793h 794h 795h 796h 797h 798h 799h 79Ah 79Bh 79Ch 79Dh 79Eh 79Fh 7A0h 7A1h 7A2h 7A3h 7A4h 7A5h 7A6h 7A7h 7A8h 7A9h 7AAh 7ABh 7ACh 7ADh 7AEh 7AFh 7B0h 7B1h 7B2h 7B3h 7B4h 7B5h 7B6h 7B7h 7B8h LCDCON LCDPS LCDREF LCDCST LCDRL -- -- LCDSE0 LCDSE1 LCDSE2 -- -- -- -- -- LCDDATA0 LCDDATA1 LCDDATA2 LCDDATA3 LCDDATA4 LCDDATA5 LCDDATA6 LCDDATA7 LCDDATA8 LCDDATA9 LCDDATA10 LCDDATA11 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- F8Ch F8Dh F8Eh F8Fh F90h F91h F92h F93h F94h F95h F96h F97h F98h F99h F9Ah F9Bh F9Ch F9Dh F9Eh F9Fh FA0h FA1h FA2h FA3h FA4h FA5h FA6h FA7h FA8h FA9h FAAh FABh TABLE 3-8: PIC16F/LF1946/47 MEMORY MAP, BANK 31 Bank 31 ICDIO(2) ICDCON0(2) ICDCON1(2) ICDCON2(2) -- ICDSTAT(2) -- -- -- DEVSEL(2) ICDINSTL(2) ICDINSTH(2) ICDCC0(2) ICDCC1(2) ICDCC2(2) ICDCC3(2) ICDBK0CON(2) ICDBK0L(2) ICDBK0H(2) ICDBK0D(2) ICDBK0CNT(2) ICDBK1CON(2) ICDBK1L(2) ICDBK1H(2) ICDBK1D(2) ICDBK1CNT(2) ICDBK2CON(2) ICDBK2L(2) ICDBK2H(2) ICDBK2D(2) ICDBK2CNT(2) -- FDFh FC0h -- FDFh FE0h FE1h FE2h FE3h FE4h FE5h FE6h FE7h FE8h FE9h FEAh FEBh FECh FEDh FEEh FEFh Legend: -- -- -- BSR_ICDSHAD(2) STATUS_SHAD WREG_SHAD BSR_SHAD PCLATH_SHAD FSR0L_SHAD FSR0H_SHAD FSR1L_SHAD FSR1H_SHAD -- STKPTR TOSL TOSH = Unimplemented data memory locations, read as `0'. Unimplemented Read as `0' 7EFh Legend: = Unimplemented data memory locations, read as `0'. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 29 PIC16F/LF1946/47 3.2.6 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS SUMMARY The Special Function Register Summary for the device family are as follows: Device Bank(s) 0 1 2 3 4 5 PIC16F/LF1946/47 6 7 8 9-14 15 16-30 31 Page No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 44 45 DS41414A-page 30 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 0 000h(2) 001h(2) 002h(2) 003h(2) 004h(2) 005h(2) 006h(2) 007h(2) 008h(2) 009h(2) 00Bh(2) 00Ch 00Dh 00Eh 00Fh 010h 011h 012h 013h 014h 015h 016h 017h 018h 019h 01Ah 01Bh 01Ch 01Dh 01Eh 01Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD PORTE PIR1 PIR2 PIR3 PIR4 TMR0 TMR1L TMR1H T1CON T1GCON TMR2 PR2 T2CON -- CPSCON0 CPSCON1 Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE TMR0IE INTE IOCIE TMR0IF INTF IOCIF xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx xxxx uuuu CCP1IF LCDIF -- -- TMR2IF C3IF TMR4IF BCL2IF TMR1IF CCP2IF -- SSP2IF 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 -000 0-0- -000 0-0--00 --00 --00 --00 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu -- TMR1ON 0000 00-0 uuuu uu-u 0000 0x00 uuuu uxuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 T2OUTPS<3:0> CPSRM -- -- -- -- TMR2ON T2CKPS<1:0> T0XCS -000 0000 -000 0000 -- CPSRNG1 CPSRNG0 CPSOUT CPSCH<4:0> -- 00-- 0000 00-- 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 T1GSS<1:0> Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets 00Ah(1, 2) PCLATH PORTA Data Latch when written: PORTA pins when read PORTB Data Latch when written: PORTB pins when read PORTC Data Latch when written: PORTC pins when read PORTD Data Latch when written: PORTD pins when read PORTE Data Latch when written: PORTE pins when read TMR1GIF OSFIF -- -- ADIF C2IF CCP5IF -- RCIF C1IF CCP4IF RC2IF TXIF EEIF CCP3IF TX2IF SSPIF BCLIF TMR6IF -- Timer0 Module Register Holding Register for the Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register Holding Register for the Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register TMR1CS<1:0> TMR1GE T1GPOL T1CKPS<1:0> T1GTM T1GSPM T1OSCEN T1GGO/ DONE T1SYNC T1GVAL Timer 2 Module Register Timer 2 Period Register -- Unimplemented CPSON -- x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 31 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 1 080h(2) 081h(2) 082h(2) 083h(2) 084h(2) 085h(2) 086h(2) 087h(2) 088h(2) 089h(2) 08Bh(2) 08Ch 08Dh 08Eh 08Fh 090h 091h 092h 093h 094h 095h 096h 097h 098h 099h 09Ah 09Bh 09Ch 09Dh 09Eh 09Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON TRISA TRISB TRISC TRISD TRISE PIE1 PIE2 PIE3 PIE4 OPTION_REG PCON WDTCON OSCTUNE OSCCON OSCSTAT ADRESL ADRESH ADCON0 ADCON1 -- Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE TMR0IE INTE IOCIE TMR0IF INTF IOCIF xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 TRISE4 TXIE EEIE CCP3IE TX2IE T0SE -- TRISE3 SSPIE BCLIE TMR6IE -- PSA RMCLR WDTPS<4:0> TUN<5:0> IRCF<3:0> PLLR OSTS HFIOFR HFIOFL -- MFIOFR SCS<1:0> LFIOFR HFIOFS RI TRISE2 CCP1IE LCDIE -- -- TRISE1 TMR2IE C3IE TMR4IE BCL2IE PS<2:0> POR BOR TRISE0 TMR1IE CCP2IE -- SSP2IE 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 -000 0-0- -000 0-0--00 --00 --00 --00 1111 1111 1111 1111 00-- 11qq qq-- qquu --00 0000 --00 0000 0011 1-00 0011 1-00 00q0 0q0- qqqq qq0xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu CHS<4:0> ADCS<2:0> -- ADNREF GO/DONE ADON -000 0000 -000 0000 -- -- ADPREF1 ADPREF0 0000 -000 0000 -000 SWDTEN --01 0110 --01 0110 Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets 08Ah(1, 2) PCLATH PORTA Data Direction Register PORTB Data Direction Register PORTC Data Direction Register PORTD Data Direction Register TRISE7 TMR1GIE OSFIE -- -- WPUEN STKOVF -- -- SPLLEN T1OSCR A/D Result Register Low A/D Result Register High -- ADFM Unimplemented TRISE6 ADIE C2IE CCP5IE -- INTEDG STKUNF -- -- TRISE5 RCIE C1IE CCP4IE RC2IE T0CS -- x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. DS41414A-page 32 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 2 100h(2) 101h(2) 102h(2) 103h(2) 104h(2) 105h(2) 106h(2) 107h(2) 108h(2) 109h(2) 10Bh(2) 10Ch 10Dh 10Eh 10Fh 110h 111h 112h 113h 114h 115h 116h 117h 118h 119h 11Ah 11Bh 11Ch 11Dh 11Eh 11Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON LATA LATB LATC LATD LATE CM1CON0 CM1CON1 CM2CON0 CM2CON1 CMOUT BORCON FVRCON DACCON0 DACCON1 SRCON0 SRCON1 -- APFCON CM3CON0 CM3CON1 Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE TMR0IE INTE IOCIE TMR0IF INTF IOCIF xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu C1OE C1PCH1 C2OE C2PCH1 -- -- Reserved DACOE -- SRCLK1 SRSC2E P2DSEL C3OE C3PCH1 SRCLK0 SRSC1E P2CSEL C3POL C3PCH0 SRQEN SRRPE P2BSEL -- -- C1POL C1PCH0 C2POL C2PCH0 -- -- Reserved -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CDAFVR1 C1SP -- C2SP -- MC3OUT -- CDAFVR0 C1HYS C2HYS C1SYNC 0000 -100 0000 -100 0000 --00 0000 --00 0000 --00 0000 --00 C2SYNC 0000 -100 0000 -100 C1NCH<1:0> C2NCH<1:0> -- -- SRPS SRRC2E P1CSEL C3HYS Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets 10Ah(1, 2) PCLATH PORTA Data Latch PORTB Data Latch PORTC Data Latch PORTD Data Latch PORTE Data Latch C1ON C1INTP C2ON C2INTP -- SBOREN FVREN DACEN -- SRLEN SRSPE P3CSEL C3ON C3INTP C1OUT C1INTN C2OUT C2INTN -- -- FVRRDY DACLPS -- SRCLK2 SRSCKE P3BSEL C3OUT C3INTN MC2OUT MC1OUT ---- -000 ---- -000 BORRDY 1--- ---q u--- ---u 0q00 0000 0q00 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 SRPR 0000 0000 0000 0000 -- -- SRRC1E 0000 0000 0000 0000 P1BSEL 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 --00 0000 --00 DACNSS 000- 00-0 000- 00-0 ADFVR<1:0> DACPSS<1:0> DACR<4:0> SRNQEN SRRCKE CCP2SEL C3SP -- Unimplemented C3SYNC 0000 -100 0000 -100 C3NCH<1:0> x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 33 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 3 180h(2) 181h(2) 182h(2) 183h(2) 184h(2) 185h(2) 186h(2) 187h(2) 188h(2) 189h(2) 18Bh(2) 18Ch 18Dh 18Eh 18Fh 190h 191h 192h 193h 194h 195h 196h 197h 198h 199h 19Ah 19Bh 19Ch 19Dh 19Eh 19Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON ANSELA -- -- -- ANSELE EEADRL EEADRH EEDATL EEDATH EECON1 EECON2 -- -- RCREG TXREG SP1BRGL SP1BRGH RCSTA TXSTA BAUD1CON SPEN CSRC ABDOVF RX9 TX9 RCIDL Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE -- Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented -- -- -- EEPGD -- -- -- -- ANSE2 ANSE1 ANSE0 EEPROM / Program Memory Address Register Low Byte EEPROM / Program Memory Address Register High Byte -- CFGS EEPROM / Program Memory Read Data Register High Byte LWLO FREE WRERR WREN WR RD EEPROM / Program Memory Read Data Register Low Byte -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE -- TMR0IE ANSA5 INTE -- IOCIE ANSA3 TMR0IF ANSA2 INTF ANSA1 IOCIF ANSA0 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u --1- 1111 --1- 1111 -- -- -- -- -- -- Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets 18Ah(1, 2) PCLATH ---- -111 ---- -111 0000 0000 0000 0000 -000 0000 -000 0000 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu --xx xxxx --uu uuuu 0000 x000 0000 q000 0000 0000 0000 0000 -- -- -- -- EEPROM control register 2 Unimplemented Unimplemented USART Receive Data Register USART Transmit Data Register EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte SREN TXEN -- CREN SYNC SCKP ADDEN SENDB BRG16 FERR BRGH -- OERR TRMT WUE RX9D TX9D ABDEN 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000x 0000 0010 0000 0010 01-0 0-00 01-0 0-00 x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. DS41414A-page 34 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 4 200h(2) 201h(2) 202h(2) 203h(2) 204h(2) 205h(2) 206h(2) 207h(2) 208h(2) 209h(2) 20Bh(2) 20Ch 20Dh 20Eh 20Fh 210h 211h 212h 213h 214h 215h 216h 217h 218h 219h 21Ah 21Bh 21Ch 21Dh 21Eh 21Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON -- WPUB -- -- -- SSP1BUF SSP1ADD SSP1MSK SSP1STAT SSP1CON1 SSP1CON2 SSP1CON3 -- SSP2BUF SSP2ADD SSP2MSK SSP2STAT SSP2CON1 SSP2CON2 SSP2CON3 SMP WCOL GCEN ACKTIM CKE SSPOV ACKSTAT PCIE D/A SSPEN ACKDT SCIE SMP WCOL GCEN ACKTIM CKE SSPOV ACKSTAT PCIE D/A SSPEN ACKDT SCIE Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE WPUB7 -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE WPUB6 TMR0IE WPUB5 INTE WPUB4 IOCIE WPUB3 TMR0IF WPUB2 INTF WPUB1 IOCIF WPUB0 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1111 1111 1111 1111 Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets 20Ah(1, 2) PCLATH Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Synchronous Serial Port Receive Buffer/Transmit Register ADD<7:0> MSK<7:0> P CKP ACKEN BOEN RCEN SDAHT S R/W PEN SBCDE UA RSEN AHEN BF SEN DHEN SSPM<3:0> xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 -- -- xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 Unimplemented Synchronous Serial Port Receive Buffer/Transmit Register ADD<7:0> MSK<7:0> P CKP ACKEN BOEN RCEN SDAHT S R/W PEN SBCDE UA RSEN AHEN BF SEN DHEN SSPM<3:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 35 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 5 280h(2) 281h(2) 282h(2) 283h(2) 284h(2) 285h(2) 286h(2) 287h(2) 288h(2) 289h(2) 28Bh(2) 28Ch 28Dh 28Eh 28Fh 290h 291h 292h 293h 294h 295h 296h 297h 298h 299h 29Ah 29Bh 29Ch 29Dh 29Eh 29Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON PORTF PORTG -- -- -- CCPR1L CCPR1H CCP1CON PWM1CON CCP1AS PSTR1CON -- CCPR2L CCPR2H CCP2CON PWM2CON CCP2AS PSTR2CON CCPTMRS0 CCPTMRS1 Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE -- Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 (LSB) Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 (MSB) P1M<1:0> P1RSEN CCP1ASE -- Unimplemented Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 (LSB) Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 (MSB) P2M<1:0> P2RSEN CCP2ASE -- C4TSEL1 -- -- C4TSEL0 -- CCP2AS<2:0> -- C3TSEL1 -- STR2SYNC C3TSEL0 -- DC2B<1:0> P2DC<6:0> PSS2AC<1:0> STR2D C2TSEL1 -- STR2C -- PSS2BD<1:0> STR2B STR2A CCP2M<3:0> -- CCP1AS<2:0> -- STR1SYNC DC1B<1:0> P1DC<6:0> PSS1AC<1:0> STR1D STR1C PSS1BD<1:0> STR1B STR1A CCP1M<3:0> -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE -- TMR0IE RG5 INTE RG4 IOCIE RG3 TMR0IF RG2 INTF RG1 IOCIF RG0 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu --xx xxxx --uu uuuu -- -- -- -- -- -- Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets 28Ah(1, 2) PCLATH PORTF Data Latch when written: PORTF pins when read xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0001 ---0 0001 -- -- xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0001 ---0 0001 ---- --00 ---- --00 C2TSEL0 C1TSEL1 C1TSEL0 0000 0000 0000 0000 C5TSEL<1:0> x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. DS41414A-page 36 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 6 300h(2) 301h(2) 302h(2) 303h(2) 304h(2) 305h(2) 306h(2) 307h(2) 308h(2) 309h(2) 30Bh(2) 30Ch 30Dh 30Eh 30Fh 310h 311h 312h 313h 314h 315h 316h 317h 318h 319h 31Ah 31Bh 31Ch 31Dh 31Eh 31Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON TRISF TRISG -- -- -- CCPR3L CCPR3H CCP3CON PWM3CON CCP3AS PSTR3CON -- CCPR4L CCPR4H CCP4CON -- CCPR5L CCPR5H CCP5CON -- Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE -- Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Capture/Compare/PWM Register 3 (LSB) Capture/Compare/PWM Register 3 (MSB) P3M<1:0> P3RSEN CCP3ASE -- Unimplemented Capture/Compare/PWM Register 4 (LSB) Capture/Compare/PWM Register 4 (MSB) -- Unimplemented Capture/Compare/PWM Register 5 (LSB) Capture/Compare/PWM Register 5 (MSB) -- Unimplemented -- DC5B<1:0> CCP5M<3:0> -- DC4B<1:0> CCP4M<3:0> -- CCP3AS<2:0> -- STR3SYNC DC3B<1:0> P3DC<6:0> PSS3AC<1:0> STR3D STR3C PSS3BD<1:0> STR3B STR3A CCP3M<1:0> -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE -- TMR0IE TRISG5 INTE TRISG4 IOCIE TRISG3 TMR0IF TRISG2 INTF TRISG1 IOCIF TRISG0 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u 1111 1111 1111 1111 --11 1111 --11 1111 -- -- -- -- -- -- Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets 30Ah(1, 2) PCLATH PORTF Data Direction Register xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0001 ---0 0001 -- -- xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu --00 0000 --00 0000 -- -- xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu --00 0000 --00 0000 -- -- x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 37 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 7 380h(2) 381h(2) 382h(2) 383h(2) 384h(2) 385h(2) 386h(2) 387h(2) 388h(2) 389h(2) 38Bh(2) 38Ch 38Dh 38Eh 38Fh 390h 391h 392h 393h 394h 395h 396h 397h 398h 399h 39Ah 39Bh 39Ch 39Dh 39Eh 39Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON LATF LATG -- -- -- -- -- -- IOCBP IOCBN IOCBF -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE -- Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented IOCBP7 IOCBN7 IOCBF7 IOCBP6 IOCBN6 IOCBF6 IOCBP5 IOCBN5 IOCBF5 IOCBP4 IOCBN4 IOCBF4 IOCBP3 IOCBN3 IOCBF3 IOCBP2 IOCBN2 IOCBF2 IOCBP1 IOCBN1 IOCBF1 IOCBP0 IOCBN0 IOCBF0 -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE -- TMR0IE LATG5 INTE LATG4 IOCIE LATG3 TMR0IF LATG2 INTF LATG1 IOCIF LATG0 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu --xx xxxx --uu uuuu -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets 38Ah(1, 2) PCLATH PORTF Data Latch 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. DS41414A-page 38 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 8 400h(2) 401h(2) 402h(2) 403h(2) 404h(2) 405h(2) 406h(2) 407h(2) 408h(2) 409h(2) 40Bh(2) 40Ch 40Dh 40Eh 40Fh 410h 411h 412h 413h 414h 415h 416h 417h 418h 419h 41Ah 41Bh 41Ch 41Dh 41Eh 41Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON ANSELF ANSELG -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TMR4 PR4 T4CON -- -- -- -- TMR6 PR6 T6CON -- Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE ANSELF7 -- Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Timer 4 Module Register Timer 4 Period Register -- Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Timer 6 Module Register Timer 6 Period Register -- Unimplemented T6OUTPS<3:0> T4OUTPS<3:0> SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets Name xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 -- -- BSR<4:0> ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 INTF IOCIF -- 0000 000x 0000 000u ---1 111- ---1 111-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE ANSELF6 -- TMR0IE ANSELF5 -- INTE ANSELF4 ANSELG4 IOCIE ANSELF3 ANSELG3 TMR0IF 40Ah(1, 2) PCLATH ANSELF2 ANSELF1 ANSELF0 1111 1111 1111 1111 ANSELG2 ANSELG1 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 TMR4ON T4CKPS<1:0> -000 0000 -000 0000 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 TMR6ON T6CKPS<1:0> -000 0000 -000 0000 -- -- x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 39 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 9 480h(2) 481h(2) 482h(2) 483h(2) 404h(2) 485h(2) 486h(2) 487h(2) 488h(2) 489h(2) 48Bh(2) 48Ch 48Dh 48Eh 48Fh 490h 491h 492h 493h 494h 495h 496h 497h 498h 499h 49Ah 49Bh 49Ch 49Dh 49Eh 49Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON -- WPUG -- -- -- RC2REG TX2REG SP2BRGL SP2BRGH RC2STA TX2STA BAUDCON2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SPEN CSRC ABDOVF Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented RX9 TX9 RCIDL Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE -- Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented USART Receive Data Register USART Transmit Data Register EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte SREN TXEN -- CREN SYNC SCKP ADDEN SENDB BRG16 FERR BRGH -- OERR TRMT WUE RX9D TX9D ABDEN -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE -- TMR0IE WPUG5 INTE -- IOCIE -- TMR0IF -- INTF -- IOCIF -- xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --1- ---- --1- ---Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets 48Ah(1, 2) PCLATH Unimplemented 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000x 0000 0010 0000 0010 01-0 0-00 01-0 0-00 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. DS41414A-page 40 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Banks 10-14 x00h/ x80h(2) x00h/ x81h(2) x02h/ x82h(2) x03h/ x83h(2) x04h/ x84h(2) x05h/ x85h(2) x06h/ x86h(2) x07h/ x87h(2) x08h/ x88h(2) x09h/ x89h(2) INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 BSR<4:0> ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 INTF IOCIF 0000 000x 0000 000u -- -- Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- -- Working Register -- GIE Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE TMR0IE INTE IOCIE TMR0IF x0Ah/ PCLATH x8Ah(1),(2) x0Bh/ x8Bh(2) x0Ch/ x8Ch -- x1Fh/ x9Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INTCON -- Unimplemented x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 41 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 15 780h(2) 781h(2) 782h(2) 783h(2) 784h(2) 785h(2) 786h(2) 787h(2) 788h(2) 789h(2) 78Bh(2) 78Ch 78Dh 78Eh 78Fh 790h 791h 792h 793h 794h 795h 796h 797h 798h 799h 79Ah 79Bh 79Ch 79Dh 79Eh 79Fh 7A0h 7A1h 7A2h 7A3h 7A4h 7A5h Legend: Note 1: 2: INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG INTCON -- -- -- -- -- LCDCON LCDPS LCDREF LCDCST LCDRL -- -- LCDSE0 LCDSE1 LCDSE2 LCDSE3 LCDSE4 LCDSE5 -- -- LCDDATA0 LCDDATA1 LCDDATA2 LCDDATA3 LCDDATA4 LCDDATA5 -- Unimplemented Unimplemented SEG7 COM0 SEG15 COM0 SEG23 COM0 SEG7 COM1 SEG15 COM1 SEG23 COM1 SEG6 COM0 SEG14 COM0 SEG22 COM0 SEG6 COM1 SEG14 COM1 SEG22 COM1 SEG5 COM0 SEG13 COM0 SEG21 COM0 SEG5 COM1 SEG13 COM1 SEG21 COM1 SEG4 COM0 SEG12 COM0 SEG20 COM0 SEG4 COM1 SEG12 COM1 SEG20 COM1 SEG3 COM0 SEG11 COM0 SEG19 COM0 SEG3 COM1 SEG11 COM1 SEG19 COM1 SEG2 COM0 SEG10 COM0 SEG18 COM0 SEG2 COM1 SEG10 COM1 SEG18 COM1 SEG1 COM0 SEG9 COM0 SEG17 COM0 SEG1 COM1 SEG9 COM1 SEG17 COM1 SEG0 COM0 SEG8 COM0 SEG16 COM0 SEG0 COM1 SEG8 COM1 SEG16 COM1 -- Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE TMR0IE INTE IOCIE TMR0IF INTF IOCIF xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u -- -- -- -- -- WERR LCDA LCDIRI -- -- WA -- -- VLCD3PE -- -- CS<1:0> LP<3:0> VLCD2PE VLCD1PE LCDCST<2:0> LRLAT<2:0> -- LMUX<1:0> -- -- -- -- -- Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets 78Ah(1, 2) PCLATH Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented LCDEN WFT LCDIRE -- Unimplemented Unimplemented SE<7:0> SE<15:8> SE<23:16> SE<31:24> SE<39:32> SE<45:40> SLPEN BIASMD LCDIRS -- 000- 0011 000- 0011 0000 0000 0000 0000 000- 000- 000- 000---- -000 ---- -000 0000 -000 0000 -000 -- -- -- -- LRLAP<1:0> LRLBP<1:0> 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu --00 0000 --uu uuuu -- -- -- -- xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. DS41414A-page 42 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets Bank 15 (Continued) 7A6h 7A7h 7A8h 7A9h 7AAh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ABh 7ACh -- 7EFh Legend: Note 1: 2: LCDDATA6 LCDDATA7 LCDDATA8 LCDDATA9 LCDDATA10 LCDDATA11 LCDDATA12 LCDDATA13 LCDDATA14 LCDDATA15 LCDDATA16 LCDDATA17 LCDDATA18 LCDDATA19 LCDDATA20 LCDDATA21 LCDDATA22 LCDDATA23 -- SEG7 COM2 SEG15 COM2 SEG23 COM2 SEG7 COM3 SEG15 COM3 SEG23 COM3 SEG31 COM0 SEG39 COM0 -- SEG31 COM1 SEG39 COM1 -- SEG31 COM2 SEG39 COM2 -- SEG31 COM3 SEG39 COM3 -- Unimplemented SEG6 COM2 SEG14 COM2 SEG22 COM2 SEG6 COM3 SEG14 COM3 SEG22 COM3 SEG30 COM0 SEG38 COM0 -- SEG30 COM1 SEG38 COM1 -- SEG30 COM2 SEG38 COM2 -- SEG30 COM3 SEG38 COM3 -- SEG5 COM2 SEG13 COM2 SEG21 COM2 SEG5 COM3 SEG13 COM3 SEG21 COM3 SEG29 COM0 SEG37 COM0 SEG45 COM0 SEG29 COM1 SEG37 COM1 SEG45 COM1 SEG29 COM2 SEG37 COM2 SEG45 COM2 SEG29 COM3 SEG37 COM3 SEG45 COM3 SEG4 COM2 SEG12 COM2 SEG20 COM2 SEG4 COM3 SEG12 COM3 SEG20 COM3 SEG28 COM0 SEG36 COM0 SEG44 COM0 SEG28 COM1 SEG36 COM1 SEG44 COM1 SEG28 COM2 SEG36 COM2 SEG44 COM2 SEG28 COM3 SEG36 COM3 SEG44 COM3 SEG3 COM2 SEG11 COM2 SEG19 COM2 SEG3 COM3 SEG11 COM3 SEG19 COM3 SEG27 COM0 SEG35 COM0 SEG43 COM0 SEG27 COM1 SEG35 COM1 SEG43 COM1 SEG27 COM2 SEG35 COM2 SEG43 COM2 SEG27 COM3 SEG35 COM3 SEG43 COM3 SEG2 COM2 SEG10 COM2 SEG18 COM2 SEG2 COM3 SEG10 COM3 SEG18 COM3 SEG26 COM0 SEG34 COM0 SEG42 COM0 SEG26 COM1 SEG34 COM1 SEG42 COM1 SEG26 COM2 SEG34 COM2 SEG42 COM2 SEG26 COM3 SEG34 COM3 SEG42 COM3 SEG1 COM2 SEG9 COM2 SEG17 COM2 SEG1 COM3 SEG9 COM3 SEG17 COM3 SEG25 COM0 SEG33 COM0 SEG41 COM0 SEG25 COM1 SEG33 COM1 SEG41 COM1 SEG25 COM2 SEG33 COM2 SEG41 COM2 SEG25 COM3 SEG33 COM3 SEG41 COM3 SEG0 COM2 SEG8 COM2 SEG16 COM2 SEG0 COM3 SEG8 COM3 SEG16 COM3 SEG24 COM0 SEG32 COM0 SEG40 COM0 SEG24 COM1 SEG32 COM1 SEG40 COM1 SEG24 COM2 SEG32 COM2 SEG40 COM2 SEG24 COM3 SEG32 COM3 SEG40 COM3 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu --xx xxxx --uu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu --xx xxxx --uu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu --xx xxxx --uu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu --xx xxxx --uu uuuu -- -- x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 43 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Banks 16-30 x00h/ x80h(2) x00h/ x81h(2) x02h/ x82h(2) x03h/ x83h(2) x04h/ x84h(2) x05h/ x85h(2) x06h/ x86h(2) x07h/ x87h(2) x08h/ x88h(2) x09h/ x89h(2) INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 BSR<4:0> ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 INTF IOCIF 0000 000x 0000 000u -- -- Name SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- -- Working Register -- GIE Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE TMR0IE INTE IOCIE TMR0IF x0Ah/ PCLATH x8Ah(1),(2) x0Bh/ x8Bh(2) x0Ch/ x8Ch -- x1Fh/ x9Fh Legend: Note 1: 2: INTCON -- Unimplemented x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. DS41414A-page 44 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 3-9: Address Bank 31 F80h(2) F81h(2) F82h(2) F83h(2) F84h(2) F85h(2) F86h(2) F87h(2) F88h(2) F89h(2) ) SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other Resets Name INDF0 INDF1 PCL STATUS FSR0L FSR0H FSR1L FSR1H BSR WREG Addressing this location uses contents of FSR0H/FSR0L to address data memory (not a physical register) Addressing this location uses contents of FSR1H/FSR1L to address data memory (not a physical register) Program Counter (PC) Least Significant Byte -- -- -- TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer -- -- GIE -- -- BSR<4:0> Working Register Write Buffer for the upper 7 bits of the Program Counter PEIE TMR0IE INTE IOCIE TMR0IF INTF IOCIF xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---1 1000 ---q quuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu -000 0000 -000 0000 0000 000x 0000 000u -- -- F8Ah(1),(2 PCLATH F8Bh(2) F8Ch -- FE3h FE4h FE5h FE6h FE7h FE8h FE9h FEAh FEBh FECh FEDh FEEh FEFh Legend: Note 1: 2: -- STKPTR TOSL TOSH INTCON -- Unimplemented STATUS_ SHAD WREG_ SHAD BSR_ SHAD PCLATH_ SHAD FSR0L_ SHAD FSR0H_ SHAD FSR1L_ SHAD FSR1H_ SHAD Unimplemented -- -- -- Current Stack pointer Top of Stack Low byte -- Top of Stack High byte Working Register Normal (Non-ICD) Shadow Z DC C ---- -xxx ---- -uuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu ---x xxxx ---u uuuu -xxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu -- -- Bank Select Register Normal (Non-ICD) Shadow Program Counter Latch High Register Normal (Non-ICD) Shadow Indirect Data Memory Address 0 Low Pointer Normal (Non-ICD) Shadow Indirect Data Memory Address 0 High Pointer Normal (Non-ICD) Shadow Indirect Data Memory Address 1 Low Pointer Normal (Non-ICD) Shadow Indirect Data Memory Address 1 High Pointer Normal (Non-ICD) Shadow ---1 1111 ---1 1111 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu -xxx xxxx -uuu uuuu x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as `0', r = reserved. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as `0'. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC<14:8>, whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. These registers can be addressed from any bank. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 45 PIC16F/LF1946/47 3.3 PCL and PCLATH 3.3.3 COMPUTED FUNCTION CALLS The Program Counter (PC) is 15 bits wide. The low byte comes from the PCL register, which is a readable and writable register. The high byte (PC<14:8>) is not directly readable or writable and comes from PCLATH. On any Reset, the PC is cleared. Figure 3-4 shows the five situations for the loading of the PC. A computed function CALL allows programs to maintain tables of functions and provide another way to execute state machines or look-up tables. When performing a table read using a computed function CALL, care should be exercised if the table location crosses a PCL memory boundary (each 256-byte block). If using the CALL instruction, the PCH<2:0> and PCL registers are loaded with the operand of the CALL instruction. PCH<6:3> is loaded with PCLATH<6:3>. The CALLW instruction enables computed calls by combining PCLATH and W to form the destination address. A computed CALLW is accomplished by loading the W register with the desired address and executing CALLW. The PCL register is loaded with the value of W and PCH is loaded with PCLATH. FIGURE 3-4: 14 PCH LOADING OF PC IN DIFFERENT SITUATIONS PCL 0 Instruction with PCL as Destination PC 6 PCLATH 14 7 0 8 ALU Result PCL 0 GOTO, CALL PC PCH 3.3.4 BRANCHING PCLATH PC 6 14 4 0 11 OPCODE <10:0> PCH PCL 0 CALLW PCLATH 6 7 0 8 W PCL 0 The branching instructions add an offset to the PC. This allows relocatable code and code that crosses page boundaries. There are two forms of branching, BRW and BRA. The PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction in both cases. When using either branching instruction, a PCL memory boundary may be crossed. If using BRW, load the W register with the desired unsigned address and execute BRW. The entire PC will be loaded with the address PC + 1 + W. If using BRA, the entire PC will be loaded with PC + 1 +, the signed value of the operand of the BRA instruction. PC 14 PCH BRW PC + W 14 PCH PCL 0 BRA 15 PC PC + OPCODE <8:0> 15 3.3.1 MODIFYING PCL Executing any instruction with the PCL register as the destination simultaneously causes the Program Counter PC<14:8> bits (PCH) to be replaced by the contents of the PCLATH register. This allows the entire contents of the program counter to be changed by writing the desired upper 7 bits to the PCLATH register. When the lower 8 bits are written to the PCL register, all 15 bits of the program counter will change to the values contained in the PCLATH register and those being written to the PCL register. 3.3.2 COMPUTED GOTO A computed GOTO is accomplished by adding an offset to the program counter (ADDWF PCL). When performing a table read using a computed GOTO method, care should be exercised if the table location crosses a PCL memory boundary (each 256-byte block). Refer to the Application Note AN556, "Implementing a Table Read" (DS00556). DS41414A-page 46 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 3.4 Stack 3.4.1 ACCESSING THE STACK All devices have a 16-level x 15-bit wide hardware stack (refer to Figures 3-3 and 3-3). The stack space is not part of either program or data space. The PC is PUSHed onto the stack when CALL or CALLW instructions are executed or an interrupt causes a branch. The stack is POPed in the event of a RETURN, RETLW or a RETFIE instruction execution. PCLATH is not affected by a PUSH or POP operation. The stack operates as a circular buffer if the STVREN bit = 0 (Configuration Word 2). This means that after the stack has been PUSHed sixteen times, the seventeenth PUSH overwrites the value that was stored from the first PUSH. The eighteenth PUSH overwrites the second PUSH (and so on). The STKOVF and STKUNF flag bits will be set on an Overflow/Underflow, regardless of whether the Reset is enabled. Note 1: There are no instructions/mnemonics called PUSH or POP. These are actions that occur from the execution of the CALL, CALLW, RETURN, RETLW and RETFIE instructions or the vectoring to an interrupt address. The stack is available through the TOSH, TOSL and STKPTR registers. STKPTR is the current value of the Stack Pointer. TOSH:TOSL register pair points to the TOP of the stack. Both registers are read/writable. TOS is split into TOSH and TOSL due to the 15-bit size of the PC. To access the stack, adjust the value of STKPTR, which will position TOSH:TOSL, then read/write to TOSH:TOSL. STKPTR is 5 bits to allow detection of overflow and underflow. Note: Care should be taken when modifying the STKPTR while interrupts are enabled. During normal program operation, CALL, CALLW and Interrupts will increment STKPTR while RETLW, RETURN, and RETFIE will decrement STKPTR. At any time STKPTR can be inspected to see how much stack is left. The STKPTR always points at the currently used place on the stack. Therefore, a CALL or CALLW will increment the STKPTR and then write the PC, and a return will unload the PC and then decrement the STKPTR. Reference Figure through Figure for examples of accessing the stack. FIGURE 3-5: ACCESSING THE STACK EXAMPLE 1 TOSH:TOSL 0x0F 0x0E 0x0D 0x0C 0x0B 0x0A 0x09 0x08 0x07 0x06 0x05 0x04 0x03 0x02 0x01 0x00 STKPTR = 0x1F Stack Reset Disabled (STVREN = 0) Initial Stack Configuration: After Reset, the stack is empty. The empty stack is initialized so the Stack Pointer is pointing at 0x1F. If the Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset is enabled, the TOSH/TOSL registers will return `0'. If the Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset is disabled, the TOSH/TOSL registers will return the contents of stack address 0x0F. TOSH:TOSL 0x1F 0x0000 STKPTR = 0x1F Stack Reset Enabled (STVREN = 1) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 47 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 3-6: ACCESSING THE STACK EXAMPLE 2 0x0F 0x0E 0x0D 0x0C 0x0B 0x0A 0x09 0x08 0x07 0x06 0x05 0x04 0x03 0x02 0x01 TOSH:TOSL 0x00 Return Address STKPTR = 0x00 This figure shows the stack configuration after the first CALL or a single interrupt. If a RETURN instruction is executed, the return address will be placed in the Program Counter and the Stack Pointer decremented to the empty state (0x1F). FIGURE 3-7: ACCESSING THE STACK EXAMPLE 3 0x0F 0x0E 0x0D 0x0C 0x0B 0x0A 0x09 0x08 0x07 TOSH:TOSL 0x06 0x05 0x04 0x03 0x02 0x01 0x00 Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address STKPTR = 0x06 After seven CALLs or six CALLs and an interrupt, the stack looks like the figure on the left. A series of RETURN instructions will repeatedly place the return addresses into the Program Counter and pop the stack. DS41414A-page 48 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 3-8: ACCESSING THE STACK EXAMPLE 4 0x0F 0x0E 0x0D 0x0C 0x0B 0x0A 0x09 0x08 0x07 0x06 0x05 0x04 0x03 0x02 0x01 TOSH:TOSL 0x00 Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address Return Address STKPTR = 0x10 When the stack is full, the next CALL or an interrupt will set the Stack Pointer to 0x10. This is identical to address 0x00 so the stack will wrap and overwrite the return address at 0x00. If the Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset is enabled, a Reset will occur and location 0x00 will not be overwritten. 3.4.2 OVERFLOW/UNDERFLOW RESET If the STVREN bit in Configuration Word 2 is set to `1', the device will be reset if the stack is PUSHed beyond the sixteenth level or POPed beyond the first level, setting the appropriate bits (STKOVF or STKUNF, respectively) in the PCON register. 3.5 Indirect Addressing The INDFn registers are not physical registers. Any instruction that accesses an INDFn register actually accesses the register at the address specified by the File Select Registers (FSR). If the FSRn address specifies one of the two INDFn registers, the read will return `0' and the write will not occur (though Status bits may be affected). The FSRn register value is created by the pair FSRnH and FSRnL. The FSR registers form a 16-bit address that allows an addressing space with 65536 locations. These locations are divided into three memory regions: * Traditional Data Memory * Linear Data Memory * Program Flash Memory 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 49 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 3-9: INDIRECT ADDRESSING 0x0000 0x0000 Traditional Data Memory 0x0FFF 0x1000 0x1FFF 0x2000 0x0FFF Reserved Linear Data Memory 0x29AF 0x29B0 FSR Address Range 0x7FFF 0x8000 Reserved 0x0000 Program Flash Memory 0xFFFF 0x7FFF Note: Not all memory regions are completely implemented. Consult device memory tables for memory limits. DS41414A-page 50 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 3.5.1 TRADITIONAL DATA MEMORY The traditional data memory is a region from FSR address 0x000 to FSR address 0xFFF. The addresses correspond to the absolute addresses of all SFR, GPR and common registers. FIGURE 3-10: TRADITIONAL DATA MEMORY MAP Indirect Addressing 0 7 0 0 0 FSRxH 0 Bank Select 1111 Location Select 0 7 FSRxL 0 Direct Addressing 4 BSR 0 6 From Opcode Bank Select Location Select 0x00 0000 0001 0010 0x7F Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 31 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 51 PIC16F/LF1946/47 3.5.2 LINEAR DATA MEMORY 3.5.3 PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY The linear data memory is the region from FSR address 0x2000 to FSR address 0x29AF. This region is a virtual region that points back to the 80-byte blocks of GPR memory in all the banks. Unimplemented memory reads as 0x00. Use of the linear data memory region allows buffers to be larger than 80 bytes because incrementing the FSR beyond one bank will go directly to the GPR memory of the next bank. The 16 bytes of common memory are not included in the linear data memory region. To make constant data access easier, the entire program Flash memory is mapped to the upper half of the FSR address space. When the MSB of FSRnH is set, the lower 15 bits are the address in program memory which will be accessed through INDF. Only the lower 8 bits of each memory location is accessible via INDF. Writing to the program Flash memory cannot be accomplished via the FSR/INDF interface. All instructions that access program Flash memory via the FSR/INDF interface will require one additional instruction cycle to complete. FIGURE 3-11: LINEAR DATA MEMORY MAP 0 7 FSRnL 0 FIGURE 3-12: 7 1 PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY MAP 0 7 FSRnL 0 FSRnH 7 FSRnH 001 Location Select Location Select 0x2000 0x020 Bank 0 0x06F 0x0A0 Bank 1 0x0EF 0x120 Bank 2 0x16F 0x8000 0x0000 Program Flash Memory (low 8 bits) 0xF20 Bank 30 0x29AF 0xF6F 0xFFFF 0x7FFF DS41414A-page 52 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 4.0 DEVICE CONFIGURATION Device Configuration consists of Configuration Word 1 and Configuration Word 2 registers, Code Protection and Device ID. 4.1 Configuration Words There are several Configuration Word bits that allow different oscillator and memory protection options. These are implemented as Configuration Word 1 register at 8007h and Configuration Word 2 register at 8008h. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 53 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 4-1: R/P-1/1 FCMEN bit 13 R/P-1/1 MCLRE bit 6 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 13 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared FCMEN: Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Enable bit 1 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled 0 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is disabled IESO: Internal External Switchover bit 1 = Internal/External Switchover mode is enabled 0 = Internal/External Switchover mode is disabled CLKOUTEN: Clock Out Enable bit 1 = CLKOUT function is disabled. I/O or oscillator function on RA6/CLKOUT 0 = CLKOUT function is enabled on RA6/CLKOUT BOREN<1:0>: Brown-out Reset Enable bits(1) 11 = BOR enabled 10 = BOR enabled during operation and disabled in Sleep 01 = BOR controlled by SBOREN bit of the BORCON register 00 = BOR disabled CPD: Data Code Protection bit(2) 1 = Data memory code protection is disabled 0 = Data memory code protection is enabled CP: Code Protection bit(3) 1 = Program memory code protection is disabled 0 = Program memory code protection is enabled MCLRE: RE3/MCLR/VPP Pin Function Select bit If LVP bit = 1: This bit is ignored. If LVP bit = 0: 1 = RE3/MCLR/VPP pin function is MCLR; Weak pull-up enabled. 0 = RE3/MCLR/VPP pin function is digital input; MCLR internally disabled; Weak pull-up under control of WPUE3 bit. PWRTE: Power-up Timer Enable bit(1) 1 = PWRT disabled 0 = PWRT enabled WDTE<1:0>: Watchdog Timer Enable bit 11 = WDT enabled 10 = WDT enabled while running and disabled in Sleep 01 = WDT controlled by the SWDTEN bit in the WDTCON register 00 = WDT disabled Enabling Brown-out Reset does not automatically enable Power-up Timer. The entire data EEPROM will be erased when the code protection is turned off during an erase. The entire program memory will be erased when the code protection is turned off. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets P = Programmable bit R/P-1/1 PWRTE R/P-1/1 WDTE1 R/P-1/1 WDTE0 R/P-1/1 FOSC2 R/P-1/1 FOSC1 R/P-1/1 FOSC0 bit 0 CONFIGURATION WORD 1 R/P-1/1 IESO R/P-1/1 CLKOUTEN R/P-1/1 BOREN1 R/P-1/1 BOREN0 R/P-1/1 CPD R/P-1/1 CP bit 7 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10-9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4-3 Note 1: 2: 3: DS41414A-page 54 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 4-1: bit 2-0 CONFIGURATION WORD 1 (CONTINUED) FOSC<2:0>: Oscillator Selection bits 111 = ECH: External Clock, High-Power mode: CLKIN on RA7/OSC1/CLKIN 110 = ECM: External Clock, Medium-Power mode: CLKIN on RA7/OSC1/CLKIN 101 = ECL: External Clock, Low-Power mode: CLKIN on RA7/OSC1/CLKIN 100 = INTOSC oscillator: I/O function on RA7/OSC1/CLKIN 011 = EXTRC oscillator: RC function on RA7/OSC1/CLKIN 010 = HS oscillator: High-speed crystal/resonator on RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT pin and RA7/OSC1/CLKIN 001 = XT oscillator: Crystal/resonator on RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT pin and RA7/OSC1/CLKIN 000 = LP oscillator: Low-power crystal on RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT pin and RA7/OSC1/CLKIN Enabling Brown-out Reset does not automatically enable Power-up Timer. The entire data EEPROM will be erased when the code protection is turned off during an erase. The entire program memory will be erased when the code protection is turned off. Note 1: 2: 3: 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 55 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 4-2: R/P-1/1 LVP bit 13 U-1 -- bit 6 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 13 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets P = Programmable bit U-1 -- R/P-1/1 VCAPEN U-1 -- U-1 -- R/P-1/1 WRT1 R/P-1/1 WRT0 bit 0 CONFIGURATION WORD 2 R/P-1/1 DEBUG U-1 -- R/P-1/1 BORV R/P-1/1 STVREN R/P-1/1 PLLEN U-1 -- bit 7 LVP: Low-Voltage Programming Enable bit(1) 1 = Low-voltage programming enabled 0 = High-voltage on MCLR/VPP must be used for programming DEBUG: In-Circuit Debugger Mode bit 1 = In-Circuit Debugger disabled, RB6/ICSPCLK and RB7/ICSPDAT are general purpose I/O pins 0 = In-Circuit Debugger enabled, RB6/ICSPCLK and RB7/ICSPDAT are dedicated to the debugger Unimplemented: Read as `1' BORV: Brown-out Reset Voltage Selection bit 1 = Brown-out Reset voltage set to 1.9V 0 = Brown-out Reset voltage set to 2.5V STVREN: Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset Enable bit 1 = Stack Overflow or Underflow will cause a Reset 0 = Stack Overflow or Underflow will not cause a Reset PLLEN: PLL Enable bit 1 = 4xPLL enabled 0 = 4xPLL disabled Unimplemented: Read as `1' VCAPEN>: Voltage Regulator Capacitor Enable bits 0 = VCAP functionality is enabled on RF0 1 = No capacitor on VCAP pin Unimplemented: Read as `1' WRT<1:0>: Flash Memory Self-Write Protection bits 8 kW Flash memory (PIC16F/LF1946 only): 11 = Write protection off 10 = 000h to 1FFh write-protected, 200h to 1FFFh may be modified by EECON control 01 = 000h to FFFh write-protected, 1000h to 1FFFh may be modified by EECON control 00 = 000h to 1FFFh write-protected, no addresses may be modified by EECON control 16 kW Flash memory (PIC16F/LF1947): 11 = Write protection off 10 = 000h to 1FFh write-protected, 200h to 3FFFh may be modified by EECON control 01 = 000h to 1FFFh write-protected, 2000h to 3FFFh may be modified by EECON control 00 = 000h to 3FFFh write-protected, no addresses may be modified by EECON control The LVP bit cannot be programmed to `0' when Programming mode is entered via LVP. bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7-5 bit 4 bit 2-3 bit 1-0 Note 1: DS41414A-page 56 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 4.2 Code Protection Code protection allows the device to be protected from unauthorized access. Program memory protection and data EEPROM protection are controlled independently. Internal access to the program memory and data EEPROM are unaffected by any code protection setting. 4.2.1 PROGRAM MEMORY PROTECTION The entire program memory space is protected from external reads and writes by the CP bit in Configuration Word 1. When CP = 0, external reads and writes of program memory are inhibited and a read will return all `0's. The CPU can continue to read program memory, regardless of the protection bit settings. Writing the program memory is dependent upon the write protection setting. See Section 4.3 "Write Protection" for more information. 4.2.2 DATA EEPROM PROTECTION The entire data EEPROM is protected from external reads and writes by the CPD bit. When CPD = 0, external reads and writes of data EEPROM are inhibited. The CPU can continue to read and write data EEPROM regardless of the protection bit settings. 4.3 Write Protection Write protection allows the device to be protected from unintended self-writes. Applications, such as bootloader software, can be protected while allowing other regions of the program memory to be modified. The WRT<1:0> bits in Configuration Word 2 define the size of the program memory block that is protected. 4.4 User ID Four memory locations (8000h-8003h) are designated as ID locations where the user can store checksum or other code identification numbers. These locations are readable and writable during normal execution. See Section 4.5 "Device ID and Revision ID" for more information on accessing these memory locations. For more information on checksum calculation, see the "PIC16F193X/LF193X/PIC16F194X/LF194X Memory Programming Specification" (DS41397). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 57 PIC16F/LF1946/47 4.5 Device ID and Revision ID The memory location 8006h is where the Device ID and Revision ID are stored. The upper nine bits hold the Device ID. The lower five bits hold the Revision ID. See Section 11.5 "User ID, Device ID and Configuration Word Access" for more information on accessing these memory locations. Development tools, such as device programmers and debuggers, may be used to read the Device ID and Revision ID. REGISTER 4-3: R DEV8 bit 13 R DEV1 bit 6 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 13-5 DEVICEID: DEVICE ID REGISTER(1) R DEV7 R DEV6 R DEV5 R DEV4 R DEV3 R DEV2 bit 7 R DEV0 R REV4 R REV3 R REV2 R REV1 R REV0 bit 0 U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown DEV<8:0>: Device ID bits 100011001 = PIC16F1946 100011010 = PIC16F1947 100011011 = PIC16LF1946 100011100 = PIC16LF1947 REV<4:0>: Revision ID bits These bits are used to identify the revision. bit 4-0 Note 1: This location cannot be written. DS41414A-page 58 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.0 5.1 OSCILLATOR MODULE (WITH FAIL-SAFE CLOCK MONITOR) Overview The oscillator module can be configured in one of six clock modes. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EC - External clock (ECL, ECM, ECH. See Section 5.2.1.1 "EC Mode"). LP - 32 kHz Low-Power Crystal mode. XT - Medium Gain Crystal or Ceramic Resonator Oscillator mode. HS - High Gain Crystal or Ceramic Resonator mode. RC - External Resistor-Capacitor (RC). INTOSC - Internal oscillator. The oscillator module has a wide variety of clock sources and selection features that allow it to be used in a wide range of applications while maximizing performance and minimizing power consumption. Figure 5-1 illustrates a block diagram of the oscillator module. Clock sources can be supplied from external oscillators, quartz crystal resonators, ceramic resonators and Resistor-Capacitor (RC) circuits. In addition, the system clock source can be supplied from one of two internal oscillators and PLL circuits, with a choice of speeds selectable via software. Additional clock features include: * Selectable system clock source between external or internal sources via software. * Two-Speed Start-up mode, which minimizes latency between external oscillator start-up and code execution. * Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) designed to detect a failure of the external clock source (LP, XT, HS, EC or RC modes) and switch automatically to the internal oscillator. * Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ensures stability of crystal oscillator sources Clock Source modes are selected by the FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word 1. The FOSC bits determine the type of oscillator that will be used when the device is first powered. The EC clock mode relies on an external logic level signal as the device clock source. The LP, XT, and HS clock modes require an external crystal or resonator to be connected to the device. Each mode is optimized for a different frequency range. The RC clock mode requires an external resistor and capacitor to set the oscillator frequency. The INTOSC internal oscillator block produces low, medium, and high frequency clock sources, designated LFINTOSC, MFINTOSC and HFINTOSC. (see Internal Oscillator Block, Figure 5-1). A wide selection of device clock frequencies may be derived from these three clock sources. FIGURE 5-1: SIMPLIFIED PIC(R) MCU CLOCK SOURCE BLOCK DIAGRAM External Oscillator OSC2 Sleep OSC1 Oscillator Timer1 T1OSO T1OSCEN Enable Oscillator FOSC<2:0> = 100 4 x PLL LP, XT, HS, RC, EC Sleep MUX T1OSC CPU and Peripherals T1OSI IRCF<3:0> 16 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 1 MHz 500 kHz 250 kHz 125 kHz 62.5 kHz 31.25 kHz 31 kHz Internal Oscillator Internal Oscillator Block HFPLL 500 kHz Source 31 kHz Source Postscaler 16 MHz (HFINTOSC) 500 kHz (MFINTOSC) MUX Clock Control FOSC<2:0> SCS<1:0> Clock Source Option for other modules 31 kHz (LFINTOSC) WDT, PWRT, Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Two-Speed Start-up and other modules 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 59 PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.2 Clock Source Types Clock sources can be classified as external or internal. External clock sources rely on external circuitry for the clock source to function. Examples are: oscillator modules (EC mode), quartz crystal resonators or ceramic resonators (LP, XT and HS modes) and Resistor-Capacitor (RC) mode circuits. Internal clock sources are contained internally within the oscillator module. The internal oscillator block has two internal oscillators and a dedicated phase-locked-loop (HFPLL) that are used to generate three internal system clock sources: the 16 MHz High-Frequency Internal Oscillator (HFINTOSC), 500 kHZ (MFINTOSC) and the 31 kHz Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC). The system clock can be selected between external or internal clock sources via the System Clock Select (SCS) bits in the OSCCON register. See Section 5.3 "Clock Switching" for additional information. The Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) is disabled when EC mode is selected. Therefore, there is no delay in operation after a Power-on Reset (POR) or wake-up from Sleep. Because the PIC(R) MCU design is fully static, stopping the external clock input will have the effect of halting the device while leaving all data intact. Upon restarting the external clock, the device will resume operation as if no time had elapsed. FIGURE 5-2: EXTERNAL CLOCK (EC) MODE OPERATION OSC1/CLKIN PIC(R) MCU OSC2/CLKOUT Clock from Ext. System FOSC/4 or I/O(1) Note 1: Output depends upon CLKOUTEN bit of the Configuration Word 1. 5.2.1 EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCES 5.2.1.2 LP, XT, HS Modes The LP, XT and HS modes support the use of quartz crystal resonators or ceramic resonators connected to OSC1 and OSC2 (Figure 5-3). The three modes select a low, medium or high gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier to support various resonator types and speed. LP Oscillator mode selects the lowest gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. LP mode current consumption is the least of the three modes. This mode is designed to drive only 32.768 kHz tuning-fork type crystals (watch crystals). XT Oscillator mode selects the intermediate gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. XT mode current consumption is the medium of the three modes. This mode is best suited to drive resonators with a medium drive level specification. HS Oscillator mode selects the highest gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. HS mode current consumption is the highest of the three modes. This mode is best suited for resonators that require a high drive setting. Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 show typical circuits for quartz crystal and ceramic resonators, respectively. An external clock source can be used as the device system clock by performing one of the following actions: * Program the FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word 1 to select an external clock source that will be used as the default system clock upon a device Reset. * Write the SCS<1:0> bits in the OSCCON register to switch the system clock source to: - Timer1 Oscillator during run-time, or - An external clock source determined by the value of the FOSC bits. See Section 5.3 "Clock Switching"for more information. 5.2.1.1 EC Mode The External Clock (EC) mode allows an externally generated logic level signal to be the system clock source. When operating in this mode, an external clock source is connected to the OSC1 input. OSC2/CLKOUT is available for general purpose I/O or CLKOUT. Figure 5-2 shows the pin connections for EC mode. EC mode has 3 power modes to select from through Configuration Word 1: * High-power, 4-32 MHz (FOSC = 111) * Medium power, 0.5-4 MHz (FOSC = 110) * Low-power, 0-0.5 MHz (FOSC = 101) DS41414A-page 60 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 5-3: QUARTZ CRYSTAL OPERATION (LP, XT OR HS MODE) PIC(R) MCU OSC1/CLKIN C1 Quartz Crystal RF(2) To Internal Logic Sleep C1 FIGURE 5-4: CERAMIC RESONATOR OPERATION (XT OR HS MODE) PIC(R) MCU OSC1/CLKIN To Internal Logic RP(3) RF(2) Sleep C2 RS(1) OSC2/CLKOUT C2 Ceramic RS(1) Resonator OSC2/CLKOUT Note 1: 2: A series resistor (RS) may be required for quartz crystals with low drive level. The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode selected (typically between 2 M to 10 M. Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for ceramic resonators with low drive level. 2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode selected (typically between 2 M to 10 M. 3: An additional parallel feedback resistor (RP) may be required for proper ceramic resonator operation. Note 1: Quartz crystal characteristics vary according to type, package and manufacturer. The user should consult the manufacturer data sheets for specifications and recommended application. 2: Always verify oscillator performance over the VDD and temperature range that is expected for the application. 3: For oscillator design assistance, reference the following Microchip Applications Notes: * AN826, "Crystal Oscillator Basics and Crystal Selection for rfPIC(R) and PIC(R) Devices" (DS00826) * AN849, "Basic PIC(R) Oscillator Design" (DS00849) * AN943, "Practical PIC(R) Oscillator Analysis and Design" (DS00943) * AN949, "Making Your Oscillator Work" (DS00949) 5.2.1.3 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) If the oscillator module is configured for LP, XT or HS modes, the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) counts 1024 oscillations from OSC1. This occurs following a Power-on Reset (POR) and when the Power-up Timer (PWRT) has expired (if configured), or a wake-up from Sleep. During this time, the program counter does not increment and program execution is suspended. The OST ensures that the oscillator circuit, using a quartz crystal resonator or ceramic resonator, has started and is providing a stable system clock to the oscillator module. In order to minimize latency between external oscillator start-up and code execution, the Two-Speed Clock Start-up mode can be selected (see Section 5.4 "Two-Speed Clock Start-up Mode"). 5.2.1.4 4X PLL The oscillator module contains a 4X PLL that can be used with both external and internal clock sources to provide a system clock source. The input frequency for the 4X PLL must fall within specifications. See the PLL Clock Timing Specifications in Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications". The 4X PLL may be enabled for use by one of two methods: 1. 2. Program the PLLEN bit in Configuration Word 2 to a `1'. Write the SPLLEN bit in the OSCCON register to a `1'. If the PLLEN bit in Configuration Word 2 is programmed to a `1', then the value of SPLLEN is ignored. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 61 PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.2.1.5 TIMER1 Oscillator 5.2.1.6 External RC Mode The Timer1 Oscillator is a separate crystal oscillator that is associated with the Timer1 peripheral. It is optimized for timekeeping operations with a 32.768 kHz crystal connected between the T1OSO and T1OSI device pins. The Timer1 Oscillator can be used as an alternate system clock source and can be selected during run-time using clock switching. Refer to Section 5.3 "Clock Switching" for more information. The external Resistor-Capacitor (RC) modes support the use of an external RC circuit. This allows the designer maximum flexibility in frequency choice while keeping costs to a minimum when clock accuracy is not required. The RC circuit connects to OSC1. OSC2/CLKOUT is available for general purpose I/O or CLKOUT. The function of the OSC2/CLKOUT pin is determined by the state of the CLKOUTEN bit in Configuration Word 1. Figure 5-6 shows the external RC mode connections. FIGURE 5-5: QUARTZ CRYSTAL OPERATION (TIMER1 OSCILLATOR) PIC(R) T1OSI FIGURE 5-6: VDD EXTERNAL RC MODES PIC(R) MCU MCU REXT OSC1/CLKIN To Internal Logic C1 32.768 kHz Quartz Crystal Internal Clock CEXT VSS FOSC/4 or I/O(1) OSC2/CLKOUT C2 T1OSO Recommended values: 10 k REXT 100 k, <3V 3 k REXT 100 k, 3-5V CEXT > 20 pF, 2-5V Note 1: Quartz crystal characteristics vary according to type, package and manufacturer. The user should consult the manufacturer data sheets for specifications and recommended application. 2: Always verify oscillator performance over the VDD and temperature range that is expected for the application. 3: For oscillator design assistance, reference the following Microchip Applications Notes: * AN826, "Crystal Oscillator Basics and Crystal Selection for rfPIC(R) and PIC(R) Devices" (DS00826) * AN849, "Basic PIC(R) Oscillator Design" (DS00849) * AN943, "Practical PIC(R) Oscillator Analysis and Design" (DS00943) * AN949, "Making Your Oscillator Work" (DS00949) * TB097, "Interfacing a Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K 32.768 kHz Tuning Fork Crystal to a PIC16F690/SS" (DS91097) * AN1288, "Design Practices for Low-Power External Oscillators" (DS01288) Note 1: Output depends upon CLKOUTEN bit of the Configuration Word 1. The RC oscillator frequency is a function of the supply voltage, the resistor (REXT) and capacitor (CEXT) values and the operating temperature. Other factors affecting the oscillator frequency are: * threshold voltage variation * component tolerances * packaging variations in capacitance The user also needs to take into account variation due to tolerance of external RC components used. DS41414A-page 62 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.2.2 INTERNAL CLOCK SOURCES 5.2.2.1 HFINTOSC The device may be configured to use the internal oscillator block as the system clock by performing one of the following actions: * Program the FOSC<2:0> bits in Configuration Word 1 to select the INTOSC clock source, which will be used as the default system clock upon a device Reset. * Write the SCS<1:0> bits in the OSCCON register to switch the system clock source to the internal oscillator during run-time. See Section 5.3 "Clock Switching"for more information. In INTOSC mode, OSC1/CLKIN is available for general purpose I/O. OSC2/CLKOUT is available for general purpose I/O or CLKOUT. The function of the OSC2/CLKOUT pin is determined by the state of the CLKOUTEN bit in Configuration Word 1. The internal oscillator block has two independent oscillators and a dedicated Phase-Locked Loop, HFPLL that can produce one of three internal system clock sources. 1. The HFINTOSC (High-Frequency Internal Oscillator) is factory calibrated and operates at 16 MHz. The HFINTOSC source is generated from the 500 kHz MFINTOSC source and the dedicated Phase-Locked Loop, HFPLL. The frequency of the HFINTOSC can be user-adjusted via software using the OSCTUNE register (Register 5-3). The MFINTOSC (Medium-Frequency Internal Oscillator) is factory calibrated and operates at 500 kHz. The frequency of the MFINTOSC can be user-adjusted via software using the OSCTUNE register (Register 5-3). The LFINTOSC (Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator) is uncalibrated and operates at 31 kHz. The High-Frequency Internal Oscillator (HFINTOSC) is a factory calibrated 16 MHz internal clock source. The frequency of the HFINTOSC can be altered via software using the OSCTUNE register (Register 5-3). The output of the HFINTOSC connects to a postscaler and multiplexer (see Figure 5-1). One of nine frequencies derived from the HFINTOSC can be selected via software using the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register. See Section 5.2.2.7 "Internal Oscillator Clock Switch Timing" for more information. The HFINTOSC is enabled by: * Configure the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register for the desired HF frequency, and * FOSC<2:0> = 100, or * Set the System Clock Source (SCS) bits of the OSCCON register to `1x'. The High Frequency Internal Oscillator Ready bit (HFIOFR) of the OSCSTAT register indicates when the HFINTOSC is running and can be utilized. The High Frequency Internal Oscillator Status Locked bit (HFIOFL) of the OSCSTAT register indicates when the HFINTOSC is running within 2% of its final value. The High Frequency Internal Oscillator Status Stable bit (HFIOFS) of the OSCSTAT register indicates when the HFINTOSC is running within 0.5% of its final value. 5.2.2.2 MFINTOSC 2. The Medium-Frequency Internal Oscillator (MFINTOSC) is a factory calibrated 500 kHz internal clock source. The frequency of the MFINTOSC can be altered via software using the OSCTUNE register (Register 5-3). The output of the MFINTOSC connects to a postscaler and multiplexer (see Figure 5-1). One of nine frequencies derived from the MFINTOSC can be selected via software using the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register. See Section 5.2.2.7 "Internal Oscillator Clock Switch Timing" for more information. The MFINTOSC is enabled by: * Configure the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register for the desired HF frequency, and * FOSC<2:0> = 100, or * Set the System Clock Source (SCS) bits of the OSCCON register to `1x' The Medium Frequency Internal Oscillator Ready bit (MFIOFR) of the OSCSTAT register indicates when the MFINTOSC is running and can be utilized. 3. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 63 PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.2.2.3 Internal Oscillator Frequency Adjustment 5.2.2.5 Internal Oscillator Frequency Selection The 500 kHz internal oscillator is factory calibrated. This internal oscillator can be adjusted in software by writing to the OSCTUNE register (Register 5-3). Since the HFINTOSC and MFINTOSC clock sources are derived from the 500 kHz internal oscillator a change in the OSCTUNE register value will apply to both. The default value of the OSCTUNE register is `0'. The value is a 6-bit two's complement number. A value of 1Fh will provide an adjustment to the maximum frequency. A value of 20h will provide an adjustment to the minimum frequency. When the OSCTUNE register is modified, the oscillator frequency will begin shifting to the new frequency. Code execution continues during this shift. There is no indication that the shift has occurred. OSCTUNE does not affect the LFINTOSC frequency. Operation of features that depend on the LFINTOSC clock source frequency, such as the Power-up Timer (PWRT), Watchdog Timer (WDT), Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) and peripherals, are not affected by the change in frequency. The system clock speed can be selected via software using the Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits IRCF<3:0> of the OSCCON register. The output of the 16 MHz HFINTOSC and 31 kHz LFINTOSC connects to a postscaler and multiplexer (see Figure 5-1). The Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits IRCF<3:0> of the OSCCON register select the frequency output of the internal oscillators. One of the following frequencies can be selected via software: * * * * * * * * * * * * 32 MHz (requires 4X PLL) 16 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 1 MHz 500 kHz (Default after Reset) 250 kHz 125 kHz 62.5 kHz 31.25 kHz 31 kHz (LFINTOSC) Note: Following any Reset, the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register are set to `0111' and the frequency selection is set to 500 kHz. The user can modify the IRCF bits to select a different frequency. 5.2.2.4 LFINTOSC The Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC) is an uncalibrated 31 kHz internal clock source. The output of the LFINTOSC connects to a postscaler and multiplexer (see Figure 5-1). Select 31 kHz, via software, using the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register. See Section 5.2.2.7 "Internal Oscillator Clock Switch Timing" for more information. The LFINTOSC is also the frequency for the Power-up Timer (PWRT), Watchdog Timer (WDT) and Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM). The LFINTOSC is enabled by selecting 31 kHz (IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register = 000) as the system clock source (SCS bits of the OSCCON register = 1x), or when any of the following are enabled: * Configure the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register for the desired LF frequency, and * FOSC<2:0> = 100, or * Set the System Clock Source (SCS) bits of the OSCCON register to `1x' Peripherals that use the LFINTOSC are: * Power-up Timer (PWRT) * Watchdog Timer (WDT) * Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) The Low Frequency Internal Oscillator Ready bit (LFIOFR) of the OSCSTAT register indicates when the LFINTOSC is running and can be utilized. The IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register allow duplicate selections for some frequencies. These duplicate choices can offer system design trade-offs. Lower power consumption can be obtained when changing oscillator sources for a given frequency. Faster transition times can be obtained between frequency changes that use the same oscillator source. DS41414A-page 64 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.2.2.6 32 MHz Internal Oscillator Frequency Selection 5.2.2.7 Internal Oscillator Clock Switch Timing The Internal Oscillator Block can be used with the 4X PLL associated with the External Oscillator Block to produce a 32 MHz internal system clock source. The following settings are required to use the 32 MHz internal clock source: * The FOSC bits in Configuration Word 1 must be set to use the INTOSC source as the device system clock (FOSC<2:0> = 100). * The IRCF bits in the OSCCON register must be set to the 8 MHz HFINTOSC selection (IRCF<3:0> = 1110). * The SPLLEN bit in the OSCCON register must be set to enable the 4xPLL, or the PLLEN bit of the Configuration Word 2 must be programmed to a `1'. Note: When using the PLLEN bit of the Configuration Word 2, the 4xPLL cannot be disabled by software and the 8 MHz HFINTOSC option will no longer be available. When switching between the HFINTOSC, MFINTOSC and the LFINTOSC, the new oscillator may already be shut down to save power (see Figure 5-7). If this is the case, there is a delay after the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register are modified before the frequency selection takes place. The OSCSTAT register will reflect the current active status of the HFINTOSC, MFINTOSC and LFINTOSC oscillators. The sequence of a frequency selection is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register are modified. If the new clock is shut down, a clock start-up delay is started. Clock switch circuitry waits for a falling edge of the current clock. The current clock is held low and the clock switch circuitry waits for a rising edge in the new clock. The new clock is now active. The OSCSTAT register is updated as required. Clock switch is complete. The 4xPLL is not available for use with the internal oscillator when the SCS bits of the OSCCON register are set to `1x'. The SCS bits must be set to `00' to use the 4xPLL with the internal oscillator. 5. 6. 7. See Figure 5-7 for more details. If the internal oscillator speed is switched between two clocks of the same source, there is no start-up delay before the new frequency is selected. Clock switching time delays are shown in Table 5-1. Start-up delay specifications are located in the oscillator tables of Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications". 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 65 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 5-7: INTERNAL OSCILLATOR SWITCH TIMING HFINTOSC/ MFINTOSC HFINTOSC/ MFINTOSC LFINTOSC IRCF <3:0> System Clock LFINTOSC (FSCM and WDT disabled) Start-up Time 2-cycle Sync Running 0 0 HFINTOSC/ MFINTOSC HFINTOSC/ MFINTOSC LFINTOSC IRCF <3:0> System Clock LFINTOSC (Either FSCM or WDT enabled) 2-cycle Sync Running 0 0 LFINTOSC LFINTOSC HFINTOSC/MFINTOSC LFINTOSC turns off unless WDT or FSCM is enabled Start-up Time 2-cycle Sync Running HFINTOSC/ MFINTOSC IRCF <3:0> System Clock =0 0 DS41414A-page 66 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.3 Clock Switching 5.3.3 TIMER1 OSCILLATOR The system clock source can be switched between external and internal clock sources via software using the System Clock Select (SCS) bits of the OSCCON register. The following clock sources can be selected using the SCS bits: * Default system oscillator determined by FOSC bits in Configuration Word 1 * Timer1 32 kHz crystal oscillator * Internal Oscillator Block (INTOSC) The Timer1 Oscillator is a separate crystal oscillator associated with the Timer1 peripheral. It is optimized for timekeeping operations with a 32.768 kHz crystal connected between the T1OSO and T1OSI device pins. The Timer1 oscillator is enabled using the T1OSCEN control bit in the T1CON register. See Section 20.0 "Timer1 Module with Gate Control" for more information about the Timer1 peripheral. 5.3.1 SYSTEM CLOCK SELECT (SCS) BITS 5.3.4 TIMER1 OSCILLATOR READY (T1OSCR) BIT The System Clock Select (SCS) bits of the OSCCON register selects the system clock source that is used for the CPU and peripherals. * When the SCS bits of the OSCCON register = 00, the system clock source is determined by value of the FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word 1. * When the SCS bits of the OSCCON register = 01, the system clock source is the Timer1 oscillator. * When the SCS bits of the OSCCON register = 1x, the system clock source is chosen by the internal oscillator frequency selected by the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register. After a Reset, the SCS bits of the OSCCON register are always cleared. Note: Any automatic clock switch, which may occur from Two-Speed Start-up or Fail-Safe Clock Monitor, does not update the SCS bits of the OSCCON register. The user can monitor the OSTS bit of the OSCSTAT register to determine the current system clock source. The user must ensure that the Timer1 Oscillator is ready to be used before it is selected as a system clock source. The Timer1 Oscillator Ready (T1OSCR) bit of the OSCSTAT register indicates whether the Timer1 oscillator is ready to be used. After the T1OSCR bit is set, the SCS bits can be configured to select the Timer1 oscillator. When switching between clock sources, a delay is required to allow the new clock to stabilize. These oscillator delays are shown in Table 5-1. 5.3.2 OSCILLATOR START-UP TIME-OUT STATUS (OSTS) BIT The Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status (OSTS) bit of the OSCSTAT register indicates whether the system clock is running from the external clock source, as defined by the FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word 1, or from the internal clock source. In particular, OSTS indicates that the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has timed out for LP, XT or HS modes. The OST does not reflect the status of the Timer1 Oscillator. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 67 PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.4 Two-Speed Clock Start-up Mode 5.4.1 Two-Speed Start-up mode provides additional power savings by minimizing the latency between external oscillator start-up and code execution. In applications that make heavy use of the Sleep mode, Two-Speed Start-up will remove the external oscillator start-up time from the time spent awake and can reduce the overall power consumption of the device. This mode allows the application to wake-up from Sleep, perform a few instructions using the INTOSC internal oscillator block as the clock source and go back to Sleep without waiting for the external oscillator to become stable. Two-Speed Start-up provides benefits when the oscillator module is configured for LP, XT or HS modes. The Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) is enabled for these modes and must count 1024 oscillations before the oscillator can be used as the system clock source. If the oscillator module is configured for any mode other than LP, XT or HS mode, then Two-Speed Start-up is disabled. This is because the external clock oscillator does not require any stabilization time after POR or an exit from Sleep. If the OST count reaches 1024 before the device enters Sleep mode, the OSTS bit of the OSCSTAT register is set and program execution switches to the external oscillator. However, the system may never operate from the external oscillator if the time spent awake is very short. Note: Executing a SLEEP instruction will abort the oscillator start-up time and will cause the OSTS bit of the OSCSTAT register to remain clear. TWO-SPEED START-UP MODE CONFIGURATION Two-Speed Start-up mode is configured by the following settings: * IESO (of the Configuration Word 1) = 1; Internal/External Switchover bit (Two-Speed Start-up mode enabled). * SCS (of the OSCCON register) = 00. * FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word 1 configured for LP, XT or HS mode. Two-Speed Start-up mode is entered after: * Power-on Reset (POR) and, if enabled, after Power-up Timer (PWRT) has expired, or * Wake-up from Sleep. TABLE 5-1: Switch From Sleep/POR Sleep/POR LFINTOSC Sleep/POR Any clock source Any clock source Any clock source PLL inactive Note 1: OSCILLATOR SWITCHING DELAYS Switch To LFINTOSC(1) MFINTOSC(1) HFINTOSC(1) RC(1) Frequency 31 kHz 31.25 kHz-500 kHz 31.25 kHz-16 MHz DC - 32 MHz DC - 32 MHz 32 kHz-20 MHz 31.25 kHz-500 kHz 31.25 kHz-16 MHz 31 kHz 32 kHz 16-32 MHz Oscillator Delay Oscillator Warm-up Delay (TWARM) 2 cycles 1 cycle of each 1024 Clock Cycles (OST) 2 s (approx.) 1 cycle of each 1024 Clock Cycles (OST) 2 ms (approx.) EC, RC(1) EC, Timer1 Oscillator LP, XT, HS(1) MFINTOSC(1) HFINTOSC(1) LFINTOSC(1) Timer1 Oscillator PLL active PLL inactive. DS41414A-page 68 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.4.2 1. 2. TWO-SPEED START-UP SEQUENCE 5.4.3 CHECKING TWO-SPEED CLOCK STATUS 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Wake-up from Power-on Reset or Sleep. Instructions begin execution by the internal oscillator at the frequency set in the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register. OST enabled to count 1024 clock cycles. OST timed out, wait for falling edge of the internal oscillator. OSTS is set. System clock held low until the next falling edge of new clock (LP, XT or HS mode). System clock is switched to external clock source. Checking the state of the OSTS bit of the OSCSTAT register will confirm if the microcontroller is running from the external clock source, as defined by the FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word 1, or the internal oscillator. FIGURE 5-8: TWO-SPEED START-UP INTOSC T TOST OSC1 0 1 1022 1023 OSC2 Program Counter PC - N PC PC + 1 System Clock 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 69 PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.5 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor 5.5.3 FAIL-SAFE CONDITION CLEARING The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the device to continue operating should the external oscillator fail. The FSCM can detect oscillator failure any time after the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired. The FSCM is enabled by setting the FCMEN bit in the Configuration Word 1. The FSCM is applicable to all external Oscillator modes (LP, XT, HS, EC, Timer1 Oscillator and RC). The Fail-Safe condition is cleared after a Reset, executing a SLEEP instruction or changing the SCS bits of the OSCCON register. When the SCS bits are changed, the OST is restarted. While the OST is running, the device continues to operate from the INTOSC selected in OSCCON. When the OST times out, the Fail-Safe condition is cleared and the device will be operating from the external clock source. The Fail-Safe condition must be cleared before the OSFIF flag can be cleared. FIGURE 5-9: FSCM BLOCK DIAGRAM Clock Monitor Latch S Q 5.5.4 RESET OR WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP External Clock LFINTOSC Oscillator 31 kHz (~32 s) / 64 488 Hz (~2 ms) R Q The FSCM is designed to detect an oscillator failure after the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired. The OST is used after waking up from Sleep and after any type of Reset. The OST is not used with the EC or RC Clock modes so that the FSCM will be active as soon as the Reset or wake-up has completed. When the FSCM is enabled, the Two-Speed Start-up is also enabled. Therefore, the device will always be executing code while the OST is operating. Clock Failure Detected Sample Clock Note: 5.5.1 FAIL-SAFE DETECTION The FSCM module detects a failed oscillator by comparing the external oscillator to the FSCM sample clock. The sample clock is generated by dividing the LFINTOSC by 64. See Figure 5-9. Inside the fail detector block is a latch. The external clock sets the latch on each falling edge of the external clock. The sample clock clears the latch on each rising edge of the sample clock. A failure is detected when an entire half-cycle of the sample clock elapses before the external clock goes low. Due to the wide range of oscillator start-up times, the Fail-Safe circuit is not active during oscillator start-up (i.e., after exiting Reset or Sleep). After an appropriate amount of time, the user should check the Status bits in the OSCSTAT register to verify the oscillator start-up and that the system clock switchover has successfully completed. 5.5.2 FAIL-SAFE OPERATION When the external clock fails, the FSCM switches the device clock to an internal clock source and sets the bit flag OSFIF of the PIR2 register. Setting this flag will generate an interrupt if the OSFIE bit of the PIE2 register is also set. The device firmware can then take steps to mitigate the problems that may arise from a failed clock. The system clock will continue to be sourced from the internal clock source until the device firmware successfully restarts the external oscillator and switches back to external operation. The internal clock source chosen by the FSCM is determined by the IRCF<3:0> bits of the OSCCON register. This allows the internal oscillator to be configured before a failure occurs. DS41414A-page 70 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 5-10: Sample Clock System Clock Output Clock Monitor Output (Q) OSCFIF Oscillator Failure FSCM TIMING DIAGRAM Failure Detected Test Note: Test Test The system clock is normally at a much higher frequency than the sample clock. The relative frequencies in this example have been chosen for clarity. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 71 PIC16F/LF1946/47 5.6 Oscillator Control Registers OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0/0 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 IRCF<3:0> SCS<1:0> REGISTER 5-1: R/W-0/0 SPLLEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets SPLLEN: Software PLL Enable bit If PLLEN in Configuration Word 1 = 1: SPLLEN bit is ignored. 4x PLL is always enabled (subject to oscillator requirements) If PLLEN in Configuration Word 1 = 0: 1 = 4x PLL Is enabled 0 = 4x PLL is disabled bit 6-3 IRCF<3:0>: Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits 000x = 31 kHz LF 0010 = 31.25 kHz MF 0011 = 31.25 kHz HF(1) 0100 = 62.5 kHz MF 0101 = 125 kHz MF 0110 = 250 kHz MF 0111 = 500 kHz MF (default upon Reset) 1000 = 125 kHz HF(1) 1001 = 250 kHz HF(1) 1010 = 500 kHz HF(1) 1011 = 1 MHz HF 1100 = 2 MHz HF 1101 = 4 MHz HF 1110 = 8 MHz or 32 MHz HF(see Section 5.2.1.4 "4X PLL") 1111 = 16 MHz HF Unimplemented: Read as `0' SCS<1:0>: System Clock Select bits 1x = Internal oscillator block 01 = Timer1 oscillator 00 = Clock determined by FOSC<2:0> in Configuration Word 1. Duplicate frequency derived from HFINTOSC. bit 2 bit 1-0 Note 1: DS41414A-page 72 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 5-2: R-1/q T1OSCR bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared T1OSCR: Timer1 Oscillator Ready bit If T1OSCEN = 1: 1 = Timer1 oscillator is ready 0 = Timer1 oscillator is not ready If T1OSCEN = 0: 1 = Timer1 clock source is always ready PLLR 4x PLL Ready bit 1 = 4x PLL is ready 0 = 4x PLL is not ready OSTS: Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status bit 1 = Running from the clock defined by the FOSC<2:0> bits of the Configuration Word 1 0 = Running from an internal oscillator (FOSC<2:0> = 100) HFIOFR: High Frequency Internal Oscillator Ready bit 1 = HFINTOSC is ready 0 = HFINTOSC is not ready HFIOFL: High Frequency Internal Oscillator Locked bit 1 = HFINTOSC is at least 2% accurate 0 = HFINTOSC is not 2% accurate MFIOFR: Medium Frequency Internal Oscillator Ready bit 1 = MFINTOSC is ready 0 = MFINTOSC is not ready LFIOFR: Low Frequency Internal Oscillator Ready bit 1 = LFINTOSC is ready 0 = LFINTOSC is not ready HFIOFS: High Frequency Internal Oscillator Stable bit 1 = HFINTOSC is at least 0.5% accurate 0 = HFINTOSC is not 0.5% accurate U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets q = Conditional OSCSTAT: OSCILLATOR STATUS REGISTER R-0/q PLLR R-q/q OSTS R-0/q HFIOFR R-0/q HFIOFL R-q/q MFIOFR R-0/0 LFIOFR R-0/q HFIOFS bit 0 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 73 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 5-3: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0' TUN<4:0>: Frequency Tuning bits 011111 = Maximum frequency 011110 = * * * 000001 = 000000 = Oscillator module is running at the factory-calibrated frequency. 111111 = * * * 100000 = Minimum frequency U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets OSCTUNE: OSCILLATOR TUNING REGISTER U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 TUN<5:0> TABLE 5-2: Name OSCCON OSCSTAT OSCTUNE PIE2 PIR2 T1CON Legend: Note 1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CLOCK SOURCES Bit 7 SPLLEN T1OSCR -- OSFIE OSFIF PLLR -- C2IE C2IF C1IE C1IF EEIE EEIF Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 -- HFIOFL BCLIE BCLIF T1OSCEN MFIOFR LCDIE LCDIF T1SYNC TUN<5:0> -- -- -- CCP2IE(1) CCP2IF (1) Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page 72 73 74 91 95 199 IRCF<3:0> OSTS HFIOFR SCS<1:0> LFIOFR HFIOFS TMR1CS<1:0> T1CKPS<1:0> TMR1ON -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by clock sources. PIC16F1947 only. TABLE 5-3: Name Bits 13:8 7:0 13:8 7:0 SUMMARY OF CONFIGURATION WORD WITH CLOCK SOURCES Bit -/7 -- CP -- -- Bit -/6 -- MCLRE -- -- Bit 13/5 FCMEN PWRTE LVP VCAPEN Bit 12/4 IESO Bit 11/3 CLKOUTEN Bit 10/2 Bit 9/1 Bit 8/0 CPD Register on Page 54 CONFIG1 BOREN<1:0> FOSC<2:0> BORV -- STVREN WDTE<1:0> DEBUG -- -- -- CONFIG2 Legend: Note 1: PLLEN WRT<1:0> 56 -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by clock sources. PIC16F1946/47 only. DS41414A-page 74 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 6.0 * * * * * * * * RESETS There are multiple ways to reset this device: Power-on Reset (POR) Brown-out Reset (BOR) MCLR Reset WDT Reset RESET instruction Stack Overflow Stack Underflow Programming mode exit To allow VDD to stabilize, an optional power-up timer can be enabled to extend the Reset time after a BOR or POR event. A simplified block diagram of the On-Chip Reset Circuit is shown in Figure 6-1. FIGURE 6-1: SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT Programming Mode Exit RESET Instruction Stack Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset Pointer External Reset MCLR Sleep WDT Time-out Power-on Reset VDD Brown-out Reset BOR Enable Device Reset MCLRE PWRT Zero LFINTOSC 64 ms PWRTEN 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 75 PIC16F/LF1946/47 6.1 Power-on Reset (POR) 6.2 Brown-Out Reset (BOR) The POR circuit holds the device in Reset until VDD has reached an acceptable level for minimum operation. Slow rising VDD, fast operating speeds or analog performance may require greater than minimum VDD. The PWRT, BOR or MCLR features can be used to extend the start-up period until all device operation conditions have been met. The BOR circuit holds the device in Reset when Vdd reaches a selectable minimum level. Between the POR and BOR, complete voltage range coverage for execution protection can be implemented. The Brown-out Reset module has four operating modes controlled by the BOREN<1:0> bits in Configuration Word 1. The four operating modes are: * * * * BOR is always on BOR is off when in Sleep BOR is controlled by software BOR is always off 6.1.1 POWER-UP TIMER (PWRT) The Power-up Timer provides a nominal 64 ms timeout on POR or Brown-out Reset. The device is held in Reset as long as PWRT is active. The PWRT delay allows additional time for the VDD to rise to an acceptable level. The Power-up Timer is enabled by clearing the PWRTE bit in Configuration Word 1. The Power-up Timer starts after the release of the POR and BOR. For additional information, refer to Application Note AN607, "Power-up Trouble Shooting" (DS00607). Refer to Table 6-3 for more information. The Brown-out Reset voltage level is selectable by configuring the BORV bit in Configuration Word 2. A VDD noise rejection filter prevents the BOR from triggering on small events. If VDD falls below VBOR for a duration greater than parameter TBORDC, the device will reset. See Figure 6-3 for more information. TABLE 6-1: BOR OPERATING MODES SBOREN Device Mode BOR Mode Device Device Operation upon Operation upon wake-up from release of POR Sleep Waits for BOR ready(1) Waits for BOR ready Begins immediately Begins immediately Begins immediately BOREN Config bits BOR_ON (11) BOR_NSLEEP (10) BOR_NSLEEP (10) BOR_SBOREN (01) BOR_SBOREN (01) BOR_OFF (00) X X X 1 0 X X Awake Sleep X X X Active Active Disabled Active Disabled Disabled Note 1: Even though this case specifically waits for the BOR, the BOR is already operating, so there is no delay in start-up. 6.2.1 BOR IS ALWAYS ON 6.2.3 BOR CONTROLLED BY SOFTWARE When the BOREN bits of Configuration Word 1 are set to `11', the BOR is always on. The device start-up will be delayed until the BOR is ready and VDD is higher than the BOR threshold. BOR protection is active during Sleep. The BOR does not delay wake-up from Sleep. When the BOREN bits of Configuration Word 1 are set to `01', the BOR is controlled by the SBOREN bit of the BORCON register. The device start-up is not delayed by the BOR ready condition or the VDD level. BOR protection begins as soon as the BOR circuit is ready. The status of the BOR circuit is reflected in the BORRDY bit of the BORCON register. BOR protection is unchanged by Sleep. 6.2.2 BOR IS OFF IN SLEEP When the BOREN bits of Configuration Word 1 are set to `10', the BOR is on, except in Sleep. The device start-up will be delayed until the BOR is ready and VDD is higher than the BOR threshold. BOR protection is not active during Sleep. The device wake-up will be delayed until the BOR is ready. DS41414A-page 76 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 6-2: SBOREN BROWN-OUT READY BORRDY TBORRDY BOR Protection Active FIGURE 6-3: VDD BROWN-OUT SITUATIONS VBOR Internal Reset VDD TPWRT(1) VBOR < TPWRT Internal Reset TPWRT(1) VDD VBOR Internal Reset Note 1: TPWRT delay only if PWRTE bit is programmed to `0'. TPWRT(1) REGISTER 6-1: R/W-1/u SBOREN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 BORCON: BROWN-OUT RESET CONTROL REGISTER U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- R-q/u BORRDY bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets q = Value depends on condition SBOREN: Software Brown-out Reset Enable bit If BOREN <1:0> in Configuration Word 1 01: SBOREN is read/write, but has no effect on the BOR. If BOREN <1:0> in Configuration Word 1 = 01: 1 = BOR Enabled 0 = BOR Disabled Unimplemented: Read as `0' BORRDY: Brown-out Reset Circuit Ready Status bit 1 = The Brown-out Reset circuit is active 0 = The Brown-out Reset circuit is inactive bit 6-1 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 77 PIC16F/LF1946/47 6.3 MCLR 6.7 Programming Mode Exit The MCLR is an optional external input that can reset the device. The MCLR function is controlled by the MCLRE bit of Configuration Word 1 and the LVP bit of Configuration Word 2 (Table 6-2). Upon exit of Programming mode, the device will behave as if a POR had just occurred. 6.8 Power-Up Timer TABLE 6-2: MCLRE 0 1 x MCLR CONFIGURATION LVP 0 0 1 MCLR Disabled Enabled Enabled The Power-up Timer optionally delays device execution after a BOR or POR event. This timer is typically used to allow VDD to stabilize before allowing the device to start running. The Power-up Timer is controlled by the PWRTE bit of Configuration Word 1. 6.3.1 MCLR ENABLED 6.9 Start-up Sequence When MCLR is enabled and the pin is held low, the device is held in Reset. The MCLR pin is connected to VDD through an internal weak pull-up. The device has a noise filter in the MCLR Reset path. The filter will detect and ignore small pulses. Note: A Reset does not drive the MCLR pin low. Upon the release of a POR or BOR, the following must occur before the device will begin executing: 1. 2. 3. Power-up Timer runs to completion (if enabled). Oscillator start-up timer runs to completion (if required for oscillator source). MCLR must be released (if enabled). 6.3.2 MCLR DISABLED When MCLR is disabled, the pin functions as a general purpose input and the internal weak pull-up is under software control. See Section 12.6 "PORTE Registers" for more information. The total time-out will vary based on oscillator configuration and Power-up Timer configuration. See Section 5.0 "Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)" for more information. The Power-up Timer and oscillator start-up timer run independently of MCLR Reset. If MCLR is kept low long enough, the Power-up Timer and oscillator start-up timer will expire. Upon bringing MCLR high, the device will begin execution immediately (see Figure 6-4). This is useful for testing purposes or to synchronize more than one device operating in parallel. 6.4 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset The Watchdog Timer generates a Reset if the firmware does not issue a CLRWDT instruction within the time-out period. The TO and PD bits in the STATUS register are changed to indicate the WDT Reset. See Section 10.0 "Watchdog Timer" for more information. 6.5 RESET Instruction A RESET instruction will cause a device Reset. The RI bit in the PCON register will be set to `0'. See Table 6-4 for default conditions after a RESET instruction has occurred. 6.6 Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset The device can reset when the Stack Overflows or Underflows. The STKOVF or STKUNF bits of the PCON register indicate the Reset condition. These Resets are enabled by setting the STVREN bit in Configuration Word 2. See Section 3.4.2 "Overflow/Underflow Reset" for more information. DS41414A-page 78 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 6-4: RESET START-UP SEQUENCE VDD Internal POR TPWRT Power Up Timer MCLR TMCLR Internal RESET Oscillator Modes External Crystal Oscillator Start Up Timer Oscillator FOSC TOST Internal Oscillator Oscillator FOSC External Clock (EC) CLKIN FOSC 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 79 PIC16F/LF1946/47 6.10 Determining the Cause of a Reset Upon any Reset, multiple bits in the STATUS and PCON register are updated to indicate the cause of the Reset. Table 6-3 and Table 6-4 show the Reset conditions of these registers. TABLE 6-3: 0 0 0 0 u u u u u u 1 u 0 0 0 0 u u u u u u u 1 RESET STATUS BITS AND THEIR SIGNIFICANCE RMCLR 1 1 1 1 u u u 0 0 u u u RI 1 1 1 1 u u u u u 0 u u POR 0 0 0 u u u u u u u u u BOR x x x 0 u u u u u u u u TO 1 0 x 1 0 0 1 u 1 u u u PD 1 x 0 1 u 0 0 u 0 u u u Power-on Reset Illegal, TO is set on POR Illegal, PD is set on POR Brown-out Reset WDT Reset WDT Wake-up from Sleep Interrupt Wake-up from Sleep MCLR Reset during normal operation MCLR Reset during Sleep RESET Instruction Executed Stack Overflow Reset (STVREN = 1) Stack Underflow Reset (STVREN = 1) Condition STKOVF STKUNF TABLE 6-4: RESET CONDITION FOR SPECIAL REGISTERS(2) Condition Program Counter 0000h 0000h 0000h 0000h PC + 1 0000h PC + 1 (1) STATUS Register ---1 1000 ---u uuuu ---1 0uuu ---0 uuuu ---0 0uuu ---1 1uuu ---1 0uuu ---u uuuu ---u uuuu ---u uuuu PCON Register 00-- 110x uu-- 0uuu uu-- 0uuu uu-- uuuu uu-- uuuu 00-- 11u0 uu-- uuuu uu-- u0uu 1u-- uuuu u1-- uuuu Power-on Reset MCLR Reset during normal operation MCLR Reset during Sleep WDT Reset WDT Wake-up from Sleep Brown-out Reset Interrupt Wake-up from Sleep RESET Instruction Executed Stack Overflow Reset (STVREN = 1) Stack Underflow Reset (STVREN = 1) 0000h 0000h 0000h Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, reads as `0'. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and Global Enable bit (GIE) is set, the return address is pushed on the stack and PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0004h) after execution of PC + 1. 2: If a Status bit is not implemented, that bit will be read as `0'. DS41414A-page 80 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 6.11 Power Control (PCON) Register The Power Control (PCON) register contains flag bits to differentiate between a: * * * * * * Power-on Reset (POR) Brown-out Reset (BOR) Reset Instruction Reset (RI) Stack Overflow Reset (STKOVF) Stack Underflow Reset (STKUNF) MCLR Reset (RMCLR) The PCON register bits are shown in Register 6-2. REGISTER 6-2: R/W/HS-0/q STKOVF bit 7 Legend: PCON: POWER CONTROL REGISTER U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W/HC-1/q RMCLR R/W/HC-1/q RI R/W/HC-q/u POR R/W/HC-q/u BOR bit 0 STKUNF R/W/HS-0/q HC = Bit is cleared by hardware R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared HS = Bit is set by hardware U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -m/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets q = Value depends on condition STKOVF: Stack Overflow Flag bit 1 = A Stack Overflow occurred 0 = A Stack Overflow has not occurred or set to `0' by firmware STKUNF: Stack Underflow Flag bit 1 = A Stack Underflow occurred 0 = A Stack Underflow has not occurred or set to `0' by firmware Unimplemented: Read as `0' RMCLR: MCLR Reset Flag bit 1 = A MCLR Reset has not occurred or set to `1' by firmware 0 = A MCLR Reset has occurred (set to `0' in hardware when a MCLR Reset occurs) RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit 1 = A RESET instruction has not been executed or set to `1' by firmware 0 = A RESET instruction has been executed (set to `0' in hardware upon executing a RESET instruction) POR: Power-on Reset Status bit 1 = No Power-on Reset occurred 0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs) BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit 1 = No Brown-out Reset occurred 0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset or Brown-out Reset occurs) bit 6 bit 5-4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 81 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 6-5: Name BORCON PCON STATUS WDTCON SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH RESETS Bit 7 Bit 6 -- STKUNF -- -- Bit 5 -- -- -- Bit 4 -- -- TO Bit 3 -- RMCLR PD WDTPS<4:0> Bit 2 -- RI Z Bit 1 -- POR DC Bit 0 BORRDY BOR C SWDTEN Register on Page 77 81 23 105 SBOREN STKOVF -- -- Legend: -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by Resets. Note 1: Other (non Power-up) Resets include MCLR Reset and Watchdog Timer Reset during normal operation. DS41414A-page 82 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.0 INTERRUPTS The interrupt feature allows certain events to preempt normal program flow. Firmware is used to determine the source of the interrupt and act accordingly. Some interrupts can be configured to wake the MCU from Sleep mode. This chapter contains the following information for Interrupts: * * * * * Operation Interrupt Latency Interrupts During Sleep INT Pin Automatic Context Saving Many peripherals produce Interrupts. Refer to the corresponding chapters for details. A block diagram of the interrupt logic is shown in Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2. FIGURE 7-1: INTERRUPT LOGIC Wake-up (If in Sleep mode) TMR0IF TMR0IE INTF INTE IOCIF IOCIE From Peripheral Interrupt Logic (Figure 7-2) PEIE Interrupt to CPU GIE 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 83 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 7-2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT LOGIC TMR1GIF TMR1GIE ADIF ADIE RCIF RCIE TXIF TXIE SSPIF SSPIE CCP1IF CCP1IE CCP5IF CCP5IE OSFIF OSFIE TMR1IF TMR1IE To Interrupt Logic (Figure 7-1) TMR6IF TMR6IE C2IF C2IE C1IF C1IE EEIF EEIE BCLIF BCLIE LCDIF LCDIE DS41414A-page 84 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.1 Operation 7.2 Interrupt Latency Interrupts are disabled upon any device Reset. They are enabled by setting the following bits: * GIE bit of the INTCON register * Interrupt Enable bit(s) for the specific interrupt event(s) * PEIE bit of the INTCON register (if the Interrupt Enable bit of the interrupt event is contained in the PIE1, PIE2 and PIE3 registers) The INTCON, PIR1, PIR2 and PIR3 registers record individual interrupts via interrupt flag bits. Interrupt flag bits will be set, regardless of the status of the GIE, PEIE and individual interrupt enable bits. The following events happen when an interrupt event occurs while the GIE bit is set: * Current prefetched instruction is flushed * GIE bit is cleared * Current Program Counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack * Critical registers are automatically saved to the shadow registers (See Section 7.5 "Automatic Context Saving") * PC is loaded with the interrupt vector 0004h The firmware within the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) should determine the source of the interrupt by polling the interrupt flag bits. The interrupt flag bits must be cleared before exiting the ISR to avoid repeated interrupts. Because the GIE bit is cleared, any interrupt that occurs while executing the ISR will be recorded through its interrupt flag, but will not cause the processor to redirect to the interrupt vector. The RETFIE instruction exits the ISR by popping the previous address from the stack, restoring the saved context from the shadow registers and setting the GIE bit. For additional information on a specific interrupt's operation, refer to its peripheral chapter. Note 1: Individual interrupt flag bits are set, regardless of the state of any other enable bits. 2: All interrupts will be ignored while the GIE bit is cleared. Any interrupt occurring while the GIE bit is clear will be serviced when the GIE bit is set again. Interrupt latency is defined as the time from when the interrupt event occurs to the time code execution at the interrupt vector begins. The latency for synchronous interrupts is 3 or 4 instruction cycles. For asynchronous interrupts, the latency is 3 to 5 instruction cycles, depending on when the interrupt occurs. See Figure 7-3 and Figure 7-4 for more details. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 85 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 7-3: OSC1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 INTERRUPT LATENCY CLKOUT Interrupt Sampled during Q1 Interrupt GIE PC Execute PC-1 PC Inst(PC) PC+1 NOP 0004h NOP 0005h Inst(0004h) 1 Cycle Instruction at PC Interrupt GIE PC+1/FSR ADDR Inst(PC) New PC/ PC+1 NOP PC Execute PC-1 PC 0004h NOP 0005h Inst(0004h) 2 Cycle Instruction at PC Interrupt GIE PC Execute PC-1 PC FSR ADDR INST(PC) PC+1 NOP PC+2 NOP 0004h NOP 0005h Inst(0004h) Inst(0005h) 3 Cycle Instruction at PC Interrupt GIE PC Execute PC-1 PC FSR ADDR INST(PC) PC+1 NOP NOP PC+2 NOP 0004h NOP 0005h Inst(0004h) 3 Cycle Instruction at PC DS41414A-page 86 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 7-4: Q1 OSC1 CLKOUT (3) INT pin INTF GIE (1) (5) INT PIN INTERRUPT TIMING Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 (4) (1) Interrupt Latency (2) INSTRUCTION FLOW PC Instruction Fetched Instruction Executed Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: PC PC + 1 Inst (PC + 1) Inst (PC) PC + 1 -- Dummy Cycle 0004h Inst (0004h) Dummy Cycle 0005h Inst (0005h) Inst (0004h) Inst (PC) Inst (PC - 1) INTF flag is sampled here (every Q1). Asynchronous interrupt latency = 3-5 TCY. Synchronous latency = 3-4 TCY, where TCY = instruction cycle time. Latency is the same whether Inst (PC) is a single cycle or a 2-cycle instruction. CLKOUT not available in all Oscillator modes. For minimum width of INT pulse, refer to AC specifications in Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications". INTF is enabled to be set any time during the Q4-Q1 cycles. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 87 PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.3 Interrupts During Sleep Some interrupts can be used to wake from Sleep. To wake from Sleep, the peripheral must be able to operate without the system clock. The interrupt source must have the appropriate Interrupt Enable bit(s) set prior to entering Sleep. On waking from Sleep, if the GIE bit is also set, the processor will branch to the interrupt vector. Otherwise, the processor will continue executing instructions after the SLEEP instruction. The instruction directly after the SLEEP instruction will always be executed before branching to the ISR. Refer to the Section 9.0 "PowerDown Mode (Sleep)" for more details. 7.4 INT Pin The INT pin can be used to generate an asynchronous edge-triggered interrupt. This interrupt is enabled by setting the INTE bit of the INTCON register. The INTEDG bit of the OPTION register determines on which edge the interrupt will occur. When the INTEDG bit is set, the rising edge will cause the interrupt. When the INTEDG bit is clear, the falling edge will cause the interrupt. The INTF bit of the INTCON register will be set when a valid edge appears on the INT pin. If the GIE and INTE bits are also set, the processor will redirect program execution to the interrupt vector. 7.5 Automatic Context Saving Upon entering an interrupt, the return PC address is saved on the stack. Additionally, the following registers are automatically saved in the Shadow registers: * * * * * W register STATUS register (except for TO and PD) BSR register FSR registers PCLATH register Upon exiting the Interrupt Service Routine, these registers are automatically restored. Any modifications to these registers during the ISR will be lost. If modifications to any of these registers are desired, the corresponding Shadow register should be modified and the value will be restored when exiting the ISR. The Shadow registers are available in Bank 31 and are readable and writable. Depending on the user's application, other registers may also need to be saved. DS41414A-page 88 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.5.1 INTCON REGISTER Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the Global Enable bit, GIE, of the INTCON register. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. The INTCON register is a readable and writable register, which contains the various enable and flag bits for TMR0 register overflow, interrupt-on-change and external INT pin interrupts. REGISTER 7-1: R/W-0/0 GIE bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 INTCON: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0/0 PEIE R/W-0/0 TMR0IE R/W-0/0 INTE R/W-0/0 IOCIE R/W-0/0 TMR0IF R/W-0/0 INTF R-0/0 IOCIF bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets GIE: Global Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables all active interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts PEIE: Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables all active peripheral interrupts 0 = Disables all peripheral interrupts TMR0IE: Timer0 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Timer0 interrupt 0 = Disables the Timer0 interrupt INTE: INT External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT external interrupt IOCIE: Interrupt-on-Change Enable bit 1 = Enables the interrupt-on-change 0 = Disables the interrupt-on-change TMR0IF: Timer0 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR0 register has overflowed 0 = TMR0 register did not overflow INTF: INT External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT external interrupt occurred 0 = The INT external interrupt did not occur IOCIF: Interrupt-on-Change Interrupt Flag bit 1 = When at least one of the interrupt-on-change pins changed state 0 = None of the interrupt-on-change pins have changed state bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 89 PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.5.2 PIE1 REGISTER Note: Bit PEIE of the INTCON register must be set to enable any peripheral interrupt. The PIE1 register contains the interrupt enable bits, as shown in Register 7-2. REGISTER 7-2: R/W-0/0 TMR1GIE bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 PIE1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 1 R/W-0/0 ADIE R/W-0/0 RCIE R/W-0/0 TXIE R/W-0/0 SSPIE R/W-0/0 CCP1IE R/W-0/0 TMR2IE R/W-0/0 TMR1IE bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets TMR1GIE: Timer1 Gate Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Timer1 Gate Acquisition interrupt 0 = Disables the Timer1 Gate Acquisition interrupt ADIE: A/D Converter (ADC) Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the ADC interrupt 0 = Disables the ADC interrupt RCIE: USART1 Receive Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the USART1 receive interrupt 0 = Disables the USART1 receive interrupt TXIE: USART1 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the USART1 transmit interrupt 0 = Disables the USART1 transmit interrupt SSPIE: Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP1) Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the MSSP1 interrupt 0 = Disables the MSSP1 interrupt CCP1IE: CCP1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the CCP1 interrupt 0 = Disables the CCP1 interrupt TMR2IE: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Timer2 to PR2 match interrupt 0 = Disables the Timer2 to PR2 match interrupt TMR1IE: Timer1 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Timer1 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the Timer1 overflow interrupt bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS41414A-page 90 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.5.3 PIE2 REGISTER Note: Bit PEIE of the INTCON register must be set to enable any peripheral interrupt. The PIE2 register contains the interrupt enable bits, as shown in Register 7-3. REGISTER 7-3: R/W-0/0 OSFIE bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 PIE2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 2 R/W-0/0 C2IE R/W-0/0 C1IE R/W-0/0 EEIE R/W-0/0 BCLIE R/W-0/0 LCDIE U-0 -- R/W-0/0 CCP2IE bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets OSFIE: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Oscillator Fail interrupt 0 = Disables the Oscillator Fail interrupt C2IE: Comparator C2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Comparator C2 interrupt 0 = Disables the Comparator C2 interrupt C1IE: Comparator C1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Comparator C1 interrupt 0 = Disables the Comparator C1 interrupt EEIE: EEPROM Write Completion Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the EEPROM Write Completion interrupt 0 = Disables the EEPROM Write Completion interrupt BCLIE: MSSP1 Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the MSSP1 Bus Collision Interrupt 0 = Disables the MSSP1 Bus Collision Interrupt LCDIE: LCD Module Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the LCD module interrupt 0 = Disables the LCD module interrupt Unimplemented: Read as `0' CCP2IE: CCP2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the CCP2 interrupt 0 = Disables the CCP2 interrupt bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 91 PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.5.4 PIE3 REGISTER Note: Bit PEIE of the INTCON register must be set to enable any peripheral interrupt. The PIE3 register contains the interrupt enable bits, as shown in Register 7-4. REGISTER 7-4: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 bit 6 PIE3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 3 R/W-0/0 CCP5IE R/W-0/0 CCP4IE R/W-0/0 CCP3IE R/W-0/0 TMR6IE U-0 -- R/W-0/0 TMR4IE U-0 -- bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets Unimplemented: Read as `0' CCP5IE: CCP5 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the CCP5 interrupt 0 = Disables the CCP5 interrupt CCP4IE: CCP4 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the CCP4 interrupt 0 = Disables the CCP4 interrupt CCP3IE: CCP3 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the CCP3 interrupt 0 = Disables the CCP3 interrupt TMR6IE: TMR6 to PR6 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR6 to PR6 Match interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR6 to PR6 Match interrupt Unimplemented: Read as `0' TMR4IE: TMR4 to PR4 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR4 to PR4 Match interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR4 to PR4 Match interrupt Unimplemented: Read as `0' bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS41414A-page 92 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.5.5 PIE4 REGISTER Note: Bit PEIE of the INTCON register must be set to enable any peripheral interrupt. The PIE4 register contains the interrupt enable bits, as shown in Register 7-5. REGISTER 7-5: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5 PIE4: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 4 U-0 -- R/W-0/0 RC2IE R/W-0/0 TX2IE U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0/0 BCL2IE R/W-0/0 SSP2IE bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets Unimplemented: Read as `0' RC2IE: USART2 Receive Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the USART2 receive interrupt 0 = Disables the USART2 receive interrupt TX2IE: USART2 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the USART2 transmit interrupt 0 = Disables the USART2 transmit interrupt Unimplemented: Read as `0' BCL2IE: MSSP2 Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the MSSP2 Bus Collision Interrupt 0 = Disables the MSSP2 Bus Collision Interrupt SSP2IE: Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP2) Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the MSSP2 interrupt 0 = Disables the MSSP2 interrupt bit 4 bit 3-2 bit 1 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 93 PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.5.6 PIR1 REGISTER Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the Global Enable bit, GIE, of the INTCON register. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. The PIR1 register contains the interrupt flag bits, as shown in Register 7-6. REGISTER 7-6: R/W-0/0 TMR1GIF bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 PIR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER 1 R/W-0/0 ADIF R-0/0 RCIF R-0/0 TXIF R/W-0/0 SSPIF R/W-0/0 CCP1IF R/W-0/0 TMR2IF R/W-0/0 TMR1IF bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets TMR1GIF: Timer1 Gate Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending ADIF: A/D Converter Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending RCIF: USART1 Receive Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending TXIF: USART1 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending SSPIF: Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP1) Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending CCP1IF: CCP1 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending TMR2IF: Timer2 to PR2 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending TMR1IF: Timer1 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS41414A-page 94 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.5.7 PIR2 REGISTER Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the Global Enable bit, GIE, of the INTCON register. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. The PIR2 register contains the interrupt flag bits, as shown in Register 7-7. REGISTER 7-7: R/W-0/0 OSFIF bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 PIR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER 2 R/W-0/0 C2IF R/W-0/0 C1IF R/W-0/0 EEIF R/W-0/0 BCLIF R/W-0/0 LCDIF U-0 -- R/W-0/0 CCP2IF bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets OSFIF: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending C2IF: Comparator C2 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending C1IF: Comparator C1 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending EEIF: EEPROM Write Completion Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending BCLIF: MSSP1 Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending LCDIF: LCD Module Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending Unimplemented: Read as `0' CCP2IF: CCP2 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 95 PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.5.8 PIR3 REGISTER Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the Global Enable bit, GIE, of the INTCON register. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. The PIR3 register contains the interrupt flag bits, as shown in Register 7-8. REGISTER 7-8: R/W-0/0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 bit 6 PIR3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER 3 R/W-0/0 CCP5IF R/W-0/0 CCP4IF R/W-0/0 CCP3IF R/W-0/0 TMR6IF R/W-0/0 -- R/W-0/0 TMR4IF R/W-0/0 -- bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets Unimplemented: Read as `0' CCP5IF: CCP5 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending CCP4IF: CCP4 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending CCP3IF: CCP3 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending TMR6IF: TMR6 to PR6 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending Unimplemented: Read as `0' TMR4IF: TMR4 to PR4 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending Unimplemented: Read as `0' bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS41414A-page 96 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 7.5.9 PIR4 REGISTER Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the Global Enable bit, GIE, of the INTCON register. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. The PIR4 register contains the interrupt flag bits, as shown in Register 7-9. REGISTER 7-9: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5 PIR4: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER 4 U-0 -- R/W-0/0 RC2IF R/W-0/0 TX2IF U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0/0 BCL2IF R/W-0/0 SSP2IF bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets Unimplemented: Read as `0' RC2IF: USART2 Receive Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending TX2IF: USART2 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending Unimplemented: Read as `0' BCL2IF: MSSP2 Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending SSP2IF: Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP2) Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Interrupt is pending 0 = Interrupt is not pending bit 4 bit 3-2 bit 1 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 97 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 7-1: Name INTCON PIE1 PIE2 PIE3 PIE4 PIR1 PIR2 PIR3 PIR4 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH INTERRUPTS Bit 7 GIE TMR1GIE OSFIE -- -- TMR1GIF OSFIF -- -- Bit 6 PEIE INTEDG ADIE C2IE CCP5IE -- ADIF C2IF CCP5IF -- Bit 5 TMR0IE T0CS RCIE C1IE CCP4IE RC2IE RCIF C1IF CCP4IF RC2IF Bit 4 INTE T0SE TXIE EEIE CCP3IE TX2IE TXIF EEIF CCP3IF TX2IF Bit 3 IOCIE PSA SSPIE BCLIE TMR6IE -- SSPIF BCLIF TMR6IF -- CCP1IE LCDIE -- -- CCP1IF LCDIF -- -- Bit 2 TMR0IF Bit 1 INTF PS<2:0> TMR2IE -- TMR4IE BCL2IE TMR2IF -- TMR4IF BCL2IF TMR1IE CCP2IE -- SSP2IE TMR1IF CCP2IF -- SSP2IF Bit 0 IOCIF Register on Page 89 189 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 OPTION_REG WPUEN Legend: -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by Interrupts. DS41414A-page 98 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 8.0 LOW DROPOUT (LDO) VOLTAGE REGULATOR On power-up, the external capacitor will load the LDO voltage regulator. To prevent erroneous operation, the device is held in Reset while a constant current source charges the external capacitor. After the cap is fully charged, the device is released from Reset. For more information on recommended capacitor values and the constant current rate, refer to the LDO Regulator Characteristics Table in Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications". The PIC16F1946/47 has an internal Low Dropout Regulator (LDO) which provides operation above 3.6V. The LDO regulates a voltage for the internal device logic while permitting the VDD and I/O pins to operate at a higher voltage. There is no user enable/disable control available for the LDO, it is always active. The PIC16LF1946/47 operates at a maximum VDD of 3.6V and does not incorporate an LDO. A device I/O pin may be configured as the LDO voltage output, identified as the VCAP pin. Although not required, an external low-ESR capacitor may be connected to the VCAP pin for additional regulator stability. The VCAPEN bit of Configuration Word 2 determines which pin is assigned as the VCAP pin. Refer to Table 8-1. TABLE 8-1: 00 11 VCAPEN<1:0> SELECT BITS Pin RF0 No Vcap VCAPEN<1:0> TABLE 8-2: Name CONFIG2 Legend: Bits 13:8 7:0 SUMMARY OF CONFIGURATION WORD WITH LDO Bit -/7 -- -- Bit -/6 -- -- Bit 13/5 LVP VCAPEN1 Bit 12/4 DEBUG -- Bit 11/3 -- -- Bit 10/2 BORV -- Bit 9/1 STVREN WRT1 Bit 8/0 PLLEN WRT0 Register on Page 56 -- = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by LDO. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 99 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 100 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 9.0 POWER-DOWN MODE (SLEEP) 9.1 Wake-up from Sleep The Power-down mode is entered by executing a SLEEP instruction. Upon entering Sleep mode, the following conditions exist: WDT will be cleared but keeps running, if enabled for operation during Sleep. 2. PD bit of the STATUS register is cleared. 3. TO bit of the STATUS register is set. 4. CPU clock is disabled. 5. 31 kHz LFINTOSC is unaffected and peripherals that operate from it may continue operation in Sleep. 6. Timer1 oscillator is unaffected and peripherals that operate from it may continue operation in Sleep. 7. ADC is unaffected, if the dedicated FRC clock is selected. 8. Capacitive Sensing oscillator is unaffected. 9. I/O ports maintain the status they had before SLEEP was executed (driving high, low or highimpedance). 10. Resets other than WDT are not affected by Sleep mode. Refer to individual chapters for more details on peripheral operation during Sleep. To minimize current consumption, the following conditions should be considered: * * * * * * I/O pins should not be floating External circuitry sinking current from I/O pins Internal circuitry sourcing current from I/O pins Current draw from pins with internal weak pull-ups Modules using 31 kHz LFINTOSC Modules using Timer1 oscillator 1. The device can wake-up from Sleep through one of the following events: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. External Reset input on MCLR pin, if enabled BOR Reset, if enabled POR Reset Watchdog Timer, if enabled Any external interrupt Interrupts by peripherals capable of running during Sleep (see individual peripheral for more information) The first three events will cause a device Reset. The last three events are considered a continuation of program execution. To determine whether a device Reset or wake-up event occurred, refer to Section 6.10 "Determining the Cause of a Reset". When the SLEEP instruction is being executed, the next instruction (PC + 1) is prefetched. For the device to wake-up through an interrupt event, the corresponding interrupt enable bit must be enabled. Wake-up will occur regardless of the state of the GIE bit. If the GIE bit is disabled, the device continues execution at the instruction after the SLEEP instruction. If the GIE bit is enabled, the device executes the instruction after the SLEEP instruction, the device will call the Interrupt Service Routine. In cases where the execution of the instruction following SLEEP is not desirable, the user should have a NOP after the SLEEP instruction. The WDT is cleared when the device wakes up from Sleep, regardless of the source of wake-up. I/O pins that are high-impedance inputs should be pulled to VDD or VSS externally to avoid switching currents caused by floating inputs. Examples of internal circuitry that might be sourcing current include modules such as the DAC and FVR modules. See Section 16.0 "Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module" and Section 14.0 "Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)" for more information on these modules. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 101 PIC16F/LF1946/47 9.1.1 WAKE-UP USING INTERRUPTS When global interrupts are disabled (GIE cleared) and any interrupt source has both its interrupt enable bit and interrupt flag bit set, one of the following will occur: * If the interrupt occurs before the execution of a SLEEP instruction - SLEEP instruction will execute as a NOP. - WDT and WDT prescaler will not be cleared - TO bit of the STATUS register will not be set - PD bit of the STATUS register will not be cleared. * If the interrupt occurs during or after the execution of a SLEEP instruction - SLEEP instruction will be completely executed - Device will immediately wake-up from Sleep - WDT and WDT prescaler will be cleared - TO bit of the STATUS register will be set - PD bit of the STATUS register will be cleared. Even if the flag bits were checked before executing a SLEEP instruction, it may be possible for flag bits to become set before the SLEEP instruction completes. To determine whether a SLEEP instruction executed, test the PD bit. If the PD bit is set, the SLEEP instruction was executed as a NOP. FIGURE 9-1: OSC1(1) CLKOUT(2) Interrupt flag GIE bit (INTCON reg.) Instruction Flow PC Instruction Fetched Instruction Executed Note 1: 2: 3: 4: WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP THROUGH INTERRUPT Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 TOST(3) Interrupt Latency (4) Processor in Sleep Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 PC Inst(PC) = Sleep Inst(PC - 1) PC + 1 Inst(PC + 1) Sleep PC + 2 PC + 2 Inst(PC + 2) Inst(PC + 1) PC + 2 0004h Inst(0004h) 0005h Inst(0005h) Inst(0004h) Dummy Cycle Dummy Cycle XT, HS or LP Oscillator mode assumed. CLKOUT is not available in XT, HS or LP Oscillator modes, but shown here for timing reference. TOST = 1024 TOSC (drawing not to scale). This delay applies only to XT, HS or LP Oscillator modes. GIE = 1 assumed. In this case after wake-up, the processor calls the ISR at 0004h. If GIE = 0, execution will continue in-line. TABLE 9-1: Name INTCON IOCBF IOCBN IOCBP PIE1 PIE2 PIE3 PIE4 PIR1 PIR2 PIR3 PIR4 STATUS WDTCON Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH POWER-DOWN MODE Bit 7 GIE IOCBF7 IOCBN7 IOCBP7 Bit 6 PEIE IOCBF6 IOCBN6 IOCBP6 ADIE C2IE CCP5IE -- ADIF C2IF CCP5IF -- -- -- Bit 5 TMR0IE IOCBF5 IOCBN5 IOCBP5 RCIE C1IE CCP4IE RC2IE RCIF C1IF CCP4IF RC2IF -- Bit 4 INTE IOCBF4 IOCBN4 IOCBP4 TXIE EEIE CCP3IE TX2IE TXIF EEIF CCP3IF TX2IF TO Bit 3 IOCIE IOCBF3 IOCBN3 IOCBP3 SSPIE BCLIE TMR6IE -- SSPIF BCLIF TMR6IF -- PD WDTPS<4:0> Bit 2 TMR0IF IOCBF2 IOCBN2 IOCBP2 CCP1IE LCDIE -- -- CCP1IF LCDIF -- -- Z Bit 1 INTF IOCBF1 IOCBN1 IOCBP1 TMR2IE -- TMR4IE BCL2IE TMR2IF -- TMR4IF BCL2IF DC Bit 0 IOCIF IOCBF0 IOCBN0 IOCBP0 TMR1IE CCP2IE -- SSP2IE TMR1IF CCP2IF -- SSP2IF C SWDTEN Register on Page 89 148 148 148 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 23 105 TMR1GIE OSFIE -- -- TMR1GIF OSFIF -- -- -- -- -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used in Power-down mode. DS41414A-page 102 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 10.0 WATCHDOG TIMER The Watchdog Timer is a system timer that generates a Reset if the firmware does not issue a CLRWDT instruction within the time-out period. The Watchdog Timer is typically used to recover the system from unexpected events. The WDT has the following features: * Independent clock source * Multiple operating modes - WDT is always on - WDT is off when in Sleep - WDT is controlled by software - WDT is always off * Configurable time-out period is from 1 ms to 256 seconds (typical) * Multiple Reset conditions * Operation during Sleep FIGURE 10-1: WDTE<1:0> = 01 SWDTEN WDTE<1:0> = 11 WDTE<1:0> = 10 Sleep WATCHDOG TIMER BLOCK DIAGRAM LFINTOSC 23-bit Programmable Prescaler WDT WDT Time-out WDTPS<4:0> 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 103 PIC16F/LF1946/47 10.1 Independent Clock Source 10.3 Time-Out Period The WDT derives its time base from the 31 kHz LFINTOSC internal oscillator. The WDTPS bits of the WDTCON register set the time-out period from 1 ms to 256 seconds. After a Reset, the default time-out period is 2 seconds. 10.2 WDT Operating Modes The Watchdog Timer module has four operating modes controlled by the WDTE<1:0> bits in Configuration Word 1. See Table 10-1. 10.4 Clearing the WDT The WDT is cleared when any of the following conditions occur: * * * * * * * Any Reset CLRWDT instruction is executed Device enters Sleep Device wakes up from Sleep Oscillator fail event WDT is disabled Oscillator Start-up TImer (OST) is running 10.2.1 WDT IS ALWAYS ON When the WDTE bits of Configuration Word 1 are set to `11', the WDT is always on. WDT protection is active during Sleep. 10.2.2 WDT IS OFF IN SLEEP When the WDTE bits of Configuration Word 1 are set to `10', the WDT is on, except in Sleep. WDT protection is not active during Sleep. See Table 10-2 for more information. 10.5 Operation During Sleep 10.2.3 WDT CONTROLLED BY SOFTWARE When the WDTE bits of Configuration Word 1 are set to `01', the WDT is controlled by the SWDTEN bit of the WDTCON register. WDT protection is unchanged Table 10-1 for more details. by Sleep. See When the device enters Sleep, the WDT is cleared. If the WDT is enabled during Sleep, the WDT resumes counting. When the device exits Sleep, the WDT is cleared again. The WDT remains clear until the OST, if enabled, completes. See Section 5.0 "Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)" for more information on the OST. When a WDT time-out occurs while the device is in Sleep, no Reset is generated. Instead, the device wakes up and resumes operation. The TO and PD bits in the STATUS register are changed to indicate the event. See Section 3.0 "Memory Organization" and STATUS register (Register 3-1) for more information. TABLE 10-1: WDTE Config bits WDT_ON (11) WDT OPERATING MODES SWDTEN X X X 1 0 X Device Mode X Awake Sleep X X X WDT Mode Active Active Disabled Active Disabled Disabled WDT_NSLEEP (10) WDT_NSLEEP (10) WDT_SWDTEN (01) WDT_SWDTEN (01) WDT_OFF (00) TABLE 10-2: WDT CLEARING CONDITIONS Conditions WDT WDTE<1:0> = 00 WDTE<1:0> = 01 and SWDTEN = 0 WDTE<1:0> = 10 and enter Sleep CLRWDT Command Oscillator Fail Detected Exit Sleep + System Clock = T1OSC, EXTRC, INTOSC, EXTCLK Exit Sleep + System Clock = XT, HS, LP Change INTOSC divider (IRCF bits) Cleared until the end of OST Unaffected Cleared DS41414A-page 104 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 10-1: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5-1 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0' WDTPS<4:0>: Watchdog Timer Period Select bits Bit Value = Prescale Rate 00000 = 1:32 (Interval 1 ms typ) 00001 = 1:64 (Interval 2 ms typ) 00010 = 1:128 (Interval 4 ms typ) 00011 = 1:256 (Interval 8 ms typ) 00100 = 1:512 (Interval 16 ms typ) 00101 = 1:1024 (Interval 32 ms typ) 00110 = 1:2048 (Interval 64 ms typ) 00111 = 1:4096 (Interval 128 ms typ) 01000 = 1:8192 (Interval 256 ms typ) 01001 = 1:16384 (Interval 512 ms typ) 01010 = 1:32768 (Interval 1s typ) 01011 = 1:65536 (Interval 2s typ) (Reset value) 01100 = 1:131072 (217) (Interval 4s typ) 01101 = 1:262144 (218) (Interval 8s typ) 01110 = 1:524288 (219) (Interval 16s typ) 01111 = 1:1048576 (220) (Interval 32s typ) 10000 = 1:2097152 (221) (Interval 64s typ) 10001 = 1:4194304 (222) (Interval 128s typ) 10010 = 1:8388608 (223) (Interval 256s typ) 10011 = Reserved. Results in minimum interval (1:32) * * * 11111 = Reserved. Results in minimum interval (1:32) bit 0 SWDTEN: Software Enable/Disable for Watchdog Timer bit If WDTE<1:0> = 00: This bit is ignored. If WDTE<1:0> = 01: 1 = WDT is turned on 0 = WDT is turned off If WDTE<1:0> = 1x: This bit is ignored. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -m/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets WDTCON: WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-1/1 R/W-0/0 WDTPS<4:0> R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-0/0 SWDTEN bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 105 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 106 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 11.0 DATA EEPROM AND FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY CONTROL 11.1 EEADRL and EEADRH Registers The EEADRH:EEADRL register pair can address up to a maximum of 256 bytes of data EEPROM or up to a maximum of 32K words of program memory. When selecting a program address value, the MSB of the address is written to the EEADRH register and the LSB is written to the EEADRL register. When selecting a EEPROM address value, only the LSB of the address is written to the EEADRL register. The Data EEPROM and Flash program memory are readable and writable during normal operation (full VDD range). These memories are not directly mapped in the register file space. Instead, they are indirectly addressed through the Special Function Registers (SFRs). There are six SFRs used to access these memories: * * * * * * EECON1 EECON2 EEDATL EEDATH EEADRL EEADRH 11.1.1 EECON1 AND EECON2 REGISTERS EECON1 is the control register for EE memory accesses. Control bit EEPGD determines if the access will be a program or data memory access. When clear, any subsequent operations will operate on the EEPROM memory. When set, any subsequent operations will operate on the program memory. On Reset, EEPROM is selected by default. Control bits RD and WR initiate read and write, respectively. These bits cannot be cleared, only set, in software. They are cleared in hardware at completion of the read or write operation. The inability to clear the WR bit in software prevents the accidental, premature termination of a write operation. The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation to occur. On power-up, the WREN bit is clear. The WRERR bit is set when a write operation is interrupted by a Reset during normal operation. In these situations, following Reset, the user can check the WRERR bit and execute the appropriate error handling routine. Interrupt flag bit EEIF of the PIR2 register is set when write is complete. It must be cleared in the software. Reading EECON2 will read all `0's. The EECON2 register is used exclusively in the data EEPROM write sequence. To enable writes, a specific pattern must be written to EECON2. When interfacing the data memory block, EEDATL holds the 8-bit data for read/write, and EEADRL holds the address of the EEDATL location being accessed. These devices have 256 bytes of data EEPROM with an address range from 0h to 0FFh. When accessing the program memory block, the EEDATH:EEDATL register pair forms a 2-byte word that holds the 14-bit data for read/write, and the EEADRL and EEADRH registers form a 2-byte word that holds the 15-bit address of the program memory location being read. The EEPROM data memory allows byte read and write. An EEPROM byte write automatically erases the location and writes the new data (erase before write). The write time is controlled by an on-chip timer. The write/erase voltages are generated by an on-chip charge pump rated to operate over the voltage range of the device for byte or word operations. Depending on the setting of the Flash Program Memory Self Write Enable bits WRT<1:0> of the Configuration Word 2, the device may or may not be able to write certain blocks of the program memory. However, reads from the program memory are always allowed. When the device is code-protected, the device programmer can no longer access data or program memory. When code-protected, the CPU may continue to read and write the data EEPROM memory and Flash program memory. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 107 PIC16F/LF1946/47 11.2 Using the Data EEPROM 11.2.2 The data EEPROM is a high-endurance, byte addressable array that has been optimized for the storage of frequently changing information (e.g., program variables or other data that are updated often). When variables in one section change frequently, while variables in another section do not change, it is possible to exceed the total number of write cycles to the EEPROM without exceeding the total number of write cycles to a single byte. Refer to Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications". If this is the case, then a refresh of the array must be performed. For this reason, variables that change infrequently (such as constants, IDs, calibration, etc.) should be stored in Flash program memory. WRITING TO THE DATA EEPROM MEMORY To write an EEPROM data location, the user must first write the address to the EEADRL register and the data to the EEDATL register. Then the user must follow a specific sequence to initiate the write for each byte. The write will not initiate if the above sequence is not followed exactly (write 55h to EECON2, write AAh to EECON2, then set the WR bit) for each byte. Interrupts should be disabled during this code segment. Additionally, the WREN bit in EECON1 must be set to enable write. This mechanism prevents accidental writes to data EEPROM due to errant (unexpected) code execution (i.e., lost programs). The user should keep the WREN bit clear at all times, except when updating EEPROM. The WREN bit is not cleared by hardware. After a write sequence has been initiated, clearing the WREN bit will not affect this write cycle. The WR bit will be inhibited from being set unless the WREN bit is set. At the completion of the write cycle, the WR bit is cleared in hardware and the EE Write Complete Interrupt Flag bit (EEIF) is set. The user can either enable this interrupt or poll this bit. EEIF must be cleared by software. 11.2.1 READING THE DATA EEPROM MEMORY To read a data memory location, the user must write the address to the EEADRL register, clear the EEPGD and CFGS control bits of the EECON1 register, and then set control bit RD. The data is available at the very next cycle, in the EEDATL register; therefore, it can be read in the next instruction. EEDATL will hold this value until another read or until it is written to by the user (during a write operation). EXAMPLE 11-1: DATA EEPROM READ 11.2.3 BANKSEL EEADRL ; MOVLW DATA_EE_ADDR ; MOVWF EEADRL ;Data Memory ;Address to read BCF EECON1, CFGS ;Deselect Config space BCF EECON1, EEPGD;Point to DATA memory BSF EECON1, RD ;EE Read MOVF EEDATL, W ;W = EEDATL PROTECTION AGAINST SPURIOUS WRITE There are conditions when the user may not want to write to the data EEPROM memory. To protect against spurious EEPROM writes, various mechanisms have been built-in. On power-up, WREN is cleared. Also, the Power-up Timer (64 ms duration) prevents EEPROM write. The write initiate sequence and the WREN bit together help prevent an accidental write during: * Brown-out * Power Glitch * Software Malfunction Note: Data EEPROM can be read regardless of the setting of the CPD bit. 11.2.4 DATA EEPROM OPERATION DURING CODE-PROTECT Data memory can be code-protected by programming the CPD bit in the Configuration Word 1 (Register 4-1) to `0'. When the data memory is code-protected, only the CPU is able to read and write data to the data EEPROM. It is recommended to code-protect the program memory when code protecting data memory. This prevents anyone from replacing your program with a program that will access the contents of the data EEPROM. DS41414A-page 108 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 EXAMPLE 11-2: BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BCF BCF BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF BCF BTFSC GOTO DATA EEPROM WRITE EEADRL DATA_EE_ADDR EEADRL DATA_EE_DATA EEDATL EECON1, CFGS EECON1, EEPGD EECON1, WREN INTCON, 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1, INTCON, EECON1, EECON1, $-2 GIE ; ; ;Data Memory Address to write ; ;Data Memory Value to write ;Deselect Configuration space ;Point to DATA memory ;Enable writes ;Disable INTs. ; ;Write 55h ; ;Write AAh ;Set WR bit to begin write ;Enable Interrupts ;Disable writes ;Wait for write to complete ;Done Required Sequence WR GIE WREN WR FIGURE 11-1: FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY READ CYCLE EXECUTION Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Flash ADDR PC PC + 1 EEADRH,EEADRL PC + 3 PC+3 PC + 4 PC + 5 Flash Data INSTR (PC) INSTR (PC + 1) EEDATH,EEDATL INSTR (PC + 3) INSTR (PC + 4) INSTR(PC - 1) executed here BSF EECON1,RD executed here INSTR(PC + 1) executed here Forced NOP executed here INSTR(PC + 3) executed here INSTR(PC + 4) executed here RD bit EEDATH EEDATL Register EERHLT 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 109 PIC16F/LF1946/47 11.3 Flash Program Memory Overview 11.3.1 It is important to understand the Flash program memory structure for erase and programming operations. Flash Program memory is arranged in rows. A row consists of a fixed number of 14-bit program memory words. A row is the minimum block size that can be erased by user software. Flash program memory may only be written or erased if the destination address is in a segment of memory that is not write-protected, as defined in bits WRT<1:0> of Configuration Word 2. After a row has been erased, the user can reprogram all or a portion of this row. Data to be written into the program memory row is written to 14-bit wide data write latches. These write latches are not directly accessible to the user, but may be loaded via sequential writes to the EEDATH:EEDATL register pair. Note: If the user wants to modify only a portion of a previously programmed row, then the contents of the entire row must be read and saved in RAM prior to the erase. READING THE FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY To read a program memory location, the user must: 1. 2. 3. 4. Write the Least and Most Significant address bits to the EEADRH:EEADRL register pair. Clear the CFGS bit of the EECON1 register. Set the EEPGD control bit of the EECON1 register. Then, set control bit RD of the EECON1 register. Once the read control bit is set, the program memory Flash controller will use the second instruction cycle to read the data. This causes the second instruction immediately following the "BSF EECON1,RD" instruction to be ignored. The data is available in the very next cycle, in the EEDATH:EEDATL register pair; therefore, it can be read as two bytes in the following instructions. EEDATH:EEDATL register pair will hold this value until another read or until it is written to by the user. Note 1: The two instructions following a program memory read are required to be NOPs. This prevents the user from executing a two-cycle instruction on the next instruction after the RD bit is set. 2: Flash program memory can be read regardless of the setting of the CP bit. The number of data write latches is not equivalent to the number of row locations. During programming, user software will need to fill the set of write latches and initiate a programming operation multiple times in order to fully reprogram an erased row. For example, a device with a row size of 32 words and eight write latches will need to load the write latches with data and initiate a programming operation four times. The size of a program memory row and the number of program memory write latches may vary by device. See Table 11-1 for details. TABLE 11-1: Device FLASH MEMORY ORGANIZATION BY DEVICE Erase Block (Row) Size/Boundary 32 words, EEADRL<4:0> = 00000 Number of Write Latches/Boundary 8 words, EEADRL<2:0> = 000 PIC16F/LF1946/47 DS41414A-page 110 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 EXAMPLE 11-3: FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY READ * This code block will read 1 word of program * memory at the memory address: PROG_ADDR_HI: PROG_ADDR_LO * data will be returned in the variables; * PROG_DATA_HI, PROG_DATA_LO BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWL BCF BSF BCF BSF NOP NOP BSF MOVF MOVWF MOVF MOVWF EEADRL PROG_ADDR_LO EEADRL PROG_ADDR_HI EEADRH EECON1,CFGS EECON1,EEPGD INTCON,GIE EECON1,RD ; Select Bank for EEPROM registers ; ; Store LSB of address ; ; Store MSB of address ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Do not select Configuration Space Select Program Memory Disable interrupts Initiate read Executed (Figure 11-1) Ignored (Figure 11-1) Restore interrupts Get LSB of word Store in user location Get MSB of word Store in user location INTCON,GIE EEDATL,W PROG_DATA_LO EEDATH,W PROG_DATA_HI 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 111 PIC16F/LF1946/47 11.3.2 ERASING FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY While executing code, program memory can only be erased by rows. To erase a row: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Load the EEADRH:EEADRL register pair with the address of new row to be erased. Clear the CFGS bit of the EECON1 register. Set the EEPGD, FREE, and WREN bits of the EECON1 register. Write 55h, then AAh, to EECON2 (Flash programming unlock sequence). Set control bit WR of the EECON1 register to begin the erase operation. Poll the FREE bit in the EECON1 register to determine when the row erase has completed. The following steps should be completed to load the write latches and program a block of program memory. These steps are divided into two parts. First, all write latches are loaded with data except for the last program memory location. Then, the last write latch is loaded and the programming sequence is initiated. A special unlock sequence is required to load a write latch with data or initiate a Flash programming operation. This unlock sequence should not be interrupted. Set the EEPGD and WREN bits of the EECON1 register. 2. Clear the CFGS bit of the EECON1 register. 3. Set the LWLO bit of the EECON1 register. When the LWLO bit of the EECON1 register is `1', the write sequence will only load the write latches and will not initiate the write to Flash program memory. 4. Load the EEADRH:EEADRL register pair with the address of the location to be written. 5. Load the EEDATH:EEDATL register pair with the program memory data to be written. 6. Write 55h, then AAh, to EECON2, then set the WR bit of the EECON1 register (Flash programming unlock sequence). The write latch is now loaded. 7. Increment the EEADRH:EEADRL register pair to point to the next location. 8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 until all but the last write latch has been loaded. 9. Clear the LWLO bit of the EECON1 register. When the LWLO bit of the EECON1 register is `0', the write sequence will initiate the write to Flash program memory. 10. Load the EEDATH:EEDATL register pair with the program memory data to be written. 11. Write 55h, then AAh, to EECON2, then set the WR bit of the EECON1 register (Flash programming unlock sequence). The entire latch block is now written to Flash program memory. It is not necessary to load the entire write latch block with user program data. However, the entire write latch block will be written to program memory. An example of the complete write sequence for eight words is shown in Example 11-5. The initial address is loaded into the EEADRH:EEADRL register pair; the eight words of data are loaded using indirect addressing. Note: The code sequence provided in Example 11-5 must be repeated multiple times to fully program an erased program memory row. 1. See Example 11-4. After the "BSF EECON1,WR" instruction, the processor requires two cycles to set up the erase operation. The user must place two NOP instructions after the WR bit is set. The processor will halt internal operations for the typical 2 ms erase time. This is not Sleep mode as the clocks and peripherals will continue to run. After the erase cycle, the processor will resume operation with the third instruction after the EECON1 write instruction. 11.3.3 WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY Program memory is programmed using the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Load the starting address of the word(s) to be programmed. Load the write latches with data. Initiate a programming operation. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all data is written. Before writing to program memory, the word(s) to be written must be erased or previously unwritten. Program memory can only be erased one row at a time. No automatic erase occurs upon the initiation of the write. Program memory can be written one or more words at a time. The maximum number of words written at one time is equal to the number of write latches. See Figure 11-2 (block writes to program memory with 16 write latches) for more details. The write latches are aligned to the address boundary defined by EEADRL as shown in Table 11-1. Write operations do not cross these boundaries. At the completion of a program memory write operation, the write latches are reset to contain 0x3FFF. DS41414A-page 112 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 After the "BSF EECON1,WR" instruction, the processor requires two cycles to set up the write operation. The user must place two NOP instructions after the WR bit is set. The processor will halt internal operations for the typical 2 ms, only during the cycle in which the write takes place (i.e., the last word of the block write). This is not Sleep mode as the clocks and peripherals will continue to run. The processor does not stall when LWLO = 1, loading the write latches. After the write cycle, the processor will resume operation with the third instruction after the EECON1 write instruction. FIGURE 11-2: BLOCK WRITES TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WITH 16 WRITE LATCHES 7 5 EEDATH 07 EEDATA 0 6 First word of block to be written 8 Last word of block to be written 14 EEADRL<3:0> = 0000 EEADRL<3:0> = 0001 14 EEADRL<3:0> = 0010 14 EEADRL<3:0> = 1111 14 Buffer Register Buffer Register Buffer Register Buffer Register Program Memory 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 113 PIC16F/LF1946/47 EXAMPLE 11-4: ERASING ONE ROW OF PROGRAM MEMORY ; This row erase routine assumes the following: ; 1. A valid address within the erase block is loaded in ADDRH:ADDRL ; 2. ADDRH and ADDRL are located in shared data memory 0x70 - 0x7F BCF BANKSEL MOVF MOVWF MOVF MOVWF BSF BCF BSF BSF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF NOP NOP INTCON,GIE EEADRL ADDRL,W EEADRL ADDRH,W EEADRH EECON1,EEPGD EECON1,CFGS EECON1,FREE EECON1,WREN 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1,WR ; Disable ints so required sequences will execute properly ; Load lower 8 bits of erase address boundary ; Load upper 6 bits of erase address boundary ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Point to program memory Not configuration space Specify an erase operation Enable writes Start of required sequence to initiate erase Write 55h Write AAh Set WR bit to begin erase Any instructions here are ignored as processor halts to begin erase sequence Processor will stop here and wait for erase complete. Required Sequence ; after erase processor continues with 3rd instruction BCF BSF EECON1,WREN INTCON,GIE ; Disable writes ; Enable interrupts DS41414A-page 114 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 EXAMPLE 11-5: ; ; ; ; ; ; ; WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY This write routine assumes the following: 1. The 16 bytes of data are loaded, starting at the address in DATA_ADDR 2. Each word of data to be written is made up of two adjacent bytes in DATA_ADDR, stored in little endian format 3. A valid starting address (the least significant bits = 000) is loaded in ADDRH:ADDRL 4. ADDRH and ADDRL are located in shared data memory 0x70 - 0x7F BCF BANKSEL MOVF MOVWF MOVF MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BCF BSF BSF INTCON,GIE EEADRH ADDRH,W EEADRH ADDRL,W EEADRL LOW DATA_ADDR FSR0L HIGH DATA_ADDR FSR0H EECON1,EEPGD EECON1,CFGS EECON1,WREN EECON1,LWLO FSR0++ EEDATL FSR0++ EEDATH EEADRL,W 0x07 0x07 STATUS,Z START_WRITE 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1,WR ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Disable ints so required sequences will execute properly Bank 3 Load initial address Load initial data address Load initial data address Point to program memory Not configuration space Enable writes Only Load Write Latches LOOP MOVIW MOVWF MOVIW MOVWF MOVF XORLW ANDLW BTFSC GOTO MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF NOP NOP ; Load first data byte into lower ; ; Load second data byte into upper ; ; Check if lower bits of address are '000' ; Check if we're on the last of 8 addresses ; ; Exit if last of eight words, ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Start of required write sequence: Write 55h Write AAh Set WR bit to begin write Any instructions here are ignored as processor halts to begin write sequence Processor will stop here and wait for write to complete. Required Sequence ; After write processor continues with 3rd instruction. INCF GOTO START_WRITE BCF EEADRL,F LOOP ; Still loading latches Increment address ; Write next latches EECON1,LWLO ; No more loading latches - Actually start Flash program ; memory write ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Start of required write sequence: Write 55h Write AAh Set WR bit to begin write Any instructions here are ignored as processor halts to begin write sequence Processor will stop here and wait for write complete. MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF NOP NOP Required Sequence 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1,WR BCF BSF EECON1,WREN INTCON,GIE ; after write processor continues with 3rd instruction ; Disable writes ; Enable interrupts 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 115 PIC16F/LF1946/47 11.4 Modifying Flash Program Memory 11.5 When modifying existing data in a program memory row, and data within that row must be preserved, it must first be read and saved in a RAM image. Program memory is modified using the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Load the starting address of the row to be modified. Read the existing data from the row into a RAM image. Modify the RAM image to contain the new data to be written into program memory. Load the starting address of the row to be rewritten. Erase the program memory row. Load the write latches with data from the RAM image. Initiate a programming operation. Repeat steps 6 and 7 as many times as required to reprogram the erased row. User ID, Device ID and Configuration Word Access Instead of accessing program memory or EEPROM data memory, the User ID's, Device ID/Revision ID and Configuration Words can be accessed when CFGS = 1 in the EECON1 register. This is the region that would be pointed to by PC<15> = 1, but not all addresses are accessible. Different access may exist for reads and writes. Refer to Table 11-2. When read access is initiated on an address outside the parameters listed in Table 11-2, the EEDATH:EEDATL register pair is cleared. TABLE 11-2: USER ID, DEVICE ID AND CONFIGURATION WORD ACCESS (CFGS = 1) Function User IDs Device ID/Revision ID Configuration Words 1 and 2 Read Access Yes Yes Yes Write Access Yes No No Address 8000h-8003h 8006h 8007h-8008h EXAMPLE 11-3: CONFIGURATION WORD AND DEVICE ID ACCESS * This code block will read 1 word of program memory at the memory address: * PROG_ADDR_LO (must be 00h-08h) data will be returned in the variables; * PROG_DATA_HI, PROG_DATA_LO BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF CLRF BSF BCF BSF NOP NOP BSF MOVF MOVWF MOVF MOVWF EEADRL PROG_ADDR_LO EEADRL EEADRH EECON1,CFGS INTCON,GIE EECON1,RD ; Select correct Bank ; ; Store LSB of address ; Clear MSB of address ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Select Configuration Space Disable interrupts Initiate read Executed (See Figure 11-1) Ignored (See Figure 11-1) Restore interrupts Get LSB of word Store in user location Get MSB of word Store in user location INTCON,GIE EEDATL,W PROG_DATA_LO EEDATH,W PROG_DATA_HI DS41414A-page 116 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 11.6 Write Verify Depending on the application, good programming practice may dictate that the value written to the data EEPROM or program memory should be verified (see Example 11-6) to the desired value to be written. Example 11-6 shows how to verify a write to EEPROM. EXAMPLE 11-6: BANKSEL EEDATL MOVF EEDATL, W BSF XORWF BTFSS GOTO : EEPROM WRITE VERIFY ; ;EEDATL not changed ;from previous write EECON1, RD ;YES, Read the ;value written EEDATL, W ; STATUS, Z ;Is data the same WRITE_ERR ;No, handle error ;Yes, continue 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 117 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 11-1: R/W-x/u bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared EEDAT<7:0>: Read/write value for EEPROM data byte or Least Significant bits of program memory U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets EEDATL: EEPROM DATA REGISTER R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u bit 0 EEDAT<7:0> REGISTER 11-2: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5-0 EEDATH: EEPROM DATA HIGH BYTE REGISTER U-0 -- R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u bit 0 EEDAT<13:8> W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0' U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets EEDAT<13:8>: Read/write value for Most Significant bits of program memory REGISTER 11-3: R/W-0/0 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 EEADRL: EEPROM ADDRESS REGISTER R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 EEADR<7:0> W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets EEADR<7:0>: Specifies the Least Significant bits for program memory address or EEPROM address REGISTER 11-4: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 bit 6-0 EEADRH: EEPROM ADDRESS HIGH BYTE REGISTER R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 EEADR<14:8> bit 0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0' U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets EEADR<14:8>: Specifies the Most Significant bits for program memory address or EEPROM address DS41414A-page 118 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 11-5: R/W-0/0 EEPGD bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit S = Bit can only be set `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets HC = Bit is cleared by hardware EECON1: EEPROM CONTROL 1 REGISTER R/W-0/0 LWLO R/W/HC-0/0 FREE R/W-x/q WRERR R/W-0/0 WREN R/S/HC-0/0 WR R/S/HC-0/0 RD bit 0 CFGS R/W-0/0 EEPGD: Flash Program/Data EEPROM Memory Select bit 1 = Accesses program space Flash memory 0 = Accesses data EEPROM memory CFGS: Flash Program/Data EEPROM or Configuration Select bit 1 = Accesses Configuration, User ID and Device ID Registers 0 = Accesses Flash Program or data EEPROM Memory LWLO: Load Write Latches Only bit If CFGS = 1 (Configuration space) OR CFGS = 0 and EEPGD = 1 (program Flash): 1 = The next WR command does not initiate a write; only the program memory latches are updated. 0 = The next WR command writes a value from EEDATH:EEDATL into program memory latches and initiates a write of all the data stored in the program memory latches. If CFGS = 0 and EEPGD = 0: (Accessing data EEPROM) LWLO is ignored. The next WR command initiates a write to the data EEPROM. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 FREE: Program Flash Erase Enable bit If CFGS = 1 (Configuration space) OR CFGS = 0 and EEPGD = 1 (program Flash): 1 = Performs an erase operation on the next WR command (cleared by hardware after completion of erase). 0 = Performs a write operation on the next WR command. If EEPGD = 0 and CFGS = 0: (Accessing data EEPROM) FREE is ignored. The next WR command will initiate both a erase cycle and a write cycle. bit 3 WRERR: EEPROM Error Flag bit 1 = Condition indicates an improper program or erase sequence attempt or termination (bit is set automatically on any set attempt (write `1') of the WR bit). 0 = The program or erase operation completed normally. WREN: Program/Erase Enable bit 1 = Allows program/erase cycles 0 = Inhibits programming/erasing of program Flash and data EEPROM WR: Write Control bit 1 = Initiates a program Flash or data EEPROM program/erase operation. The operation is self-timed and the bit is cleared by hardware once operation is complete. The WR bit can only be set (not cleared) in software. 0 = Program/erase operation to the Flash or data EEPROM is complete and inactive. RD: Read Control bit 1 = Initiates an program Flash or data EEPROM read. Read takes one cycle. RD is cleared in hardware. The RD bit can only be set (not cleared) in software. 0 = Does not initiate a program Flash or data EEPROM data read. bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 119 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 11-6: W-0/0 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit S = Bit can only be set `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Data EEPROM Unlock Pattern bits To unlock writes, a 55h must be written first, followed by an AAh, before setting the WR bit of the EECON1 register. The value written to this register is used to unlock the writes. There are specific timing requirements on these writes. Refer to Section 11.2.2 "Writing to the Data EEPROM Memory" for more information. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets EECON2: EEPROM CONTROL 2 REGISTER W-0/0 W-0/0 W-0/0 W-0/0 W-0/0 W-0/0 W-0/0 bit 0 EEPROM Control Register 2 TABLE 11-3: Name EECON1 EECON2 EEADRL EEADRH EEDATL EEDATH INTCON PIE2 PIR2 Legend: * -- -- SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH DATA EEPROM Bit 7 Bit 6 CFGS Bit 5 LWLO Bit 4 FREE Bit 3 WRERR Bit 2 WREN Bit 1 WR Bit 0 RD Register on Page 119 107* 118 118 118 118 INTF C3IE C3IF IOCIF CCP2IE CCP2IF 89 91 95 TMR0IF LCDIE LCDIF EEPGD EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) EEADRL<7:0> EEADRH<6:0 EEDATL<7:0> -- PEIE C2IE C2IF TMR0IE C1IE C1IF INTE EEIE EEIF EEDATH<5:0> IOCIE BCLIE BCLIF GIE OSFIE OSFIF -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by Data EEPROM module. Page provides register information. DS41414A-page 120 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 12.0 I/O PORTS 12.1 Alternate Pin Function Depending on the device selected and peripherals enabled, there are up to five ports available. In general, when a peripheral is enabled, that pin may not be used as a general purpose I/O pin. Each port has three registers for its operation. These registers are: * TRISx registers (data direction register) * PORTx registers (reads the levels on the pins of the device) * LATx registers (output latch) The Data Latch (LATx registers) is useful for read-modify-write operations on the value that the I/O pins are driving. A write operation to the LATx register has the same affect as a write to the corresponding PORTx register. A read of the LATx register reads of the values held in the I/O PORT latches, while a read of the PORTx register reads the actual I/O pin value. Ports with analog functions also have an ANSELx register which can disable the digital input and save power. A simplified model of a generic I/O port, without the interfaces to other peripherals, is shown in Figure 12-1. The Alternate Pin Function Control (APFCON) register is used to steer specific peripheral input and output functions between different pins. The APFCON register is shown in Register 12-1. For this device family, the following functions can be moved between different pins. * * * * * * * * CCP3/P3C output CCP3/P3B output CCP2/P2D output CCP2/P2C output CCP2/P2B output CCP2/P2A output CCP1/P1C output CCP1/P1B output These bits have no effect on the values of any TRIS register. PORT and TRIS overrides will be routed to the correct pin. The unselected pin will be unaffected. FIGURE 12-1: GENERIC I/O PORT OPERATION Read LATx D Write LATx Write PORTx Q TRISx CK Data Register VDD Data Bus I/O pin Read PORTx To peripherals ANSELx VSS 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 121 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-1: R/W-0/0 P3CSEL bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared P3CSEL: CCP3 PWM C Output Pin Selection bit 0 = P3C function is on RE3/P3C/COM0 1 = P3C function is on RD3/P3C/SEG3 P3BSEL: CCP3 PWM B Output Pin Selection bit 0 = P3B function is on RE4/P3B/COM1 1 = P3B function is on RD4/P3B/SEG4 P2DSEL: CCP2 PWM D Output Pin Selection bit 0 = P2D function is on RE0/P2D/VLCD1 1 = P2D function is on RD0/P2D/SEG0 P2CSEL: CCP2 PWM C Output Pin Selection bit 0 = P2C function is on RE1/P2C/VLCD2 1 = P2C function is on RD1/P2C/SEG1 P2BSEL: CCP2 PWM B Output Pin Selection bit 0 = P2B function is on RE2/P2B/VLCD3 1 = P2B function is on RD2/P2B/SEG2 CCP2SEL: CCP2 Input/Output Pin Selection bit 0 = CCP2/P2A function is on RC1/CCP2/P2A/T1OSI/SEG32 1 = CCP2/P2A function is on RE7/CCP2/P2A/SEG31 P1CSEL: CCP1 PWM C Output Pin Selection bit 0 = P1C function is on RE5/P1C/COM2 1 = P1C function is on RD5/P1C/SEG5 P1BSEL: CCP1 PWM B Output Pin Selection bit 0 = P1B function is on RE6/P1B/COM3 1 = P1B function is on RD6/P1B/SEG6 U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets APFCON: ALTERNATE PIN FUNCTION CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0/0 P2DSEL R/W-0/0 P2CSEL R/W-0/0 P2BSEL R/W-0/0 CCP2SEL R/W-0/0 P1CSEL R/W-0/0 P1BSEL bit 0 R/W-0/0 P3BSEL bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS41414A-page 122 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 12.2 PORTA Registers 12.2.2 PORTA is a 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISA (Register 12-3). Setting a TRISA bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTA pin an input (i.e., disable the output driver). Clearing a TRISA bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTA pin an output (i.e., enables output driver and puts the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). Example 12-1 shows how to initialize PORTA. Reading the PORTA register (Register 12-2) reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it will write to the PORT latch. All write operations are read-modify-write operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the port pins are read, this value is modified and then written to the PORT data latch (LATA). The TRISA register (Register 12-3) controls the PORTA pin output drivers, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user should ensure the bits in the TRISA register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. I/O pins configured as analog input always read `0'. PORTA FUNCTIONS AND OUTPUT PRIORITIES Each PORTA pin is multiplexed with other functions. The pins, their combined functions and their output priorities are briefly described here. For additional information, refer to the appropriate section in this data sheet. When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin control goes to the peripheral with the lowest number in the following lists. Analog input functions, such as ADC, comparator and CapSense inputs, are not shown in the priority lists. These inputs are active when the I/O pin is set for Analog mode using the ANSELx registers. Digital output functions may control the pin when it is in Analog mode with the priority shown below. RA0 1. AN0 (ADC) 2. SEG33 (LCD) 3. CPS0 (CSM) RA1 1. SEG18 2. CPS1 (CSM) RA2 1. SEG34 (LCD) 2. VREF- (DAC) 3. AN2 (ADC) 4. CPS2 (CSM) RA3 1. VREF+ (DAC) 2. SEG35 (LCD) 3. AN3 (ADC) 4. CPS3 (CSM) RA4 1. SEG14 (LCD) 2. T0CKI (TMR0) RA5 1. AN4 (ADC) 2. SEG15 (LCD) 3. CPS4 (CSM) RA6 1. OSC2 (enabled by Configuration Word) 2. CLKOUT (enabled by Configuration Word) 3. SEG36 (LCD) RA7 1. OSC1/CLKIN (enabled by Configuration Word) 2. SEG37 (LCD) 12.2.1 ANSELA REGISTER The ANSELA register (Register 12-5) is used to configure the Input mode of an I/O pin to analog. Setting the appropriate ANSELA bit high will cause all digital reads on the pin to be read as `0' and allow analog functions on the pin to operate correctly. The state of the ANSELA bits has no affect on digital output functions. A pin with TRIS clear and ANSEL set will still operate as a digital output, but the Input mode will be analog. This can cause unexpected behavior when executing read-modify-write instructions on the affected port. Note: The ANSELA register must be initialized to configure an analog channel as a digital input. Pins configured as analog inputs will read `0'. EXAMPLE 12-1: BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF INITIALIZING PORTA ; ;Init PORTA ;Data Latch ; ; ;digital I/O ; ;Set RA<7:4> as inputs ;and set RA<3:0> as ;outputs PORTA PORTA LATA LATA ANSELA ANSELA TRISA B'11110000' TRISA 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 123 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-2: R/W-x/u RA7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared RA<7:0>: PORTA I/O Value bits(1) 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL Writes to PORTA are actually written to corresponding LATA register. Reads from PORTA register is return of actual I/O pin values. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets PORTA: PORTA REGISTER R/W-x/u RA5 R/W-x/u RA4 R/W-x/u RA3 R/W-x/u RA2 R/W-x/u RA1 R/W-x/u RA0 bit 0 RA6 R/W-x/u Note 1: REGISTER 12-3: R/W-1/1 TRISA7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 TRISA: PORTA TRI-STATE REGISTER R/W-1/1 TRISA5 R/W-1/1 TRISA4 R/W-1/1 TRISA3 R/W-1/1 TRISA2 R/W-1/1 TRISA1 R/W-1/1 TRISA0 bit 0 R/W-1/1 TRISA6 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets TRISA<7:0>: PORTA Tri-State Control bit 1 = PORTA pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = PORTA pin configured as an output REGISTER 12-4: R/W-x/u LATA7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 Note 1: LATA: PORTA DATA LATCH REGISTER R/W-x/u LATA5 R/W-x/u LATA4 R/W-x/u LATA3 R/W-x/u LATA2 R/W-x/u LATA1 R/W-x/u LATA0 bit 0 LATA6 R/W-x/u W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets LATA<7:0>: PORTA Output Latch Value bits(1) Writes to PORTA are actually written to corresponding LATA register. Reads from PORTA register is return of actual I/O pin values. DS41414A-page 124 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-5: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0' ANSA5: Analog Select between Analog or Digital Function on pins RA<5>, respectively 0 = Digital I/O. Pin is assigned to port or digital special function. 1 = Analog input. Pin is assigned as analog input(1). Digital input buffer disabled. Unimplemented: Read as `0' ANSA<3:0>: Analog Select between Analog or Digital Function on pins RA<3:0>, respectively 0 = Digital I/O. Pin is assigned to port or digital special function. 1 = Analog input. Pin is assigned as analog input(1). Digital input buffer disabled. When setting a pin to an analog input, the corresponding TRIS bit must be set to Input mode in order to allow external control of the voltage on the pin. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets ANSELA: PORTA ANALOG SELECT REGISTER U-0 -- R/W-1/1 ANSA5 U-0 -- R/W-1/1 ANSA3 R/W-1/1 ANSA2 R/W-1/1 ANSA1 R/W-1/1 ANSA0 bit 0 bit 4 bit 3-0 Note 1: TABLE 12-1: Name ADCON0 ADCON1 ANSELA CPSCON0 CPSCON1 DACCON0 LATA LCDSE1 LCDSE2 LCDSE4 OPTION_REG PORTA TRISA Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTA Bit 7 -- ADFM -- CPSON -- DACEN LATA7 SE15 SE23 SE39 WPUEN RA7 TRISA7 -- CPSRM -- DACLPS LATA6 SE14 SE22 SE38 INTEDG RA6 TRISA6 ADCS<2:0> ANSA5 -- -- DACOE LATA5 SE13 SE21 SE37 TMR0CS RA5 TRISA5 --LATA4 SE12 SE20 SE36 TMR0SE RA4 TRISA4 LATA3 SE11 SE19 SE35 PSA RA3 TRISA3 RA2 TRISA2 -- -- Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 CHS<4:0> -- ANSA3 -- ANSA2 CPSCH<4:0> DACPSS<1:0> LATA2 SE10 SE18 SE34 --LATA1 SE9 SE17 SE33 PS<2:0> RA1 TRISA1 RA0 TRISA0 DACNSS LATA0 SE8 SE16 SE32 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 GO/DONE ANSA1 CPSOUT Bit 0 ADON ANSA0 T0XCS Register on Page 159 160 125 323 324 171 124 333 333 333 189 124 124 ADPREF<1:0> CPSRNG1 CPSRNG0 x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTA. TABLE 12-2: Name Bits 13:8 7:0 SUMMARY OF CONFIGURATION WORD WITH PORTA Bit -/7 -- CP Bit -/6 -- MCLRE Bit 13/5 FCMEN PWRTE Bit 12/4 IESO Bit 11/3 CLKOUTEN Bit 10/2 Bit 9/1 Bit 8/0 CPD Register on Page 54 CONFIG1 Legend: BOREN<1:0> FOSC<2:0> WDTE<1:0> -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTA. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 125 PIC16F/LF1946/47 12.3 PORTB Registers 12.3.3 PORTB is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISB (Register 12-7). Setting a TRISB bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTB pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISB bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTB pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). Example 12-2 shows how to initialize PORTB. Reading the PORTB register (Register 12-6) reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it will write to the PORT latch. All write operations are read-modify-write operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the port pins are read, this value is modified and then written to the PORT data latch (LATB). The TRISB register (Register 12-7) controls the PORTB pin output drivers, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user should ensure the bits in the TRISB register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. I/O pins configured as analog input always read `0'. PORTB FUNCTIONS AND OUTPUT PRIORITIES Each PORTB pin is multiplexed with other functions. The pins, their combined functions and their output priorities are briefly described here. For additional information, refer to the appropriate section in this data sheet. When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin control goes to the peripheral with the lowest number in the following lists. Analog input and some digital input functions are not included in the list below. These input functions can remain active when the pin is configured as an output. Certain digital input functions, such as the EUSART RX signal, override other port functions and are included in the priority list. RB0 1. 2. 3. 4. RB1 1. RB2 1. RB3 1. RB4 1. RB5 1. 2. RB6 1. 2. 3. RB7 1. 2. 3. ICSPDAT (Programming) ICDDAT (enabled by Configuration Word) SEG39 (LCD) ICSPCLK (Programming) ICDCLK (enabled by Configuration Word) SEG38 (LCD) SEG29 (LCD) T1G (TMR1) SEG11 (LCD) SEG10 (LCD) SEG9 (LCD) SEG8 (LCD) SEG30 (LCD) FLT0 (CCP) SRI (SR Latch) INT 12.3.1 WEAK PULL-UPS Each of the PORTB pins has an individually configurable internal weak pull-up. Control bits WPUB<7:0> enable or disable each pull-up (see Register 12-9). Each weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. All pull-ups are disabled on a Power-on Reset by the WPUEN bit of the OPTION register. 12.3.2 INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE All of the PORTB pins are individually configurable as an interrupt-on-change pin. Control bits IOCB<7:0> enable or disable the interrupt function for each pin. The interrupt-on-change feature is disabled on a Power-on Reset. Reference Section 13.0 "Interrupt-On-Change" for more information. EXAMPLE 12-2: BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF INITIALIZING PORTB ;Init PORTD ;Data Latch ; ; ;Set RD<7:4> as inputs ;and set RD<3:0> as ;outputs PORTDB; PORTB LATDB LATB TRISD B'11110000' TRISD DS41414A-page 126 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-6: R/W-x/u RB7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared RB<7:0>: PORTB I/O Pin bit 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets PORTB: PORTB REGISTER R/W-x/u RB5 R/W-x/u RB4 R/W-x/u RB3 R/W-x/u RB2 R/W-x/u RB1 R/W-x/u RB0 bit 0 RB6 R/W-x/u REGISTER 12-7: R/W-1/1 TRISB7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 TRISB: PORTB TRI-STATE REGISTER R/W-1/1 TRISB5 R/W-1/1 TRISB4 R/W-1/1 TRISB3 R/W-1/1 TRISB2 R/W-1/1 TRISB1 R/W-1/1 TRISB0 bit 0 R/W-1/1 TRISB6 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets TRISB<7:0>: PORTB Tri-State Control bit 1 = PORTB pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = PORTB pin configured as an output REGISTER 12-8: R/W-x/u LATB7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 Note 1: LATB: PORTB DATA LATCH REGISTER R/W-x/u LATB5 R/W-x/u LATB4 R/W-x/u LATB3 R/W-x/u LATB2 R/W-x/u LATB1 R/W-x/u LATB0 bit 0 LATB6 R/W-x/u W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets LATB<7:0>: PORTB Output Latch Value bits(1) Writes to PORTB are actually written to corresponding LATB register. Reads from PORTB register is return of actual I/O pin values. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 127 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-9: R/W-1/1 WPUB7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared WPUB<7:0>: Weak Pull-up Register bits 1 = Pull-up enabled 0 = Pull-up disabled Global WPUEN bit of the OPTION register must be cleared for individual pull-ups to be enabled. The weak pull-up device is automatically disabled if the pin is in configured as an output. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets WPUB: WEAK PULL-UP PORTB REGISTER R/W-1/1 WPUB5 R/W-1/1 WPUB4 R/W-1/1 WPUB3 R/W-1/1 WPUB2 R/W-1/1 WPUB1 R/W-1/1 WPUB0 bit 0 R/W-1/1 WPUB6 Note 1: 2: TABLE 12-3: Name INTCON IOCBP IOCBN IOCBF LATB LCDSE1 LCDSE3 LCDSE4 OPTION_REG PORTB T1GCON TRISB WPUB Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTB Bit 7 GIE IOCBP7 IOCBN7 IOCBF7 LATB7 SE15 SE31 SE39 WPUEN RB7 TMR1GE TRISB7 WPUB7 Bit 6 PEIE IOCBP6 IOCBN6 IOCBF6 LATB6 SE14 SE30 SE38 INTEDG RB6 T1GPOL TRISB6 WPUB6 Bit 5 TMR0IE IOCBP5 IOCBN5 IOCBF5 LATB5 SE13 SE29 SE37 TMR0CS RB5 T1GTM TRISB5 WPUB5 Bit 4 INTE IOCBP4 IOCBN4 IOCBF4 LATB4 SE12 SE28 SE36 TMR0SE RB4 T1GSPM TRISB4 WPUB4 Bit 3 IOCIE IOCBP3 IOCBN3 IOCBF3 LATB3 SE11 SE27 SE35 PSA RB3 T1GGO/DONE TRISB3 WPUB3 RB2 T1GVAL TRISB2 WPUB2 Bit 2 TMR0IF IOCBP2 IOCBN2 IOCBF2 LATB2 SE10 SE26 SE34 Bit 1 INTF IOCBP1 IOCBN1 IOCBF1 LATB1 SE9 SE25 SE33 PS<2:0> RB1 TRISB1 WPUB1 RB0 TRISB0 WPUB0 T1GSS<1:0> Bit 0 IOCIF IOCBP0 IOCBN0 IOCBF0 LATB0 SE8 SE24 SE32 Register on Page 89 148 148 148 127 333 333 333 189 127 200 127 128 x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTB. DS41414A-page 128 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 12.4 PORTC Registers 12.4.1 PORTC is a 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISC (Register 12-11). Setting a TRISC bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTC pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISC bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTC pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). Example 12-3 shows how to initialize PORTC. Reading the PORTC register (Register 12-10) reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it will write to the PORT latch. All write operations are read-modify-write operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the port pins are read, this value is modified and then written to the PORT data latch (LATC). The TRISC register (Register 12-11) controls the PORTC pin output drivers, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user should ensure the bits in the TRISC register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. I/O pins configured as analog input always read `0'. PORTC FUNCTIONS AND OUTPUT PRIORITIES Each PORTC pin is multiplexed with other functions. The pins, their combined functions and their output priorities are briefly described here. For additional information, refer to the appropriate section in this data sheet. When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin control goes to the peripheral with the lowest number in the following lists. Analog input and some digital input functions are not included in the list below. These input functions can remain active when the pin is configured as an output. Certain digital input functions override other port functions and are included in the priority list. RC0 1. 2. 3. RC1 1. 2. 3. RC2 1. 2. RC3 1. 2. 3. RC4 1. 2. 3. RC5 1. 2. RC6 1. 2. 3. RC7 1. 2. 3. SEG28 (LCD) DT1 (EUSART1) RX1 (EUSART1) SEG27 (LCD) TX1 (EUSART1) CK2 (EUSART1) SEG12 (LCD) SDO1 (MSSP1) SEG16 (LCD) SDA1 (MSSP1) SDI1 (MSSP1) SEG17 (LCD) SCL1 (MSSP1) SCK1 (MSSP1) SEG13 (LCD) CCP1/P1A T1OSI (Timer1 Oscillator) CCP2/P2A SEG32 (ICD) T1OSO (Timer1 Oscillator) T1CKI (TMR1) SEG40 (ICD) EXAMPLE 12-3: BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF INITIALIZING PORTC ; ;Init PORTC ;Data Latch ; ; ;Set RC<7:4> as inputs ;and set RC<3:0> as ;outputs PORTC PORTC LATC LATC TRISC B'11110000' TRISC 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 129 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-10: PORTC: PORTC REGISTER R/W-x/u RC7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared RC<7:0>: PORTC General Purpose I/O Pin bits 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-x/u RC6 R/W-x/u RC5 R/W-x/u RC4 R/W-x/u RC3 R/W-x/u RC2 R/W-x/u RC1 R/W-x/u RC0 bit 0 REGISTER 12-11: TRISC: PORTC TRI-STATE REGISTER R/W-1/1 TRISC7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared TRISC<7:0>: PORTC Tri-State Control bits 1 = PORTC pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = PORTC pin configured as an output U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-1/1 TRISC6 R/W-1/1 TRISC5 R/W-1/1 TRISC4 R/W-1/1 TRISC3 R/W-1/1 TRISC2 R/W-1/1 TRISC1 R/W-1/1 TRISC0 bit 0 REGISTER 12-12: LATC: PORTC DATA LATCH REGISTER R/W-x/u LATC7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 Note 1: W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared LATC<7:0>: PORTC Output Latch Value bits(1) Writes to PORTC are actually written to corresponding LATC register. Reads from PORTC register is return of actual I/O pin values. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-x/u LATC6 R/W-x/u LATC5 R/W-x/u LATC4 R/W-x/u LATC3 R/W-x/u LATC2 R/W-x/u LATC1 R/W-x/u LATC0 bit 0 DS41414A-page 130 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 12-4: Name APFCON LATC LCDSE1 LCDSE2 LCDSE3 LCDSE4 LCDSE5 PORTC RC1STA RC2STA SSP1CON1 SSP2STAT T1CON TX1STA TX2STA TRISC Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTC Bit 7 P3CSEL LATC7 SE15 SE23 SE31 SE39 -- RC7 SPEN SPEN WCOL SMP CSRC CSRC TRISC7 Bit 6 P3BSEL LATC6 SE14 SE22 SE30 SE38 -- RC6 RX9 RX9 SSPOV CKE TX9 TX9 TRISC6 Bit 5 P2DSEL LATC5 SE13 SE21 SE29 SE37 SE45 RC5 SREN SREN SSPEN D/A TXEN TXEN TRISC5 Bit 4 P2CSEL LATC4 SE12 SE20 SE28 SE36 SE44 RC4 CREN CREN CKP P SYNC SYNC TRISC4 S T1OSCEN -- -- TRISC3 Bit 3 P2BSEL LATC3 SE11 SE19 SE27 SE35 SE43 RC3 ADDEN ADDEN Bit 2 CCP2SEL LATC2 SE10 SE18 SE26 SE34 SE42 RC2 FERR FERR R/W T1SYNC BRGH BRGH TRISC2 Bit 1 P1CSEL LATC1 SE9 SE17 SE25 SE33 SE41 RC1 OERR OERR UA -- TRMT TRMT TRISC1 Bit 0 P1BSEL LATC0 SE8 SE16 SE24 SE32 SE40 RC0 RX9D RX9D BF TMR1ON TX9D TX9D TRISC0 Register on Page 122 130 333 333 333 333 333 130 299 299 284 283 199 298 298 130 SSPM<3:0> TMR1CS<1:0> T1CKPS<1:0> x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTC. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 131 PIC16F/LF1946/47 12.5 PORTD Registers 12.5.1 PORTD is a 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISD (Register 12-13). Setting a TRISD bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTD pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISD bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTD pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). Example 12-4 shows how to initialize PORTD. Reading the PORTD register (Register 12-13) reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it will write to the PORT latch. All write operations are read-modify-write operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the port pins are read, this value is modified and then written to the PORT data latch (LATD). The TRISD register (Register 12-14) controls the PORTD pin output drivers, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user should ensure the bits in the TRISD register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. I/O pins configured as analog input always read `0'. PORTD FUNCTIONS AND OUTPUT PRIORITIES Each PORTD pin is multiplexed with other functions. The pins, their combined functions and their output priorities are briefly described here. For additional information, refer to the appropriate section in this data sheet. When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin control goes to the peripheral with the lowest number in the following lists. Analog input and some digital input functions are not included in the list below. These input functions can remain active when the pin is configured as an output. Certain digital input functions override other port functions and are included in the priority list. RD0 1. 2. RD1 1. 2. RD2 1. 2. RD3 1. 2. RD4 1. 2. 3. RD5 1. 2. 3. RD6 1. 2. 3. RD7 1. 2. SEG7 (LCD) SS2 (SSP2) SEG5 (LCD) P1B (CCP) SCK2/SCL2 (SSP2) SEG5 (LCD) P1C (CCP) SDI2/SDA2 (SSP2) SEG4 (LCD) P3D (CCP) SDO2 (SSP2) SEG3 (LCD) P3C (CCP) P2B (CCP) SEG2 (LCD) SEG1 (LCD) P2C (CCP) SEG0 (LCD) P2D (CCP) EXAMPLE 12-4: BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF INITIALIZING PORTD ; ;Init PORTD ;Data Latch ; ; ;Set RD<7:4> as inputs ;and set RD<3:0> as ;outputs PORTD PORTD LATD LATD TRISD B'11110000' TRISD DS41414A-page 132 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-13: PORTD: PORTD REGISTER R/W-x/u RD7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared RD<7:0>: PORTD General Purpose I/O Pin bits 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-x/u RD6 R/W-x/u RD5 R/W-x/u RD4 R/W-x/u RD3 R/W-x/u RD2 R/W-x/u RD1 R/W-x/u RD0 bit 0 REGISTER 12-14: TRISD: PORTD TRI-STATE REGISTER R/W-1/1 TRISD7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared TRISD<7:0>: PORTD Tri-State Control bits 1 = PORTD pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = PORTD pin configured as an output U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-1/1 TRISD6 R/W-1/1 TRISD5 R/W-1/1 TRISD4 R/W-1/1 TRISD3 R/W-1/1 TRISD2 R/W-1/1 TRISD1 R/W-1/1 TRISD0 bit 0 REGISTER 12-15: LATD: PORTD DATA LATCH REGISTER R/W-x/u LATD7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 Note 1: W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared LATD<7:0>: PORTD Output Latch Value bits(1) Writes to PORTD are actually written to corresponding LATD register. Reads from PORTD register is return of actual I/O pin values. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-x/u LATD6 R/W-x/u LATD5 R/W-x/u LATD4 R/W-x/u LATD3 R/W-x/u LATD2 R/W-x/u LATD1 R/W-x/u LATD0 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 133 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 12-5: Name APFCON CCPxCON LATD LCDCON LCDSE0 PORTD TRISD Legend: Note 1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTD Bit 7 P3CSEL Bit 6 P3BSEL Bit 5 P2DSEL Bit 4 P2CSEL Bit 3 P2BSEL Bit 2 CCP2SEL Bit 1 P1CSEL Bit 0 P1BSEL Register on Page 122 229 LATD0 SE0 RD0 TRISD0 133 329 333 133 133 PxM<1:0>(1) LATD7 LCDEN SE7 RD7 TRISD7 LATD6 SLPEN SE6 RD6 TRISD6 DCxB<1:0> LATD5 WERR SE5 RD5 TRISD5 LATD4 -- SE4 RD4 TRISD4 LATD3 SE3 RD3 TRISD3 CS<1:0> CCPxM<3:0> LATD2 SE2 RD2 TRISD2 LATD1 SE1 RD1 TRISD1 LMUX<1:0> x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTD. Applies to ECCP modules only. DS41414A-page 134 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 12.6 PORTE Registers 12.6.2 PORTE is a 4-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISE. Setting a TRISE bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTE pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISE bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTE pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). The exception is RE3, which is input only and its TRIS bit will always read as `1'. Example 12-5 shows how to initialize PORTE. Reading the PORTE register (Register 12-16) reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it will write to the PORT latch. All write operations are read-modify-write operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the port pins are read, this value is modified and then written to the PORT data latch (LATE). RE3 reads `0' when MCLRE = 1. PORTE FUNCTIONS AND OUTPUT PRIORITIES Each PORTE pin is multiplexed with other functions. The pins, their combined functions and their output priorities are briefly described here. For additional information, refer to the appropriate section in this data sheet. When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin control goes to the peripheral with the lowest number in the following lists. Analog input and some digital input functions are not included in the list below. These input functions can remain active when the pin is configured as an output. Certain digital input functions, such as the EUSART RX signal, override other port functions and are included in the priority list. RE0 1. 2. RE1 1. 2. RE2 1. 2. RE3 1. 2. RE4 1. 2. RE5 1. 2. RE6 1. 2. RE7 1. 2. CCP2/P2A (CCP) SEG31 (LCD) P1B (CCP) COM3 (LCD) P1C (CCP) COM32(LCD) P3B (CCP) COM1 (LCD) P3C (CCP) COM0 (LCD) P2B (CCP) VLCD3 (LCD) P2C (CCP) VLCD2 (LCD) P2D (CCP) VLCD1 (LCD) 12.6.1 ANSELE REGISTER The ANSELE register (Register 12-19) is used to configure the Input mode of an I/O pin to analog. Setting the appropriate ANSELE bit high will cause all digital reads on the pin to be read as `0' and allow analog functions on the pin to operate correctly. The state of the ANSELE bits has no affect on digital output functions. A pin with TRIS clear and ANSEL set will still operate as a digital output, but the Input mode will be analog. This can cause unexpected behavior when executing read-modify-write instructions on the affected port. The TRISE register (Register 12-17) controls the PORTE pin output drivers, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user should ensure the bits in the TRISE register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. I/O pins configured as analog input always read `0'. Note: The ANSELE register must be initialized to configure an analog channel as a digital input. Pins configured as analog inputs will read `0'. EXAMPLE 12-5: BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF INITIALIZING PORTE ; ;Init PORTE ;Data Latch ; ; ;digital I/O ; ;Set RE<3:2> as inputs ;and set RE<1:0> ;as outputs PORTE PORTE LATE LATE ANSELE ANSELE TRISE B`00001100' TRISE 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 135 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-16: PORTE: PORTE REGISTER R/W-x/u RE7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared RE<7:0>: PORTE I/O Pin bits 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-x/u RE6 R/W-x/u RE5 R/W-x/u RE4 R/W-x/u RE3 R/W-x/u RE2 R/W-x/u RE1 R/W-x/u RE0 bit 0 REGISTER 12-17: TRISE: PORTE TRI-STATE REGISTER R/W-1 TRISE7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared TRISE<7:0>: RE<7:0> Tri-State Control bits 1 = PORTE pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = PORTE pin configured as an output U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-1 TRISE6 R/W-1 TRISE5 R/W-1 TRISE4 R/W-1 TRISE3 R/W-1 TRISE2 R/W-1 TRISE1 R/W-1 TRISE0 bit 0 DS41414A-page 136 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-18: LATE: PORTE DATA LATCH REGISTER R/W-x/u LATE7 bit 7 Legend: R/W-x/u LATE6 R/W-x/u LATE5 R/W-x/u LATE4 R/W-x/u LATE3 R/W-x/u LATE2 R/W-x/u LATE1 R/W-x/u LATE0 bit 0 R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 Note 1: W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets LATE<7:0>: PORTE Output Latch Value bits(1) Writes to PORTE are actually written to corresponding LATE register. Reads from PORTE register is return of actual I/O pin values. REGISTER 12-19: ANSELE: PORTE ANALOG SELECT REGISTER R/W-1 ANSE7 bit 7 Legend: R/W-1 ANSE6 R/W-1 ANSE5 R/W-1 ANSE4 R/W-1 ANSE3 R/W-1 ANSE2 R/W-1 ANSE1 R/W-1 ANSE0 bit 0 R = Readable bit u = bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets ANSE<7:0>: Analog Select between Analog or Digital Function on Pins RE<7:0>, respectively 0 = Digital I/O. Pin is assigned to port or digital special function. 1 = Analog input. Pin is assigned as analog input(1). Digital input buffer disabled. Note 1: When setting a pin to an analog input, the corresponding TRIS bit must be set to Input mode in order to allow external control of the voltage on the pin. TABLE 12-6: Name APFCON ANSELE CCPxCON LATE LCDCON LCDREF LCDSE2 PORTE TRISE Legend: Note 1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTE Bit 7 P3CSEL ANSE7 LATE7 LCDEN LCDIRE SE31 RE7 TRISE7 Bit 6 P3BSEL ANSE6 LATE6 SLPEN LCDIRS SE30 RE6 TRISE6 Bit 5 P2DSEL ANSE5 LATE5 WERR LCDIRI SE29 RE5 TRISE5 Bit 4 P2CSEL ANSE4 LATE4 -- -- SE28 RE4 TRISE4 Bit 3 P2BSEL ANSE3 LATE3 VLCD3PE SE27 RE3 TRISE3 Bit 2 CCP2SEL ANSE2 LATE2 VLCD2PE SE26 RE2 TRISE2 Bit 1 P1CSEL ANSE1 LATE1 VLCD1PE SE25 RE1 TRISE1 Bit 0 P1BSEL ANSE0 LATE0 -- SE24 RE0 TRISE0 Register on Page 122 137 229 137 329 331 333 136 136 PxM<1:0>(1) DCxB<1:0> CS<1:0> CCPxM<3:0> LMUX<1:0> x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTE. Applies to ECCP modules only. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 137 PIC16F/LF1946/47 12.7 PORTF Registers PORTF is a 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISF (Register 12-21). Setting a TRISF bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTF pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISF bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTF pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). Example 12-4 shows how to initialize PORTF. Reading the PORTF register (Register 12-13) reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it will write to the PORT latch. All write operations are read-modify-write operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the port pins are read, this value is modified and then written to the PORT data latch (LATF). The TRISF register (Register 12-14) controls the PORTF pin output drivers, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user should ensure the bits in the TRISF register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. I/O pins configured as analog input always read `0'. 12.7.1 ANSELF REGISTER The ANSELF register (Register 12-23) is used to configure the Input mode of an I/O pin to analog. Setting the appropriate ANSELF bit high will cause all digital reads on the pin to be read as `0' and allow analog functions on the pin to operate correctly. The state of the ANSELF bits has no affect on digital output functions. A pin with TRIS clear and ANSEL set will still operate as a digital output, but the Input mode will be analog. This can cause unexpected behavior when executing read-modify-write instructions on the affected port. Note: The ANSELF register must be initialized to configure an analog channel as a digital input. Pins configured as analog inputs will read `0'. EXAMPLE 12-6: BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF INITIALIZING PORTF ; ;Init PORTF ;Data Latch ; ; ;digital I/O ; ;Set RF<7:4> as inputs ;and set RF<3:0> as ;outputs PORTF PORTF LATF LATF ANSELF ANSELF TRISF B'11110000' TRISF DS41414A-page 138 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 12.7.2 PORTF FUNCTIONS AND OUTPUT PRIORITIES RF5 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. RF6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. RF7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. AN5 (ADC) CPS5 (CSM) C123IN3- (Comparator) SS1 (MSSP1) SEG25 (LCD) AN11 (ADC) CPS11 (CSM) C1IN+ (Comparator) DACOUT (DAC) SEG24 (LCD) AN10 (ADC) CPS10 (CSM) C12IN1- (Comparator) DACOUT (DAC) SEG23 (LCD) Each PORTF pin is multiplexed with other functions. The pins, their combined functions and their output priorities are briefly described here. For additional information, refer to the appropriate section in this data sheet. When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin control goes to the peripheral with the lowest number in the following lists. Analog input and some digital input functions are not included in the list below. These input functions can remain active when the pin is configured as an output. Certain digital input functions override other port functions and are included in the priority list. RF0 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. RF1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. RF2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. RF3 1. 2. 3. 4. RF4 1. 2. 3. 4. AN9 (ADC) CPS9 (CSM) C2IN+ (Comparator) SEG22 (LCD) AN8 (ADC) CPS8 (CSM) C123IN2- (Comparator) SEG21 (LCD) AN7 (ADC) CPS7 (CSM) C1OUT (Comparator) SEG20 (LCD) SRQ (SR Latch) AN6 (ADC) CPS6 (CSM) C2OUT (Comparator) SRNQ (SR Latch) SEG19 (LCD) AN16 (ADC) CPS16 (CSM) C12IN0- (Comparator) SEG41 (LCD) VCAP (LDO) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 139 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-20: PORTF: PORTF REGISTER R/W-x/u RF7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared RF<7:0>: PORTF General Purpose I/O Pin bits 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-x/u RF6 R/W-x/u RF5 R/W-x/u RF4 R/W-x/u RF3 R/W-x/u RF2 R/W-x/u RF1 R/W-x/u RF0 bit 0 REGISTER 12-21: TRISF: PORTF TRI-STATE REGISTER R/W-1/1 TRISF7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared TRISF<7:0>: PORTF Tri-State Control bits 1 = PORTF pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = PORTF pin configured as an output U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-1/1 TRISF6 R/W-1/1 TRISF5 R/W-1/1 TRISF4 R/W-1/1 TRISF3 R/W-1/1 TRISF2 R/W-1/1 TRISF1 R/W-1/1 TRISF0 bit 0 REGISTER 12-22: LATF: PORTF DATA LATCH REGISTER R/W-x/u LATF7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 Note 1: W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared LATF<7:0>: PORTF Output Latch Value bits(1) Writes to PORTF are actually written to corresponding LATF register. Reads from PORTF register is return of actual I/O pin values. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-x/u LATF6 R/W-x/u LATF5 R/W-x/u LATF4 R/W-x/u LATF3 R/W-x/u LATF2 R/W-x/u LATF1 R/W-x/u LATF0 bit 0 DS41414A-page 140 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-23: ANSELF: PORTF ANALOG SELECT REGISTER R/W-1/1 ANSF7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared ANSF<7:0>: Analog Select between Analog or Digital Function on Pins RF<7:0>, respectively 0 = Digital I/O. Pin is assigned to port or digital special function. 1 = Analog input. Pin is assigned as analog input(1). Digital input buffer disabled. When setting a pin to an analog input, the corresponding TRIS bit must be set to Input mode in order to allow external control of the voltage on the pin. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets R/W-1/1 ANSF6 R/W-1/1 ANSF5 R/W-1/1 ANSDF4 R/W-1/1 ANSF3 R/W-1/1 ANSF2 R/W-1/1 ANSDF1 R/W-1/1 ANSF0 bit 0 Note 1: TABLE 12-7: Name ADCON0 ANSELF CCPxCON CMOUT CM1CON1 CM2CON1 CPSCON0 CPSCON1 DACCON0 LATD LCDCON LCDSE2 LCDSE3 LCDSE5 PORTF SRCON0 TRISF Legend: Note 1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTF Bit 7 -- ANSF7 -- C1INTP C2INTP CPSON -- DACEN LATF7 LCDEN SE23 SE31 -- RF7 SRLEN TRISF7 ANSF6 -- C1INTN C2INTN CPSRM -- DACLPS LATF6 SLPEN SE22 SE30 -- RF6 SRCLK2 TRISF6 ANSF5 -- C1PCH1 C2PCH1 -- -- DACOE LATF5 WERR SE21 SE29 SE45 RF5 SRCLK1 TRISF5 PxM<1:0>(1) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 CHS<4:0> ANSF4 -- C1PCH0 C2PCH0 -- -- -- LATF4 -- SE20 SE28 SE44 RF4 SRCLK0 TRISF4 LATF3 SE19 SE27 SE43 RF3 SRQEN TRISF3 ANSF3 -- -- -- ANSF2 MC3OUT -- -- DCxB<1:0> Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 GO/DONE ANSF1 MC2OUT CCPxM<3:0> MC1OUT C1NCH<1:0> C2NCH<1:0> CPSOUT -- LATF1 SE17 SE25 SE41 RF1 SRPS TRISF1 T0XCS DACNSS LATF0 SE16 SE24 SE40 RF0 SRPR TRISF0 Bit 0 ADON ANSF0 Register on Page 159 141 229 179 179 179 323 324 171 133 329 333 333 333 140 183 140 CPSRNG<1:0> DACPSS<1:0> LATF2 SE18 SE26 SE42 RF2 SRNQEN TRISF2 CS<1:0> CPSCH<3:0> LMUX<1:0> x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTF. Applies to ECCP modules only. TABLE 12-8: Name Bits 13:8 7:0 SUMMARY OF CONFIGURATION WORD WITH CLOCK SOURCES Bit -/7 -- -- Bit -/6 -- -- Bit 13/5 LVP VCAPEN Bit 12/4 DEBUG -- Bit 11/3 -- -- Bit 10/2 BORV -- Bit 9/1 STVREN Bit 8/0 PLLEN Register on Page 56 CONFIG2 Legend: WRT<1:0> -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by clock sources. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 141 PIC16F/LF1946/47 12.8 PORTG Registers 12.8.2 PORTG is a 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISG (Register 12-25). Setting a TRISG bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTG pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISG bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTG pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). Example 12-4 shows how to initialize PORTG. Reading the PORTG register (Register 12-24) reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it will write to the PORT latch. All write operations are read-modify-write operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the port pins are read, this value is modified and then written to the PORT data latch (LATG). The TRISG register (Register 12-25) controls the PORTG pin output drivers, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user should ensure the bits in the TRISG register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. I/O pins configured as analog input always read `0'. PORTG FUNCTIONS AND OUTPUT PRIORITIES Each PORTG pin is multiplexed with other functions. The pins, their combined functions and their output priorities are briefly described here. For additional information, refer to the appropriate section in this data sheet. When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin control goes to the peripheral with the lowest number in the following lists. Analog input and some digital input functions are not included in the list below. These input functions can remain active when the pin is configured as an output. Certain digital input functions override other port functions and are included in the priority list. RG0 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. CCP3 (CCP) P3A (CCP) SEG42 (LCD) AN15 (ADC) CPS15 (CSM) TX2 (EUSART) CK2 (EUSART) C3OUT (Comparator) SEG43 (LCD) AN14 (ADC) CPS14 (CSM) DT2/RX2 (EUSART) C3IN+ (Comparator) SEG44 (LCD) AN13 (ADC) CPS13 (CSM) C3IN0- (Comparator) CCP4 (CCP) P3D (CCP) SEG45 (LCD) AN12 (ADC) CPS12 (CSM) C3IN1- (Comparator) CCP5 (CCP) P1D (CCP) SEG26 (LCD) VPP/MCLR (Basic)SEG18 (LCD) RG1 12.8.1 ANSELG REGISTER The ANSELG register (Register 12-27) is used to configure the Input mode of an I/O pin to analog. Setting the appropriate ANSELG bit high will cause all digital reads on the pin to be read as `0' and allow analog functions on the pin to operate correctly. The state of the ANSELG bits has no affect on digital output functions. A pin with TRIS clear and ANSEL set will still operate as a digital output, but the Input mode will be analog. This can cause unexpected behavior when executing read-modify-write instructions on the affected port. Note: The ANSELG register must be initialized to configure an analog channel as a digital input. Pins configured as analog inputs will read `0'. RG2 RG3 EXAMPLE 12-7: BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF INITIALIZING PORTG ; ;Init PORTG ;Data Latch ; ; ;digital I/O ; ;Set RG<7:4> as inputs ;and set RG<3:0> as ;outputs PORTG PORTG LATG LATG ANSELG ANSELG TRISG B'11110000' TRISG RG4 RG5 DS41414A-page 142 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-24: PORTG: PORTG REGISTER U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0'. RG<5:0>: PORTG General Purpose I/O Pin bits 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets U-0 -- R/W-x/u RG5 R/W-x/u RG4 R/W-x/u RG3 R/W-x/u RG2 R/W-x/u RG1 R/W-x/u RG0 bit 0 REGISTER 12-25: TRISG: PORTG TRI-STATE REGISTER U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5 bit 4-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0'. TRISG5: PORTG Tri-State Control bit This bit (RG5 pin) is an input only and always read as `1'. TRISG<4:0>: PORTG Tri-State Control bits 1 = PORTG pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = PORTG pin configured as an output U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets U-0 -- R-1/1 TRISG5 R/W-1/1 TRISG4 R/W-1/1 TRISG3 R/W-1/1 TRISG2 R/W-1/1 TRISG1 R/W-1/1 TRISG0 bit 0 REGISTER 12-26: LATG: PORTG DATA LATCH REGISTER U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5-0 Note 1: W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0'. LATG<5:0>: PORTG Output Latch Value bits Writes to PORTG are actually written to corresponding LATG register. Reads from PORTG register is return of actual I/O pin values. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets U-0 -- R/W-x/u LATG5 R/W-x/u LATG4 R/W-x/u LATG3 R/W-x/u LATG2 R/W-x/u LATG1 R/W-x/u LATG0 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 143 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 12-27: ANSELG: PORTG ANALOG SELECT REGISTER U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-5 bit 4-1 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0'. ANSG<4:1>: Analog Select between Analog or Digital Function on Pins RG<4:0>, respectively 0 = Digital I/O. Pin is assigned to port or digital special function. 1 = Analog input. Pin is assigned as analog input(1). Digital input buffer disabled. Unimplemented: Read as `0'. When setting a pin to an analog input, the corresponding TRIS bit must be set to Input mode in order to allow external control of the voltage on the pin. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-1/1 ANSG4 R/W-1/1 ANSG3 R/W-1/1 ANSG2 R/W-1/1 ANSG1 U-0 -- bit 0 bit 0 Note 1: REGISTER 12-28: WPUG: WEAK PULL-UP PORTB REGISTER U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0'. WPUG5: Weak Pull-up Register bits 1 = Pull-up enabled 0 = Pull-up disabled Unimplemented: Read as `0'. Global WPUEN bit of the OPTION register must be cleared for individual pull-ups to be enabled. The weak pull-up device is automatically disabled if the pin is in configured as an output. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets U-0 -- R/W-1/1 WPUG5 U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- bit 0 bit 4-0 Note 1: 2: DS41414A-page 144 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 12-9: Name ADCON0 ANSELG CCPxCON CMOUT CM1CON1 CM2CON1 CPSCON0 CPSCON1 LATG LCDCON LCDSE5 PORTG TRISG WPUG Legend: Note 1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTG Bit 7 -- -- -- C1INTP C2INTP CPSON -- -- LCDEN -- -- -- -- -- -- C1INTN C2INTN CPSRM -- -- SLPEN -- -- -- -- -- -- C1PCH1 C2PCH1 -- -- -- WERR SE45 RG5 TRISG5 WPUG5 PxM<1:0>(1) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 CHS<4:0> ANSG4 -- C1PCH0 C2PCH0 -- -- LATG4 -- SE44 RG4 TRISG4 -- LATG3 SE43 RG3 TRISG3 -- CS<1:0> SE42 RG2 TRISG2 -- ANSG3 -- -- -- ANSG2 MC3OUT -- -- DCxB<1:0> Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 GO/DONE ANSG1 MC2OUT CCPxM<3:0> MC1OUT C1NCH<1:0> C2NCH<1:0> CPSOUT LATG1 SE41 RG1 TRISG1 -- T0XCS -- SE40 RG0 TRISG0 -- Bit 0 ADON -- Register on Page 159 144 229 179 179 179 323 324 143 329 333 143 143 144 CPSRNG<1:0> LATG2 CPSCH<3:0> LMUX<1:0> x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTG. Applies to ECCP modules only. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 145 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 146 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 13.0 INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE 13.3 Interrupt Flags The PORTB pins can be configured to operate as Interrupt-On-Change (IOC) pins. An interrupt can be generated by detecting a signal that has either a rising edge or a falling edge. Any individual PORTB pin, or combination of PORTB pins, can be configured to generate an interrupt. The interrupt-on-change module has the following features: * * * * Interrupt-on-Change enable (Master Switch) Individual pin configuration Rising and falling edge detection Individual pin interrupt flags The IOCBFx bits located in the IOCBF register are status flags that correspond to the Interrupt-on-change pins of PORTB. If an expected edge is detected on an appropriately enabled pin, then the status flag for that pin will be set, and an interrupt will be generated if the IOCIE bit is set. The IOCIF bit of the INTCON register reflects the status of all IOCBFx bits. 13.4 Clearing Interrupt Flags Figure 13-1 is a block diagram of the IOC module. 13.1 Enabling the Module The individual status flags, (IOCBFx bits), can be cleared by resetting them to zero. If another edge is detected during this clearing operation, the associated status flag will be set at the end of the sequence, regardless of the value actually being written. In order to ensure that no detected edge is lost while clearing flags, only AND operations masking out known changed bits should be performed. The following sequence is an example of what should be performed. To allow individual PORTB pins to generate an interrupt, the IOCIE bit of the INTCON register must be set. If the IOCIE bit is disabled, the edge detection on the pin will still occur, but an interrupt will not be generated. 13.2 Individual Pin Configuration EXAMPLE 13-1: MOVLW XORWF ANDWF 0xff IOCBF, W IOCBF, F For each PORTB pin, a rising edge detector and a falling edge detector are present. To enable a pin to detect a rising edge, the associated IOCBPx bit of the IOCBP register is set. To enable a pin to detect a falling edge, the associated IOCBNx bit of the IOCBN register is set. A pin can be configured to detect rising and falling edges simultaneously by setting both the IOCBPx bit and the IOCBNx bit of the IOCBP and IOCBN registers, respectively. 13.5 Operation in Sleep The interrupt-on-change interrupt sequence will wake the device from Sleep mode, if the IOCIE bit is set. If an edge is detected while in Sleep mode, the IOCBF register will be updated prior to the first instruction executed out of Sleep. FIGURE 13-1: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE BLOCK DIAGRAM IOCIE IOCBNx D CK R Q IOCBFx From all other IOCBFx individual pin detectors IOC Interrupt to CPU Core RBx IOCBPx D CK R Q Q2 Clock Cycle 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 147 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 13-1: R/W-0/0 IOCBP7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared IOCBP<7:0>: Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge Enable bits 1 = Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the pin for a positive going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag will be set upon detecting an edge. 0 = Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets IOCBP: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE POSITIVE EDGE REGISTER R/W-0/0 IOCBP5 R/W-0/0 IOCBP4 R/W-0/0 IOCBP3 R/W-0/0 IOCBP2 R/W-0/0 IOCBP1 R/W-0/0 IOCBP0 bit 0 R/W-0/0 IOCBP6 REGISTER 13-2: R/W-0/0 IOCBN7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 IOCBN: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE NEGATIVE EDGE REGISTER R/W-0/0 IOCBN5 R/W-0/0 IOCBN4 R/W-0/0 IOCBN3 R/W-0/0 IOCBN2 R/W-0/0 IOCBN1 R/W-0/0 IOCBN0 bit 0 R/W-0/0 IOCBN6 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets IOCBN<7:0>: Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge Enable bits 1 = Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the pin for a negative going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag will be set upon detecting an edge. 0 = Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin. REGISTER 13-3: R/W/HS-0/0 IOCBF7 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 IOCBF: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE FLAG REGISTER R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 R/W/HS-0/0 IOCBF5 IOCBF4 IOCBF3 R/W/HS-0/0 IOCBF2 R/W/HS-0/0 IOCBF1 R/W/HS-0/0 IOCBF0 bit 0 R/W/HS-0/0 IOCBF6 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets HS - Bit is set in hardware IOCBF<7:0>: Interrupt-on-Change Flag bits 1 = An enabled change was detected on the associated pin. Set when IOCBPx = 1 and a rising edge was detected on RBx, or when IOCBNx = 1 and a falling edge was detected on RBx. 0 = No change was detected, or the user cleared the detected change. DS41414A-page 148 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 13-1: Name INTCON IOCBF IOCBN IOCBP TRISB SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE Bit 7 GIE IOCBF7 IOCBN7 IOCBP7 TRISB7 Bit 6 PEIE IOCBF6 IOCBN6 IOCBP6 TRISB6 Bit 5 TMR0IE IOCBF5 IOCBN5 IOCBP5 TRISB5 Bit 4 INTE IOCBF4 IOCBN4 IOCBP4 TRISB4 Bit 3 IOCIE IOCBF3 IOCBN3 IOCBP3 TRISB3 Bit 2 TMR0IF IOCBF2 IOCBN2 IOCBP2 TRISB2 Bit 1 INTF IOCBF1 IOCBN1 IOCBP1 TRISB1 Bit 0 IOCIF IOCBF0 IOCBN0 IOCBP0 TRISB0 Register on Page 89 148 148 148 127 Legend: -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by Interrupt-on-Change. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 149 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 150 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 14.0 FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE (FVR) 14.1 Independent Gain Amplifiers The output of the FVR supplied to the ADC, Comparators, and DAC is routed through two independent programmable gain amplifiers. Each amplifier can be configured to amplify the reference voltage by 1x, 2x or 4x, to produce the three possible voltage levels. The ADFVR<1:0> bits of the FVRCON register are used to enable and configure the gain amplifier settings for the reference supplied to the ADC module. Reference Section 15.0 "Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module" for additional information. The CDAFVR<1:0> bits of the FVRCON register are used to enable and configure the gain amplifier settings for the reference supplied to the DAC and Comparator module. Reference Section 16.0 "Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module" and Section 17.0 "Comparator Module" for additional information. The Fixed Voltage Reference, or FVR, is a stable voltage reference, independent of VDD, with 1.024V, 2.048V or 4.096V selectable output levels. The output of the FVR can be configured to supply a reference voltage to the following: * * * * * ADC input channel ADC positive reference Comparator positive input Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) LCD bias generator The FVR can be enabled by setting the FVREN bit of the FVRCON register. 14.2 FVR Stabilization Period When the Fixed Voltage Reference module is enabled, it requires time for the reference and amplifier circuits to stabilize. Once the circuits stabilize and are ready for use, the FVRRDY bit of the FVRCON register will be set. See Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications" for the minimum delay requirement. FIGURE 14-1: VOLTAGE REFERENCE BLOCK DIAGRAM ADFVR<1:0> 2 X1 X2 X4 FVR BUFFER1 (To ADC Module) CDAFVR<1:0> 2 X1 X2 X4 FVR BUFFER2 (To Comparators, DAC) FVR VREF (To LCD Bias Generator) FVREN FVRRDY + _ 1.024V Fixed Reference 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 151 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 14-1: R/W-0/0 FVREN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets q = Value depends on condition FVRCON: FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER R-q/q R/W-0/0 Reserved R/W-0/0 Reserved R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 CDAFVR<1:0> ADFVR<1:0> FVRRDY(1) FVREN: Fixed Voltage Reference Enable bit 0 = Fixed Voltage Reference is disabled 1 = Fixed Voltage Reference is enabled FVRRDY: Fixed Voltage Reference Ready Flag bit(1) 0 = Fixed Voltage Reference output is not ready or not enabled 1 = Fixed Voltage Reference output is ready for use Reserved: Read as `0'. Maintain these bits clear. CDAFVR<1:0>: Comparator and DAC Fixed Voltage Reference Selection bit 00 = Comparator and DAC Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is off 01 = Comparator and DAC Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is 1x (1.024V) 10 = Comparator and DAC Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is 2x (2.048V)(2) 11 = Comparator and DAC Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is 4x (4.096V)(2) ADFVR<1:0>: ADC Fixed Voltage Reference Selection bit 00 = ADC Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is off 01 = ADC Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is 1x (1.024V) 10 = ADC Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is 2x (2.048V)(2) 11 = ADC Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is 4x (4.096V)(2) FVRRDY is always `1' on devices with LDO (PIC16F1946/47). Fixed Voltage Reference output cannot exceed VDD. bit 6 bit 5-4 bit 3-2 bit 1-0 Note 1: 2: TABLE 14-1: Name FVRCON Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE Bit 7 FVREN Bit 6 FVRRDY Bit 5 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on page 152 CDAFVR<1:0> ADFVR<1:0> Shaded cells are not used with the Fixed Voltage Reference. DS41414A-page 152 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 15.0 ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) MODULE approximation and stores the conversion result into the ADC result registers (ADRESH:ADRESL register pair). Figure 15-1 shows the block diagram of the ADC. The ADC voltage reference is software selectable to be either internally generated or externally supplied. The ADC can generate an interrupt upon completion of a conversion. This interrupt can be used to wake-up the device from Sleep. The Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) allows conversion of an analog input signal to a 10-bit binary representation of that signal. This device uses analog inputs, which are multiplexed into a single sample and hold circuit. The output of the sample and hold is connected to the input of the converter. The converter generates a 10-bit binary result via successive FIGURE 15-1: ADC BLOCK DIAGRAM VREFADNREF = 1 ADNREF = 0 VSS ADPREF = 00 ADPREF = 11 VREF+ ADPREF = 10 VDD AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 AN8 AN9 AN10 AN11 AN12 AN13 AN14 AN15 AN16 00000 00001 00010 00011 00100 00101 00110 00111 01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 01101 01110 01111 10000 ADON VSS ADRESH ADFM 0 = Left Justify 1 = Right Justify 16 ADRESL GO/DONE ADC 10 DAC FVR Buffer1 11110 11111 CHS<4:0> Note: When ADON = 0, all multiplexer inputs are disconnected. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 153 PIC16F/LF1946/47 15.1 ADC Configuration 15.1.4 CONVERSION CLOCK When configuring and using the ADC the following functions must be considered: * * * * * * Port configuration Channel selection ADC voltage reference selection ADC conversion clock source Interrupt control Result formatting The source of the conversion clock is software selectable via the ADCS bits of the ADCON1 register. There are seven possible clock options: * * * * * * * FOSC/2 FOSC/4 FOSC/8 FOSC/16 FOSC/32 FOSC/64 FRC (dedicated internal oscillator) 15.1.1 PORT CONFIGURATION The ADC can be used to convert both analog and digital signals. When converting analog signals, the I/O pin should be configured for analog by setting the associated TRIS and ANSEL bits. Refer to Section 12.0 "I/O Ports" for more information. Note: Analog voltages on any pin that is defined as a digital input may cause the input buffer to conduct excess current. The time to complete one bit conversion is defined as TAD. One full 10-bit conversion requires 11.5 TAD periods as shown in Figure 15-2. For correct conversion, the appropriate TAD specification must be met. Refer to the A/D conversion requirements in Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications" for more information. Table 15-1 gives examples of appropriate ADC clock selections. Note: Unless using the FRC, any changes in the system clock frequency will change the ADC clock frequency, which may adversely affect the ADC result. 15.1.2 CHANNEL SELECTION There are 16 channel selections available: * AN<13:0> pins * DAC Output * FVR (Fixed Voltage Reference) Output Refer to Section 16.0 "Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module" and Section 14.0 "Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)" for more information on these channel selections. The CHS bits of the ADCON0 register determine which channel is connected to the sample and hold circuit. When changing channels, a delay is required before starting the next conversion. Refer to Section 15.2 "ADC Operation" for more information. 15.1.3 ADC VOLTAGE REFERENCE The ADPREF bits of the ADCON1 register provides control of the positive voltage reference. The positive voltage reference can be: * VREF+ pin * VDD * FVR The ADNREF bit of the ADCON1 register provides control of the negative voltage reference. The negative voltage reference can be: * VREF- pin * VSS See Section 14.0 "Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)" for more details on the fixed voltage reference. DS41414A-page 154 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 15-1: ADC CLOCK PERIOD (TAD) VS. DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCIES Device Frequency (FOSC) Device Frequency (FOSC) 32 MHz 62.5ns(2) 125 ns (2) ADC Clock Period (TAD) ADC Clock Source Fosc/2 Fosc/4 Fosc/8 Fosc/16 Fosc/32 Fosc/64 FRC Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: ADCS<2:0> 000 100 001 101 010 110 x11 20 MHz 100 ns(2) 200 ns (2) 16 MHz 125 ns(2) 250 ns (2) 8 MHz 250 ns(2) 500 ns (2) 4 MHz 500 ns(2) 1.0 s 2.0 s 4.0 s 8.0 s(3) 16.0 s(3) (1,4) 1 MHz 2.0 s 4.0 s 8.0 s(3) 16.0 s(3) 32.0 s(3) 64.0 s(3) 1.0-6.0 s(1,4) 0.5 s(2) 800 ns 1.0 s 2.0 s 1.0-6.0 s (1,4) 400 ns(2) 800 ns 1.6 s 3.2 s 1.0-6.0 s (1,4) 0.5 s(2) 1.0 s 2.0 s 4.0 s 1.0-6.0 s (1,4) 1.0 s 2.0 s 4.0 s 8.0 s(3) (1,4) 1.0-6.0 s 1.0-6.0 s Shaded cells are outside of recommended range. The FRC source has a typical TAD time of 1.6 s for VDD. These values violate the minimum required TAD time. For faster conversion times, the selection of another clock source is recommended. The ADC clock period (TAD) and total ADC conversion time can be minimized when the ADC clock is derived from the system clock FOSC. However, the FRC clock source must be used when conversions are to be performed with the device in Sleep mode. FIGURE 15-2: ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERSION TAD CYCLES TCY - TAD TAD1 TAD2 TAD3 TAD4 TAD5 TAD6 TAD7 TAD8 TAD9 TAD10 TAD11 b4 b1 b0 b6 b7 b2 b9 b8 b3 b5 Conversion starts Holding capacitor is disconnected from analog input (typically 100 ns) Set GO bit On the following cycle: ADRESH:ADRESL is loaded, GO bit is cleared, ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is connected to analog input. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 155 PIC16F/LF1946/47 15.1.5 INTERRUPTS 15.1.6 RESULT FORMATTING The ADC module allows for the ability to generate an interrupt upon completion of an Analog-to-Digital conversion. The ADC Interrupt Flag is the ADIF bit in the PIR1 register. The ADC Interrupt Enable is the ADIE bit in the PIE1 register. The ADIF bit must be cleared in software. Note 1: The ADIF bit is set at the completion of every conversion, regardless of whether or not the ADC interrupt is enabled. 2: The ADC operates during Sleep only when the FRC oscillator is selected. This interrupt can be generated while the device is operating or while in Sleep. If the device is in Sleep, the interrupt will wake-up the device. Upon waking from Sleep, the next instruction following the SLEEP instruction is always executed. If the user is attempting to wake-up from Sleep and resume in-line code execution, the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register must be disabled. If the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register are enabled, execution will switch to the Interrupt Service Routine. Please refer to Section 15.1.5 "Interrupts" for more information. The 10-bit A/D conversion result can be supplied in two formats, left justified or right justified. The ADFM bit of the ADCON1 register controls the output format. Figure 15-3 shows the two output formats. FIGURE 15-3: 10-BIT A/D CONVERSION RESULT FORMAT ADRESH ADRESL LSB bit 0 10-bit A/D Result bit 7 bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as `0' LSB bit 0 bit 7 10-bit A/D Result bit 0 (ADFM = 0) MSB bit 7 (ADFM = 1) bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as `0' MSB DS41414A-page 156 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 15.2 15.2.1 ADC Operation STARTING A CONVERSION 15.2.4 ADC OPERATION DURING SLEEP To enable the ADC module, the ADON bit of the ADCON0 register must be set to a `1'. Setting the GO/ DONE bit of the ADCON0 register to a `1' will start the Analog-to-Digital conversion. Note: The GO/DONE bit should not be set in the same instruction that turns on the ADC. Refer to Section 15.2.6 "A/D Conversion Procedure". The ADC module can operate during Sleep. This requires the ADC clock source to be set to the FRC option. When the FRC clock source is selected, the ADC waits one additional instruction before starting the conversion. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed, which can reduce system noise during the conversion. If the ADC interrupt is enabled, the device will wake-up from Sleep when the conversion completes. If the ADC interrupt is disabled, the ADC module is turned off after the conversion completes, although the ADON bit remains set. When the ADC clock source is something other than FRC, a SLEEP instruction causes the present conversion to be aborted and the ADC module is turned off, although the ADON bit remains set. 15.2.2 COMPLETION OF A CONVERSION When the conversion is complete, the ADC module will: * Clear the GO/DONE bit * Set the ADIF Interrupt Flag bit * Update the ADRESH and ADRESL registers with new conversion result 15.2.5 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER 15.2.3 TERMINATING A CONVERSION If a conversion must be terminated before completion, the GO/DONE bit can be cleared in software. The ADRESH and ADRESL registers will be updated with the partially complete Analog-to-Digital conversion sample. Incomplete bits will match the last bit converted. Note: A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state. Thus, the ADC module is turned off and any pending conversion is terminated. The Special Event Trigger of the CCPx/ECCPX module allows periodic ADC measurements without software intervention. When this trigger occurs, the GO/DONE bit is set by hardware and the Timer1 counter resets to zero. TABLE 15-2: Device SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER CCPx/ECCPx CCP5 PIC16F/LF1946/47 Using the Special Event Trigger does not assure proper ADC timing. It is the user's responsibility to ensure that the ADC timing requirements are met. Refer to Section 22.0 "Capture/Compare/PWM Modules" for more information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 157 PIC16F/LF1946/47 15.2.6 A/D CONVERSION PROCEDURE EXAMPLE 15-1: A/D CONVERSION This is an example procedure for using the ADC to perform an Analog-to-Digital conversion: 1. Configure Port: * Disable pin output driver (Refer to the TRIS register) * Configure pin as analog (Refer to the ANSEL register) Configure the ADC module: * Select ADC conversion clock * Configure voltage reference * Select ADC input channel * Turn on ADC module Configure ADC interrupt (optional): * Clear ADC interrupt flag * Enable ADC interrupt * Enable peripheral interrupt * Enable global interrupt(1) Wait the required acquisition time(2). Start conversion by setting the GO/DONE bit. Wait for ADC conversion to complete by one of the following: * Polling the GO/DONE bit * Waiting for the ADC interrupt (interrupts enabled) Read ADC Result. Clear the ADC interrupt flag (required if interrupt is enabled). Note 1: The global interrupt can be disabled if the user is attempting to wake-up from Sleep and resume in-line code execution. 2: Refer to Section 15.3 "A/D Acquisition Requirements". ;This code block configures the ADC ;for polling, Vdd and Vss references, Frc ;clock and AN0 input. ; ;Conversion start & polling for completion ; are included. ; BANKSEL ADCON1 ; MOVLW B'11110000' ;Right justify, Frc ;clock MOVWF ADCON1 ;Vdd and Vss Vref BANKSEL TRISA ; BSF TRISA,0 ;Set RA0 to input BANKSEL ANSEL ; BSF ANSEL,0 ;Set RA0 to analog BANKSEL ADCON0 ; MOVLW B'00000001' ;Select channel AN0 MOVWF ADCON0 ;Turn ADC On CALL SampleTime ;Acquisiton delay BSF ADCON0,ADGO ;Start conversion BTFSC ADCON0,ADGO ;Is conversion done? GOTO $-1 ;No, test again BANKSEL ADRESH ; MOVF ADRESH,W ;Read upper 2 bits MOVWF RESULTHI ;store in GPR space BANKSEL ADRESL ; MOVF ADRESL,W ;Read lower 8 bits MOVWF RESULTLO ;Store in GPR space 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. DS41414A-page 158 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 15.2.7 ADC REGISTER DEFINITIONS The following registers are used to control the operation of the ADC. REGISTER 15-1: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 bit 6-2 ADCON0: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 CHS<4:0> R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 GO/DONE R/W-0/0 ADON bit 0 R/W-0/0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets Unimplemented: Read as `0' CHS<4:0>: Analog Channel Select bits 00000 = AN0 00001 = AN1 00010 = AN2 00011 = AN3 00100 = AN4 00101 = AN5 00110 = AN6 00111 = AN7 01000 = AN8 01001 = AN9 01010 = AN10 01011 = AN11 01100 = AN12 01101 = AN13 01110 = AN14 01111 = AN15 10000 = AN16 10001 = Reserved. No channel connected. * * * 11100 = Reserved. No channel connected. 11101 = Temp Sense(2) 11110 = DAC output(1) 11111 = FVR (Fixed Voltage Reference) Buffer 1 Output(2) GO/DONE: A/D Conversion Status bit 1 = A/D conversion cycle in progress. Setting this bit starts an A/D conversion cycle. This bit is automatically cleared by hardware when the A/D conversion has completed. 0 = A/D conversion completed/not in progress ADON: ADC Enable bit 1 = ADC is enabled 0 = ADC is disabled and consumes no operating current See Section 16.0 "Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module" for more information. See Section 14.0 "Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)" for more information. bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: 2: 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 159 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 15-2: R/W-0/0 ADFM bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared ADFM: A/D Result Format Select bit 1 = Right justified. Six Most Significant bits of ADRESH are set to `0' when the conversion result is loaded. 0 = Left justified. Six Least Significant bits of ADRESL are set to `0' when the conversion result is loaded. ADCS<2:0>: A/D Conversion Clock Select bits 000 = FOSC/2 001 = FOSC/8 010 = FOSC/32 011 = FRC (clock supplied from a dedicated RC oscillator) 100 = FOSC/4 101 = FOSC/16 110 = FOSC/64 111 = FRC (clock supplied from a dedicated RC oscillator) Unimplemented: Read as `0' ADNREF: A/D Negative Voltage Reference Configuration bit 0 = VREF- is connected to VSS 1 = VREF- is connected to external VREFADPREF<1:0>: A/D Positive Voltage Reference Configuration bits 00 = VREF+ is connected to VDD 01 = Reserved 10 = VREF+ is connected to external VREF+ 11 = VREF+ is connected to internal fixed voltage reference U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets ADCON1: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0/0 ADCS<2:0> R/W-0/0 U-0 -- R/W-0/0 ADNREF R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 ADPREF<1:0> R/W-0/0 bit 6-4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1-0 DS41414A-page 160 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 15-3: R/W-x/u bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared ADRES<9:2>: ADC Result Register bits Upper 8 bits of 10-bit conversion result U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets ADRESH: ADC RESULT REGISTER HIGH (ADRESH) ADFM = 0 R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u bit 0 ADRES<9:2> R/W-x/u REGISTER 15-4: R/W-x/u bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 bit 5-0 ADRES<1:0> ADRESL: ADC RESULT REGISTER LOW (ADRESL) ADFM = 0 R/W-x/u -- R/W-x/u -- R/W-x/u -- R/W-x/u -- R/W-x/u -- R/W-x/u -- bit 0 R/W-x/u W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets ADRES<1:0>: ADC Result Register bits Lower 2 bits of 10-bit conversion result Reserved: Do not use. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 161 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 15-5: R/W-x/u -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-2 bit 1-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Reserved: Do not use. ADRES<9:8>: ADC Result Register bits Upper 2 bits of 10-bit conversion result U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets ADRESH: ADC RESULT REGISTER HIGH (ADRESH) ADFM = 1 R/W-x/u -- R/W-x/u -- R/W-x/u -- R/W-x/u -- R/W-x/u R/W-x/u bit 0 -- ADRES<9:8> R/W-x/u REGISTER 15-6: R/W-x/u bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 ADRESL: ADC RESULT REGISTER LOW (ADRESL) ADFM = 1 R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u bit 0 ADRES<7:0> R/W-x/u W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets ADRES<7:0>: ADC Result Register bits Lower 8 bits of 10-bit conversion result DS41414A-page 162 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 15.3 A/D Acquisition Requirements For the ADC to meet its specified accuracy, the charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed to fully charge to the input channel voltage level. The Analog Input model is shown in Figure 15-4. The source impedance (RS) and the internal sampling switch (RSS) impedance directly affect the time required to charge the capacitor, CHOLD. The sampling switch (RSS) impedance varies over the device voltage (VDD), refer to Figure 15-4. The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 10 k. As the source impedance is decreased, the acquisition time may be decreased. After the analog input channel is selected (or changed), an A/D acquisition must be done before the conversion can be started. To calculate the minimum acquisition time, Equation 15-1 may be used. This equation assumes that 1/2 LSb error is used (1,024 steps for the ADC). The 1/2 LSb error is the maximum error allowed for the ADC to meet its specified resolution. EQUATION 15-1: Assumptions: ACQUISITION TIME EXAMPLE Temperature = 50C and external impedance of 10k 5.0V VDD TACQ = Amplifier Settling Time + Hold Capacitor Charging Time + Temperature Coefficient = TAMP + TC + TCOFF = 2s + TC + Temperature - 25C 0.05s/C The value for TC can be approximated with the following equations: 1 VAPPLIED 1 - -------------------------- = VCHOLD n+1 2 -1 --------- RC VAPPLIED 1 - e = VCHOLD - Tc - TC ;[1] VCHOLD charged to within 1/2 lsb ;[2] VCHOLD charge response to VAPPLIED -------- 1 RC VAPPLIED 1 - e = VAPPLIED 1 - -------------------------- ;combining [1] and [2] n+1 2 -1 Note: Where n = number of bits of the ADC. Solving for TC: TC = - CHOLD RIC + RSS + RS ln(1/511) = - 10pF 1k + 7k + 10k ln(0.001957) = 1.12 s Therefore: TACQ = 2s + 1.12s + 50C- 25C 0.05s/C = 4.42s Note 1: The reference voltage (VREF) has no effect on the equation, since it cancels itself out. 2: The charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) is not discharged after each conversion. 3: The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 10 k. This is required to meet the pin leakage specification. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 163 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 15-4: ANALOG INPUT MODEL Analog Input pin CPIN 5 pF VDD VT 0.6V RIC 1k I LEAKAGE(1) Sampling Switch SS Rss CHOLD = 10 pF VSS/VREF- Rs VA VT 0.6V Legend: CHOLD CPIN = Sample/Hold Capacitance = Input Capacitance 6V 5V VDD 4V 3V 2V RSS I LEAKAGE = Leakage current at the pin due to various junctions = Interconnect Resistance RIC RSS = Resistance of Sampling Switch SS VT = Sampling Switch = Threshold Voltage 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Sampling Switch (k) Note 1: Refer to Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications". FIGURE 15-5: ADC TRANSFER FUNCTION Full-Scale Range 3FFh 3FEh 3FDh ADC Output Code 3FCh 3FBh Full-Scale Transition 1 LSB ideal 004h 003h 002h 001h 000h 1 LSB ideal VREFZero-Scale Transition VREF+ Analog Input Voltage DS41414A-page 164 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 15-3: Name ADCON0 ADCON1 ADRESH ADRESL ANSELA ANSELE CCP1CON INTCON PIE1 PIR1 TRISA TRISB TRISE FVRCON DACCON0 DACCON1 Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ADC Bit 7 -- ADFM A/D Result Register High A/D Result Register Low -- -- P1M<1:0> GIE TMR1GIE TMR1GIF TRISA7 TRISB7 -- FVREN DACEN -- PEIE ADIE ADIF TRISA6 TRISB6 -- FVRRDY DACLPS -- -- -- ANSA5 -- TMR0IE RCIE RCIF TRISA5 TRISB5 -- Reserved DACOE -- ANSA4 -- INTE TXIE TXIF TRISA4 TRISB4 -- Reserved -- ANSA3 -- IOCIE SSPIE SSPIF TRISA3 TRISB3 TRISE3 ANSA2 ANSE2 TMR0IF CCP1IE CCP1IF TRISA2 TRISB2 TRISE2 ANSA1 ANSE1 INTF TMR2IE TMR2IF TRISA1 TRISB1 TRISE1 -- ANSA0 ANSE0 IOCIF TMR1IE TMR1IF TRISA0 TRISB0 TRISE0 DACNSS ADCS<2:0> Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 CHS<4:0> -- ADNREF Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 GO/DONE Bit 0 ADON Register on Page 159 160 162 162 125 137 229 89 90 94 124 127 136 152 171 171 ADPREF<1:0> DC1B<1:0> CCP1M<3:0> CDAFVR<1:0> DACPSS<1:0> DACR<4:0> ADFVR<1:0> x = unknown, u = unchanged, -- = unimplemented read as `0', q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells are not used for ADC module. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 165 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 166 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 16.0 DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER (DAC) MODULE 16.3.1 OUTPUT CLAMPED TO POSITIVE VOLTAGE SOURCE The DAC output voltage can be set to VSRC+ with the least amount of power consumption by performing the following: * Clearing the DACEN bit in the DACCON0 register. * Setting the DACLPS bit in the DACCON0 register. * Configuring the DACPSS bits to the proper positive source. * Configuring the DACR<4:0>x bits to `11111' in the DACCON1 register. This is also the method used to output the voltage level from the FVR to an output pin. See Section 16.4 "DAC Voltage Reference Output" for more information. Reference Figure 16-1 for output clamping examples. The Digital-to-Analog Converter supplies a variable voltage reference, ratiometric with the input source, with 32 selectable output levels. The input of the DAC can be connected to: * External VREF pins * VDD supply voltage * FVR (Fixed Voltage Reference) The output of the DAC can be configured to supply a reference voltage to the following: * Comparator positive input * ADC input channel * DACOUT pin The Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) can be enabled by setting the DACEN bit of the DACCON0 register. 16.3.2 OUTPUT CLAMPED TO NEGATIVE VOLTAGE SOURCE 16.1 Output Voltage Selection The DAC has 32 voltage level ranges. The 32 levels are set with the DACR<4:0> bits of the DACCON1 register. The DAC output voltage is determined by the following equations: The DAC output voltage can be set to VSRC- with the least amount of power consumption by performing the following: * Clearing the DACEN bit in the DACCON0 register. * Clearing the DACLPS bit in the DACCON0 register. * Configuring the DACNSS bits to the proper negative source. * Configuring the DACR<4:0> bits to `00000' in the DACCON1 register. This allows the comparator to detect a zero-crossing while not consuming additional current through the DAC module. Reference Figure 16-1 for output clamping examples. EQUATION 16-1: DAC OUTPUT VOLTAGE 2 DACR<4:0> VOUT = VSOURCE+ - VSOURCE- ------------------------------ + VSRC- 5 Note: VSOURCE+ can equal FVR Buffer 2, VDD or VREF+. VSOURCE- can equal VSS or VREF-. 16.2 Ratiometric Output Level The DAC output value is derived using a resistor ladder with each end of the ladder tied to a positive and negative voltage reference input source. If the voltage of either input source fluctuates, a similar fluctuation will result in the DAC output value. The value of the individual resistors within the ladder can be found in Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications". 16.3 Low-Power Voltage State In order for the DAC module to consume the least amount of power, one of the two voltage reference input sources to the resistor ladder must be disconnected. Either the positive voltage source, (VSRC+), or the negative voltage source, (VSRC-) can be disabled. The negative voltage source is disabled by setting the DACLPS bit in the DACCON0 register. Clearing the DACLPS bit in the DACCON0 register disables the positive voltage source. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 167 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 16-1: OUTPUT VOLTAGE CLAMPING EXAMPLES Output Clamped to Negative Voltage Source VSRC+ R R DACEN = 0 DACLPS = 1 DAC Voltage Ladder (see Figure 16-2) R VSRCVSRCDACEN = 0 DACLPS = 0 DACR<4:0> = 11111 R R DAC Voltage Ladder (see Figure 16-2) R DACR<4:0> = 00000 Output Clamped to Positive Voltage Source VSRC+ DS41414A-page 168 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 16.4 DAC Voltage Reference Output The DAC can be output to the DACOUT pin by setting the DACOE bit of the DACCON0 register to `1'. Selecting the DAC reference voltage for output on the DACOUT pin automatically overrides the digital output buffer and digital input threshold detector functions of that pin. Reading the DACOUT pin when it has been configured for DAC reference voltage output will always return a `0'. Due to the limited current drive capability, a buffer must be used on the DAC voltage reference output for external connections to DACOUT. Figure 16-3 shows an example buffering technique. FIGURE 16-2: DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER BLOCK DIAGRAM Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) FVR BUFFER2 VDD VREF+ VSRC+ 5 R R 2 R R 32 Steps R R R 32-to-1 MUX R DACR<4:0> DACPSS<1:0> DACEN DACLPS DAC (To Comparator and ADC Modules) DACOUT DACOE DACNSS VREFVSS VSRC- 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 169 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 16-3: VOLTAGE REFERENCE OUTPUT BUFFER EXAMPLE PIC(R) MCU DAC Module R Voltage Reference Output Impedance DACOUT + - Buffered DAC Output 16.5 Operation During Sleep When the device wakes up from Sleep through an interrupt or a Watchdog Timer time-out, the contents of the DACCON0 register are not affected. To minimize current consumption in Sleep mode, the voltage reference should be disabled. 16.6 Effects of a Reset A device Reset affects the following: * DAC is disabled. * DAC output voltage is removed from the DACOUT pin. * The DACR<4:0> range select bits are cleared. DS41414A-page 170 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 16-1: R/W-0/0 DACEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared DACEN: DAC Enable bit 1 = DAC is enabled 0 = DAC is disabled DACLPS: DAC Low-Power Voltage State Select bit 1 = DAC Positive reference source selected 0 = DAC Negative reference source selected DACOE: DAC Voltage Output Enable bit 1 = DAC voltage level is also an output on the DACOUT pin 0 = DAC voltage level is disconnected from the DACOUT pin Unimplemented: Read as `0' DACPSS<1:0>: DAC Positive Source Select bits 00 = VDD 01 = VREF+ 10 = FVR Buffer2 output 11 = Reserved, do not use Unimplemented: Read as `0' DACNSS: DAC Negative Source Select bits 1 = VREF0 = VSS U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets DACCON0: VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER 0 R/W-0/0 DACOE U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 -- R/W-0/0 DACNSS bit 0 DACPSS<1:0> R/W-0/0 DACLPS bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3-2 bit 1 bit 0 REGISTER 16-2: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-5 bit 4-0 Note 1: DACCON1: VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER 1 U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 DACR<4:0> bit 0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets Unimplemented: Read as `0' DACR<4:0>: DAC Voltage Output Select bits VOUT = ((VSRC+) - (VSRC-))*(DACR<4:0>/(25)) + VSRCThe output select bits are always right justified to ensure that any number of bits can be used without affecting the register layout. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 171 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 16-1: Name FVRCON DACCON0 DACCON1 Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH DAC MODULE Bit 7 FVREN DACEN -- Bit 6 FVRRDY DACLPS -- Bit 5 Reserved DACOE -- Bit 4 Reserved -- Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on page 152 171 171 CDAFVR<1:0> DACPSS<1:0> DACR<4:0> ADFVR<1:0> -- DACNSS -- = Unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used with the DAC Module. DS41414A-page 172 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 17.0 COMPARATOR MODULE FIGURE 17-1: VIN+ VIN- SINGLE COMPARATOR + - Output The PIC16F/LF1946/47 devices have three rail-to-rail comparators, C1, C2 and C3, with input multiplexing. Comparators are used to interface analog circuits to a digital circuit by comparing two analog voltages and providing a digital indication of their relative magnitudes. Comparators are very useful mixed signal building blocks because they provide analog functionality independent of program execution. The analog comparator module includes the following features: * * * * * * * * * Independent comparator control Programmable input selection Comparator output is available internally/externally Programmable output polarity Interrupt-on-change Wake-up from Sleep Programmable Speed/Power optimization PWM shutdown Programmable and fixed voltage reference VINVIN+ Output Note: The black areas of the output of the comparator represents the uncertainty due to input offsets and response time. 17.1 Comparator Overview A single comparator is shown in Figure 17-1 along with the relationship between the analog input levels and the digital output. When the analog voltage at VIN+ is less than the analog voltage at VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital low level. When the analog voltage at VIN+ is greater than the analog voltage at VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital high level. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 173 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 17-2: CxNCH<1:0> 2 CXIN0CXIN1CXIN2CXIN30 1 MUX 2 (2) 3 CXPOL CxVN COMPARATOR MODULE SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM CxON(1) Interrupt det CxINTP Set CxIF Interrupt det CxINTN Cx(3) D Q CXOUT MCXOUT To Data Bus CxVP CXIN+ DAC FVR Buffer2 0 MUX 1 (2) 2 3 VSS CXPCH<1:0> 2 + Q1 CxHYS CxSP To ECCP PWM Logic EN CxON CXSYNC CXOE TRIS bit CXOUT 0 D (from Timer1) T1CLK Q 1 To Timer1 or SR Latch SYNCCXOUT Note 1: 2: 3: When CxON = 0, the Comparator will produce a `0' at the output. When CxON = 0, all multiplexer inputs are disconnected. Output of comparator can be frozen during debugging. DS41414A-page 174 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 17.2 Comparator Control 17.2.3 COMPARATOR OUTPUT POLARITY Each comparator has 2 control registers: CMxCON0 and CMxCON1. The CMxCON0 registers (see Register 17-1) contain Control and Status bits for the following: * * * * * * Enable Output selection Output polarity Speed/Power selection Hysteresis enable Output synchronization Inverting the output of the comparator is functionally equivalent to swapping the comparator inputs. The polarity of the comparator output can be inverted by setting the CxPOL bit of the CMxCON0 register. Clearing the CxPOL bit results in a non-inverted output. Table 17-1 shows the output state versus input conditions, including polarity control. TABLE 17-1: COMPARATOR OUTPUT STATE VS. INPUT CONDITIONS CxPOL 0 0 1 1 CxOUT 0 1 0 1 Input Condition CxVN > CxVP CxVN < CxVP CxVN > CxVP CxVN < CxVP The CMxCON1 registers (see Register 17-2) contain Control bits for the following: * * * * Interrupt enable Interrupt edge polarity Positive input channel selection Negative input channel selection 17.2.4 17.2.1 COMPARATOR ENABLE COMPARATOR SPEED/POWER SELECTION Setting the CxON bit of the CMxCON0 register enables the comparator for operation. Clearing the CxON bit disables the comparator resulting in minimum current consumption. 17.2.2 COMPARATOR OUTPUT SELECTION The trade-off between speed or power can be optimized during program execution with the CxSP control bit. The default state for this bit is `1' which selects the normal speed mode. Device power consumption can be optimized at the cost of slower comparator propagation delay by clearing the CxSP bit to `0'. The output of the comparator can be monitored by reading either the CxOUT bit of the CMxCON0 register or the MCxOUT bit of the CMOUT register. In order to make the output available for an external connection, the following conditions must be true: * CxOE bit of the CMxCON0 register must be set * Corresponding TRIS bit must be cleared * CxON bit of the CMxCON0 register must be set Note 1: The CxOE bit of the CMxCON0 register overrides the PORT data latch. Setting the CxON bit of the CMxCON0 register has no impact on the port override. 2: The internal output of the comparator is latched with each instruction cycle. Unless otherwise specified, external outputs are not latched. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 175 PIC16F/LF1946/47 17.3 Comparator Hysteresis 17.5 Comparator Interrupt A selectable amount of separation voltage can be added to the input pins of each comparator to provide a hysteresis function to the overall operation. Hysteresis is enabled by setting the CxHYS bit of the CMxCON0 register. These hysteresis levels change as a function of the comparator's Speed/Power mode selection. Table 17-2 shows the hysteresis levels. An interrupt can be generated upon a change in the output value of the comparator for each comparator, a rising edge detector and a Falling edge detector are present. When either edge detector is triggered and its associated enable bit is set (CxINTP and/or CxINTN bits of the CMxCON1 register), the Corresponding Interrupt Flag bit (CxIF bit of the PIR2 register) will be set. To enable the interrupt, you must set the following bits: * CxON, CxPOL and CxSP bits of the CMxCON0 register * CxIE bit of the PIE2 register * CxINTP bit of the CMxCON1 register (for a rising edge detection) * CxINTN bit of the CMxCON1 register (for a falling edge detection) * PEIE and GIE bits of the INTCON register The associated interrupt flag bit, CxIF bit of the PIR2 register, must be cleared in software. If another edge is detected while this flag is being cleared, the flag will still be set at the end of the sequence. Note: Although a comparator is disabled, an interrupt can be generated by changing the output polarity with the CxPOL bit of the CMxCON0 register, or by switching the comparator on or off with the CxON bit of the CMxCON0 register. TABLE 17-2: CxSP 0 1 HYSTERESIS LEVELS CxHYS Enabled 3mV 20mV CxHYS Disabled << 1mV 3mV These levels are approximate. See Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications" for more information. 17.4 Timer1 Gate Operation The output resulting from a comparator operation can be used as a source for gate control of Timer1. See Section 20.6 "Timer1 Gate" for more information. This feature is useful for timing the duration or interval of an analog event. It is recommended that the comparator output be synchronized to Timer1. This ensures that Timer1 does not increment while a change in the comparator is occurring. 17.6 17.4.1 COMPARATOR OUTPUT SYNCHRONIZATION Comparator Positive Input Selection The output from a comparator can be synchronized with Timer1 by setting the CxSYNC bit of the CMxCON0 register. Once enabled, the comparator output is latched on the falling edge of the Timer1 source clock. If a prescaler is used with Timer1, the comparator output is latched after the prescaling function. To prevent a race condition, the comparator output is latched on the falling edge of the Timer1 clock source and Timer1 increments on the rising edge of its clock source. See the Comparator Block Diagram (Figure 17-2) and the Timer1 Block Diagram (Figure 20-1) for more information. Configuring the CxPCH<1:0> bits of the CMxCON1 register directs an internal voltage reference or an analog pin to the non-inverting input of the comparator: * * * * CxIN+ analog pin DAC FVR (Fixed Voltage Reference) VSS (Ground) See Section 14.0 "Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)" for more information on the Fixed Voltage Reference module. See Section 16.0 "Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module" for more information on the DAC input signal. Any time the comparator is disabled (CxON = 0), all comparator inputs are disabled. DS41414A-page 176 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 17.7 Comparator Negative Input Selection 17.10 Analog Input Connection Considerations A simplified circuit for an analog input is shown in Figure 17-3. Since the analog input pins share their connection with a digital input, they have reverse biased ESD protection diodes to VDD and VSS. The analog input, therefore, must be between VSS and VDD. If the input voltage deviates from this range by more than 0.6V in either direction, one of the diodes is forward biased and a latch-up may occur. A maximum source impedance of 10 k is recommended for the analog sources. Also, any external component connected to an analog input pin, such as a capacitor or a Zener diode, should have very little leakage current to minimize inaccuracies introduced. Note 1: When reading a PORT register, all pins configured as analog inputs will read as a `0'. Pins configured as digital inputs will convert as an analog input, according to the input specification. 2: Analog levels on any pin defined as a digital input, may cause the input buffer to consume more current than is specified. The CxNCH<1:0> bits of the CMxCON0 register direct one of four analog pins to the comparator inverting input. Note: To use CxIN+ and CxINx- pins as analog input, the appropriate bits must be set in the ANSEL register and the corresponding TRIS bits must also be set to disable the output drivers. 17.8 Comparator Response Time The comparator output is indeterminate for a period of time after the change of an input source or the selection of a new reference voltage. This period is referred to as the response time. The response time of the comparator differs from the settling time of the voltage reference. Therefore, both of these times must be considered when determining the total response time to a comparator input change. See the Comparator and Voltage Reference Specifications in Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications" for more details. 17.9 Interaction with ECCP Logic The comparators can be used as general purpose comparators. Their outputs can be brought out to the pins. When the ECCP Auto-Shutdown is active it can use one or both comparator signals. If auto-restart is also enabled, the comparators can be configured as a closed loop analog feedback to the ECCP, thereby, creating an analog controlled PWM. FIGURE 17-3: ANALOG INPUT MODEL VDD Analog Input pin Rs < 10K VT 0.6V RIC To Comparator VA CPIN 5 pF VT 0.6V ILEAKAGE(1) Vss Legend: CPIN = Input Capacitance ILEAKAGE = Leakage Current at the pin due to various junctions = Interconnect Resistance RIC RS = Source Impedance = Analog Voltage VA = Threshold Voltage VT Note 1: See Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications". 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 177 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 17-1: R/W-0/0 CxON bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared CxON: Comparator Enable bit 1 = Comparator is enabled and consumes no active power 0 = Comparator is disabled CxOUT: Comparator Output bit If CxPOL = 1 (inverted polarity): 1 = CxVP < CxVN 0 = CxVP > CxVN If CxPOL = 0 (non-inverted polarity): 1 = CxVP > CxVN 0 = CxVP < CxVN CxOE: Comparator Output Enable bit 1 = CxOUT is present on the CxOUT pin. Requires that the associated TRIS bit be cleared to actually drive the pin. Not affected by CxON. 0 = CxOUT is internal only CxPOL: Comparator Output Polarity Select bit 1 = Comparator output is inverted 0 = Comparator output is not inverted Unimplemented: Read as `0' CxSP: Comparator Speed/Power Select bit 1 = Comparator operates in normal power, higher speed mode 0 = Comparator operates in low-power, low-speed mode CxHYS: Comparator Hysteresis Enable bit 1 = Comparator hysteresis enabled 0 = Comparator hysteresis disabled CxSYNC: Comparator Output Synchronous Mode bit 1 = Comparator output to Timer1 and I/O pin is synchronous to changes on Timer1 clock source. Output updated on the falling edge of Timer1 clock source. 0 = Comparator output to Timer1 and I/O pin is asynchronous U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets CMxCON0: COMPARATOR X CONTROL REGISTER 0 R-0/0 R/W-0/0 CxOE R/W-0/0 CxPOL U-0 -- R/W-1/1 CxSP R/W-0/0 CxHYS R/W-0/0 CxSYNC bit 0 CxOUT bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS41414A-page 178 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 17-2: R/W-0/0 CxINTP bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared CxINTP: Comparator Interrupt on Positive Going Edge Enable bit 1 = The CxIF interrupt flag will be set upon a positive going edge of the CxOUT bit 0 = No interrupt flag will be set on a positive going edge of the CxOUT bit CxINTN: Comparator Interrupt on Negative Going Edge Enable bit 1 = The CxIF interrupt flag will be set upon a negative going edge of the CxOUT bit 0 = No interrupt flag will be set on a negative going edge of the CxOUT bit CxPCH<1:0>: Comparator Positive Input Channel Select bits 00 = CxVP connects to CxIN+ pin 01 = CxVP connects to DAC Voltage Reference 10 = CxVP connects to FVR Voltage Reference 11 = CxVP connects to VSS Unimplemented: Read as `0' CxNCH<1:0>: Comparator Negative Input Channel Select bits 00 = CxVN connects to CxIN0- pin 01 = CxVN connects to CxIN1- pin 10 = CxVN connects to CxIN2- pin 11 = CxVN connects to CxIN3- pin U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets CMxCON1: COMPARATOR CX CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 CxPCH<1:0> CxNCH<1:0> R/W-0/0 CxINTN bit 6 bit 5-4 bit 3-2 bit 1-0 REGISTER 17-3: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 CMOUT: COMPARATOR OUTPUT REGISTER U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- R-0/0 MC3OUT R-0/0 MC2OUT R-0/0 MC1OUT bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets Unimplemented: Read as `0' MC3OUT: Mirror Copy of C3OUT bit MC2OUT: Mirror Copy of C2OUT bit MC1OUT: Mirror Copy of C1OUT bit 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 179 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 17-3: Name ANSELF ANSELG CM1CON0 CM2CON0 CM1CON1 CM2CON1 CM3CON0 CM3CON1 CMOUT FVRCON DACCON0 DACCON1 INTCON PIE2 PIR2 TRISF TRISG Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARATOR MODULE Bit 7 ANSF7 -- C1ON C2ON C1NTP C2NTP C3ON C3INTP -- FVREN DACEN -- GIE OSFIE OSFIF TRISF7 -- Bit 6 ANSF6 -- C1OUT C2OUT C1INTN C2INTN C3OUT C3INTN -- FVRRDY DACLPS -- PEIE C2IE C2IF TRISF6 -- Bit 5 ANSF5 ANSG5 C1OE C2OE Bit 4 ANSF4 ANSG4 C1POL C2POL Bit 3 ANSF3 ANSG3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 2 ANSF2 ANSG2 C1SP C2SP -- -- C3SP -- -- Bit 1 ANSF1 ANSG1 C1HYS C2HYS Bit 0 ANSF0 ANSG0 C1SYNC C2SYNC Register on Page 141 144 178 178 179 179 178 179 179 152 171 171 INTF -- -- TRISF1 TRISG1 IOCIF CCP2IE CCP2IF TRISF0 TRISG0 89 91 95 140 143 C1PCH<1:0> C2PCH<1:0> C3OE C3PCH1 -- Reserved DACOE -- TMR0IE C1IE C1IF TRISF5 TRISG5 INTE EEIE EEIF TRISF4 TRISG4 C3POL C3PCH0 -- Reserved -- C1NCH<1:0> C2NCH<1:0> C3HYS MC2OUT -- C3SYNC MC1OUT DACNSS C3NCH<1:0> ADFVR<1:0> CDAFVR<1:0> DACPSS<1:0> DACR<4:0> IOCIE BCLIE BCLIF TRISF3 TRISG3 TMR0IF LCDIE LCDIF TRISF2 TRISG2 -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are unused by the Comparator module. DS41414A-page 180 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 18.0 SR LATCH 18.2 Latch Output The module consists of a single SR Latch with multiple Set and Reset inputs as well as separate latch outputs. The SR Latch module includes the following features: * * * * Programmable input selection SR Latch output is available externally Separate Q and Q outputs Firmware Set and Reset The SRQEN and SRNQEN bits of the SRCON0 register control the Q and Q latch outputs. Both of the SR Latch outputs may be directly output to an I/O pin at the same time. The applicable TRIS bit of the corresponding port must be cleared to enable the port pin output driver. The SR Latch can be used in a variety of analog applications, including oscillator circuits, one-shot circuit, hysteretic controllers, and analog timing applications. 18.3 Effects of a Reset 18.1 Latch Operation Upon any device Reset, the SR Latch output is not initialized to a known state. The user's firmware is responsible for initializing the latch output before enabling the output pins. The latch is a Set-Reset Latch that does not depend on a clock source. Each of the Set and Reset inputs are active-high. The latch can be Set or Reset by: * * * * * Software control (SRPS and SRPR bits) Comparator C1 output (SYNCC1OUT) Comparator C2 output (SYNCC2OUT) SRI pin Programmable clock (SRCLK) The SRPS and the SRPR bits of the SRCON0 register may be used to Set or Reset the SR Latch, respectively. The latch is Reset-dominant. Therefore, if both Set and Reset inputs are high, the latch will go to the Reset state. Both the SRPS and SRPR bits are self resetting which means that a single write to either of the bits is all that is necessary to complete a latch Set or Reset operation. The output from Comparator C1 or C2 can be used as the Set or Reset inputs of the SR Latch. The output of either Comparator can be synchronized to the Timer1 clock source. See Section 17.0 "Comparator Module" and Section 20.0 "Timer1 Module with Gate Control" for more information. An external source on the SRI pin can be used as the Set or Reset inputs of the SR Latch. An internal clock source is available that can periodically set or reset the SR Latch. The SRCLK<2:0> bits in the SRCON0 register are used to select the clock source period. The SRSCKE and SRRCKE bits of the SRCON1 register enable the clock source to Set or Reset the SR Latch, respectively. Note: Enabling both the Set and Reset inputs from any one source at the same time may result in indeterminate operation, as the Reset dominance cannot be assured. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 181 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 18-1: SRPS SR LATCH SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM Pulse Gen(2) SRLEN SRQEN SRI SRSPE SRCLK SRSCKE SYNCC2OUT(3) SRSC2E SYNCC1OUT(3) SRSC1E SRPR Pulse Gen(2) SR Latch(1) S Q SRQ SRI SRRPE SRCLK SRRCKE SYNCC2OUT(3) SRRC2E SYNCC1OUT(3) SRRC1E R Q SRNQ SRLEN SRNQEN Note 1: 2: 3: If R = 1 and S = 1 simultaneously, Q = 0, Q = 1. Pulse generator causes a 1 Q-state pulse width. Name denotes the connection point at the comparator output. DS41414A-page 182 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 18-1: SRCLK 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 SRCLK FREQUENCY TABLE Divider 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 FOSC = 32 MHz 62.5 kHz 125 kHz 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz FOSC = 20 MHz 39.0 kHz 78.1 kHz 156 kHz 313 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz FOSC = 16 MHz 31.3 kHz 62.5 kHz 125 kHz 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz FOSC = 4 MHz 7.81 kHz 15.6 kHz 31.25 kHz 62.5 kHz 125 kHz 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz FOSC = 1 MHz 1.95 kHz 3.90 kHz 7.81 kHz 15.6 kHz 31.3 kHz 62.5 kHz 125 kHz 250 kHz REGISTER 18-1: R/W-0/0 SRLEN bit 7 Legend: SRCON0: SR LATCH CONTROL 0 REGISTER R/W-0/0 SRCLK<2:0> R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 SRQEN R/W-0/0 SRNQEN R/S-0/0 SRPS R/S-0/0 SRPR bit 0 R/W-0/0 R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets S = Bit is set only SRLEN: SR Latch Enable bit 1 = SR Latch is enabled 0 = SR Latch is disabled SRCLK<2:0>: SR Latch Clock Divider bits 000 = Generates a 1 FOSC wide pulse every 4th FOSC cycle clock 001 = Generates a 1 FOSC wide pulse every 8th FOSC cycle clock 010 = Generates a 1 FOSC wide pulse every 16th FOSC cycle clock 011 = Generates a 1 FOSC wide pulse every 32nd FOSC cycle clock 100 = Generates a 1 FOSC wide pulse every 64th FOSC cycle clock 101 = Generates a 1 FOSC wide pulse every 128th FOSC cycle clock 110 = Generates a 1 FOSC wide pulse every 256th FOSC cycle clock 111 = Generates a 1 FOSC wide pulse every 512th FOSC cycle clock SRQEN: SR Latch Q Output Enable bit If SRLEN = 1: 1 = Q is present on the SRQ pin 0 = External Q output is disabled If SRLEN = 0: SR Latch is disabled SRNQEN: SR Latch Q Output Enable bit If SRLEN = 1: 1 = Q is present on the SRnQ pin 0 = External Q output is disabled If SRLEN = 0: SR Latch is disabled SRPS: Pulse Set Input of the SR Latch bit(1) 1 = Pulse set input for 1 Q-clock period 0 = No effect on set input SRPR: Pulse Reset Input of the SR Latch bit(1) 1 = Pulse reset input for 1 Q-clock period 0 = No effect on reset input bit 6-4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: Set only, always reads back `0'. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 183 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 18-2: R/W-0/0 SRSPE bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared SRSPE: SR Latch Peripheral Set Enable bit 1 = SR Latch is set when the SRI pin is high 0 = SRI pin has no effect on the set input of the SR Latch SRSCKE: SR Latch Set Clock Enable bit 1 = Set input of SR Latch is pulsed with SRCLK 0 = SRCLK has no effect on the set input of the SR Latch SRSC2E: SR Latch C2 Set Enable bit 1 = SR Latch is set when the C2 Comparator output is high 0 = C2 Comparator output has no effect on the set input of the SR Latch SRSC1E: SR Latch C1 Set Enable bit 1 = SR Latch is set when the C1 Comparator output is high 0 = C1 Comparator output has no effect on the set input of the SR Latch SRRPE: SR Latch Peripheral Reset Enable bit 1 = SR Latch is reset when the SRI pin is high 0 = SRI pin has no effect on the reset input of the SR Latch SRRCKE: SR Latch Reset Clock Enable bit 1 = Reset input of SR Latch is pulsed with SRCLK 0 = SRCLK has no effect on the reset input of the SR Latch SRRC2E: SR Latch C2 Reset Enable bit 1 = SR Latch is reset when the C2 Comparator output is high 0 = C2 Comparator output has no effect on the reset input of the SR Latch SRRC1E: SR Latch C1 Reset Enable bit 1 = SR Latch is reset when the C1 Comparator output is high 0 = C1 Comparator output has no effect on the reset input of the SR Latch U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets SRCON1: SR LATCH CONTROL 1 REGISTER R/W-0/0 SRSC2E R/W-0/0 SRSC1E R/W-0/0 SRRPE R/W-0/0 SRRCKE R/W-0/0 SRRC2E R/W-0/0 SRRC1E bit 0 R/W-0/0 SRSCKE bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS41414A-page 184 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 18-2: Name ANSELA SRCON0 SRCON1 TRISA SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SR LATCH MODULE Bit 7 -- SRLEN SRSPE TRISA7 SRSCKE TRISA6 Bit 6 -- Bit 5 ANSA5 SRCLK<2:0> SRSC2E TRISA5 SRSC1E TRISA4 Bit 4 ANSA4 Bit 3 ANSA3 SRQEN SRRPE TRISA3 Bit 2 ANSA2 SRNQEN TRISA2 Bit 1 ANSA1 SRPS TRISA1 Bit 0 ANSA0 SRPR SRRC1E TRISA0 Register on Page 125 183 184 124 SRRCKE SRRC2E Legend: -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are unused by the SR Latch module. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 185 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 186 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 19.0 TIMER0 MODULE The Timer0 module is an 8-bit timer/counter with the following features: * * * * * * 8-bit timer/counter register (TMR0) 8-bit prescaler (independent of Watchdog Timer) Programmable internal or external clock source Programmable external clock edge selection Interrupt on overflow TMR0 can be used to gate Timer1 When TMR0 is written, the increment is inhibited for two instruction cycles immediately following the write. Note: The value written to the TMR0 register can be adjusted, in order to account for the two instruction cycle delay when TMR0 is written. 19.1.2 8-BIT COUNTER MODE Figure 19-1 is a block diagram of the Timer0 module. In 8-Bit Counter mode, the Timer0 module will increment on every rising or falling edge of the T0CKI pin or the Capacitive Sensing Oscillator (CPSCLK) signal. 8-Bit Counter mode using the T0CKI pin is selected by setting the TMR0CS bit in the OPTION register to `1' and resetting the T0XCS bit in the CPSCON0 register to `0'. 8-Bit Counter mode using the Capacitive Sensing Oscillator (CPSCLK) signal is selected by setting the TMR0CS bit in the OPTION register to `1' and setting the T0XCS bit in the CPSCON0 register to `1'. The rising or falling transition of the incrementing edge for either input source is determined by the TMR0SE bit in the OPTION register. 19.1 Timer0 Operation The Timer0 module can be used as either an 8-bit timer or an 8-bit counter. 19.1.1 8-BIT TIMER MODE The Timer0 module will increment every instruction cycle, if used without a prescaler. 8-Bit Timer mode is selected by clearing the TMR0CS bit of the OPTION register. FIGURE 19-1: FOSC/4 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE TIMER0 Data Bus 0 T0CKI 0 From CPSCLK 1 0 1 TMR0SE TMR0CS 8-bit Prescaler 1 Sync 2 TCY 8 TMR0 Set Flag bit TMR0IF on Overflow Overflow to Timer1 PSA T0XCS 8 PS<2:0> 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 187 PIC16F/LF1946/47 19.1.3 SOFTWARE PROGRAMMABLE PRESCALER A software programmable prescaler is available for exclusive use with Timer0. The prescaler is enabled by clearing the PSA bit of the OPTION register. Note: The Watchdog Timer (WDT) uses its own independent prescaler. There are 8 prescaler options for the Timer0 module ranging from 1:2 to 1:256. The prescale values are selectable via the PS<2:0> bits of the OPTION register. In order to have a 1:1 prescaler value for the Timer0 module, the prescaler must be disabled by setting the PSA bit of the OPTION register. The prescaler is not readable or writable. All instructions writing to the TMR0 register will clear the prescaler. 19.1.4 TIMER0 INTERRUPT Timer0 will generate an interrupt when the TMR0 register overflows from FFh to 00h. The TMR0IF interrupt flag bit of the INTCON register is set every time the TMR0 register overflows, regardless of whether or not the Timer0 interrupt is enabled. The TMR0IF bit can only be cleared in software. The Timer0 interrupt enable is the TMR0IE bit of the INTCON register. Note: The Timer0 interrupt cannot wake the processor from Sleep since the timer is frozen during Sleep. 8-BIT COUNTER MODE SYNCHRONIZATION 19.1.5 When in 8-Bit Counter mode, the incrementing edge on the T0CKI pin must be synchronized to the instruction clock. Synchronization can be accomplished by sampling the prescaler output on the Q2 and Q4 cycles of the instruction clock. The high and low periods of the external clocking source must meet the timing requirements as shown in Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications". 19.1.6 OPERATION DURING SLEEP Timer0 cannot operate while the processor is in Sleep mode. The contents of the TMR0 register will remain unchanged while the processor is in Sleep mode. DS41414A-page 188 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 19-1: R/W-1/1 WPUEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared WPUEN: Weak Pull-up Enable bit 1 = All weak pull-ups are disabled (except MCLR, if it is enabled) 0 = Weak pull-ups are enabled by individual WPUx latch values INTEDG: Interrupt Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge of RB0/INT pin 0 = Interrupt on falling edge of RB0/INT pin TMR0CS: Timer0 Clock Source Select bit 1 = Transition on RA4/T0CKI pin 0 = Internal instruction cycle clock (FOSC/4) TMR0SE: Timer0 Source Edge Select bit 1 = Increment on high-to-low transition on RA4/T0CKI pin 0 = Increment on low-to-high transition on RA4/T0CKI pin PSA: Prescaler Assignment bit 1 = Prescaler is not assigned to the Timer0 module 0 = Prescaler is assigned to the Timer0 module PS<2:0>: Prescaler Rate Select bits Bit Value 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Timer0 Rate 1:2 1:4 1:8 1 : 16 1 : 32 1 : 64 1 : 128 1 : 256 OPTION_REG: OPTION REGISTER R/W-1/1 TMR0CS R/W-1/1 TMR0SE R/W-1/1 PSA R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 PS<2:0> bit 0 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 INTEDG U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2-0 TABLE 19-1: Name CPSCON0 INTCON TMR0 TRISA SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER0 Bit 7 CPSON GIE Bit 6 CPSRM PEIE Bit 5 -- TMR0IE Bit 4 -- INTE Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 CPSOUT INTF PS<2:0> TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 Bit 0 T0XCS IOCIF Register on Page 323 89 189 187* TRISA4 TRISA3 124 CPSRNG<1:0> IOCIE PSA TMR0IF OPTION_REG WPUEN TRISA7 INTEDG TMR0CS TMR0SE TRISA6 TRISA5 Timer0 Module Register Legend: -- = Unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer0 module. * Page provides register information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 189 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 190 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 20.0 TIMER1 MODULE WITH GATE CONTROL * * * * Gate Toggle Mode Gate Single-pulse Mode Gate Value Status Gate Event Interrupt The Timer1 module is a 16-bit timer/counter with the following features: 16-bit timer/counter register pair (TMR1H:TMR1L) Programmable internal or external clock source 2-bit prescaler Dedicated 32 kHz oscillator circuit Optionally synchronized comparator out Multiple Timer1 gate (count enable) sources Interrupt on overflow Wake-up on overflow (external clock, Asynchronous mode only) * Time base for the Capture/Compare function * Special Event Trigger (with CCP/ECCP) * Selectable Gate Source Polarity * * * * * * * * Figure 20-1 is a block diagram of the Timer1 module. FIGURE 20-1: T1GSS<1:0> T1G TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 00 01 10 D 11 TMR1ON T1GPOL Set flag bit TMR1IF on Overflow T1GTM CK R Q Q 1 T1G_IN T1GSPM 0 0 Single Pulse Acq. Control T1GGO/DONE 1 Data Bus D EN Q RD T1GCON Set TMR1GIF From Timer0 Overflow Comparator 1 SYNCC1OUT Comparator 2 SYNCC2OUT T1GVAL Q1 Interrupt det TMR1GE TMR1ON TMR1(2) TMR1H TMR1L Q To Comparator Module EN D T1CLK 0 1 TMR1CS<1:0> Synchronized clock input T1OSO T1SYNC 11 10 Synchronize(3) det OUT T1OSC 1 Cap. Sensing Oscillator T1OSI Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 2 T1CKPS<1:0> FOSC/2 Internal Clock EN 0 FOSC Internal Clock FOSC/4 Internal Clock 01 T1OSCEN (1) Sleep input 00 T1CKI To LCD and Clock Switching Modules Note 1: ST Buffer is high speed type when using T1CKI. 2: Timer1 register increments on rising edge. 3: Synchronize does not operate while in Sleep. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 191 PIC16F/LF1946/47 20.1 Timer1 Operation 20.2 Clock Source Selection The Timer1 module is a 16-bit incrementing counter which is accessed through the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair. Writes to TMR1H or TMR1L directly update the counter. When used with an internal clock source, the module is a timer and increments on every instruction cycle. When used with an external clock source, the module can be used as either a timer or counter and increments on every selected edge of the external source. Timer1 is enabled by configuring the TMR1ON and TMR1GE bits in the T1CON and T1GCON registers, respectively. Table 20-1 displays the Timer1 enable selections. The TMR1CS<1:0> and T1OSCEN bits of the T1CON register are used to select the clock source for Timer1. Table 20-2 displays the clock source selections. 20.2.1 INTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE When the internal clock source is selected, the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair will increment on multiples of FOSC as determined by the Timer1 prescaler. When the FOSC internal clock source is selected, the Timer1 register value will increment by four counts every instruction clock cycle. Due to this condition, a 2 LSB error in resolution will occur when reading the Timer1 value. To utilize the full resolution of Timer1, an asynchronous input signal must be used to gate the Timer1 clock input. The following asynchronous sources may be used: * Asynchronous event on the T1G pin to Timer1 Gate * C1 or C2 comparator input to Timer1 Gate TABLE 20-1: TMR1ON 0 0 1 1 TIMER1 ENABLE SELECTIONS TMR1GE 0 1 0 1 Timer1 Operation Off Off Always On Count Enabled 20.2.2 EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE When the external clock source is selected, the Timer1 module may work as a timer or a counter. When enabled to count, Timer1 is incremented on the rising edge of the external clock input T1CKI or the capacitive sensing oscillator signal. Either of these external clock sources can be synchronized to the microcontroller system clock or they can run asynchronously. When used as a timer with a clock oscillator, an external 32.768 kHz crystal can be used in conjunction with the dedicated internal oscillator circuit. Note: In Counter mode, a falling edge must be registered by the counter prior to the first incrementing rising edge after any one or more of the following conditions: * * * * Timer1 enabled after POR Write to TMR1H or TMR1L Timer1 is disabled Timer1 is disabled (TMR1ON = 0) when T1CKI is high then Timer1 is enabled (TMR1ON=1) when T1CKI is low. TABLE 20-2: TMR1CS1 0 0 1 1 1 CLOCK SOURCE SELECTIONS TMR1CS0 1 0 1 0 0 T1OSCEN x x x 0 1 System Clock (FOSC) Instruction Clock (FOSC/4) Capacitive Sensing Oscillator External Clocking on T1CKI Pin Osc.Circuit On T1OSI/T1OSO Pins Clock Source DS41414A-page 192 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 20.3 Timer1 Prescaler 20.6 Timer1 Gate Timer1 has four prescaler options allowing 1, 2, 4 or 8 divisions of the clock input. The T1CKPS bits of the T1CON register control the prescale counter. The prescale counter is not directly readable or writable; however, the prescaler counter is cleared upon a write to TMR1H or TMR1L. Timer1 can be configured to count freely or the count can be enabled and disabled using Timer1 Gate circuitry. This is also referred to as Timer1 Gate Enable. Timer1 Gate can also be driven by multiple selectable sources. 20.4 Timer1 Oscillator 20.6.1 TIMER1 GATE ENABLE A dedicated low-power 32.768 kHz oscillator circuit is built-in between pins T1OSI (input) and T1OSO (amplifier output). This internal circuit is to be used in conjunction with an external 32.768 kHz crystal. The oscillator circuit is enabled by setting the T1OSCEN bit of the T1CON register. The oscillator will continue to run during Sleep. Note: The oscillator requires a start-up and stabilization time before use. Thus, T1OSCEN should be set and a suitable delay observed prior to enabling Timer1. The Timer1 Gate Enable mode is enabled by setting the TMR1GE bit of the T1GCON register. The polarity of the Timer1 Gate Enable mode is configured using the T1GPOL bit of the T1GCON register. When Timer1 Gate Enable mode is enabled, Timer1 will increment on the rising edge of the Timer1 clock source. When Timer1 Gate Enable mode is disabled, no incrementing will occur and Timer1 will hold the current count. See Figure 20-3 for timing details. TABLE 20-3: T1CLK TIMER1 GATE ENABLE SELECTIONS T1G 0 1 0 1 Timer1 Operation Counts Holds Count Holds Count Counts 0 0 1 1 20.5 Timer1 Operation in Asynchronous Counter Mode T1GPOL If control bit T1SYNC of the T1CON register is set, the external clock input is not synchronized. The timer increments asynchronously to the internal phase clocks. If the external clock source is selected then the timer will continue to run during Sleep and can generate an interrupt on overflow, which will wake-up the processor. However, special precautions in software are needed to read/write the timer (see Section 20.5.1 "Reading and Writing Timer1 in Asynchronous Counter Mode"). Note: When switching from synchronous to asynchronous operation, it is possible to skip an increment. When switching from asynchronous to synchronous operation, it is possible to produce an additional increment. 20.6.2 TIMER1 GATE SOURCE SELECTION The Timer1 Gate source can be selected from one of four different sources. Source selection is controlled by the T1GSS bits of the T1GCON register. The polarity for each available source is also selectable. Polarity selection is controlled by the T1GPOL bit of the T1GCON register. TABLE 20-4: T1GSS 00 01 10 11 TIMER1 GATE SOURCES Timer1 Gate Source Timer1 Gate Pin Overflow of Timer0 (TMR0 increments from FFh to 00h) Comparator 1 Output SYNCC1OUT (optionally Timer1 synchronized output) Comparator 2 Output SYNCC2OUT (optionally Timer1 synchronized output) 20.5.1 READING AND WRITING TIMER1 IN ASYNCHRONOUS COUNTER MODE Reading TMR1H or TMR1L while the timer is running from an external asynchronous clock will ensure a valid read (taken care of in hardware). However, the user should keep in mind that reading the 16-bit timer in two 8-bit values itself, poses certain problems, since the timer may overflow between the reads. For writes, it is recommended that the user simply stop the timer and write the desired values. A write contention may occur by writing to the timer registers, while the register is incrementing. This may produce an unpredictable value in the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 193 PIC16F/LF1946/47 20.6.2.1 T1G Pin Gate Operation 20.6.4 The T1G pin is one source for Timer1 Gate Control. It can be used to supply an external source to the Timer1 Gate circuitry. TIMER1 GATE SINGLE-PULSE MODE 20.6.2.2 Timer0 Overflow Gate Operation When Timer0 increments from FFh to 00h, a low-to-high pulse will automatically be generated and internally supplied to the Timer1 Gate circuitry. 20.6.2.3 Comparator C1 Gate Operation The output resulting from a Comparator 1 operation can be selected as a source for Timer1 Gate Control. The Comparator 1 output (SYNCC1OUT) can be synchronized to the Timer1 clock or left asynchronous. For more information see Section 17.4.1 "Comparator Output Synchronization". When Timer1 Gate Single-Pulse mode is enabled, it is possible to capture a single pulse gate event. Timer1 Gate Single-Pulse mode is first enabled by setting the T1GSPM bit in the T1GCON register. Next, the T1GGO/DONE bit in the T1GCON register must be set. The Timer1 will be fully enabled on the next incrementing edge. On the next trailing edge of the pulse, the T1GGO/DONE bit will automatically be cleared. No other gate events will be allowed to increment Timer1 until the T1GGO/DONE bit is once again set in software. Clearing the T1GSPM bit of the T1GCON register will also clear the T1GGO/DONE bit. See Figure 20-5 for timing details. Enabling the Toggle mode and the Single-Pulse mode simultaneously will permit both sections to work together. This allows the cycle times on the Timer1 Gate source to be measured. See Figure 20-6 for timing details. 20.6.2.4 Comparator C2 Gate Operation The output resulting from a Comparator 2 operation can be selected as a source for Timer1 Gate Control. The Comparator 2 output (SYNCC2OUT) can be synchronized to the Timer1 clock or left asynchronous. For more information see Section 17.4.1 "Comparator Output Synchronization". 20.6.5 TIMER1 GATE VALUE STATUS 20.6.3 TIMER1 GATE TOGGLE MODE When Timer1 Gate Toggle mode is enabled, it is possible to measure the full-cycle length of a Timer1 gate signal, as opposed to the duration of a single level pulse. The Timer1 Gate source is routed through a flip-flop that changes state on every incrementing edge of the signal. See Figure 20-4 for timing details. Timer1 Gate Toggle mode is enabled by setting the T1GTM bit of the T1GCON register. When the T1GTM bit is cleared, the flip-flop is cleared and held clear. This is necessary in order to control which edge is measured. Note: Enabling Toggle mode at the same time as changing the gate polarity may result in indeterminate operation. When Timer1 Gate Value Status is utilized, it is possible to read the most current level of the gate control value. The value is stored in the T1GVAL bit in the T1GCON register. The T1GVAL bit is valid even when the Timer1 Gate is not enabled (TMR1GE bit is cleared). 20.6.6 TIMER1 GATE EVENT INTERRUPT When Timer1 Gate Event Interrupt is enabled, it is possible to generate an interrupt upon the completion of a gate event. When the falling edge of T1GVAL occurs, the TMR1GIF flag bit in the PIR1 register will be set. If the TMR1GIE bit in the PIE1 register is set, then an interrupt will be recognized. The TMR1GIF flag bit operates even when the Timer1 Gate is not enabled (TMR1GE bit is cleared). DS41414A-page 194 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 20.7 Timer1 Interrupt 20.9 The Timer1 register pair (TMR1H:TMR1L) increments to FFFFh and rolls over to 0000h. When Timer1 rolls over, the Timer1 interrupt flag bit of the PIR1 register is set. To enable the interrupt on rollover, you must set these bits: * * * * TMR1ON bit of the T1CON register TMR1IE bit of the PIE1 register PEIE bit of the INTCON register GIE bit of the INTCON register ECCP/CCP Capture/Compare Time Base The CCP modules use the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair as the time base when operating in Capture or Compare mode. In Capture mode, the value in the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair is copied into the CCPR1H:CCPR1L register pair on a configured event. In Compare mode, an event is triggered when the value CCPR1H:CCPR1L register pair matches the value in the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair. This event can be a Special Event Trigger. For more information, see "Capture/Compare/PWM Modules". Section 22.0 The interrupt is cleared by clearing the TMR1IF bit in the Interrupt Service Routine. Note: The TMR1H:TMR1L register pair and the TMR1IF bit should be cleared before enabling interrupts. 20.10 ECCP/CCP Special Event Trigger When any of the CCP's are configured to trigger a special event, the trigger will clear the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair. This special event does not cause a Timer1 interrupt. The CCP module may still be configured to generate a CCP interrupt. In this mode of operation, the CCPR1H:CCPR1L register pair becomes the period register for Timer1. Timer1 should be synchronized and FOSC/4 should be selected as the clock source in order to utilize the Special Event Trigger. Asynchronous operation of Timer1 can cause a Special Event Trigger to be missed. In the event that a write to TMR1H or TMR1L coincides with a Special Event Trigger from the CCP, the write will take precedence. For more information, see Section 15.2.5 "Special Event Trigger". 20.8 Timer1 Operation During Sleep Timer1 can only operate during Sleep when setup in Asynchronous Counter mode. In this mode, an external crystal or clock source can be used to increment the counter. To set up the timer to wake the device: * * * * * TMR1ON bit of the T1CON register must be set TMR1IE bit of the PIE1 register must be set PEIE bit of the INTCON register must be set T1SYNC bit of the T1CON register must be set TMR1CS bits of the T1CON register must be configured * T1OSCEN bit of the T1CON register must be configured The device will wake-up on an overflow and execute the next instructions. If the GIE bit of the INTCON register is set, the device will call the Interrupt Service Routine. Timer1 oscillator will continue to operate in Sleep regardless of the T1SYNC bit setting. FIGURE 20-2: T1CKI = 1 when TMR1 Enabled TIMER1 INCREMENTING EDGE T1CKI = 0 when TMR1 Enabled Note 1: 2: Arrows indicate counter increments. In Counter mode, a falling edge must be registered by the counter prior to the first incrementing rising edge of the clock. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 195 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 20-3: TIMER1 GATE ENABLE MODE TMR1GE T1GPOL T1G_IN T1CKI T1GVAL TIMER1 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 FIGURE 20-4: TIMER1 GATE TOGGLE MODE TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GTM T1G_IN T1CKI T1GVAL TIMER1 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 N+5 N+6 N+7 N+8 DS41414A-page 196 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 20-5: TIMER1 GATE SINGLE-PULSE MODE TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GSPM T1GGO/ DONE T1G_IN Set by software Counting enabled on rising edge of T1G Cleared by hardware on falling edge of T1GVAL T1CKI T1GVAL TIMER1 N N+1 N+2 Set by hardware on falling edge of T1GVAL Cleared by software TMR1GIF Cleared by software 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 197 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 20-6: TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GSPM T1GTM T1GGO/ DONE T1G_IN Set by software Counting enabled on rising edge of T1G Cleared by hardware on falling edge of T1GVAL TIMER1 GATE SINGLE-PULSE AND TOGGLE COMBINED MODE T1CKI T1GVAL TIMER1 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 Cleared by software TMR1GIF Cleared by software Set by hardware on falling edge of T1GVAL DS41414A-page 198 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 20.11 Timer1 Control Register The Timer1 Control register (T1CON), shown in Register 20-1, is used to control Timer1 and select the various features of the Timer1 module. REGISTER 20-1: R/W-0/u bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 T1CON: TIMER1 CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u T1OSCEN R/W-0/u T1SYNC U-0 -- R/W-0/u TMR1ON bit 0 R/W-0/u TMR1CS<1:0> T1CKPS<1:0> W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets TMR1CS<1:0>: Timer1 Clock Source Select bits 11 = Timer1 clock source is Capacitive Sensing Oscillator (CAPOSC) 10 = Timer1 clock source is pin or oscillator: If T1OSCEN = 0: External clock from T1CKI pin (on the rising edge) If T1OSCEN = 1: Crystal oscillator on T1OSI/T1OSO pins 01 = Timer1 clock source is system clock (FOSC) 00 = Timer1 clock source is instruction clock (FOSC/4) T1CKPS<1:0>: Timer1 Input Clock Prescale Select bits 11 = 1:8 Prescale value 10 = 1:4 Prescale value 01 = 1:2 Prescale value 00 = 1:1 Prescale value T1OSCEN: LP Oscillator Enable Control bit 1 = Dedicated Timer1 oscillator circuit enabled 0 = Dedicated Timer1 oscillator circuit disabled T1SYNC: Timer1 External Clock Input Synchronization Control bit TMR1CS<1:0> = 1X 1 = Do not synchronize external clock input 0 = Synchronize external clock input with system clock (FOSC) TMR1CS<1:0> = 0X This bit is ignored. Timer1 uses the internal clock when TMR1CS<1:0> = 1X. bit 5-4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as `0' TMR1ON: Timer1 On bit 1 = Enables Timer1 0 = Stops Timer1 Clears Timer1 Gate flip-flop 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 199 PIC16F/LF1946/47 20.12 Timer1 Gate Control Register The Timer1 Gate Control register (T1GCON), shown in Register 20-2, is used to control Timer1 Gate. REGISTER 20-2: R/W-0/u TMR1GE bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 T1GCON: TIMER1 GATE CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0/u T1GTM R/W-0/u T1GSPM R/W/HC-0/u T1GGO/ DONE R-x/x T1GVAL R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u T1GPOL T1GSS<1:0> bit 0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets HC = Bit is cleared by hardware TMR1GE: Timer1 Gate Enable bit If TMR1ON = 0: This bit is ignored If TMR1ON = 1: 1 = Timer1 counting is controlled by the Timer1 gate function 0 = Timer1 counts regardless of Timer1 gate function T1GPOL: Timer1 Gate Polarity bit 1 = Timer1 gate is active-high (Timer1 counts when gate is high) 0 = Timer1 gate is active-low (Timer1 counts when gate is low) T1GTM: Timer1 Gate Toggle Mode bit 1 = Timer1 Gate Toggle mode is enabled 0 = Timer1 Gate Toggle mode is disabled and toggle flip flop is cleared Timer1 gate flip-flop toggles on every rising edge. T1GSPM: Timer1 Gate Single-Pulse Mode bit 1 = Timer1 gate Single-Pulse mode is enabled and is controlling Timer1 gate 0 = Timer1 gate Single-Pulse mode is disabled T1GGO/DONE: Timer1 Gate Single-Pulse Acquisition Status bit 1 = Timer1 gate single-pulse acquisition is ready, waiting for an edge 0 = Timer1 gate single-pulse acquisition has completed or has not been started This bit is automatically cleared when T1GSPM is cleared. T1GVAL: Timer1 Gate Current State bit Indicates the current state of the Timer1 gate that could be provided to TMR1H:TMR1L. Unaffected by Timer1 Gate Enable (TMR1GE). T1GSS<1:0>: Timer1 Gate Source Select bits 00 = Timer1 Gate pin 01 = Timer0 overflow output 10 = Comparator 1 optionally synchronized output (SYNCC1OUT) 11 = Comparator 2 optionally synchronized output (SYNCC2OUT) bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1-0 DS41414A-page 200 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 20-5: Name CCP1CON CCP2CON INTCON PIE1 PIR1 TMR1H TMR1L TRISB TRISC T1CON T1GCON Legend: * SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page 229 229 IOCIF TMR1IE TMR1IF 89 90 94 195* 195* TRISB1 TRISC1 -- TRISB0 TRISC0 TMR1ON 127 130 199 200 P1M<1:0> P2M<1:0> GIE TMR1GIE TMR1GIF PEIE ADIE ADIF DC1B<1:0> DC2B<1:0> TMR0IE RCIE RCIF INTE TXIE TXIF IOCIE SSPIE SSPIF CCP1M<3:0> CCP2M<3:0> TMR0IF CCP1IE CCP1IF INTF TMR2IE TMR2IF Holding Register for the Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register Holding Register for the Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register TRISB7 TRISC7 TMR1GE TRISB6 TRISC6 T1GPOL TRISB5 TRISC5 T1GTM TRISB4 TRISC4 T1GSPM TRISB3 TRISC3 T1OSCEN T1GGO/ DONE TRISB2 TRISC2 T1SYNC T1GVAL TMR1CS<1:0> T1CKPS<1:0> T1GSS<1:0> -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer1 module. Page provides register information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 201 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 202 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 21.0 TIMER2/4/6 MODULES There are up to three identical Timer2-type modules available. To maintain pre-existing naming conventions, the Timers are called Timer2, Timer4 and Timer6 (also Timer2/4/6). Note: The `x' variable used in this section is used to designate Timer2, Timer4, or Timer6. For example, TxCON references T2CON, T4CON or T6CON. PRx references PR2, PR4 or PR6. The Timer2/4/6 modules incorporate the following features: * 8-bit Timer and Period registers (TMRx and PRx, respectively) * Readable and writable (both registers) * Software programmable prescaler (1:1, 1:4, 1:16 and 1:64) * Software programmable postscaler (1:1 to 1:16) * Interrupt on TMRx match with PRx, respectively * Optional use as the shift clock for the MSSPx modules (Timer2 only) See Figure 21-1 for a block diagram of Timer2/4/6. FIGURE 21-1: TIMER2/4/6 BLOCK DIAGRAM TMRx Output Sets Flag bit TMRxIF FOSC/4 Prescaler 1:1, 1:4, 1:16, 1:64 2 TxCKPS<1:0> TMRx Comparator Reset Postscaler 1:1 to 1:16 4 TxOUTPS<3:0> EQ PRx 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 203 PIC16F/LF1946/47 21.1 Timer2/4/6 Operation 21.3 Timer2/4/6 Output The clock input to the Timer2/4/6 modules is the system instruction clock (FOSC/4). TMRx increments from 00h on each clock edge. A 4-bit counter/prescaler on the clock input allows direct input, divide-by-4 and divide-by-16 prescale options. These options are selected by the prescaler control bits, TxCKPS<1:0> of the TxCON register. The value of TMRx is compared to that of the Period register, PRx, on each clock cycle. When the two values match, the comparator generates a match signal as the timer output. This signal also resets the value of TMRx to 00h on the next cycle and drives the output counter/postscaler (see Section 21.2 "Timer2/4/6 Interrupt"). The TMRx and PRx registers are both directly readable and writable. The TMRx register is cleared on any device Reset, whereas the PRx register initializes to FFh. Both the prescaler and postscaler counters are cleared on the following events: * * * * * * * * * a write to the TMRx register a write to the TxCON register Power-on Reset (POR) Brown-out Reset (BOR) MCLR Reset Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset Stack Overflow Reset Stack Underflow Reset RESET Instruction Note: TMRx is not cleared when TxCON is written. The unscaled output of TMRx is available primarily to the CCP modules, where it is used as a time base for operations in PWM mode. Timer2 can be optionally used as the shift clock source for the MSSPx modules operating in SPI mode. Additional information is provided in Section 23.0 "Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP1 and MSSP2) Module". 21.4 Timer2/4/6 Operation During Sleep The Timer2/4/6 timers cannot be operated while the processor is in Sleep mode. The contents of the TMRx and PRx registers will remain unchanged while the processor is in Sleep mode. 21.2 Timer2/4/6 Interrupt Timer2/4/6 can also generate an optional device interrupt. The Timer2/4/6 output signal (TMRx-to-PRx match) provides the input for the 4-bit counter/postscaler. This counter generates the TMRx match interrupt flag which is latched in TMRxIF of the PIRx register. The interrupt is enabled by setting the TMRx Match Interrupt Enable bit, TMRxIE of the PIEx register. A range of 16 postscale options (from 1:1 through 1:16 inclusive) can be selected with the postscaler control bits, TxOUTPS<3:0>, of the TxCON register. DS41414A-page 204 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 21-1: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 bit 6-3 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0' TOUTPS<3:0>: Timer Output Postscaler Select bits 0000 = 1:1 Postscaler 0001 = 1:2 Postscaler 0010 = 1:3 Postscaler 0011 = 1:4 Postscaler 0100 = 1:5 Postscaler 0101 = 1:6 Postscaler 0110 = 1:7 Postscaler 0111 = 1:8 Postscaler 1000 = 1:9 Postscaler 1001 = 1:10 Postscaler 1010 = 1:11 Postscaler 1011 = 1:12 Postscaler 1100 = 1:13 Postscaler 1101 = 1:14 Postscaler 1110 = 1:15 Postscaler 1111 = 1:16 Postscaler TMRxON: Timerx On bit 1 = Timerx is on 0 = Timerx is off TxCKPS<1:0>: Timer2-type Clock Prescale Select bits 00 = Prescaler is 1 01 = Prescaler is 4 10 = Prescaler is 16 11 = Prescaler is 64 U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets TXCON: TIMER2/TIMER4/TIMER6 CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 TMRxON R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 TOUTPS<3:0> TxCKPS<1:0> R/W-0/0 bit 2 bit 1-0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 205 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 21-1: Name CCP2CON INTCON PIE1 PIE3 PIR1 PIR3 PR2 PR4 PR6 T2CON T4CON T6CON TMR2 TMR4 TMR6 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER2/4/6 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page 229 IOCIF TMR1IE -- TMR1IF -- 89 90 92 94 96 203* 203* 203* TMR2ON TMR4ON TMR6ON T2CKPS<1:0> T4CKPS<1:0> T6CKPS<1:0> 205 205 205 203* 203* 203* P2M<1:0> GIE TMR1GIE -- TMR1GIF -- PEIE ADIE CCP5IE ADIF CCP5IF DC2B<1:0> TMR0IE RCIE CCP4IE RCIF CCP4IF INTE TXIE CCP3IE TXIF CCP3IF IOCIE SSPIE TMR6IE SSPIF TMR6IF CCP2M<3:0> TMR0IF CCP1IE -- CCP1IF -- INTF TMR2IE TMR4IE TMR2IF TMR4IF Timer2 Module Period Register Timer4 Module Period Register Timer6 Module Period Register -- -- -- TOUTPS<3:0> TOUTPS<3:0> TOUTPS<3:0> Holding Register for the 8-bit TMR2 Register Holding Register for the 8-bit TMR4 Register(1) Holding Register for the 8-bit TMR6 Register(1) Legend: -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for Timer2 module. * Page provides register information. DS41414A-page 206 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.0 CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM MODULES Note 1: In devices with more than one CCP module, it is very important to pay close attention to the register names used. A number placed after the module acronym is used to distinguish between separate modules. For example, the CCP1CON and CCP2CON control the same operational aspects of two completely different CCP modules. 2: Throughout this section, generic references to a CCP module in any of its operating modes may be interpreted as being equally applicable to ECCP1, ECCP2, ECCP3, CCP4 and CCP5. Register names, module signals, I/O pins, and bit names may use the generic designator `x' to indicate the use of a numeral to distinguish a particular module, when required. The Capture/Compare/PWM module is a peripheral which allows the user to time and control different events, and to generate Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) signals. In Capture mode, the peripheral allows the timing of the duration of an event. The Compare mode allows the user to trigger an external event when a predetermined amount of time has expired. The PWM mode can generate Pulse-Width Modulated signals of varying frequency and duty cycle. This family of devices contains three Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM modules (ECCP1, ECCP2 and ECCP3) and two standard Capture/Compare/PWM modules (CCP4 and CCP5). The Capture and Compare functions are identical for all five CCP modules (ECCP1, ECCP2, ECCP3, CCP4 and CCP5). The only differences between CCP modules are in the Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) function. The standard PWM function is identical in modules, CCP4 and CCP5. In CCP modules ECCP1, ECCP2 and ECCP3, the Enhanced PWM function has slight variations from one another. Full-Bridge ECCP modules have four available I/O pins while Half-Bridge ECCP modules only have two available I/O pins. See Table 22-1 for more information. TABLE 22-1: PWM RESOURCES ECCP1 Enhanced PWM Full-Bridge ECCP2 Enhanced PWM Full-Bridge ECCP3 Enhanced PWM Full-Bridge CCP4 Standard PWM CCP5 Standard PWM Device Name PIC16F/LF1946/47 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 207 PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.1 Capture Mode 22.1.2 TIMER1 MODE RESOURCE The Capture mode function described in this section is available and identical for CCP modules ECCP1, ECCP2, ECCP3, CCP4 and CCP5. Capture mode makes use of the 16-bit Timer1 resource. When an event occurs on the CCPx pin, the 16-bit CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair captures and stores the 16-bit value of the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair, respectively. An event is defined as one of the following and is configured by the CCPxM<3:0> bits of the CCPxCON register: * * * * Every falling edge Every rising edge Every 4th rising edge Every 16th rising edge Timer1 must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode for the CCP module to use the capture feature. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the capture operation may not work. See Section 20.0 "Timer1 Module with Gate Control" for more information on configuring Timer1. 22.1.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE When the Capture mode is changed, a false capture interrupt may be generated. The user should keep the CCPxIE interrupt enable bit of the PIEx register clear to avoid false interrupts. Additionally, the user should clear the CCPxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register following any change in Operating mode. Note: Clocking Timer1 from the system clock (FOSC) should not be used in Capture mode. In order for Capture mode to recognize the trigger event on the CCPx pin, Timer1 must be clocked from the instruction clock (FOSC/4) or from an external clock source. When a capture is made, the Interrupt Request Flag bit CCPxIF of the PIRx register is set. The interrupt flag must be cleared in software. If another capture occurs before the value in the CCPRxH, CCPRxL register pair is read, the old captured value is overwritten by the new captured value. Figure 22-1 shows a simplified diagram of the Capture operation. 22.1.4 CCP PRESCALER 22.1.1 CCP PIN CONFIGURATION In Capture mode, the CCPx pin should be configured as an input by setting the associated TRIS control bit. Also, the CCPx pin function can be moved to alternative pins using the APFCON register. Refer to Section 12.1 "Alternate Pin Function" for more details. Note: If the CCPx pin is configured as an output, a write to the port can cause a capture condition. There are four prescaler settings specified by the CCPxM<3:0> bits of the CCPxCON register. Whenever the CCP module is turned off, or the CCP module is not in Capture mode, the prescaler counter is cleared. Any Reset will clear the prescaler counter. Switching from one capture prescaler to another does not clear the prescaler and may generate a false interrupt. To avoid this unexpected operation, turn the module off by clearing the CCPxCON register before changing the prescaler. Example 22-1 demonstrates the code to perform this function. FIGURE 22-1: CAPTURE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM Set Flag bit CCPxIF (PIRx register) EXAMPLE 22-1: BANKSEL CCPxCON CLRF MOVLW CHANGING BETWEEN CAPTURE PRESCALERS Prescaler 1, 4, 16 CCPx pin CCPRxH and Edge Detect Capture Enable TMR1H CCPRxL MOVWF ;Set Bank bits to point ;to CCPxCON CCPxCON ;Turn CCP module off NEW_CAPT_PS ;Load the W reg with ;the new prescaler ;move value and CCP ON CCPxCON ;Load CCPxCON with this ;value TMR1L 22.1.5 CAPTURE DURING SLEEP CCPxM<3:0> System Clock (FOSC) Capture mode depends upon the Timer1 module for proper operation. There are two options for driving the Timer1 module in Capture mode. It can be driven by the instruction clock (FOSC/4), or by an external clock source. When Timer1 is clocked by FOSC/4, Timer1 will not increment during Sleep. When the device wakes from Sleep, Timer1 will continue from its previous state. Capture mode will operate during Sleep when Timer1 is clocked by an external clock source. DS41414A-page 208 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 22-2: Name CCPxCON CCPRxL CCPRxH INTCON PIE1 PIE2 PIE3 PIR1 PIR2 PIR3 T1CON T1GCON TMR1L TMR1H TRISA TRISB TRISC TRISD TRISE SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CAPTURE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page 229 208* 208* IOCIE SSPIE BCLIE TMR6IE SSPIF BCLIF TMR6IF T1OSCEN T1GGO/DONE TMR0IF CCP1IE LCDIE -- CCP1IF LCDIF -- T1SYNC T1GVAL INTF TMR2IE -- TMR4IE TMR2IF -- TMR4IF -- IOCIF TMR1IE CCP2IE -- TMR1IF CCP2IF -- TMR1ON 89 90 91 92 94 95 96 199 200 195* 195* TRISA1 TRISB1 TRISC1 TRISD1 TRISE1 TRISA0 TRISB0 TRISC0 TRISD0 TRISE0 124 127 130 133 136 PxM<1:0>(1) DCxB<1:0> CCPxM<3:0> Capture/Compare/PWM Register x Low Byte (LSB) Capture/Compare/PWM Register x High Byte (MSB) GIE TMR1GIE OSFIE -- TMR1GIF OSFIF -- TMR1GE PEIE ADIE C2IE CCP5IE ADIF C2IF CCP5IF T1GPOL TMR0IE RCIE C1IE CCP4IE RCIF C1IF CCP4IF T1GTM INTE TXIE EEIE CCP3IE TXIF EEIF CCP3IF T1GSPM TMR1CS<1:0> T1CKPS<1:0> T1GSS<1:0> Holding Register for the Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register Holding Register for the Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register TRISA7 TRISB7 TRISC7 TRISD7 -- TRISA6 TRISB6 TRISC6 TRISD6 -- TRISA5 TRISB5 TRISC5 TRISD5 -- TRISA4 TRISB4 TRISC4 TRISD4 -- TRISA3 TRISB3 TRISC3 TRISD3 TRISE3 TRISA2 TRISB2 TRISC2 TRISD2 TRISE2 Legend: -- = Unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by Capture mode. Note 1: Applies to ECCP modules only. * Page provides register information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 209 PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.2 Compare Mode 22.2.2 TIMER1 MODE RESOURCE The Compare mode function described in this section is available and identical for CCP modules ECCP1, ECCP2, ECCP3, CCP4 and CCP5. Compare mode makes use of the 16-bit Timer1 resource. The 16-bit value of the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair is constantly compared against the 16-bit value of the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair. When a match occurs, one of the following events can occur: * * * * * Toggle the CCPx output Set the CCPx output Clear the CCPx output Generate a Special Event Trigger Generate a Software Interrupt In Compare mode, Timer1 must be running in either Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode. The compare operation may not work in Asynchronous Counter mode. See Section 20.0 "Timer1 Module with Gate Control" for more information on configuring Timer1. Note: Clocking Timer1 from the system clock (FOSC) should not be used in Capture mode. In order for Capture mode to recognize the trigger event on the CCPx pin, TImer1 must be clocked from the instruction clock (FOSC/4) or from an external clock source. The action on the pin is based on the value of the CCPxM<3:0> control bits of the CCPxCON register. At the same time, the interrupt flag CCPxIF bit is set. All Compare modes can generate an interrupt. Figure 22-2 shows a simplified diagram of the Compare operation. 22.2.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE When Generate Software Interrupt mode is chosen (CCPxM<3:0> = 1010), the CCPx module does not assert control of the CCPx pin (see the CCPxCON register). 22.2.4 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER FIGURE 22-2: COMPARE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM CCPxM<3:0> Mode Select Set CCPxIF Interrupt Flag (PIRx) 4 CCPRxH CCPRxL When Special Event Trigger mode is chosen (CCPxM<3:0> = 1011), the CCPx module does the following: * Resets Timer1 * Starts an ADC conversion if ADC is enabled (CCP5 only) The CCPx module does not assert control of the CCPx pin in this mode. The Special Event Trigger output of the CCP occurs immediately upon a match between the TMR1H, TMR1L register pair and the CCPRxH, CCPRxL register pair. The TMR1H, TMR1L register pair is not reset until the next rising edge of the Timer1 clock. The Special Event Trigger output starts an A/D conversion (if the A/D module is enabled). This feature is only available on CCP5. This allows the CCPRxH, CCPRxL register pair to effectively provide a 16-bit programmable period register for Timer1. Note 1: The Special Event Trigger from the CCP module does not set interrupt flag bit TMR1IF of the PIR1 register. 2: Removing the match condition by changing the contents of the CCPRxH and CCPRxL register pair, between the clock edge that generates the Special Event Trigger and the clock edge that generates the Timer1 Reset, will preclude the Reset from occurring. CCPx Pin Q S R Output Logic Match Comparator TMR1H TMR1L TRIS Output Enable Special Event Trigger Special Event Trigger will: * CCP<4:1>: Reset Timer1, but not set interrupt flag bit TMR1IF. * CCP5: Reset Timer1, but not set interrupt flag bit and set bit GO/DONE (ADCON0<1>). 22.2.1 CCP PIN CONFIGURATION The user must configure the CCPx pin as an output by clearing the associated TRIS bit. Also, the CCPx pin function can be moved to alternative pins using the APFCON register. Refer to Section 12.1 "Alternate Pin Function" for more details. Note: Clearing the CCPxCON register will force the CCPx compare output latch to the default low level. This is not the PORT I/O data latch. DS41414A-page 210 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.2.5 COMPARE DURING SLEEP The Compare mode is dependent upon the system clock (FOSC) for proper operation. Since FOSC is shut down during Sleep mode, the Compare mode will not function properly during Sleep. TABLE 22-3: Name CCPxCON CCPRxL CCPRxH INTCON PIE1 PIE2 PIE3 PIR1 PIR2 PIR3 T1CON T1GCON TMR1L TMR1H TRISA TRISB TRISC TRISD TRISE SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page 229 208* 208* IOCIE SSPIE BCLIE TMR6IE SSPIF BCLIF TMR6IF T1OSCEN T1GGO/DONE TMR0IF CCP1IE LCDIE -- CCP1IF LCDIF -- T1SYNC T1GVAL INTF TMR2IE -- TMR4IE TMR2IF -- TMR4IF -- IOCIF TMR1IE CCP2IE -- TMR1IF CCP2IF -- TMR1ON 89 90 91 92 94 95 96 199 200 195* 195* TRISA1 TRISB1 TRISC1 TRISD1 TRISE1 TRISA0 TRISB0 TRISC0 TRISD0 TRISE0 124 127 130 133 136 PxM<1:0>(1) DCxB<1:0> CCPxM<3:0> Capture/Compare/PWM Register x Low Byte (LSB) Capture/Compare/PWM Register x High Byte (MSB) GIE TMR1GIE OSFIE -- TMR1GIF OSFIF -- TMR1GE PEIE ADIE C2IE CCP5IE ADIF C2IF CCP5IF T1GPOL TMR0IE RCIE C1IE CCP4IE RCIF C1IF CCP4IF T1GTM INTE TXIE EEIE CCP3IE TXIF EEIF CCP3IF T1GSPM TMR1CS<1:0> T1CKPS<1:0> T1GSS<1:0> Holding Register for the Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register Holding Register for the Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register TRISA7 TRISB7 TRISC7 TRISD7 -- TRISA6 TRISB6 TRISC6 TRISD6 -- TRISA5 TRISB5 TRISC5 TRISD5 -- TRISA4 TRISB4 TRISC4 TRISD4 -- TRISA3 TRISB3 TRISC3 TRISD3 TRISE3 TRISA2 TRISB2 TRISC2 TRISD2 TRISE2 Legend: -- = Unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by Compare mode. Note 1: Applies to ECCP modules only. * Page provides register information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 211 PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.3 PWM Overview FIGURE 22-3: Period Pulse Width CCP PWM OUTPUT SIGNAL Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) is a scheme that provides power to a load by switching quickly between fully on and fully off states. The PWM signal resembles a square wave where the high portion of the signal is considered the on state and the low portion of the signal is considered the off state. The high portion, also known as the pulse width, can vary in time and is defined in steps. A larger number of steps applied, which lengthens the pulse width, also supplies more power to the load. Lowering the number of steps applied, which shortens the pulse width, supplies less power. The PWM period is defined as the duration of one complete cycle or the total amount of on and off time combined. PWM resolution defines the maximum number of steps that can be present in a single PWM period. A higher resolution allows for more precise control of the pulse width time and in turn the power that is applied to the load. The term duty cycle describes the proportion of the on time to the off time and is expressed in percentages, where 0% is fully off and 100% is fully on. A lower duty cycle corresponds to less power applied and a higher duty cycle corresponds to more power applied. Figure 22-3 shows a typical waveform of the PWM signal. TMRx = PRx TMRx = CCPRxH:CCPxCON<5:4> TMRx = 0 FIGURE 22-4: SIMPLIFIED PWM BLOCK DIAGRAM CCPxCON<5:4> Duty Cycle Registers CCPRxL CCPRxH(2) (Slave) CCPx Comparator (1) R S Q TMRx TRIS Comparator 22.3.1 STANDARD PWM OPERATION Note 1: PRx Clear Timer, toggle CCPx pin and latch duty cycle The standard PWM function described in this section is available and identical for CCP modules ECCP1, ECCP2, ECCP3, CCP4 and CCP5. The standard PWM mode generates a Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) signal on the CCPx pin with up to 10 bits of resolution. The period, duty cycle, and resolution are controlled by the following registers: * * * * PRx registers TxCON registers CCPRxL registers CCPxCON registers 2: The 8-bit timer TMRx register is concatenated with the 2-bit internal system clock (FOSC), or 2 bits of the prescaler, to create the 10-bit time base. In PWM mode, CCPRxH is a read-only register. Figure 22-4 shows a simplified block diagram of PWM operation. Note 1: The corresponding TRIS bit must be cleared to enable the PWM output on the CCPx pin. 2: Clearing the CCPxCON register will relinquish control of the CCPx pin. DS41414A-page 212 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.3.2 SETUP FOR PWM OPERATION The following steps should be taken when configuring the CCP module for standard PWM operation: 1. 2. 3. Disable the CCPx pin output driver by setting the associated TRIS bit. Load the PRx register with the PWM period value. Configure the CCP module for the PWM mode by loading the CCPxCON register with the appropriate values. Load the CCPRxL register and the DCxBx bits of the CCPxCON register, with the PWM duty cycle value. Configure and start Timer2/4/6: * Select the Timer2/4/6 resource to be used for PWM generation by setting the CxTSEL<1:0> bits in the CCPTMRSx register. * Clear the TMRxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register. See Note below. * Configure the TxCKPS bits of the TxCON register with the Timer prescale value. * Enable the Timer by setting the TMRxON bit of the TxCON register. Enable PWM output pin: * Wait until the Timer overflows and the TMRxIF bit of the PIRx register is set. See Note below. * Enable the CCPx pin output driver by clearing the associated TRIS bit. Note: In order to send a complete duty cycle and period on the first PWM output, the above steps must be included in the setup sequence. If it is not critical to start with a complete PWM signal on the first output, then step 6 may be ignored. When TMRx is equal to PRx, the following three events occur on the next increment cycle: * TMRx is cleared * The CCPx pin is set. (Exception: If the PWM duty cycle = 0%, the pin will not be set.) * The PWM duty cycle is latched from CCPRxL into CCPRxH. Note: The Timer postscaler (see Section 21.0 "Timer2/4/6 Modules") is not used in the determination of the PWM frequency. 4. 22.3.5 PWM DUTY CYCLE 5. The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing a 10-bit value to multiple registers: CCPRxL register and DCxB<1:0> bits of the CCPxCON register. The CCPRxL contains the eight MSbs and the DCxB<1:0> bits of the CCPxCON register contain the two LSbs. CCPRxL and DCxB<1:0> bits of the CCPxCON register can be written to at any time. The duty cycle value is not latched into CCPRxH until after the period completes (i.e., a match between PRx and TMRx registers occurs). While using the PWM, the CCPRxH register is read-only. Equation 22-2 is used to calculate the PWM pulse width. Equation 22-2 is used to calculate the PWM duty cycle ratio. 6. EQUATION 22-2: PULSE WIDTH Pulse Width = CCPRxL:CCPxCON<5:4> TOSC (TMRx Prescale Value) EQUATION 22-3: DUTY CYCLE RATIO 22.3.3 TIMER2/4/6 TIMER RESOURCE The PWM standard mode makes use of one of the 8-bit Timer2/4/6 timer resources to specify the PWM period. Configuring the CxTSEL<1:0> bits in the CCPTMRSx register selects which Timer2/4/6 timer is used. CCPRxL:CCPxCON<5:4> Duty Cycle Ratio = ---------------------------------------------------------------------4 PRx + 1 The CCPRxH register and a 2-bit internal latch are used to double buffer the PWM duty cycle. This double buffering is essential for glitchless PWM operation. The 8-bit timer TMRx register is concatenated with either the 2-bit internal system clock (FOSC), or 2 bits of the prescaler, to create the 10-bit time base. The system clock is used if the Timer2/4/6 prescaler is set to 1:1. When the 10-bit time base matches the CCPRxH and 2-bit latch, then the CCPx pin is cleared (see Figure 22-4). 22.3.4 PWM PERIOD The PWM period is specified by the PRx register of Timer2/4/6. The PWM period can be calculated using the formula of Equation 22-1. EQUATION 22-1: PWM PERIOD (TMRx Prescale Value) PWM Period = PRx + 1 4 TOSC Note 1: TOSC = 1/FOSC 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 213 PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.3.6 PWM RESOLUTION EQUATION 22-4: PWM RESOLUTION The resolution determines the number of available duty cycles for a given period. For example, a 10-bit resolution will result in 1024 discrete duty cycles, whereas an 8-bit resolution will result in 256 discrete duty cycles. The maximum PWM resolution is 10 bits when PRx is 255. The resolution is a function of the PRx register value as shown by Equation 22-4. Note: log 4 PRx + 1 Resolution = ----------------------------------------- bits log 2 If the pulse width value is greater than the period the assigned PWM pin(s) will remain unchanged. TABLE 22-4: EXAMPLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS (FOSC = 32 MHz) 1.95 kHz 16 0xFF 10 7.81 kHz 4 0xFF 10 31.25 kHz 1 0xFF 10 125 kHz 1 0x3F 8 250 kHz 1 0x1F 7 333.3 kHz 1 0x17 6.6 PWM Frequency Timer Prescale (1, 4, 16) PRx Value Maximum Resolution (bits) TABLE 22-5: EXAMPLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS (FOSC = 20 MHz) 1.22 kHz 16 0xFF 10 4.88 kHz 4 0xFF 10 19.53 kHz 1 0xFF 10 78.12 kHz 1 0x3F 8 156.3 kHz 1 0x1F 7 208.3 kHz 1 0x17 6.6 PWM Frequency Timer Prescale (1, 4, 16) PRx Value Maximum Resolution (bits) TABLE 22-6: EXAMPLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS (FOSC = 8 MHz) 1.22 kHz 16 0x65 8 4.90 kHz 4 0x65 8 19.61 kHz 1 0x65 8 76.92 kHz 1 0x19 6 153.85 kHz 1 0x0C 5 200.0 kHz 1 0x09 5 PWM Frequency Timer Prescale (1, 4, 16) PRx Value Maximum Resolution (bits) DS41414A-page 214 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.3.7 OPERATION IN SLEEP MODE In Sleep mode, the TMRx register will not increment and the state of the module will not change. If the CCPx pin is driving a value, it will continue to drive that value. When the device wakes up, TMRx will continue from its previous state. 22.3.8 CHANGES IN SYSTEM CLOCK FREQUENCY The PWM frequency is derived from the system clock frequency. Any changes in the system clock frequency will result in changes to the PWM frequency. See Section 5.0 "Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)" for additional details. 22.3.9 EFFECTS OF RESET Any Reset will force all ports to Input mode and the CCP registers to their Reset states. TABLE 22-7: Name CCPxCON CCPTMRS0 CCPTMRS1 INTCON PIE1 PIE2 PIE3 PIR1 PIR2 PIR3 PRx TxCON TMRx TRISA TRISB TRISC TRISD TRISE SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH STANDARD PWM Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page 229 230 231 89 90 91 92 94 95 96 203* TxOUTPS<3:0> TMRxON TxCKPS<:0>1 205 203 TRISA5 TRISB5 TRISC5 TRISD5 -- TRISA4 TRISB4 TRISC4 TRISD4 -- TRISA3 TRISB3 TRISC3 TRISD3 TRISE3 TRISA2 TRISB2 TRISC2 TRISD2 TRISE2 TRISA1 TRISB1 TRISC1 TRISD1 TRISE1 TRISA0 TRISB0 TRISC0 TRISD0 TRISE0 124 127 130 133 136 PxM<1:0>(1) C4TSEL<1:0> -- GIE TMR1GIE OSFIE -- TMR1GIF OSFIF -- -- Timer2/4/6 Module Register TRISA7 TRISB7 TRISC7 TRISD7 -- TRISA6 TRISB6 TRISC6 TRISD6 -- -- PEIE ADIE C2IE CCP5IE ADIF C2IF CCP5IF DCxB<1:0> C3TSEL<1:0> -- TMR0IE RCIE C1IE CCP4IE RCIF C1IF CCP4IF -- INTE TXIE EEIE CCP3IE TXIF EEIF CCP3IF CCPxM<3:0> C2TSEL<1:0> -- IOCIE SSPIE BCLIE TMR6IE SSPIF BCLIF TMR6IF -- TMR0IF CCP1IE LCDIE -- CCP1IF LCDIF -- C1TSEL<1:0> C5TSEL<1:0> INTF TMR2IE -- TMR4IE TMR2IF -- TMR4IF IOCIF TMR1IE CCP2IE -- TMR1IF CCP2IF -- Timer2/4/6 Period Register Legend: -- = Unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the PWM. Note 1: Applies to ECCP modules only. * Page provides register information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 215 PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.4 PWM (Enhanced Mode) The enhanced PWM function described in this section is available for CCP modules ECCP1, ECCP2 and ECCP3, with any differences between modules noted. The enhanced PWM mode generates a Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) signal on up to four different output pins with up to 10 bits of resolution. The period, duty cycle, and resolution are controlled by the following registers: * * * * PRx registers TxCON registers CCPRxL registers CCPxCON registers To select an Enhanced PWM Output mode, the PxM bits of the CCPxCON register must be configured appropriately. The PWM outputs are multiplexed with I/O pins and are designated PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD. The polarity of the PWM pins is configurable and is selected by setting the CCPxM bits in the CCPxCON register appropriately. Figure 22-5 shows an example of a simplified block diagram of the Enhanced PWM module. Table 22-8 shows the pin assignments for various Enhanced PWM modes. Note 1: The corresponding TRIS bit must be cleared to enable the PWM output on the CCPx pin. 2: Clearing the CCPxCON register will relinquish control of the CCPx pin. 3: Any pin not used in the enhanced PWM mode is available for alternate pin functions, if applicable. 4: To prevent the generation of an incomplete waveform when the PWM is first enabled, the ECCP module waits until the start of a new PWM period before generating a PWM signal. The ECCP modules have the following additional PWM registers which control Auto-shutdown, Auto-restart, Dead-band Delay and PWM Steering modes: * CCPxAS registers * PSTRxCON registers * PWMxCON registers The enhanced PWM module can generate the following five PWM Output modes: * * * * * Single PWM Half-Bridge PWM Full-Bridge PWM, Forward Mode Full-Bridge PWM, Reverse Mode Single PWM with PWM Steering Mode FIGURE 22-5: Duty Cycle Registers CCPRxL EXAMPLE SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE ENHANCED PWM MODE DCxB<1:0> PxM<1:0> 2 CCPxM<3:0> 4 CCPx/PxA TRISx CCPRxH (Slave) Comparator R Q PxB Output Controller PxC TMRx (1) S PxD Clear Timer, toggle PWM pin and latch duty cycle PWMxCON TRISx TRISx TRISx CCPx/PxA PxB PxC Comparator PxD PRx Note 1: The 8-bit timer TMRx register is concatenated with the 2-bit internal Q clock, or 2 bits of the prescaler to create the 10-bit time base. DS41414A-page 216 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 22-8: ECCP Mode Single Half-Bridge Full-Bridge, Forward Full-Bridge, Reverse Note 1: EXAMPLE PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR VARIOUS PWM ENHANCED MODES PxM<1:0> 00 10 01 11 CCPx/PxA Yes(1) Yes Yes Yes PxB Yes(1) Yes Yes Yes PxC Yes(1) No Yes Yes PxD Yes(1) No Yes Yes PWM Steering enables outputs in Single mode. FIGURE 22-6: PxM<1:0> EXAMPLE PWM (ENHANCED MODE) OUTPUT RELATIONSHIPS (ACTIVE-HIGH STATE) Signal 0 Pulse Width Period PRX+1 00 (Single Output) PxA Modulated Delay PxA Modulated Delay 10 (Half-Bridge) PxB Modulated PxA Active 01 (Full-Bridge, Forward) PxB Inactive PxC Inactive PxD Modulated PxA Inactive 11 (Full-Bridge, Reverse) PxB Modulated PxC Active PxD Inactive Relationships: * Period = 4 * TOSC * (PRx + 1) * (TMRx Prescale Value) * Pulse Width = TOSC * (CCPRxL<7:0>:CCPxCON<5:4>) * (TMRx Prescale Value) * Delay = 4 * TOSC * (PWMxCON<6:0>) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 217 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 22-7: PxM<1:0> EXAMPLE ENHANCED PWM OUTPUT RELATIONSHIPS (ACTIVE-LOW STATE) Signal 0 Pulse Width Period PRx+1 00 (Single Output) PxA Modulated PxA Modulated 10 (Half-Bridge) Delay PxB Modulated PxA Active Delay 01 (Full-Bridge, Forward) PxB Inactive PxC Inactive PxD Modulated PxA Inactive 11 (Full-Bridge, Reverse) PxB Modulated PxC Active PxD Inactive Relationships: * Period = 4 * TOSC * (PRx + 1) * (TMRx Prescale Value) * Pulse Width = TOSC * (CCPRxL<7:0>:CCPxCON<5:4>) * (TMRx Prescale Value) * Delay = 4 * TOSC * (PWMxCON<6:0>) DS41414A-page 218 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.4.1 HALF-BRIDGE MODE In Half-Bridge mode, two pins are used as outputs to drive push-pull loads. The PWM output signal is output on the CCPx/PxA pin, while the complementary PWM output signal is output on the PxB pin (see Figure 22-9). This mode can be used for Half-Bridge applications, as shown in Figure 22-9, or for Full-Bridge applications, where four power switches are being modulated with two PWM signals. In Half-Bridge mode, the programmable dead-band delay can be used to prevent shoot-through current in Half-Bridge power devices. The value of the PDC<6:0> bits of the PWMxCON register sets the number of instruction cycles before the output is driven active. If the value is greater than the duty cycle, the corresponding output remains inactive during the entire cycle. See Section 22.4.5 "Programmable Dead-Band Delay Mode" for more details of the dead-band delay operations. Since the PxA and PxB outputs are multiplexed with the PORT data latches, the associated TRIS bits must be cleared to configure PxA and PxB as outputs. FIGURE 22-8: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT Period Period Pulse Width PxA(2) td PxB(2) (1) td (1) (1) td = Dead-Band Delay Note 1: 2: At this time, the TMRx register is equal to the PRx register. Output signals are shown as active-high. FIGURE 22-9: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE APPLICATIONS Standard Half-Bridge Circuit ("Push-Pull") FET Driver PxA + Load + - FET Driver PxB Half-Bridge Output Driving a Full-Bridge Circuit V+ FET Driver PxA Load FET Driver FET Driver PxB FET Driver 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 219 PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.4.2 FULL-BRIDGE MODE In Full-Bridge mode, all four pins are used as outputs. An example of Full-Bridge application is shown in Figure 22-10. In the Forward mode, pin CCPx/PxA is driven to its active state, pin PxD is modulated, while PxB and PxC will be driven to their inactive state as shown in Figure 22-11. In the Reverse mode, PxC is driven to its active state, pin PxB is modulated, while PxA and PxD will be driven to their inactive state as shown Figure 22-11. PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD outputs are multiplexed with the PORT data latches. The associated TRIS bits must be cleared to configure the PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD pins as outputs. FIGURE 22-10: EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE APPLICATION V+ FET Driver PxA QA QC FET Driver PxB FET Driver Load FET Driver PxC QB QD VPxD DS41414A-page 220 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 22-11: Forward Mode Period PxA (2) EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT Pulse Width PxB(2) PxC(2) PxD(2) (1) (1) Reverse Mode Period Pulse Width PxA(2) PxB(2) PxC(2) PxD(2) (1) (1) Note 1: 2: At this time, the TMRx register is equal to the PRx register. Output signal is shown as active-high. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 221 PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.4.2.1 Direction Change in Full-Bridge Mode In the Full-Bridge mode, the PxM1 bit in the CCPxCON register allows users to control the forward/reverse direction. When the application firmware changes this direction control bit, the module will change to the new direction on the next PWM cycle. A direction change is initiated in software by changing the PxM1 bit of the CCPxCON register. The following sequence occurs four Timer cycles prior to the end of the current PWM period: * The modulated outputs (PxB and PxD) are placed in their inactive state. * The associated unmodulated outputs (PxA and PxC) are switched to drive in the opposite direction. * PWM modulation resumes at the beginning of the next period. See Figure 22-12 for an illustration of this sequence. The Full-Bridge mode does not provide dead-band delay. As one output is modulated at a time, dead-band delay is generally not required. There is a situation where dead-band delay is required. This situation occurs when both of the following conditions are true: 1. 2. The direction of the PWM output changes when the duty cycle of the output is at or near 100%. The turn off time of the power switch, including the power device and driver circuit, is greater than the turn on time. Figure 22-13 shows an example of the PWM direction changing from forward to reverse, at a near 100% duty cycle. In this example, at time t1, the output PxA and PxD become inactive, while output PxC becomes active. Since the turn-off time of the power devices is longer than the turn-on time, a shoot-through current will flow through power devices QC and QD (see Figure 22-10) for the duration of `t'. The same phenomenon will occur to power devices QA and QB for PWM direction change from reverse to forward. If changing PWM direction at high duty cycle is required for an application, two possible solutions for eliminating the shoot-through current are: 1. 2. Reduce PWM duty cycle for one PWM period before changing directions. Use switch drivers that can drive the switches off faster than they can drive them on. Other options to prevent shoot-through current may exist. FIGURE 22-12: Signal EXAMPLE OF PWM DIRECTION CHANGE Period(1) Period PxA (Active-High) PxB (Active-High) PxC (Active-High) PxD (Active-High) Pulse Width Note 1: 2: The direction bit PxM1 of the CCPxCON register is written any time during the PWM cycle. When changing directions, the PxA and PxC signals switch before the end of the current PWM cycle. The modulated PxB and PxD signals are inactive at this time. The length of this time is four Timer counts. (2) Pulse Width DS41414A-page 222 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 22-13: EXAMPLE OF PWM DIRECTION CHANGE AT NEAR 100% DUTY CYCLE Forward Period t1 Reverse Period PxA PxB PxC PxD PW PW TON External Switch C TOFF External Switch D Potential Shoot-Through Current T = TOFF - TON Note 1: 2: 3: All signals are shown as active-high. TON is the turn on delay of power switch QC and its driver. TOFF is the turn off delay of power switch QD and its driver. 22.4.3 ENHANCED PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN MODE The PWM mode supports an Auto-Shutdown mode that will disable the PWM outputs when an external shutdown event occurs. Auto-Shutdown mode places the PWM output pins into a predetermined state. This mode is used to help prevent the PWM from damaging the application. The auto-shutdown sources are selected using the CCPxAS<2:0> bits of the CCPxAS register. A shutdown event may be generated by: * A logic `0' on the INT pin * A logic `1' on a Comparator (Cx) output A shutdown condition is indicated by the CCPxASE (Auto-Shutdown Event Status) bit of the CCPxAS register. If the bit is a `0', the PWM pins are operating normally. If the bit is a `1', the PWM outputs are in the shutdown state. When a shutdown event occurs, two things happen: The CCPxASE bit is set to `1'. The CCPxASE will remain set until cleared in firmware or an auto-restart occurs (see Section 22.4.4 "Auto-Restart Mode"). The enabled PWM pins are asynchronously placed in their shutdown states. The PWM output pins are grouped into pairs [PxA/PxC] and [PxB/PxD]. The state of each pin pair is determined by the PSSxAC and PSSxBD bits of the CCPxAS register. Each pin pair may be placed into one of three states: * Drive logic `1' * Drive logic `0' * Tri-state (high-impedance) Note 1: The auto-shutdown condition is a level-based signal, not an edge-based signal. As long as the level is present, the auto-shutdown will persist. 2: Writing to the CCPxASE bit is disabled while an auto-shutdown condition persists. 3: Once the auto-shutdown condition has been removed and the PWM restarted (either through firmware or auto-restart) the PWM signal will always restart at the beginning of the next PWM period. 4: Prior to an auto-shutdown event caused by a comparator output or INT pin event, a software shutdown can be triggered in firmware by setting the CCPxASE bit to a `1'. The auto-restart feature tracks the active status of a shutdown caused by a comparator output or INT pin event only, so if it is enabled at this time, it will immediately clear this bit and restart the ECCP module at the beginning of the next PWM period. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 223 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 22-14: PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN WITH FIRMWARE RESTART (PXRSEN = 0) Missing Pulse (Auto-Shutdown) Timer Overflow Timer Overflow PWM Period PWM Activity Start of PWM Period Shutdown Event CCPxASE bit Shutdown Event Occurs Shutdown Event Clears PWM Resumes CCPxASE Cleared by Firmware Timer Overflow Missing Pulse (CCPxASE not clear) Timer Overflow Timer Overflow 22.4.4 AUTO-RESTART MODE The Enhanced PWM can be configured to automatically restart the PWM signal once the auto-shutdown condition has been removed. Auto-restart is enabled by setting the PxRSEN bit in the PWMxCON register. If auto-restart is enabled, the CCPxASE bit will remain set as long as the auto-shutdown condition is active. When the auto-shutdown condition is removed, the CCPxASE bit will be cleared via hardware and normal operation will resume. FIGURE 22-15: PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN WITH AUTO-RESTART (PXRSEN = 1) Missing Pulse (Auto-Shutdown) Timer Overflow Timer Overflow PWM Period Timer Overflow Missing Pulse (CCPxASE not clear) Timer Overflow Timer Overflow PWM Activity Start of PWM Period Shutdown Event CCPxASE bit Shutdown Event Occurs Shutdown Event Clears PWM Resumes CCPxASE Cleared by Hardware DS41414A-page 224 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.4.5 PROGRAMMABLE DEAD-BAND DELAY MODE FIGURE 22-16: In Half-Bridge applications where all power switches are modulated at the PWM frequency, the power switches normally require more time to turn off than to turn on. If both the upper and lower power switches are switched at the same time (one turned on, and the other turned off), both switches may be on for a short period of time until one switch completely turns off. During this brief interval, a very high current (shoot-through current) will flow through both power switches, shorting the bridge supply. To avoid this potentially destructive shoot-through current from flowing during switching, turning on either of the power switches is normally delayed to allow the other switch to completely turn off. In Half-Bridge mode, a digitally programmable dead-band delay is available to avoid shoot-through current from destroying the bridge power switches. The delay occurs at the signal transition from the non-active state to the active state. See Figure 22-16 for illustration. The lower seven bits of the associated PWMxCON register (Register 22-5) sets the delay period in terms of microcontroller instruction cycles (TCY or 4 TOSC). EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT Period Period Pulse Width PxA(2) td PxB(2) (1) td (1) (1) td = Dead-Band Delay Note 1: 2: At this time, the TMRx register is equal to the PRx register. Output signals are shown as active-high. FIGURE 22-17: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE APPLICATIONS V+ Standard Half-Bridge Circuit ("Push-Pull") FET Driver PxA + V Load FET Driver PxB + V - V- 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 225 PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.4.6 PWM STEERING MODE In Single Output mode, PWM steering allows any of the PWM pins to be the modulated signal. Additionally, the same PWM signal can be simultaneously available on multiple pins. Once the Single Output mode is selected (CCPxM<3:2> = 11 and PxM<1:0> = 00 of the CCPxCON register), the user firmware can bring out the same PWM signal to one, two, three or four output pins by setting the appropriate STRx While the PWM Steering mode is active, CCPxM<1:0> bits of the CCPxCON register select the PWM output polarity for the Px FIGURE 22-18: STRxA PxA Signal CCPxM1 PORT Data STRxB CCPxM0 PORT Data STRxC CCPxM1 PORT Data STRxD CCPxM0 PORT Data SIMPLIFIED STEERING BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 0 TRIS PxA pin 1 0 PxB pin TRIS 1 0 TRIS PxC pin 1 0 TRIS PxD pin Note 1: Port outputs are configured as shown when the CCPxCON register bits PxM<1:0> = 00 and CCPxM<3:2> = 11. Single PWM output requires setting at least one of the STRx bits. 2: DS41414A-page 226 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 22.4.6.1 Steering Synchronization The STRxSYNC bit of the PSTRxCON register gives the user two selections of when the steering event will happen. When the STRxSYNC bit is `0', the steering event will happen at the end of the instruction that writes to the PSTRxCON register. In this case, the output signal at the Px 22.4.7 START-UP CONSIDERATIONS When any PWM mode is used, the application hardware must use the proper external pull-up and/or pull-down resistors on the PWM output pins. The CCPxM<1:0> bits of the CCPxCON register allow the user to choose whether the PWM output signals are active-high or active-low for each pair of PWM output pins (PxA/PxC and PxB/PxD). The PWM output polarities must be selected before the PWM pin output FIGURE 22-19: EXAMPLE OF STEERING EVENT AT END OF INSTRUCTION (STRxSYNC = 0) PWM Period PWM STRx P1 PORT Data P1n = PWM PORT Data FIGURE 22-20: EXAMPLE OF STEERING EVENT AT BEGINNING OF INSTRUCTION (STRxSYNC = 1) PWM STRx P1 PORT Data P1n = PWM PORT Data 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 227 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 22-9: Name CCPxCON CCPxAS CCPTMRS0 CCPTMRS1 INTCON PIE1 PIE2 PIE3 PIR1 PIR2 PIR3 PRx PSTRxCON PWMxCON TxCON TMRx TRISA TRISB TRISC TRISD TRISE SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ENHANCED PWM Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page 229 232 230 231 89 90 91 92 94 95 96 203* -- STRxSYNC STRxD PxDC<6:0> TxOUTPS<3:0> TMRxON TxCKPS<:0>1 STRxC STRxB STRxA 234 233 205 203 TRISA5 TRISB5 TRISC5 TRISD5 -- TRISA4 TRISB4 TRISC4 TRISD4 -- TRISA3 TRISB3 TRISC3 TRISD3 TRISE3 TRISA2 TRISB2 TRISC2 TRISD2 TRISE2 TRISA1 TRISB1 TRISC1 TRISD1 TRISE1 TRISA0 TRISB0 TRISC0 TRISD0 TRISE0 216 216 216 216 216 PxM<1:0>(1) CCPxASE C4TSEL<1:0> -- GIE TMR1GIE OSFIE -- TMR1GIF OSFIF -- -- PxRSEN -- Timer2/4/6 Module Register TRISA7 TRISB7 TRISC7 TRISD7 -- TRISA6 TRISB6 TRISC6 TRISD6 -- -- PEIE ADIE C2IE CCP5IE ADIF C2IF CCP5IF -- DCxB<1:0> CCPxAS<2:0> C3TSEL<1:0> -- TMR0IE RCIE C1IE CCP4IE RCIF C1IF CCP4IF -- INTE TXIE EEIE CCP3IE TXIF EEIF CCP3IF CCPxM<3:0> PSSxAC<1:0> C2TSEL<1:0> -- IOCIE SSPIE BCLIE TMR6IE SSPIF BCLIF TMR6IF -- TMR0IF CCP1IE LCDIE -- CCP1IF LCDIF -- PSSxBD<1:0> C1TSEL<1:0> C5TSEL<1:0> INTF TMR2IE -- TMR4IE TMR2IF -- TMR4IF IOCIF TMR1IE CCP2IE -- TMR1IF CCP2IF -- Timer2/4/6 Period Register Legend: -- = Unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the PWM. Note 1: Applies to ECCP modules only. * Page provides register information. DS41414A-page 228 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 22-1: R/W-00 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared PxM<1:0>: Enhanced PWM Output Configuration bits(1) Capture mode: Unused Compare mode: Unused If CCPxM<3:2> = 00, 01, 10: xx = PxA assigned as Capture/Compare input; PxB, PxC, PxD assigned as port pins If CCPxM<3:2> = 11: 00 = Single output; PxA modulated; PxB, PxC, PxD assigned as port pins 01 = Full-Bridge output forward; PxD modulated; PxA active; PxB, PxC inactive 10 = Half-Bridge output; PxA, PxB modulated with dead-band control; PxC, PxD assigned as port pins 11 = Full-Bridge output reverse; PxB modulated; PxC active; PxA, PxD inactive bit 5-4 DCxB<1:0>: PWM Duty Cycle Least Significant bits Capture mode: Unused Compare mode: Unused PWM mode: These bits are the two LSbs of the PWM duty cycle. The eight MSbs are found in CCPRxL. bit 3-0 CCPxM<3:0>: ECCPx Mode Select bits 0000 = 0001 = 0010 = 0011 = 0100 = 0101 = 0110 = 0111 = 1000 = 1001 = 1010 = 1011 = Capture/Compare/PWM off (resets ECCPx module) Reserved Compare mode: toggle output on match Reserved Capture mode: every falling edge Capture mode: every rising edge Capture mode: every 4th rising edge Capture mode: every 16th rising edge Compare mode: initialize ECCPx pin low; set output on compare match (set CCPxIF) Compare mode: initialize ECCPx pin high; clear output on compare match (set CCPxIF) Compare mode: generate software interrupt only; ECCPx pin reverts to I/O state Compare mode: Special Event Trigger (ECCPx resets TMR1 or TMR3, sets CCPxIF bit, ECCP2 trigger also starts A/D conversion if A/D module is enabled)(1) U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Reset PxM<1:0>(1) CCPxCON: CCPx CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 DCxB<1:0> CCPxM<3:0> R/W-0/0 CCP4/CCP5 only: 11xx = PWM mode ECCP1/ECCP2/ECCP3 only: 1100 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-high; PxB, PxD active-high 1101 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-high; PxB, PxD active-low 1110 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-low; PxB, PxD active-high 1111 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-low; PxB, PxD active-low Note 1: These bits are not implemented on CCP<5:4>. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 229 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 22-2: R/W-0/0 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared C4TSEL<1:0>: CCP4 Timer Selection bits 00 = CCP4 is based off Timer 2 in PWM Mode 01 = CCP4 is based off Timer 4 in PWM Mode 10 = CCP4 is based off Timer 6 in PWM Mode 11 = Reserved C3TSEL<1:0>: CCP3 Timer Selection bits 00 = CCP3 is based off Timer 2 in PWM Mode 01 = CCP3 is based off Timer 4 in PWM Mode 10 = CCP3 is based off Timer 6 in PWM Mode 11 = Reserved C2TSEL<1:0>: CCP2 Timer Selection bits 00 = CCP2 is based off Timer 2 in PWM Mode 01 = CCP2 is based off Timer 4 in PWM Mode 10 = CCP2 is based off Timer 6 in PWM Mode 11 = Reserved C1TSEL<1:0>: CCP1 Timer Selection bits 00 = CCP1 is based off Timer 2 in PWM Mode 01 = CCP1 is based off Timer 4 in PWM Mode 10 = CCP1 is based off Timer 6 in PWM Mode 11 = Reserved U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets C4TSEL<1:0> CCPTMRS0: PWM TIMER SELECTION CONTROL REGISTER 0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 C3TSEL<1:0> C2TSEL<1:0> C1TSEL<1:0> R/W-0/0 bit 5-4 bit 3-2 bit 1-0 DS41414A-page 230 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 22-3: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-2 bit 1-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0' C5TSEL<1:0>: CCP5 Timer Selection bits 00 = CCP5 is based off Timer 2 in PWM Mode 01 = CCP5 is based off Timer 4 in PWM Mode 10 = CCP5 is based off Timer 6 in PWM Mode 11 = Reserved U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets CCPTMRS1: PWM TIMER SELECTION CONTROL REGISTER 1 U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 C5TSEL<1:0> 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 231 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 22-4: R/W-0/0 CCPxASE bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared CCPxASE: CCPx Auto-Shutdown Event Status bit 1 = A shutdown event has occurred; CCPx outputs are in shutdown state 0 = CCPx outputs are operating CCPxAS<2:0>: CCPx Auto-Shutdown Source Select bits 000 = Auto-shutdown is disabled 001 = Comparator C1 output high(1) 010 = Comparator C3 output high(1) 011 = Either Comparator C1 or C3 high(1) 100 = VIL on INT pin 101 = VIL on INT pin or Comparator C1 high(1) 110 = VIL on INT pin or Comparator C3 high(1) 111 = VIL on INT pin or Comparator C1 or Comparator C3 high(1) PSSxAC<1:0>: Pins PxA and PxC Shutdown State Control bits 00 = Drive pins PxA and PxC to `0' 01 = Drive pins PxA and PxC to `1' 1x = Pins PxA and PxC tri-state PSSxBD<1:0>: Pins PxB and PxD Shutdown State Control bits 00 = Drive pins PxB and PxD to `0' 01 = Drive pins PxB and PxD to `1' 1x = Pins PxB and PxD tri-state If CxSYNC is enabled, the shutdown will be delayed by Timer1. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets CCPxAS: CCPX AUTO-SHUTDOWN CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0/0 CCPxAS<2:0> R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 PSSxAC<1:0> PSSxBD<1:0> R/W-0/0 bit 6-4 bit 3-2 bit 1-0 Note 1: DS41414A-page 232 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 22-5: R/W-0/0 PxRSEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared PxRSEN: PWM Restart Enable bit 1 = Upon auto-shutdown, the CCPxASE bit clears automatically once the shutdown event goes away; the PWM restarts automatically 0 = Upon auto-shutdown, CCPxASE must be cleared in software to restart the PWM PxDC<6:0>: PWM Delay Count bits PxDCx = Number of FOSC/4 (4 * TOSC) cycles between the scheduled time when a PWM signal should transition active and the actual time it transitions active Bit resets to `0' with Two-Speed Start-up and LP, XT or HS selected as the Oscillator mode or Fail-Safe mode is enabled. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets PWMxCON: ENHANCED PWM CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 PxDC<6:0> bit 0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 6-0 Note 1: 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 233 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 22-6: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-5 bit 4 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0' STRxSYNC: Steering Sync bit 1 = Output steering update occurs on next PWM period 0 = Output steering update occurs at the beginning of the instruction cycle boundary STRxD: Steering Enable bit D 1 = PxD pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0> 0 = PxD pin is assigned to port pin STRxC: Steering Enable bit C 1 = PxC pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0> 0 = PxC pin is assigned to port pin STRxB: Steering Enable bit B 1 = PxB pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0> 0 = PxB pin is assigned to port pin STRxA: Steering Enable bit A 1 = PxA pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0> 0 = PxA pin is assigned to port pin The PWM Steering mode is available only when the CCPxCON register bits CCPxM<3:2> = 11 and PxM<1:0> = 00. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets PSTRxCON: PWM STEERING CONTROL REGISTER(1) U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0/0 STRxSYNC R/W-0/0 STRxD R/W-0/0 STRxC R/W-0/0 STRxB R/W-1/1 STRxA bit 0 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: DS41414A-page 234 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.0 MASTER SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL PORT (MSSP1 AND MSSP2) MODULE Master SSPx (MSSPx) Module Overview 23.1 The Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSPx) module is a serial interface useful for communicating with other peripheral or microcontroller devices. These peripheral devices may be Serial EEPROMs, shift registers, display drivers, A/D converters, etc. The MSSPx module can operate in one of two modes: * Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) * Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2CTM) The SPI interface supports the following modes and features: * * * * * Master mode Slave mode Clock Parity Slave Select Synchronization (Slave mode only) Daisy chain connection of slave devices Figure 23-1 is a block diagram of the SPI interface module. FIGURE 23-1: MSSPX BLOCK DIAGRAM (SPI MODE) Data Bus Read SSPxBUF Reg Write SDIx SSPxSR Reg SDOx bit 0 Shift Clock SSx SSx Control Enable Edge Select SSPxM<3:0> 4 2 (CKP, CKE) Clock Select SCKx Edge Select ( TMR22Output ) Prescaler TOSC 4, 16, 64 Baud rate generator (SSPxADD) TRIS bit 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 235 PIC16F/LF1946/47 The I2C interface supports the following modes and features: * * * * * * * * * * * * * Master mode Slave mode Byte NACKing (Slave mode) Limited Multi-master support 7-bit and 10-bit addressing Start and Stop interrupts Interrupt masking Clock stretching Bus collision detection General call address matching Address masking Address Hold and Data Hold modes Selectable SDAx hold times The PIC16F1947 has two MSSP modules, MSSP1 and MSSP2, each module operating independently from the other. Note 1: In devices with more than one MSSP module, it is very important to pay close attention to SSPxCONx register names. SSP1CON1 and SSP1CON2 registers control different operational aspects of the same module, while SSP1CON1 and SSP2CON1 control the same features for two different modules. 2: Throughout this section, generic references to an MSSP module in any of its operating modes may be interpreted as being equally applicable to MSSP1 or MSSP2. Register names, module I/O signals, and bit names may use the generic designator `x' to indicate the use of a numeral to distinguish a particular module when required. Figure 23-2 is a block diagram of the I2C interface module in Master mode. Figure 23-3 is a diagram of the I2C interface module in Slave mode. FIGURE 23-2: MSSPX BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2CTM MASTER MODE) Internal data bus Read SSPxBUF Write Baud rate generator (SSPxADD) Shift Clock SSPxSR Clock Cntl MSb Receive Enable (RCEN) LSb Clock arbitrate/BCOL detect (Hold off clock source) [SSPxM 3:0] SDAx SDAx in Start bit, Stop bit, Acknowledge Generate (SSPxCON2) SCLx SCLx in Bus Collision Start bit detect, Stop bit detect Write collision detect Clock arbitration State counter for end of XMIT/RCV Address Match detect Set/Reset: S, P, SSPxSTAT, WCOL, SSPxOV Reset SEN, PEN (SSPxCON2) Set SSPxIF, BCLxIF DS41414A-page 236 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 23-3: MSSPx BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2CTM SLAVE MODE) Internal Data Bus Read SSPxBUF Reg Shift Clock SSPxSR Reg SDAx MSb LSb Write SCLx SSPxMSK Reg Match Detect SSPxADD Reg Start and Stop bit Detect Set, Reset S, P bits (SSPxSTAT Reg) Addr Match 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 237 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.2 SPI Mode Overview The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus is a synchronous serial data communication bus that operates in Full Duplex mode. Devices communicate in a master/slave environment where the master device initiates the communication. A slave device is controlled through a chip select known as Slave Select. The SPI bus specifies four signal connections: * * * * Serial Clock (SCKx) Serial Data Out (SDOx) Serial Data In (SDIx) Slave Select (SSx) its SDOx pin) and the slave device is reading this bit and saving it as the LSb of its shift register, that the slave device is also sending out the MSb from its shift register (on its SDOx pin) and the master device is reading this bit and saving it as the LSb of its shift register. After 8 bits have been shifted out, the master and slave have exchanged register values. If there is more data to exchange, the shift registers are loaded with new data and the process repeats itself. Whether the data is meaningful or not (dummy data), depends on the application software. This leads to three scenarios for data transmission: * Master sends useful data and slave sends dummy data. * Master sends useful data and slave sends useful data. * Master sends dummy data and slave sends useful data. Transmissions may involve any number of clock cycles. When there is no more data to be transmitted, the master stops sending the clock signal and it deselects the slave. Every slave device connected to the bus that has not been selected through its slave select line must disregard the clock and transmission signals and must not transmit out any data of its own. Figure 23-1 shows the block diagram of the MSSPx module when operating in SPI Mode. The SPI bus operates with a single master device and one or more slave devices. When multiple slave devices are used, an independent Slave Select connection is required from the master device to each slave device. Figure 23-4 shows a typical connection between a master device and multiple slave devices. The master selects only one slave at a time. Most slave devices have tri-state outputs so their output signal appears disconnected from the bus when they are not selected. Transmissions involve two shift registers, eight bits in size, one in the master and one in the slave. With either the master or the slave device, data is always shifted out one bit at a time, with the Most Significant bit (MSb) shifted out first. At the same time, a new Least Significant bit (LSb) is shifted into the same register. Figure 23-5 shows a typical connection between two processors configured as master and slave devices. Data is shifted out of both shift registers on the programmed clock edge and latched on the opposite edge of the clock. The master device transmits information out on its SDOx output pin which is connected to, and received by, the slave's SDIx input pin. The slave device transmits information out on its SDOx output pin, which is connected to, and received by, the master's SDIx input pin. To begin communication, the master device first sends out the clock signal. Both the master and the slave devices should be configured for the same clock polarity. The master device starts a transmission by sending out the MSb from its shift register. The slave device reads this bit from that same line and saves it into the LSb position of its shift register. During each SPI clock cycle, a full duplex data transmission occurs. This means that while the master device is sending out the MSb from its shift register (on DS41414A-page 238 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 23-4: SPI MASTER AND MULTIPLE SLAVE CONNECTION SCKx SDOx SDIx General I/O General I/O General I/O SCKx SDIx SDOx SSx SCKx SDIx SDOx SSx SCKx SDIx SDOx SSx SPI Slave #3 SPI Slave #2 SPI Slave #1 SPI Master 23.2.1 SPI MODE REGISTERS The MSSPx module has five registers for SPI mode operation. These are: * * * * * * MSSPx STATUS register (SSPxSTAT) MSSPx Control Register 1 (SSPxCON1) MSSPx Control Register 3 (SSPxCON3) MSSPx Data Buffer register (SSPxBUF) MSSPx Address register (SSPxADD) MSSPx Shift register (SSPxSR) (Not directly accessible) SSPxCON1 and SSPxSTAT are the control and STATUS registers in SPI mode operation. The SSPxCON1 register is readable and writable. The lower 6 bits of the SSPxSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPxSTAT are read/write. In one SPI master mode, SSPxADD can be loaded with a value used in the Baud Rate Generator. More information on the Baud Rate Generator is available in Section 23.7 "Baud Rate Generator". SSPxSR is the shift register used for shifting data in and out. SSPxBUF provides indirect access to the SSPxSR register. SSPxBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written, and from which data bytes are read. In receive operations, SSPxSR and SSPxBUF together create a buffered receiver. When SSPxSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPxBUF and the SSPxIF interrupt is set. During transmission, the SSPxBUF is not buffered. A write to SSPxBUF will write to both SSPxBUF and SSPxSR. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 239 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.2.2 SPI MODE OPERATION When initializing the SPI, several options need to be specified. This is done by programming the appropriate control bits (SSPxCON1<5:0> and SSPxSTAT<7:6>). These control bits allow the following to be specified: Master mode (SCKx is the clock output) Slave mode (SCKx is the clock input) Clock Polarity (Idle state of SCKx) Data Input Sample Phase (middle or end of data output time) * Clock Edge (output data on rising/falling edge of SCKx) * Clock Rate (Master mode only) * Slave Select mode (Slave mode only) To enable the serial port, SSPx Enable bit, SSPxEN of the SSPxCON1 register, must be set. To reset or reconfigure SPI mode, clear the SSPxEN bit, re-initialize the SSPxCONx registers and then set the SSPxEN bit. This configures the SDIx, SDOx, SCKx and SSx pins as serial port pins. For the pins to behave as the serial port function, some must have their data direction bits (in the TRIS register) appropriately programmed as follows: * SDIx must have corresponding TRIS bit set * SDOx must have corresponding TRIS bit cleared * SCKx (Master mode) must have corresponding TRIS bit cleared * SCKx (Slave mode) must have corresponding TRIS bit set * SSx must have corresponding TRIS bit set * * * * Any serial port function that is not desired may be overridden by programming the corresponding data direction (TRIS) register to the opposite value. The MSSPx consists of a transmit/receive shift register (SSPxSR) and a buffer register (SSPxBUF). The SSPxSR shifts the data in and out of the device, MSb first. The SSPxBUF holds the data that was written to the SSPxSR until the received data is ready. Once the 8 bits of data have been received, that byte is moved to the SSPxBUF register. Then, the Buffer Full Detect bit, BF of the SSPxSTAT register, and the interrupt flag bit, SSPxIF, are set. This double-buffering of the received data (SSPxBUF) allows the next byte to start reception before reading the data that was just received. Any write to the SSPxBUF register during transmission/reception of data will be ignored and the write collision detect bit WCOL of the SSPxCON1 register, will be set. User software must clear the WCOL bit to allow the following write(s) to the SSPxBUF register to complete successfully. When the application software is expecting to receive valid data, the SSPxBUF should be read before the next byte of data to transfer is written to the SSPxBUF. The Buffer Full bit, BF of the SSPxSTAT register, indicates when SSPxBUF has been loaded with the received data (transmission is complete). When the SSPxBUF is read, the BF bit is cleared. This data may be irrelevant if the SPI is only a transmitter. Generally, the MSSPx interrupt is used to determine when the transmission/reception has completed. If the interrupt method is not going to be used, then software polling can be done to ensure that a write collision does not occur. FIGURE 23-5: SPI MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION SPI Slave SSPxM<3:0> = 010x SDIx Serial Input Buffer (SSPxBUF) SPI Master SSPxM<3:0> = 00xx = 1010 SDOx Serial Input Buffer (BUF) Shift Register (SSPxSR) MSb LSb SDIx SDOx MSb SCKx SSx Shift Register (SSPxSR) LSb SCKx General I/O Processor 1 Serial Clock Slave Select (optional) Processor 2 DS41414A-page 240 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.2.3 SPI MASTER MODE The master can initiate the data transfer at any time because it controls the SCKx line. The master determines when the slave (Processor 2, Figure 23-5) is to broadcast data by the software protocol. In Master mode, the data is transmitted/received as soon as the SSPxBUF register is written to. If the SPI is only going to receive, the SDOx output could be disabled (programmed as an input). The SSPxSR register will continue to shift in the signal present on the SDIx pin at the programmed clock rate. As each byte is received, it will be loaded into the SSPxBUF register as if a normal received byte (interrupts and Status bits appropriately set). The clock polarity is selected by appropriately programming the CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register and the CKE bit of the SSPxSTAT register. This then, would give waveforms for SPI communication as shown in Figure 23-6, Figure 23-8 and Figure 23-9, where the MSB is transmitted first. In Master mode, the SPI clock rate (bit rate) is user programmable to be one of the following: * * * * * FOSC/4 (or TCY) FOSC/16 (or 4 * TCY) FOSC/64 (or 16 * TCY) Timer2 output/2 Fosc/(4 * (SSPxADD + 1)) Figure 23-6 shows the waveforms for Master mode. When the CKE bit is set, the SDOx data is valid before there is a clock edge on SCKx. The change of the input sample is shown based on the state of the SMP bit. The time when the SSPxBUF is loaded with the received data is shown. FIGURE 23-6: Write to SSPxBUF SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 1) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 1) SDOx (CKE = 0) SDOx (CKE = 1) SDIx (SMP = 0) Input Sample (SMP = 0) SDIx (SMP = 1) Input Sample (SMP = 1) SSPxIF SSPxSR to SSPxBUF SPI MODE WAVEFORM (MASTER MODE) 4 Clock Modes bit 7 bit 7 bit 6 bit 6 bit 5 bit 5 bit 4 bit 4 bit 3 bit 3 bit 2 bit 2 bit 1 bit 1 bit 0 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 241 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.2.4 SPI SLAVE MODE 23.2.5 In Slave mode, the data is transmitted and received as external clock pulses appear on SCKx. When the last bit is latched, the SSPxIF interrupt flag bit is set. Before enabling the module in SPI Slave mode, the clock line must match the proper Idle state. The clock line can be observed by reading the SCKx pin. The Idle state is determined by the CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register. While in Slave mode, the external clock is supplied by the external clock source on the SCKx pin. This external clock must meet the minimum high and low times as specified in the electrical specifications. While in Sleep mode, the slave can transmit/receive data. The shift register is clocked from the SCKx pin input and when a byte is received, the device will generate an interrupt. If enabled, the device will wake-up from Sleep. 23.2.4.1 Daisy-Chain Configuration SLAVE SELECT SYNCHRONIZATION The Slave Select can also be used to synchronize communication. The Slave Select line is held high until the master device is ready to communicate. When the Slave Select line is pulled low, the slave knows that a new transmission is starting. If the slave fails to receive the communication properly, it will be reset at the end of the transmission, when the Slave Select line returns to a high state. The slave is then ready to receive a new transmission when the Slave Select line is pulled low again. If the Slave Select line is not used, there is a risk that the slave will eventually become out of sync with the master. If the slave misses a bit, it will always be one bit off in future transmissions. Use of the Slave Select line allows the slave and master to align themselves at the beginning of each transmission. The SSx pin allows a Synchronous Slave mode. The SPI must be in Slave mode with SSx pin control enabled (SSPxCON1<3:0> = 0100). When the SSx pin is low, transmission and reception are enabled and the SDOx pin is driven. When the SSx pin goes high, the SDOx pin is no longer driven, even if in the middle of a transmitted byte and becomes a floating output. External pull-up/pull-down resistors may be desirable depending on the application. Note 1: When the SPI is in Slave mode with SSx pin control enabled (SSPxCON1<3:0> = 0100), the SPI module will reset if the SSx pin is set to VDD. 2: When the SPI is used in Slave mode with CKE set; the user must enable SSx pin control. 3: While operated in SPI Slave mode the SMP bit of the SSPxSTAT register must remain clear. When the SPI module resets, the bit counter is forced to `0'. This can be done by either forcing the SSx pin to a high level or clearing the SSPxEN bit. The SPI bus can sometimes be connected in a daisy-chain configuration. The first slave output is connected to the second slave input, the second slave output is connected to the third slave input, and so on. The final slave output is connected to the master input. Each slave sends out, during a second group of clock pulses, an exact copy of what was received during the first group of clock pulses. The whole chain acts as one large communication shift register. The daisy-chain feature only requires a single Slave Select line from the master device. Figure 23-7 shows the block diagram of a typical Daisy-Chain connection when operating in SPI Mode. In a daisy-chain configuration, only the most recent byte on the bus is required by the slave. Setting the BOEN bit of the SSPxCON3 register will enable writes to the SSPxBUF register, even if the previous byte has not been read. This allows the software to ignore data that may not apply to it. DS41414A-page 242 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 23-7: SPI DAISY-CHAIN CONNECTION SCK SDOx SDIx General I/O SCK SDIx SDOx SSx SCK SDIx SDOx SSx SCK SDIx SDOx SSx SPI Slave #3 SPI Slave #2 SPI Slave #1 SPI Master FIGURE 23-8: SSx SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) Write to SSPxBUF SSPxBUF to SSPxSR SLAVE SELECT SYNCHRONOUS WAVEFORM Shift register SSPxSR and bit count are reset SDOx bit 7 bit 6 bit 7 bit 6 bit 0 SDIx bit 7 Input Sample SSPxIF Interrupt Flag SSPxSR to SSPxBUF bit 7 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 243 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 23-9: SSx Optional SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) Write to SSPxBUF Valid SDOx SDIx bit 7 Input Sample SSPxIF Interrupt Flag SSPxSR to SSPxBUF Write Collision detection active bit 0 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 0) FIGURE 23-10: SSx Not Optional SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 1) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 1) Write to SSPxBUF Valid SDOx SDIx SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 1) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample bit 0 SSPxIF Interrupt Flag SSPxSR to SSPxBUF Write Collision detection active DS41414A-page 244 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.2.6 SPI OPERATION IN SLEEP MODE In SPI Master mode, module clocks may be operating at a different speed than when in full power mode; in the case of the Sleep mode, all clocks are halted. Special care must be taken by the user when the MSSPx clock is much faster than the system clock. In Slave mode, when MSSPx interrupts are enabled, after the master completes sending data, an MSSPx interrupt will wake the controller from Sleep. If an exit from Sleep mode is not desired, MSSPx interrupts should be disabled. In SPI Master mode, when the Sleep mode is selected, all module clocks are halted and the transmission/reception will remain in that state until the device wakes. After the device returns to Run mode, the module will resume transmitting and receiving data. In SPI Slave mode, the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register operates asynchronously to the device. This allows the device to be placed in Sleep mode and data to be shifted into the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register. When all 8 bits have been received, the MSSPx interrupt flag bit will be set and if enabled, will wake the device. TABLE 23-1: Name ANSELA APFCON INTCON PIE1 PIE4 PIR1 PIR4 SSPxBUF SSPxCON1 SSPxCON3 SSPxSTAT TRISA TRISB Legend: * SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SPI OPERATION Bit 7 Bit 6 ANSA6 P3BSEL PEIE ADIE -- ADIF -- Bit 5 ANSA5 P2DSEL TMR0IE RCIE RC2IE RCIF RC2IF Bit 4 ANSA4 P2CSEL INTE TXIE TX2IE TXIF TX2IF Bit 3 ANSA3 P2BSEL IOCIE SSP1IE -- SSP1IF -- Bit 2 ANSA2 CCP2SEL TMR0IF CCP1IE -- CCP1IF -- Bit 1 ANSA1 P1CSEL INTF TMR2IE BCL2IE TMR2IF BCL2IF Bit 0 ANSA0 P1BSEL IOCIF TMR1IE SSP2IE TMR1IF SSP2IF Register on Page 125 122 89 90 93 94 97 239* SSPxM<3:0> SDAHT S TRISA3 TRISB3 SBCDE R/W TRISA2 TRISB2 AHEN UA TRISA1 TRISB1 DHEN BF TRISA0 TRISB0 284 286 283 124 127 ANSA7 P3CSEL GIE TMR1GIE -- TMR1GIF -- Synchronous Serial Port Receive Buffer/Transmit Register WCOL ACKTIM SMP TRISA7 TRISB7 SSPxOV PCIE CKE TRISA6 TRISB6 SSPxEN SCIE D/A TRISA5 TRISB5 CKP BOEN P TRISA4 TRISB4 -- = Unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the MSSPx in SPI mode. Page provides register information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 245 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.3 I2C MODE OVERVIEW FIGURE 23-11: The Inter-Integrated Circuit Bus (ICTM) is a multi-master serial data communication bus. Devices communicate in a master/slave environment where the master devices initiate the communication. A Slave device is controlled through addressing. The I2C bus specifies two signal connections: * Serial Clock (SCLx) * Serial Data (SDAx) Figure 23-11 shows the block diagram of the MSSPx module when operating in I2C Mode. Both the SCLx and SDAx connections are bidirectional open-drain lines, each requiring pull-up resistors for the supply voltage. Pulling the line to ground is considered a logical zero and letting the line float is considered a logical one. Figure 23-11 shows a typical connection between two processors configured as master and slave devices. The I2C bus can operate with one or more master devices and one or more slave devices. There are four potential modes of operation for a given device: * Master Transmit mode (master is transmitting data to a slave) * Master Receive mode (master is receiving data from a slave) * Slave Transmit mode (slave is transmitting data to a master) * Slave Receive mode (slave is receiving data from the master) To begin communication, a master device starts out in Master Transmit mode. The master device sends out a Start bit followed by the address byte of the slave it intends to communicate with. This is followed by a single Read/Write bit, which determines whether the master intends to transmit to or receive data from the slave device. If the requested slave exists on the bus, it will respond with an Acknowledge bit, otherwise known as an ACK. The master then continues in either Transmit mode or Receive mode and the slave continues in the complement, either in Receive mode or Transmit mode, respectively. A Start bit is indicated by a high-to-low transition of the SDAx line while the SCLx line is held high. Address and data bytes are sent out, Most Significant bit (MSb) first. The Read/Write bit is sent out as a logical one when the master intends to read data from the slave, and is sent out as a logical zero when it intends to write data to the slave. Master SDAx I2C MASTER/ SLAVE CONNECTION VDD SCLx VDD SCLx Slave SDAx The Acknowledge bit (ACK) is an active-low signal, which holds the SDAx line low to indicate to the transmitter that the slave device has received the transmitted data and is ready to receive more. The transition of a data bit is always performed while the SCLx line is held low. Transitions that occur while the SCLx line is held high are used to indicate Start and Stop bits. If the master intends to write to the slave, then it repeatedly sends out a byte of data, with the slave responding after each byte with an ACK bit. In this example, the master device is in Master Transmit mode and the slave is in Slave Receive mode. If the master intends to read from the slave, then it repeatedly receives a byte of data from the slave, and responds after each byte with an ACK bit. In this example, the master device is in Master Receive mode and the slave is Slave Transmit mode. On the last byte of data communicated, the master device may end the transmission by sending a Stop bit. If the master device is in Receive mode, it sends the Stop bit in place of the last ACK bit. A Stop bit is indicated by a low-to-high transition of the SDAx line while the SCLx line is held high. In some cases, the master may want to maintain control of the bus and re-initiate another transmission. If so, the master device may send another Start bit in place of the Stop bit or last ACK bit when it is in receive mode. The I2C bus specifies three message protocols; * Single message where a master writes data to a slave. * Single message where a master reads data from a slave. * Combined message where a master initiates a minimum of two writes, or two reads, or a combination of writes and reads, to one or more slaves. DS41414A-page 246 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 When one device is transmitting a logical one, or letting the line float, and a second device is transmitting a logical zero, or holding the line low, the first device can detect that the line is not a logical one. This detection, when used on the SCLx line, is called clock stretching. Clock stretching gives slave devices a mechanism to control the flow of data. When this detection is used on the SDAx line, it is called arbitration. Arbitration ensures that there is only one master device communicating at any single time. Slave Transmit mode can also be arbitrated, when a master addresses multiple slaves, but this is less common. If two master devices are sending a message to two different slave devices at the address stage, the master sending the lower slave address always wins arbitration. When two master devices send messages to the same slave address, and addresses can sometimes refer to multiple slaves, the arbitration process must continue into the data stage. Arbitration usually occurs very rarely, but it is a necessary process for proper multi-master support. 23.3.1 CLOCK STRETCHING When a slave device has not completed processing data, it can delay the transfer of more data through the process of Clock Stretching. An addressed slave device may hold the SCLx clock line low after receiving or sending a bit, indicating that it is not yet ready to continue. The master that is communicating with the slave will attempt to raise the SCLx line in order to transfer the next bit, but will detect that the clock line has not yet been released. Because the SCLx connection is open-drain, the slave has the ability to hold that line low until it is ready to continue communicating. Clock stretching allows receivers that cannot keep up with a transmitter to control the flow of incoming data. 23.4 I2C Mode Operation All MSSPx I2C communication is byte oriented and shifted out MSb first. Six SFR registers and 2 interrupt flags interface the module with the PIC(R) microcontroller and user software. Two pins, SDAx and SCLx, are exercised by the module to communicate with other external I2C devices. 23.4.1 BYTE FORMAT 23.3.2 ARBITRATION Each master device must monitor the bus for Start and Stop bits. If the device detects that the bus is busy, it cannot begin a new message until the bus returns to an Idle state. However, two master devices may try to initiate a transmission on or about the same time. When this occurs, the process of arbitration begins. Each transmitter checks the level of the SDAx data line and compares it to the level that it expects to find. The first transmitter to observe that the two levels don't match, loses arbitration, and must stop transmitting on the SDAx line. For example, if one transmitter holds the SDAx line to a logical one (lets it float) and a second transmitter holds it to a logical zero (pulls it low), the result is that the SDAx line will be low. The first transmitter then observes that the level of the line is different than expected and concludes that another transmitter is communicating. The first transmitter to notice this difference is the one that loses arbitration and must stop driving the SDAx line. If this transmitter is also a master device, it also must stop driving the SCLx line. It then can monitor the lines for a Stop condition before trying to reissue its transmission. In the meantime, the other device that has not noticed any difference between the expected and actual levels on the SDAx line continues with its original transmission. It can do so without any complications, because so far, the transmission appears exactly as expected with no other transmitter disturbing the message. All communication in I2C is done in 9-bit segments. A byte is sent from a Master to a Slave or vice-versa, followed by an Acknowledge bit sent back. After the 8th falling edge of the SCLx line, the device outputting data on the SDAx changes that pin to an input and reads in an acknowledge value on the next clock pulse. The clock signal, SCLx, is provided by the master. Data is valid to change while the SCLx signal is low, and sampled on the rising edge of the clock. Changes on the SDAx line while the SCLx line is high define special conditions on the bus, explained below. 23.4.2 DEFINITION OF I2C TERMINOLOGY There is language and terminology in the description of I2C communication that have definitions specific to I2C. That word usage is defined below and may be used in the rest of this document without explanation. This table was adapted from the Phillips I2C specification. 23.4.3 SDAX AND SCLX PINS Selection of any I2C mode with the SSPxEN bit set, forces the SCLx and SDAx pins to be open-drain. These pins should be set by the user to inputs by setting the appropriate TRIS bits. Note: Data is tied to output zero when an I2C mode is enabled. 23.4.4 SDAX HOLD TIME The hold time of the SDAx pin is selected by the SDAHT bit of the SSPxCON3 register. Hold time is the time SDAx is held valid after the falling edge of SCLx. Setting the SDAHT bit selects a longer 300 ns minimum hold time and may help on buses with large capacitance. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 247 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 23-2: TERM Transmitter I2C BUS TERMS Description 23.4.5 START CONDITION The device which shifts data out onto the bus. Receiver The device which shifts data in from the bus. Master The device that initiates a transfer, generates clock signals and terminates a transfer. Slave The device addressed by the master. Multi-master A bus with more than one device that can initiate data transfers. Arbitration Procedure to ensure that only one master at a time controls the bus. Winning arbitration ensures that the message is not corrupted. Synchronization Procedure to synchronize the clocks of two or more devices on the bus. Idle No master is controlling the bus, and both SDAx and SCLx lines are high. Active Any time one or more master devices are controlling the bus. Addressed Slave device that has received a Slave matching address and is actively being clocked by a master. Matching Address byte that is clocked into a Address slave that matches the value stored in SSPxADD. Write Request Slave receives a matching address with R/W bit clear, and is ready to clock in data. Read Request Master sends an address byte with the R/W bit set, indicating that it wishes to clock data out of the Slave. This data is the next and all following bytes until a Restart or Stop. Clock Stretching When a device on the bus holds SCLx low to stall communication. Bus Collision Any time the SDAx line is sampled low by the module while it is outputting and expected high state. The I2C specification defines a Start condition as a transition of SDAx from a high to a low state while SCLx line is high. A Start condition is always generated by the master and signifies the transition of the bus from an Idle to an Active state. Figure 23-10 shows wave forms for Start and Stop conditions. A bus collision can occur on a Start condition if the module samples the SDAx line low before asserting it low. This does not conform to the I2C Specification that states no bus collision can occur on a Start. 23.4.6 STOP CONDITION A Stop condition is a transition of the SDAx line from low-to-high state while the SCLx line is high. Note: At least one SCLx low time must appear before a Stop is valid, therefore, if the SDAx line goes low then high again while the SCLx line stays high, only the Start condition is detected. 23.4.7 RESTART CONDITION A Restart is valid any time that a Stop would be valid. A master can issue a Restart if it wishes to hold the bus after terminating the current transfer. A Restart has the same effect on the slave that a Start would, resetting all slave logic and preparing it to clock in an address. The master may want to address the same or another slave. In 10-bit Addressing Slave mode a Restart is required for the master to clock data out of the addressed slave. Once a slave has been fully addressed, matching both high and low address bytes, the master can issue a Restart and the high address byte with the R/W bit set. The slave logic will then hold the clock and prepare to clock out data. After a full match with R/W clear in 10-bit mode, a prior match flag is set and maintained. Until a Stop condition, a high address with R/W clear, or high address match fails. 23.4.8 START/STOP CONDITION INTERRUPT MASKING The SCIE and PCIE bits of the SSPxCON3 register can enable the generation of an interrupt in Slave modes that do not typically support this function. Slave modes where interrupt on Start and Stop detect are already enabled, these bits will have no effect. DS41414A-page 248 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 23-12: I2C START AND STOP CONDITIONS SDAx SCLx S Change of Start Condition Data Allowed Change of Data Allowed Stop Condition P FIGURE 23-13: I2C RESTART CONDITION Sr Change of Data Allowed Restart Condition Change of Data Allowed 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 249 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.4.9 ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE 23.5 I2C SLAVE MODE OPERATION The 9th SCLx pulse for any transferred byte in I2C is dedicated as an Acknowledge. It allows receiving devices to respond back to the transmitter by pulling the SDAx line low. The transmitter must release control of the line during this time to shift in the response. The Acknowledge (ACK) is an active-low signal, pulling the SDAx line low indicated to the transmitter that the device has received the transmitted data and is ready to receive more. The result of an ACK is placed in the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register. Slave software, when the AHEN and DHEN bits are set, allow the user to set the ACK value sent back to the transmitter. The ACKDT bit of the SSPxCON2 register is set/cleared to determine the response. Slave hardware will generate an ACK response if the AHEN and DHEN bits of the SSPxCON3 register are clear. There are certain conditions where an ACK will not be sent by the slave. If the BF bit of the SSPxSTAT register or the SSPxOV bit of the SSPxCON1 register are set when a byte is received. When the module is addressed, after the 8th falling edge of SCLx on the bus, the ACKTIM bit of the SSPxCON3 register is set. The ACKTIM bit indicates the acknowledge time of the active bus. The ACKTIM Status bit is only active when the AHEN bit or DHEN bit is enabled. The MSSPx Slave mode operates in one of four modes selected in the SSPxM bits of SSPxCON1 register. The modes can be divided into 7-bit and 10-bit Addressing mode. 10-bit Addressing modes operate the same as 7-bit with some additional overhead for handling the larger addresses. Modes with Start and Stop bit interrupts operated the same as the other modes with SSPxIF additionally getting set upon detection of a Start, Restart, or Stop condition. 23.5.1 SLAVE MODE ADDRESSES The SSPxADD register (Register 23-6) contains the Slave mode address. The first byte received after a Start or Restart condition is compared against the value stored in this register. If the byte matches, the value is loaded into the SSPxBUF register and an interrupt is generated. If the value does not match, the module goes idle and no indication is given to the software that anything happened. The SSPx Mask register (Register 23-5) affects the address matching process. See Section 23.5.9 "SSPx Mask Register" for more information. 23.5.1.1 I2C Slave 7-bit Addressing Mode In 7-bit Addressing mode, the LSb of the received data byte is ignored when determining if there is an address match. 23.5.1.2 I2C Slave 10-bit Addressing Mode In 10-bit Addressing mode, the first received byte is compared to the binary value of `1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 0'. A9 and A8 are the two MSb of the 10-bit address and stored in bits 2 and 1 of the SSPxADD register. After the acknowledge of the high byte, the UA bit is set and SCLx is held low until the user updates SSPxADD with the low address. The low address byte is clocked in and all 8 bits are compared to the low address value in SSPxADD. Even if there is not an address match; SSPxIF and UA are set, and SCLx is held low until SSPxADD is updated to receive a high byte again. When SSPxADD is updated, the UA bit is cleared. This ensures the module is ready to receive the high address byte on the next communication. A high and low address match as a write request is required at the start of all 10-bit addressing communication. A transmission can be initiated by issuing a Restart once the slave is addressed, and clocking in the high address with the R/W bit set. The slave hardware will then acknowledge the read request and prepare to clock out data. This is only valid for a slave after it has received a complete high and low address byte match. DS41414A-page 250 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.5.2 SLAVE RECEPTION 23.5.2.2 7-bit Reception with AHEN and DHEN When the R/W bit of a matching received address byte is clear, the R/W bit of the SSPxSTAT register is cleared. The received address is loaded into the SSPxBUF register and acknowledged. When the overflow condition exists for a received address, then not Acknowledge is given. An overflow condition is defined as either bit BF bit of the SSPxSTAT register is set, or bit SSPxOV bit of the SSPxCON1 register is set. The BOEN bit of the SSPxCON3 register modifies this operation. For more information see Register 23-4. An MSSPx interrupt is generated for each transferred data byte. Flag bit, SSPxIF, must be cleared by software. When the SEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register is set, SCLx will be held low (clock stretch) following each received byte. The clock must be released by setting the CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register, except sometimes in 10-bit mode. See Section 23.2.3 "SPI Master Mode" for more detail. 23.5.2.1 7-bit Addressing Reception Slave device reception with AHEN and DHEN set operate the same as without these options with extra interrupts and clock stretching added after the 8th falling edge of SCLx. These additional interrupts allow the slave software to decide whether it wants to ACK the receive address or data byte, rather than the hardware. This functionality adds support for PMBusTM that was not present on previous versions of this module. This list describes the steps that need to be taken by slave software to use these options for I2C communication. Figure 23-15 displays a module using both address and data holding. Figure 23-16 includes the operation with the SEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register set. S bit of SSPxSTAT is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is enabled. 2. Matching address with R/W bit clear is clocked in. SSPxIF is set and CKP cleared after the 8th falling edge of SCLx. 3. Slave clears the SSPxIF. 4. Slave can look at the ACKTIM bit of the SSPxCON3 register to determine if the SSPxIF was after or before the ACK. 5. Slave reads the address value from SSPxBUF, clearing the BF flag. 6. Slave sets ACK value clocked out to the master by setting ACKDT. 7. Slave releases the clock by setting CKP. 8. SSPxIF is set after an ACK, not after a NACK. 9. If SEN = 1 the slave hardware will stretch the clock after the ACK. 10. Slave clears SSPxIF. Note: SSPxIF is still set after the 9th falling edge of SCLx even if there is no clock stretching and BF has been cleared. Only if NACK is sent to Master is SSPxIF not set 11. SSPxIF set and CKP cleared after 8th falling edge of SCLx for a received data byte. 12. Slave looks at ACKTIM bit of SSPxCON3 to determine the source of the interrupt. 13. Slave reads the received data from SSPxBUF clearing BF. 14. Steps 7-14 are the same for each received data byte. 15. Communication is ended by either the slave sending an ACK = 1, or the master sending a Stop condition. If a Stop is sent and Interrupt on Stop Detect is disabled, the slave will only know by polling the P bit of the SSTSTAT register. 1. This section describes a standard sequence of events for the MSSPx module configured as an I2C Slave in 7-bit Addressing mode. All decisions made by hardware or software and their effect on reception. Figure 23-13 and Figure 23-14 is used as a visual reference for this description. This is a step by step process of what typically must be done to accomplish I2C communication. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Start bit detected. S bit of SSPxSTAT is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is enabled. Matching address with R/W bit clear is received. The slave pulls SDAx low sending an ACK to the master, and sets SSPxIF bit. Software clears the SSPxIF bit. Software reads received address from SSPxBUF clearing the BF flag. If SEN = 1; Slave software sets CKP bit to release the SCLx line. The master clocks out a data byte. Slave drives SDAx low sending an ACK to the master, and sets SSPxIF bit. Software clears SSPxIF. Software reads the received byte from SSPxBUF clearing BF. Steps 8-12 are repeated for all received bytes from the Master. Master sends Stop condition, setting P bit of SSPxSTAT, and the bus goes idle. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 251 FIGURE 23-14: DS41414A-page 252 Bus Master sends Stop condition From Slave to Master Receiving Address A5 ACK A4 A3 A2 A1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Receiving Data Receiving Data D0 ACK = 1 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Cleared by software Cleared by software SSPxIF set on 9th falling edge of SCLx SSPxBUF is read First byte of data is available in SSPxBUF SSPxOV set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. PIC16F/LF1946/47 SDAx A7 A6 SCLx S 1 2 I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION (SEN = 0, AHEN = 0, DHEN = 0) Preliminary SSPxIF BF SSPxOV 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 23-15: Bus Master sends Stop condition 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Receive Data A2 A1 R/W=0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Receive Data D1 D0 ACK A4 A3 4 1 Clock is held low until CKP is set to `1' 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 8 9 SEN 1 2 3 SEN 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Cleared by software Cleared by software falling edge of SCLx Receive Address SDAx A7 A6 A5 SCLx S 1 2 3 SSPxIF SSPxIF set on 9th I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION (SEN = 1, AHEN = 0, DHEN = 0) Preliminary SSPxBUF is read CKP is written to `1' in software, releasing SCLx BF First byte of data is available in SSPxBUF SSPxOV SSPxOV set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. CKP CKP is written to 1 in software, releasing SCLx PIC16F/LF1946/47 SCLx is not held low because ACK= 1 DS41414A-page 253 FIGURE 23-16: Master Releases SDAx to slave for ACK sequence Receiving Data ACK ACK=1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Received Data Master sends Stop condition DS41414A-page 254 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 P If AHEN = 1: SSPxIF is set SSPxIF is set on 9th falling edge of SCLx, after ACK Cleared by software Data is read from SSPxBUF No interrupt after not ACK from Slave Address is read from SSBUF Slave software clears ACKDT to ACK the received byte Slave software sets ACKDT to not ACK When DHEN=1: CKP is cleared by hardware on 8th falling edge of SCLx CKP set by software, SCLx is released ACKTIM cleared by hardware in 9th rising edge of SCLx ACKTIM set by hardware on 8th falling edge of SCLx SDAx Receiving Address A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 SCLx S 1 2 SSPxIF PIC16F/LF1946/47 BF ACKDT I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION (SEN = 0, AHEN = 1, DHEN = 1) Preliminary CKP When AHEN=1: CKP is cleared by hardware and SCLx is stretched ACKTIM ACKTIM set by hardware on 8th falling edge of SCLx S 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. P FIGURE 23-17: Master sends Stop condition Receive Data ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK R/W = 0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Receive Data Master releases SDAx to slave for ACK sequence 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 5 67 8 9 1 23 4 5 67 8 9 1 34 5 67 8 2 9 P Cleared by software No interrupt after if not ACK from Slave SSPxBUF can be read any time before next byte is loaded Received data is available on SSPxBUF Slave sends not ACK CKP is not cleared if not ACK Set by software, release SCLx When DHEN = 1; on the 8th falling edge of SCLx of a received data byte, CKP is cleared ACKTIM is cleared by hardware on 9th rising edge of SCLx SDAx Receiving Address A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 SCLx S 1 23 4 SSPxIF BF Received address is loaded into SSPxBUF I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION (SEN = 1, AHEN = 1, DHEN = 1) Preliminary ACKDT Slave software clears ACKDT to ACK the received byte CKP When AHEN = 1; on the 8th falling edge of SCLx of an address byte, CKP is cleared ACKTIM ACKTIM is set by hardware on 8th falling edge of SCLx S PIC16F/LF1946/47 DS41414A-page 255 P PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.5.3 SLAVE TRANSMISSION 23.5.3.2 7-bit Transmission When the R/W bit of the incoming address byte is set and an address match occurs, the R/W bit of the SSPxSTAT register is set. The received address is loaded into the SSPxBUF register, and an ACK pulse is sent by the slave on the ninth bit. Following the ACK, slave hardware clears the CKP bit and the SCLx pin is held low (see Section 23.5.6 "Clock Stretching" for more detail). By stretching the clock, the master will be unable to assert another clock pulse until the slave is done preparing the transmit data. The transmit data must be loaded into the SSPxBUF register which also loads the SSPxSR register. Then the SCLx pin should be released by setting the CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register. The eight data bits are shifted out on the falling edge of the SCLx input. This ensures that the SDAx signal is valid during the SCLx high time. The ACK pulse from the master-receiver is latched on the rising edge of the ninth SCLx input pulse. This ACK value is copied to the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register. If ACKSTAT is set (not ACK), then the data transfer is complete. In this case, when the not ACK is latched by the slave, the slave goes idle and waits for another occurrence of the Start bit. If the SDAx line was low (ACK), the next transmit data must be loaded into the SSPxBUF register. Again, the SCLx pin must be released by setting bit CKP. An MSSPx interrupt is generated for each data transfer byte. The SSPxIF bit must be cleared by software and the SSPxSTAT register is used to determine the status of the byte. The SSPxIF bit is set on the falling edge of the ninth clock pulse. A master device can transmit a read request to a slave, and then clock data out of the slave. The list below outlines what software for a slave will need to do to accomplish a standard transmission. Figure 23-17 can be used as a reference to this list. Master sends a Start condition on SDAx and SCLx. 2. S bit of SSPxSTAT is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is enabled. 3. Matching address with R/W bit set is received by the Slave setting SSPxIF bit. 4. Slave hardware generates an ACK and sets SSPxIF. 5. SSPxIF bit is cleared by user. 6. Software reads the received address from SSPxBUF, clearing BF. 7. R/W is set so CKP was automatically cleared after the ACK. 8. The slave software loads the transmit data into SSPxBUF. 9. CKP bit is set releasing SCLx, allowing the master to clock the data out of the slave. 10. SSPxIF is set after the ACK response from the master is loaded into the ACKSTAT register. 11. SSPxIF bit is cleared. 12. The slave software checks the ACKSTAT bit to see if the master wants to clock out more data. Note 1: If the master ACKs the clock will be stretched. 2: ACKSTAT is the only bit updated on the rising edge of SCLx (9th) rather than the falling. 13. Steps 9-13 are repeated for each transmitted byte. 14. If the master sends a not ACK; the clock is not held, but SSPxIF is still set. 15. The master sends a Restart condition or a Stop. 16. The slave is no longer addressed. 1. 23.5.3.1 Slave Mode Bus Collision A slave receives a Read request and begins shifting data out on the SDAx line. If a bus collision is detected and the SBCDE bit of the SSPxCON3 register is set, the BCLxIF bit of the PIRx register is set. Once a bus collision is detected, the slave goes Idle and waits to be addressed again. User software can use the BCLxIF bit to handle a slave bus collision. DS41414A-page 256 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 23-18: Master sends Stop condition Receiving Address D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Transmitting Data Automatic Transmitting Data ACK SDAx 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 R/W = 1 Automatic ACK SCLx 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. P Cleared by software Received address is read from SSPxBUF Data to transmit is loaded into SSPxBUF BF is automatically cleared after 8th falling edge of SCLx When R/W is set SCLx is always held low after 9th SCLx falling edge Set by software CKP is not held for not ACK Masters not ACK is copied to ACKSTAT R/W is copied from the matching address byte Indicates an address has been received S 1 SSPxIF BF CKP I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION (AHEN = 0) Preliminary ACKSTAT R/W D/A S PIC16F/LF1946/47 DS41414A-page 257 P PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.5.3.3 7-bit Transmission with Address Hold Enabled Setting the AHEN bit of the SSPxCON3 register enables additional clock stretching and interrupt generation after the 8th falling edge of a received matching address. Once a matching address has been clocked in, CKP is cleared and the SSPxIF interrupt is set. Figure 23-18 displays a standard waveform of a 7-bit Address Slave Transmission with AHEN enabled. Bus starts Idle. Master sends Start condition; the S bit of SSPxSTAT is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is enabled. 3. Master sends matching address with R/W bit set. After the 8th falling edge of the SCLx line the CKP bit is cleared and SSPxIF interrupt is generated. 4. Slave software clears SSPxIF. 5. Slave software reads ACKTIM bit of SSPxCON3 register, and R/W and D/A of the SSPxSTAT register to determine the source of the interrupt. 6. Slave reads the address value from the SSPxBUF register clearing the BF bit. 7. Slave software decides from this information if it wishes to ACK or not ACK and sets ACKDT bit of the SSPxCON2 register accordingly. 8. Slave sets the CKP bit releasing SCLx. 9. Master clocks in the ACK value from the slave. 10. Slave hardware automatically clears the CKP bit and sets SSPxIF after the ACK if the R/W bit is set. 11. Slave software clears SSPxIF. 12. Slave loads value to transmit to the master into SSPxBUF setting the BF bit. Note: SSPxBUF cannot be loaded until after the ACK. 13. Slave sets CKP bit releasing the clock. 14. Master clocks out the data from the slave and sends an ACK value on the 9th SCLx pulse. 15. Slave hardware copies the ACK value into the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register. 16. Steps 10-15 are repeated for each byte transmitted to the master from the slave. 17. If the master sends a not ACK the slave releases the bus allowing the master to send a Stop and end the communication. Note: Master must send a not ACK on the last byte to ensure that the slave releases the SCLx line to receive a Stop. 1. 2. DS41414A-page 258 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 23-19: Master sends Stop condition Master releases SDAx to slave for ACK sequence R/W = 1 ACK 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 8 9 Automatic Transmitting Data ACK Receiving Address SDAx 3 4 5 6 7 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Transmitting Data Automatic D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. P Cleared by software Received address is read from SSPxBUF Data to transmit is loaded into SSPxBUF BF is automatically cleared after 8th falling edge of SCLx Slave clears ACKDT to ACK address Master's ACK response is copied to SSPxSTAT CKP not cleared When R/W = 1; CKP is always cleared after ACK Set by software, releases SCLx after not ACK ACKTIM is cleared on 9th rising edge of SCLx SCLx S 1 2 SSPxIF BF I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION (AHEN = 1) Preliminary ACKDT ACKSTAT CKP When AHEN = 1; CKP is cleared by hardware after receiving matching address. ACKTIM ACKTIM is set on 8th falling edge of SCLx R/W PIC16F/LF1946/47 DS41414A-page 259 D/A PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.5.4 SLAVE MODE 10-BIT ADDRESS RECEPTION 23.5.5 10-BIT ADDRESSING WITH ADDRESS OR DATA HOLD This section describes a standard sequence of events for the MSSPx module configured as an I2C Slave in 10-bit Addressing mode. Figure 23-19 is used as a visual reference for this description. This is a step by step process of what must be done by slave software to accomplish I2C communication. 1. 2. Bus starts Idle. Master sends Start condition; S bit of SSPxSTAT is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is enabled. Master sends matching high address with R/W bit clear; UA bit of the SSPxSTAT register is set. Slave sends ACK and SSPxIF is set. Software clears the SSPxIF bit. Software reads received address from SSPxBUF clearing the BF flag. Slave loads low address into SSPxADD, releasing SCLx. Master sends matching low address byte to the Slave; UA bit is set. Note: Updates to the SSPxADD register are not allowed until after the ACK sequence. 9. Slave sends ACK and SSPxIF is set. Note: If the low address does not match, SSPxIF and UA are still set so that the slave software can set SSPxADD back to the high address. BF is not set because there is no match. CKP is unaffected. 10. Slave clears SSPxIF. 11. Slave reads the received matching address from SSPxBUF clearing BF. 12. Slave loads high address into SSPxADD. 13. Master clocks a data byte to the slave and clocks out the slaves ACK on the 9th SCLx pulse; SSPxIF is set. 14. If SEN bit of SSPxCON2 is set, CKP is cleared by hardware and the clock is stretched. 15. Slave clears SSPxIF. 16. Slave reads the received byte from SSPxBUF clearing BF. 17. If SEN is set the slave sets CKP to release the SCLx. 18. Steps 13-17 repeat for each received byte. 19. Master sends Stop to end the transmission. Reception using 10-bit addressing with AHEN or DHEN set is the same as with 7-bit modes. The only difference is the need to update the SSPxADD register using the UA bit. All functionality, specifically when the CKP bit is cleared and SCLx line is held low are the same. Figure 23-20 can be used as a reference of a slave in 10-bit addressing with AHEN set. Figure 23-21 shows a standard waveform for a slave transmitter in 10-bit Addressing mode. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. DS41414A-page 260 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 23-20: Master sends Stop condition 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Receive Second Address Byte Receive Data D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK Receive Data D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK 0 A9 A8 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P SCLx is held low while CKP = 0 Cleared by software Receive address is read from SSPxBUF Data is read from SSPxBUF Software updates SSPxADD and releases SCLx Set by software, When SEN = 1; releasing SCLx CKP is cleared after 9th falling edge of received byte Receive First Address Byte SDAx 1 1 1 1 SCLx S 1 2 3 4 SSPxIF Set by hardware on 9th falling edge I2C SLAVE, 10-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION (SEN = 1, AHEN = 0, DHEN = 0) Preliminary BF If address matches SSPxADD it is loaded into SSPxBUF UA When UA = 1; SCLx is held low CKP PIC16F/LF1946/47 DS41414A-page 261 FIGURE 23-21: Receive First Address Byte R/W = 0 A8 ACK ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 Receive Second Address Byte Receive Data Receive Data D6 D5 DS41414A-page 262 1 0 A9 4 UA UA 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 Set by hardware on 9th falling edge Cleared by software Cleared by software SSPxBUF can be read anytime before the next received byte Received data is read from SSPxBUF Update to SSPxADD is not allowed until 9th falling edge of SCLx Update of SSPxADD, clears UA and releases SCLx Set CKP with software releases SCLx SDAx 1 1 1 SCLx S 1 2 3 PIC16F/LF1946/47 SSPxIF BF I2C SLAVE, 10-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION (SEN = 0, AHEN = 1, DHEN = 0) Preliminary ACKDT Slave software clears ACKDT to ACK the received byte UA CKP If when AHEN = 1; on the 8th falling edge of SCLx of an address byte, CKP is cleared ACKTIM 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. ACKTIM is set by hardware on 8th falling edge of SCLx FIGURE 23-22: Master sends Stop condition 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Master sends Restart event Receiving Second Address Byte Receive First Address Byte A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK Transmitting Data Byte ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Master sends not ACK ACK = 1 SDAx Receiving Address R/W = 0 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 ACK 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 SCLx 5 1 2 Sr 3 4 5 6 78 9 23 4 5 6 78 9 6 1 1 7 8 9 S 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P SSPxIF Cleared by software Set by hardware Set by hardware BF Received address is read from SSPxBUF High address is loaded back into SSPxADD Data to transmit is loaded into SSPxBUF I2C SLAVE, 10-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION (SEN = 0, AHEN = 0, DHEN = 0) Preliminary After SSPxADD is updated, UA is cleared and SCLx is released When R/W = 1; CKP is cleared on 9th falling edge of SCLx R/W is copied from the matching address byte SSPxBUF loaded with received address UA UA indicates SSPxADD must be updated CKP ACKSTAT Set by software releases SCLx Masters not ACK is copied R/W D/A PIC16F/LF1946/47 DS41414A-page 263 Indicates an address has been received PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.5.6 CLOCK STRETCHING 23.5.6.2 10-bit Addressing Mode Clock stretching occurs when a device on the bus holds the SCLx line low effectively pausing communication. The slave may stretch the clock to allow more time to handle data or prepare a response for the master device. A master device is not concerned with stretching as anytime it is active on the bus and not transferring data it is stretching. Any stretching done by a slave is invisible to the master software and handled by the hardware that generates SCLx. The CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register is used to control stretching in software. Any time the CKP bit is cleared, the module will wait for the SCLx line to go low and then hold it. Setting CKP will release SCLx and allow more communication. 23.5.6.1 Normal Clock Stretching In 10-bit Addressing mode, when the UA bit is set, the clock is always stretched. This is the only time the SCLx is stretched without CKP being cleared. SCLx is released immediately after a write to SSPxADD. Note: Previous versions of the module did not stretch the clock if the second address byte did not match. 23.5.6.3 Byte NACKing When AHEN bit of SSPxCON3 is set; CKP is cleared by hardware after the 8th falling edge of SCLx for a received matching address byte. When DHEN bit of SSPxCON3 is set; CKP is cleared after the 8th falling edge of SCLx for received data. Stretching after the 8th falling edge of SCLx allows the slave to look at the received address or data and decide if it wants to ACK the received data. 23.5.7 CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION AND THE CKP BIT Following an ACK if the R/W bit of SSPxSTAT is set, a read request, the slave hardware will clear CKP. This allows the slave time to update SSPxBUF with data to transfer to the master. If the SEN bit of SSPxCON2 is set, the slave hardware will always stretch the clock after the ACK sequence. Once the slave is ready; CKP is set by software and communication resumes. Note 1: The BF bit has no effect on if the clock will be stretched or not. This is different than previous versions of the module that would not stretch the clock, clear CKP, if SSPxBUF was read before the 9th falling edge of SCLx. 2: Previous versions of the module did not stretch the clock for a transmission if SSPxBUF was loaded before the 9th falling edge of SCLx. It is now always cleared for read requests. Any time the CKP bit is cleared, the module will wait for the SCLx line to go low and then hold it. However, clearing the CKP bit will not assert the SCLx output low until the SCLx output is already sampled low. Therefore, the CKP bit will not assert the SCLx line until an external I2C master device has already asserted the SCLx line. The SCLx output will remain low until the CKP bit is set and all other devices on the I2C bus have released SCLx. This ensures that a write to the CKP bit will not violate the minimum high time requirement for SCLx (see Figure 23-22). FIGURE 23-23: CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TIMING Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 SDAx DX DX - 1 SCLx CKP Master device asserts clock Master device releases clock WR SSPxCON1 DS41414A-page 264 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.5.8 GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SUPPORT The addressing procedure for the I2C bus is such that the first byte after the Start condition usually determines which device will be the slave addressed by the master device. The exception is the general call address which can address all devices. When this address is used, all devices should, in theory, respond with an acknowledge. The general call address is a reserved address in the I2C protocol, defined as address 0x00. When the GCEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register is set, the slave module will automatically ACK the reception of this address regardless of the value stored in SSPxADD. After the slave clocks in an address of all zeros with the R/W bit clear, an interrupt is generated and slave software can read SSPxBUF and respond. Figure 23-23 shows a general call reception sequence. In 10-bit Address mode, the UA bit will not be set on the reception of the general call address. The slave will prepare to receive the second byte as data, just as it would in 7-bit mode. If the AHEN bit of the SSPxCON3 register is set, just as with any other address reception, the slave hardware will stretch the clock after the 8th falling edge of SCLx. The slave must then set its ACKDT value and release the clock with communication progressing as it would normally. FIGURE 23-24: SLAVE MODE GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SEQUENCE Address is compared to General Call Address after ACK, set interrupt R/W = 0 ACK D7 Receiving Data D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK SDAx SCLx S SSPxIF BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) General Call Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Cleared by software GCEN (SSPxCON2<7>) SSPxBUF is read '1' 23.5.9 SSPX MASK REGISTER An SSPx Mask (SSPxMSK) register (Register 23-5) is available in I2C Slave mode as a mask for the value held in the SSPxSR register during an address comparison operation. A zero (`0') bit in the SSPxMSK register has the effect of making the corresponding bit of the received address a "don't care". This register is reset to all `1's upon any Reset condition and, therefore, has no effect on standard SSPx operation until written with a mask value. The SSPx Mask register is active during: * 7-bit Address mode: address compare of A<7:1>. * 10-bit Address mode: address compare of A<7:0> only. The SSPx mask has no effect during the reception of the first (high) byte of the address. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 265 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.6 I2C MASTER MODE 23.6.1 I2C MASTER MODE OPERATION Master mode is enabled by setting and clearing the appropriate SSPxM bits in the SSPxCON1 register and by setting the SSPxEN bit. In Master mode, the SCLx and SDAx lines are set as inputs and are manipulated by the MSSPx hardware. Master mode of operation is supported by interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSPx module is disabled. Control of the I 2C bus may be taken when the P bit is set, or the bus is Idle. In Firmware Controlled Master mode, user code conducts all I 2C bus operations based on Start and Stop bit condition detection. Start and Stop condition detection is the only active circuitry in this mode. All other communication is done by the user software directly manipulating the SDAx and SCLx lines. The following events will cause the SSPx Interrupt Flag bit, SSPxIF, to be set (SSPx interrupt, if enabled): * * * * * Start condition detected Stop condition detected Data transfer byte transmitted/received Acknowledge transmitted/received Repeated Start generated Note 1: The MSSPx module, when configured in I2C Master mode, does not allow queueing of events. For instance, the user is not allowed to initiate a Start condition and immediately write the SSPxBUF register to initiate transmission before the Start condition is complete. In this case, the SSPxBUF will not be written to and the WCOL bit will be set, indicating that a write to the SSPxBUF did not occur 2: When in Master mode, Start/Stop detection is masked and an interrupt is generated when the SEN/PEN bit is cleared and the generation is complete. The master device generates all of the serial clock pulses and the Start and Stop conditions. A transfer is ended with a Stop condition or with a Repeated Start condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will not be released. In Master Transmitter mode, serial data is output through SDAx, while SCLx outputs the serial clock. The first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the receiving device (7 bits) and the Read/Write (R/W) bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic `0'. Serial data is transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is transmitted, an Acknowledge bit is received. Start and Stop conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the end of a serial transfer. In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the transmitting device (7 bits) and the R/W bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic `1'. Thus, the first byte transmitted is a 7-bit slave address followed by a `1' to indicate the receive bit. Serial data is received via SDAx, while SCLx outputs the serial clock. Serial data is received 8 bits at a time. After each byte is received, an Acknowledge bit is transmitted. Start and Stop conditions indicate the beginning and end of transmission. A Baud Rate Generator is used to set the clock frequency output on SCLx. See Section 23.7 "Baud Rate Generator" for more detail. DS41414A-page 266 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.6.2 CLOCK ARBITRATION Clock arbitration occurs when the master, during any receive, transmit or Repeated Start/Stop condition, releases the SCLx pin (SCLx allowed to float high). When the SCLx pin is allowed to float high, the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) is suspended from counting until the SCLx pin is actually sampled high. When the SCLx pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<7:0> and begins counting. This ensures that the SCLx high time will always be at least one BRG rollover count in the event that the clock is held low by an external device (Figure 23-25). FIGURE 23-25: SDAx BAUD RATE GENERATOR TIMING WITH CLOCK ARBITRATION DX SCLx deasserted but slave holds SCLx low (clock arbitration) DX - 1 SCLx allowed to transition high SCLx BRG decrements on Q2 and Q4 cycles BRG Value 03h 02h 01h 00h (hold off) 03h 02h SCLx is sampled high, reload takes place and BRG starts its count BRG Reload 23.6.3 WCOL STATUS FLAG If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Start, Restart, Stop, Receive or Transmit sequence is in progress, the WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur). Any time the WCOL bit is set it indicates that an action on SSPxBUF was attempted while the module was not Idle. Note: Because queueing of events is not allowed, writing to the lower 5 bits of SSPxCON2 is disabled until the Start condition is complete. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 267 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.6.4 I2C MASTER MODE START CONDITION TIMING To initiate a Start condition, the user sets the Start Enable bit, SEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register. If the SDAx and SCLx pins are sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<7:0> and starts its count. If SCLx and SDAx are both sampled high when the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SDAx pin is driven low. The action of the SDAx being driven low while SCLx is high is the Start condition and causes the S bit of the SSPxSTAT1 register to be set. Following this, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<7:0> and resumes its count. When the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register will be automatically cleared by hardware; the Baud Rate Generator is suspended, leaving the SDAx line held low and the Start condition is complete. Note 1: If at the beginning of the Start condition, the SDAx and SCLx pins are already sampled low, or if during the Start condition, the SCLx line is sampled low before the SDAx line is driven low, a bus collision occurs, the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLxIF, is set, the Start condition is aborted and the I2C module is reset into its Idle state. 2: The Philips I2C Specification states that a bus collision cannot occur on a Start. FIGURE 23-26: FIRST START BIT TIMING Write to SEN bit occurs here SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 TBRG SDAx TBRG Set S bit (SSPxSTAT<3>) At completion of Start bit, hardware clears SEN bit and sets SSPxIF bit Write to SSPxBUF occurs here 1st bit TBRG SCLx S TBRG 2nd bit DS41414A-page 268 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.6.5 I2C MASTER MODE REPEATED START CONDITION TIMING A Repeated Start condition occurs when the RSEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register is programmed high and the Master state machine is no longer active. When the RSEN bit is set, the SCLx pin is asserted low. When the SCLx pin is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is loaded and begins counting. The SDAx pin is released (brought high) for one Baud Rate Generator count (TBRG). When the Baud Rate Generator times out, if SDAx is sampled high, the SCLx pin will be deasserted (brought high). When SCLx is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded and begins counting. SDAx and SCLx must be sampled high for one TBRG. This action is then followed by assertion of the SDAx pin (SDAx = 0) for one TBRG while SCLx is high. SCLx is asserted low. Following this, the RSEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register will be automatically cleared and the Baud Rate Generator will not be reloaded, leaving the SDAx pin held low. As soon as a Start condition is detected on the SDAx and SCLx pins, the S bit of the SSPxSTAT register will be set. The SSPxIF bit will not be set until the Baud Rate Generator has timed out. Note 1: If RSEN is programmed while any other event is in progress, it will not take effect. 2: A bus collision during the Repeated Start condition occurs if: * SDAx is sampled low when SCLx goes from low-to-high. * SCLx goes low before SDAx is asserted low. This may indicate that another master is attempting to transmit a data `1'. FIGURE 23-27: REPEAT START CONDITION WAVEFORM Write to SSPxCON2 occurs here SDAx = 1, SCLx (no change) TBRG SDAx S bit set by hardware SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 TBRG TBRG 1st bit At completion of Start bit, hardware clears RSEN bit and sets SSPxIF Write to SSPxBUF occurs here TBRG SCLx Sr Repeated Start TBRG 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 269 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.6.6 I2C MASTER MODE TRANSMISSION 23.6.6.3 ACKSTAT Status Flag Transmission of a data byte, a 7-bit address or the other half of a 10-bit address is accomplished by simply writing a value to the SSPxBUF register. This action will set the Buffer Full flag bit, BF, and allow the Baud Rate Generator to begin counting and start the next transmission. Each bit of address/data will be shifted out onto the SDAx pin after the falling edge of SCLx is asserted. SCLx is held low for one Baud Rate Generator rollover count (TBRG). Data should be valid before SCLx is released high. When the SCLx pin is released high, it is held that way for TBRG. The data on the SDAx pin must remain stable for that duration and some hold time after the next falling edge of SCLx. After the eighth bit is shifted out (the falling edge of the eighth clock), the BF flag is cleared and the master releases SDAx. This allows the slave device being addressed to respond with an ACK bit during the ninth bit time if an address match occurred, or if data was received properly. The status of ACK is written into the ACKSTAT bit on the rising edge of the ninth clock. If the master receives an Acknowledge, the Acknowledge Status bit, ACKSTAT, is cleared. If not, the bit is set. After the ninth clock, the SSPxIF bit is set and the master clock (Baud Rate Generator) is suspended until the next data byte is loaded into the SSPxBUF, leaving SCLx low and SDAx unchanged (Figure 23-27). After the write to the SSPxBUF, each bit of the address will be shifted out on the falling edge of SCLx until all seven address bits and the R/W bit are completed. On the falling edge of the eighth clock, the master will release the SDAx pin, allowing the slave to respond with an Acknowledge. On the falling edge of the ninth clock, the master will sample the SDAx pin to see if the address was recognized by a slave. The status of the ACK bit is loaded into the ACKSTAT Status bit of the SSPxCON2 register. Following the falling edge of the ninth clock transmission of the address, the SSPxIF is set, the BF flag is cleared and the Baud Rate Generator is turned off until another write to the SSPxBUF takes place, holding SCLx low and allowing SDAx to float. In Transmit mode, the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register is cleared when the slave has sent an Acknowledge (ACK = 0) and is set when the slave does not Acknowledge (ACK = 1). A slave sends an Acknowledge when it has recognized its address (including a general call), or when the slave has properly received its data. 23.6.6.4 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Typical transmit sequence: 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 23.6.6.1 BF Status Flag The user generates a Start condition by setting the SEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register. SSPxIF is set by hardware on completion of the Start. SSPxIF is cleared by software. The MSSPx module will wait the required start time before any other operation takes place. The user loads the SSPxBUF with the slave address to transmit. Address is shifted out the SDAx pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. Transmission begins as soon as SSPxBUF is written to. The MSSPx module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register. The MSSPx module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPxIF bit. The user loads the SSPxBUF with eight bits of data. Data is shifted out the SDAx pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. The MSSPx module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register. Steps 8-11 are repeated for all transmitted data bytes. The user generates a Stop or Restart condition by setting the PEN or RSEN bits of the SSPxCON2 register. Interrupt is generated once the Stop/Restart condition is complete. In Transmit mode, the BF bit of the SSPxSTAT register is set when the CPU writes to SSPxBUF and is cleared when all 8 bits are shifted out. 23.6.6.2 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a transmit is already in progress (i.e., SSPxSR is still shifting out a data byte), the WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur). WCOL must be cleared by software before the next transmission. DS41414A-page 270 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 23-28: Write SSPxCON2<0> SEN = 1 Start condition begins From slave, clear ACKSTAT bit SSPxCON2<6> R/W = 0 ACKSTAT in SSPxCON2 = 1 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. SEN = 0 Transmit Address to Slave SDAx A7 SSPxBUF written with 7-bit address and R/W start transmit SCLx S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 SCLx held low while CPU responds to SSPxIF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK = 0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Transmitting Data or Second Half of 10-bit Address D1 D0 ACK SSPxIF Cleared by software Cleared by software service routine from SSPx interrupt Cleared by software BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SSPxBUF written SEN After Start condition, SEN cleared by hardware SSPxBUF is written by software PEN R/W I2C MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (TRANSMISSION, 7 OR 10-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary PIC16F/LF1946/47 DS41414A-page 271 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.6.7 I2C MASTER MODE RECEPTION 23.6.7.4 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Typical Receive Sequence: Master mode reception is enabled by programming the Receive Enable bit, RCEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register. Note: The MSSPx module must be in an Idle state before the RCEN bit is set or the RCEN bit will be disregarded. The user generates a Start condition by setting the SEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register. SSPxIF is set by hardware on completion of the Start. SSPxIF is cleared by software. User writes SSPxBUF with the slave address to transmit and the R/W bit set. Address is shifted out the SDAx pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. Transmission begins as soon as SSPxBUF is written to. The MSSPx module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register. The MSSPx module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPxIF bit. User sets the RCEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register and the Master clocks in a byte from the slave. After the 8th falling edge of SCLx, SSPxIF and BF are set. Master clears SSPxIF and reads the received byte from SSPxUF, clears BF. Master sets ACK value sent to slave in ACKDT bit of the SSPxCON2 register and initiates the ACK by setting the ACKEN bit. Masters ACK is clocked out to the Slave and SSPxIF is set. User clears SSPxIF. Steps 8-13 are repeated for each received byte from the slave. Master sends a not ACK or Stop to end communication. The Baud Rate Generator begins counting and on each rollover, the state of the SCLx pin changes (high-to-low/low-to-high) and data is shifted into the SSPxSR. After the falling edge of the eighth clock, the receive enable flag is automatically cleared, the contents of the SSPxSR are loaded into the SSPxBUF, the BF flag bit is set, the SSPxIF flag bit is set and the Baud Rate Generator is suspended from counting, holding SCLx low. The MSSPx is now in Idle state awaiting the next command. When the buffer is read by the CPU, the BF flag bit is automatically cleared. The user can then send an Acknowledge bit at the end of reception by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable, ACKEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 23.6.7.1 BF Status Flag In receive operation, the BF bit is set when an address or data byte is loaded into SSPxBUF from SSPxSR. It is cleared when the SSPxBUF register is read. 23.6.7.2 SSPxOV Status Flag 12. 13. 14. 15. In receive operation, the SSPxOV bit is set when 8 bits are received into the SSPxSR and the BF flag bit is already set from a previous reception. 23.6.7.3 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a receive is already in progress (i.e., SSPxSR is still shifting in a data byte), the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur). DS41414A-page 272 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 23-29: Write to SSPxCON2<0>(SEN = 1), begin Start condition Master configured as a receiver by programming SSPxCON2<3> (RCEN = 1) RCEN cleared automatically Receiving Data from Slave ACK Receiving Data from Slave RCEN = 1, start next receive RCEN cleared automatically ACK ACK from Master SDAx = ACKDT = 0 Set ACKEN, start Acknowledge sequence SDAx = ACKDT = 1 PEN bit = 1 written here Write to SSPxCON2<4> to start Acknowledge sequence SDAx = ACKDT (SSPxCON2<5>) = 0 SEN = 0 Write to SSPxBUF occurs here, ACK from Slave start XMIT R/W = 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. A1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK ACK is not sent Bus master terminates transfer Transmit Address to Slave SDAx A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 SCLx Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of receive S 1 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 8 6 7 8 9 6 9 7 7 8 9 Set SSPxIF at end of receive P Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence Data shifted in on falling edge of CLK SSPxIF Cleared by software Cleared by software Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence Cleared by software Cleared in software I2C MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary Master configured as a receiver by programming SSPxCON2<3> (RCEN = 1) RCEN cleared automatically ACK from Master SDAx = ACKDT = 0 SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1 while CPU responds to SSPxIF Cleared by software Set P bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) and SSPxIF BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) Last bit is shifted into SSPxSR and contents are unloaded into SSPxBUF SSPxOV SSPxOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full ACKEN RCEN PIC16F/LF1946/47 DS41414A-page 273 RCEN cleared automatically PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.6.8 ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE TIMING 23.6.9 STOP CONDITION TIMING An Acknowledge sequence is enabled by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit, ACKEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register. When this bit is set, the SCLx pin is pulled low and the contents of the Acknowledge data bit are presented on the SDAx pin. If the user wishes to generate an Acknowledge, then the ACKDT bit should be cleared. If not, the user should set the ACKDT bit before starting an Acknowledge sequence. The Baud Rate Generator then counts for one rollover period (TBRG) and the SCLx pin is deasserted (pulled high). When the SCLx pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the Baud Rate Generator counts for TBRG. The SCLx pin is then pulled low. Following this, the ACKEN bit is automatically cleared, the Baud Rate Generator is turned off and the MSSPx module then goes into Idle mode (Figure 23-29). A Stop bit is asserted on the SDAx pin at the end of a receive/transmit by setting the Stop Sequence Enable bit, PEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register. At the end of a receive/transmit, the SCLx line is held low after the falling edge of the ninth clock. When the PEN bit is set, the master will assert the SDAx line low. When the SDAx line is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded and counts down to `0'. When the Baud Rate Generator times out, the SCLx pin will be brought high and one TBRG (Baud Rate Generator rollover count) later, the SDAx pin will be deasserted. When the SDAx pin is sampled high while SCLx is high, the P bit of the SSPxSTAT register is set. A TBRG later, the PEN bit is cleared and the SSPxIF bit is set (Figure 23-30). 23.6.9.1 WCOL Status Flag 23.6.8.1 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when an Acknowledge sequence is in progress, then WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur). If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Stop sequence is in progress, then the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur). FIGURE 23-30: ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE WAVEFORM Acknowledge sequence starts here, write to SSPxCON2 ACKEN = 1, ACKDT = 0 TBRG SDAx SCLx D0 8 ACK TBRG ACKEN automatically cleared 9 SSPxIF SSPxIF set at the end of receive Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. Cleared in software SSPxIF set at the end of Acknowledge sequence Cleared in software DS41414A-page 274 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 23-31: STOP CONDITION RECEIVE OR TRANSMIT MODE SCLx = 1 for TBRG, followed by SDAx = 1 for TBRG after SDAx sampled high. P bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) is set. PEN bit (SSPxCON2<2>) is cleared by hardware and the SSPxIF bit is set TBRG Write to SSPxCON2, set PEN Falling edge of 9th clock SCLx SDAx ACK P TBRG TBRG TBRG SCLx brought high after TBRG SDAx asserted low before rising edge of clock to setup Stop condition Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. 23.6.10 SLEEP OPERATION the I2C slave 23.6.13 While in Sleep mode, module can receive addresses or data and when an address match or complete byte transfer occurs, wake the processor from Sleep (if the MSSPx interrupt is enabled). MULTI -MASTER COMMUNICATION, BUS COLLISION AND BUS ARBITRATION 23.6.11 EFFECTS OF A RESET A Reset disables the MSSPx module and terminates the current transfer. 23.6.12 MULTI-MASTER MODE In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSPx module is disabled. Control of the I 2C bus may be taken when the P bit of the SSPxSTAT register is set, or the bus is Idle, with both the S and P bits clear. When the bus is busy, enabling the SSPx interrupt will generate the interrupt when the Stop condition occurs. In multi-master operation, the SDAx line must be monitored for arbitration to see if the signal level is the expected output level. This check is performed by hardware with the result placed in the BCLxIF bit. The states where arbitration can be lost are: * * * * * Address Transfer Data Transfer A Start Condition A Repeated Start Condition An Acknowledge Condition Multi-Master mode support is achieved by bus arbitration. When the master outputs address/data bits onto the SDAx pin, arbitration takes place when the master outputs a `1' on SDAx, by letting SDAx float high and another master asserts a `0'. When the SCLx pin floats high, data should be stable. If the expected data on SDAx is a `1' and the data sampled on the SDAx pin is `0', then a bus collision has taken place. The master will set the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLxIF, and reset the I2C port to its Idle state (Figure 23-31). If a transmit was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the transmission is halted, the BF flag is cleared, the SDAx and SCLx lines are deasserted and the SSPxBUF can be written to. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. If a Start, Repeated Start, Stop or Acknowledge condition was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the condition is aborted, the SDAx and SCLx lines are deasserted and the respective control bits in the SSPxCON2 register are cleared. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. The master will continue to monitor the SDAx and SCLx pins. If a Stop condition occurs, the SSPxIF bit will be set. A write to the SSPxBUF will start the transmission of data at the first data bit, regardless of where the transmitter left off when the bus collision occurred. In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. Control of the I2C bus can be taken when the P bit is set in the SSPxSTAT register, or the bus is Idle and the S and P bits are cleared. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 275 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 23-32: BUS COLLISION TIMING FOR TRANSMIT AND ACKNOWLEDGE Data changes while SCLx = 0 SDAx line pulled low by another source SDAx released by master SDAx Sample SDAx. While SCLx is high, data doesn't match what is driven by the master. Bus collision has occurred. SCLx Set bus collision interrupt (BCLxIF) BCLxIF DS41414A-page 276 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.6.13.1 Bus Collision During a Start Condition During a Start condition, a bus collision occurs if: a) b) SDAx or SCLx are sampled low at the beginning of the Start condition (Figure 23-32). SCLx is sampled low before SDAx is asserted low (Figure 23-33). If the SDAx pin is sampled low during this count, the BRG is reset and the SDAx line is asserted early (Figure 23-34). If, however, a `1' is sampled on the SDAx pin, the SDAx pin is asserted low at the end of the BRG count. The Baud Rate Generator is then reloaded and counts down to zero; if the SCLx pin is sampled as `0' during this time, a bus collision does not occur. At the end of the BRG count, the SCLx pin is asserted low. Note: The reason that bus collision is not a factor during a Start condition is that no two bus masters can assert a Start condition at the exact same time. Therefore, one master will always assert SDAx before the other. This condition does not cause a bus collision because the two masters must be allowed to arbitrate the first address following the Start condition. If the address is the same, arbitration must be allowed to continue into the data portion, Repeated Start or Stop conditions. During a Start condition, both the SDAx and the SCLx pins are monitored. If the SDAx pin is already low, or the SCLx pin is already low, then all of the following occur: * the Start condition is aborted, * the BCLxIF flag is set and * the MSSPx module is reset to its Idle state (Figure 23-32). The Start condition begins with the SDAx and SCLx pins deasserted. When the SDAx pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is loaded and counts down. If the SCLx pin is sampled low while SDAx is high, a bus collision occurs because it is assumed that another master is attempting to drive a data `1' during the Start condition. FIGURE 23-33: BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SDAX ONLY) SDAx goes low before the SEN bit is set. Set BCLxIF, S bit and SSPxIF set because SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1. SDAx SCLx Set SEN, enable Start condition if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 SEN SDAx sampled low before Start condition. Set BCLxIF. S bit and SSPxIF set because SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1. SSPxIF and BCLxIF are cleared by software S SEN cleared automatically because of bus collision. SSPx module reset into Idle state. BCLxIF SSPxIF SSPxIF and BCLxIF are cleared by software 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 277 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 23-34: BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SCLX = 0) SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1 TBRG TBRG SDAx Set SEN, enable Start sequence if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 SCLx = 0 before SDAx = 0, bus collision occurs. Set BCLxIF. SCLx = 0 before BRG time-out, bus collision occurs. Set BCLxIF. BCLxIF Interrupt cleared by software S SSPxIF SCLx SEN '0' '0' '0' '0' FIGURE 23-35: BRG RESET DUE TO SDA ARBITRATION DURING START CONDITION SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1 Set S Less than TBRG Set SSPxIF TBRG SDAx SDAx pulled low by other master. Reset BRG and assert SDAx. S SCLx pulled low after BRG time-out Set SEN, enable Start sequence if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 SCLx SEN BCLxIF '0' S SSPxIF SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1, set SSPxIF Interrupts cleared by software DS41414A-page 278 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.6.13.2 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition During a Repeated Start condition, a bus collision occurs if: a) b) A low level is sampled on SDAx when SCLx goes from low level to high level. SCLx goes low before SDAx is asserted low, indicating that another master is attempting to transmit a data `1'. If SDAx is low, a bus collision has occurred (i.e., another master is attempting to transmit a data `0', Figure 23-35). If SDAx is sampled high, the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. If SDAx goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out, no bus collision occurs because no two masters can assert SDAx at exactly the same time. If SCLx goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out and SDAx has not already been asserted, a bus collision occurs. In this case, another master is attempting to transmit a data `1' during the Repeated Start condition, see Figure 23-36. If, at the end of the BRG time-out, both SCLx and SDAx are still high, the SDAx pin is driven low and the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. At the end of the count, regardless of the status of the SCLx pin, the SCLx pin is driven low and the Repeated Start condition is complete. When the user releases SDAx and the pin is allowed to float high, the BRG is loaded with SSPxADD and counts down to zero. The SCLx pin is then deasserted and when sampled high, the SDAx pin is sampled. FIGURE 23-36: SDAx BUS COLLISION DURING A REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 1) SCLx Sample SDAx when SCLx goes high. If SDAx = 0, set BCLxIF and release SDAx and SCLx. RSEN BCLxIF Cleared by software S SSPxIF '0' '0' FIGURE 23-37: BUS COLLISION DURING REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 2) TBRG TBRG SDAx SCLx SCLx goes low before SDAx, set BCLxIF. Release SDAx and SCLx. Interrupt cleared by software RSEN S SSPxIF BCLxIF '0' 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 279 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.6.13.3 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition Bus collision occurs during a Stop condition if: a) After the SDAx pin has been deasserted and allowed to float high, SDAx is sampled low after the BRG has timed out. After the SCLx pin is deasserted, SCLx is sampled low before SDAx goes high. The Stop condition begins with SDAx asserted low. When SDAx is sampled low, the SCLx pin is allowed to float. When the pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the Baud Rate Generator is loaded with SSPxADD and counts down to 0. After the BRG times out, SDAx is sampled. If SDAx is sampled low, a bus collision has occurred. This is due to another master attempting to drive a data `0' (Figure 23-37). If the SCLx pin is sampled low before SDAx is allowed to float high, a bus collision occurs. This is another case of another master attempting to drive a data `0' (Figure 23-38). b) FIGURE 23-38: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 1) TBRG TBRG TBRG SDAx sampled low after TBRG, set BCLxIF SDAx SDAx asserted low SCLx PEN BCLxIF P SSPxIF '0' '0' FIGURE 23-39: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 2) TBRG TBRG TBRG SDAx Assert SDAx SCLx PEN BCLxIF P SSPxIF SCLx goes low before SDAx goes high, set BCLxIF '0' '0' DS41414A-page 280 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 23-3: Name INTCON PIE1 PIE2 PIE4(1) PIR1 PIR2 PIR4(1) TRISA TRISB SSPxADD SSPxBUF SSPxCON1 SSPxCON2 SSPxCON3 SSPxMSK SSPxSTAT Legend: * Note 1: SMP CKE D/A P MSSPx Receive Buffer/Transmit Register WCOL GCEN ACKTIM SSPOV ACKSTAT PCIE SSPEN ACKDT SCIE CKP ACKEN BOEN RCEN SDAHT S SSPM<3:0> PEN SBCDE R/W RSEN AHEN UA SEN DHEN BF SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH I2CTM OPERATION Bit 7 GIE Bit 6 PEIE ADIE C2IE -- ADIF C2IF -- TRISA6 TRISB6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RCIE C1IE -- RCIF C1IF -- TRISA5 TRISB5 Bit 4 INTE TXIE EEIE -- TXIF EEIF -- TRISA4 TRISB4 Bit 3 IOCIE SSP1IE BCL1IE -- SSP1IF BCL1IF -- TRISA3 TRISB3 Bit 2 TMR0IF CCP1IE -- -- CCP1IF -- -- TRISA2 TRISB2 Bit 1 INTF TMR2IE -- BCL2IE TMR2IF -- BCL2IF TRISA1 TRISB1 Bit 0 IOCIF TMR1IE CCP2IE(1) SSP2IE TMR1IF CCP2IF(1) SSP2IF TRISA0 TRISB0 Reset Values on Page 89 90 91 93 94 95 97 124 127 287 239* 284 285 286 287 283 TMR1GIE OSFIE -- TMR1GIF OSFIF -- TRISA7 TRISB7 ADD<7:0> MSK<7:0> -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the MSSP module in I2CTM mode. Page provides register information. PIC16F1947 only. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 281 PIC16F/LF1946/47 23.7 BAUD RATE GENERATOR The MSSPx module has a Baud Rate Generator available for clock generation in both I2C and SPI Master modes. The Baud Rate Generator (BRG) reload value is placed in the SSPxADD register (Register 23-6). When a write occurs to SSPxBUF, the Baud Rate Generator will automatically begin counting down. Once the given operation is complete, the internal clock will automatically stop counting and the clock pin will remain in its last state. An internal signal "Reload" in Figure 23-39 triggers the value from SSPxADD to be loaded into the BRG counter. This occurs twice for each oscillation of the module clock line. The logic dictating when the reload signal is asserted depends on the mode the MSSPx is being operated in. Table 23-4 demonstrates clock rates based on instruction cycles and the BRG value loaded into SSPxADD. EQUATION 23-1: FOSC FCLOCK = ------------------------------------------------ SSPxADD + 1 4 FIGURE 23-40: BAUD RATE GENERATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM SSPxM<3:0> SSPxADD<7:0> SSPxM<3:0> SCLx Reload Control SSPxCLK Reload BRG Down Counter FOSC/2 Note: Values of 0x00, 0x01 and 0x02 are not valid for SSPxADD when used as a Baud Rate Generator for I2C. This is an implementation limitation. TABLE 23-4: FOSC MSSPx CLOCK RATE W/BRG FCY 8 MHz 8 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 4 MHz 4 MHz 1 MHz I2C BRG Value 13h 19h 4Fh 09h 0Ch 27h 09h FCLOCK (2 Rollovers of BRG) 400 kHz(1) 308 kHz 100 kHz 400 kHz(1) 308 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 32 MHz 32 MHz 32 MHz 16 MHz 16 MHz 16 MHz 4 MHz Note 1: 2C specification (which applies to rates greater than The I interface does not conform to the 400 kHz 100 kHz) in all details, but may be used with care where higher rates are required by the application. DS41414A-page 282 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 23-1: R/W-0/0 SMP bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared SMP: SPI Data Input Sample bit SPI Master mode: 1 = Input data sampled at end of data output time 0 = Input data sampled at middle of data output time SPI Slave mode: SMP must be cleared when SPI is used in Slave mode In I2 C Master or Slave mode: 1 = Slew rate control disabled for standard speed mode (100 kHz and 1 MHz) 0 = Slew rate control enabled for high speed mode (400 kHz) bit 6 CKE: SPI Clock Edge Select bit (SPI mode only) In SPI Master or Slave mode: 1 = Transmit occurs on transition from active to Idle clock state 0 = Transmit occurs on transition from Idle to active clock state In I2 CTM mode only: 1 = Enable input logic so that thresholds are compliant with SMBus specification 0 = Disable SMBus specific inputs bit 5 D/A: Data/Address bit (I2C mode only) 1 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was data 0 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was address P: Stop bit (I2C mode only. This bit is cleared when the MSSPx module is disabled, SSPxEN is cleared.) 1 = Indicates that a Stop bit has been detected last (this bit is `0' on Reset) 0 = Stop bit was not detected last bit 3 S: Start bit (I2C mode only. This bit is cleared when the MSSPx module is disabled, SSPxEN is cleared.) 1 = Indicates that a Start bit has been detected last (this bit is `0' on Reset) 0 = Start bit was not detected last bit 2 R/W: Read/Write bit information (I2C mode only) This bit holds the R/W bit information following the last address match. This bit is only valid from the address match to the next Start bit, Stop bit, or not ACK bit. In I2 C Slave mode: 1 = Read 0 = Write In I2 C Master mode: 1 = Transmit is in progress 0 = Transmit is not in progress OR-ing this bit with SEN, RSEN, PEN, RCEN or ACKEN will indicate if the MSSPx is in Idle mode. bit 1 UA: Update Address bit (10-bit I2C mode only) 1 = Indicates that the user needs to update the address in the SSPxADD register 0 = Address does not need to be updated BF: Buffer Full Status bit Receive (SPI and I2 C modes): 1 = Receive complete, SSPxBUF is full 0 = Receive not complete, SSPxBUF is empty Transmit (I2 C mode only): 1 = Data transmit in progress (does not include the ACK and Stop bits), SSPxBUF is full 0 = Data transmit complete (does not include the ACK and Stop bits), SSPxBUF is empty U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets SSPxSTAT: SSPx STATUS REGISTER R/W-0/0 CKE R-0/0 D/A R-0/0 P R-0/0 S R-0/0 R/W R-0/0 UA R-0/0 BF bit 0 bit 4 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 283 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 23-2: R/C/HS-0/0 WCOL bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets HS = Bit is set by hardware C = User cleared SSPxCON1: SSPx CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0/0 SSPxEN R/W-0/0 CKP R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 SSPxOV SSPxM<3:0> R/C/HS-0/0 WCOL: Write Collision Detect bit Master mode: 1 = A write to the SSPxBUF register was attempted while the I2C conditions were not valid for a transmission to be started 0 = No collision Slave mode: 1 = The SSPxBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared in software) 0 = No collision SSPxOV: Receive Overflow Indicator bit(1) In SPI mode: 1 = A new byte is received while the SSPxBUF register is still holding the previous data. In case of overflow, the data in SSPxSR is lost. Overflow can only occur in Slave mode. In Slave mode, the user must read the SSPxBUF, even if only transmitting data, to avoid setting overflow. In Master mode, the overflow bit is not set since each new reception (and transmission) is initiated by writing to the SSPxBUF register (must be cleared in software). 0 = No overflow 2 In I C mode: 1 = A byte is received while the SSPxBUF register is still holding the previous byte. SSPxOV is a "don't care" in Transmit mode (must be cleared in software). 0 = No overflow SSPxEN: Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit In both modes, when enabled, these pins must be properly configured as input or output In SPI mode: 1 = Enables serial port and configures SCKx, SDOx, SDIx and SSx as the source of the serial port pins(2) 0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins In I2C mode: 1 = Enables the serial port and configures the SDAx and SCLx pins as the source of the serial port pins(3) 0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins CKP: Clock Polarity Select bit In SPI mode: 1 = Idle state for clock is a high level 0 = Idle state for clock is a low level In I2C Slave mode: SCLx release control 1 = Enable clock 0 = Holds clock low (clock stretch). (Used to ensure data setup time.) In I2C Master mode: Unused in this mode SSPxM<3:0>: Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits 0000 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/4 0001 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/16 0010 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/64 0011 = SPI Master mode, clock = TMR2 output/2 0100 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCKx pin, SSx pin control enabled 0101 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCKx pin, SSx pin control disabled, SSx can be used as I/O pin 0110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address 0111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address 1000 = I2C Master mode, clock = FOSC / (4 * (SSPxADD+1))(4) 1001 = Reserved 1010 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/(4 * (SSPxADD+1)) 1011 = I2C firmware controlled Master mode (Slave idle) 1100 = Reserved 1101 = Reserved 1110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled 1111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled 1: 2: 3: 4: In Master mode, the overflow bit is not set since each new reception (and transmission) is initiated by writing to the SSPxBUF register. When enabled, these pins must be properly configured as input or output. When enabled, the SDAx and SCLx pins must be configured as inputs. SSPxADD values of 0, 1 or 2 are not supported for I2C Mode. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3-0 Note DS41414A-page 284 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 23-3: R/W-0/0 GCEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets HC = Cleared by hardware S = User set SSPxCON2: SSPx CONTROL REGISTER 2 R-0/0 R/W-0/0 ACKDT R/S/HS-0/0 ACKEN R/S/HS-0/0 RCEN R/S/HS-0/0 PEN R/S/HS-0/0 RSEN R/W/HS-0/0 SEN bit 0 ACKSTAT GCEN: General Call Enable bit (in I2C Slave mode only) 1 = Enable interrupt when a general call address (0x00 or 00h) is received in the SSPxSR 0 = General call address disabled ACKSTAT: Acknowledge Status bit (in I2C mode only) 1 = Acknowledge was not received 0 = Acknowledge was received ACKDT: Acknowledge Data bit (in I2C mode only) In Receive mode: Value transmitted when the user initiates an Acknowledge sequence at the end of a receive 1 = Not Acknowledge 0 = Acknowledge ACKEN: Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit (in I2C Master mode only) In Master Receive mode: 1 = Initiate Acknowledge sequence on SDAx and SCLx pins, and transmit ACKDT data bit. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Acknowledge sequence idle RCEN: Receive Enable bit (in I2C Master mode only) 1 = Enables Receive mode for I2C 0 = Receive idle PEN: Stop Condition Enable bit (in I2C Master mode only) SCKx Release Control: 1 = Initiate Stop condition on SDAx and SCLx pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Stop condition Idle RSEN: Repeated Start Condition Enabled bit (in I2C Master mode only) 1 = Initiate Repeated Start condition on SDAx and SCLx pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Repeated Start condition Idle SEN: Start Condition Enabled bit (in I2C Master mode only) In Master mode: 1 = Initiate Start condition on SDAx and SCLx pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Start condition Idle In Slave mode: 1 = Clock stretching is enabled for both slave transmit and slave receive (stretch enabled) 0 = Clock stretching is disabled For bits ACKEN, RCEN, PEN, RSEN, SEN: If the I2C module is not in the Idle mode, this bit may not be set (no spooling) and the SSPxBUF may not be written (or writes to the SSPxBUF are disabled). bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 285 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 23-4: R-0/0 ACKTIM bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared ACKTIM: Acknowledge Time Status bit (I2C mode only)(3) 1 = Indicates the I2C bus is in an Acknowledge sequence, set on 8TH falling edge of SCLx clock 0 = Not an Acknowledge sequence, cleared on 9TH rising edge of SCLx clock PCIE: Stop Condition Interrupt Enable bit (I2C mode only) 1 = Enable interrupt on detection of Stop condition 0 = Stop detection interrupts are disabled(2) SCIE: Start Condition Interrupt Enable bit (I2C mode only) 1 = Enable interrupt on detection of Start or Restart conditions 0 = Start detection interrupts are disabled(2) BOEN: Buffer Overwrite Enable bit In SPI Slave mode:(1) 1 = SSPxBUF updates every time that a new data byte is shifted in ignoring the BF bit 0 = If new byte is received with BF bit of the SSPxSTAT register already set, SSPxOV bit of the SSPxCON1 register is set, and the buffer is not updated In I2C Master mode and SPI Master mode: This bit is ignored. In I2C Slave mode: 1 = SSPxBUF is updated and ACK is generated for a received address/data byte, ignoring the state of the SSPxOV bit only if the BF bit = 0. 0 = SSPxBUF is only updated when SSPxOV is clear SDAHT: SDAx Hold Time Selection bit (I2C mode only) 1 = Minimum of 300 ns hold time on SDAx after the falling edge of SCLx 0 = Minimum of 100 ns hold time on SDAx after the falling edge of SCLx SBCDE: Slave Mode Bus Collision Detect Enable bit (I2C Slave mode only) If on the rising edge of SCLx, SDAx is sampled low when the module is outputting a high state, the BCLxIF bit of the PIR2 register is set, and bus goes idle 1 = Enable slave bus collision interrupts 0 = Slave bus collision interrupts are disabled bit 1 AHEN: Address Hold Enable bit (I2C Slave mode only) 1 = Following the 8th falling edge of SCLx for a matching received address byte; CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register will be cleared and the SCLx will be held low. 0 = Address holding is disabled DHEN: Data Hold Enable bit (I2C Slave mode only) 1 = Following the 8th falling edge of SCLx for a received data byte; slave hardware clears the CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register and SCLx is held low. 0 = Data holding is disabled For daisy-chained SPI operation; allows the user to ignore all but the last received byte. SSPxOV is still set when a new byte is received and BF = 1, but hardware continues to write the most recent byte to SSPxBUF. This bit has no effect in Slave modes that Start and Stop condition detection is explicitly listed as enabled. The ACKTIM Status bit is only active when the AHEN bit or DHEN bit is set. U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets SSPxCON3: SSPx CONTROL REGISTER 3 R/W-0/0 SCIE R/W-0/0 BOEN R/W-0/0 SDAHT R/W-0/0 SBCDE R/W-0/0 AHEN R/W-0/0 DHEN bit 0 PCIE R/W-0/0 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 0 Note 1: 2: 3: DS41414A-page 286 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 23-5: R/W-1/1 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-1 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared MSK<7:1>: Mask bits 1 = The received address bit n is compared to SSPxADD SSPxMSK: SSPx MASK REGISTER R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 bit 0 MSK<7:0> R/W-1/1 bit 0 REGISTER 23-6: R/W-0/0 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set Master mode: bit 7-0 SSPxADD: MSSPx ADDRESS AND BAUD RATE REGISTER (I2C MODE) R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 bit 0 ADD<7:0> R/W-0/0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets ADD<7:0>: Baud Rate Clock Divider bits SCLx pin clock period = ((ADD<7:0> + 1) *4)/FOSC 10-Bit Slave mode - Most Significant Address byte: bit 7-3 Not used: Unused for Most Significant Address byte. Bit state of this register is a "don't care". Bit pattern sent by master is fixed by I2C specification and must be equal to `11110'. However, those bits are compared by hardware and are not affected by the value in this register. ADD<2:1>: Two Most Significant bits of 10-bit address Not used: Unused in this mode. Bit state is a "don't care". bit 2-1 bit 0 10-Bit Slave mode - Least Significant Address byte: bit 7-0 ADD<7:0>: Eight Least Significant bits of 10-bit address 7-Bit Slave mode: bit 7-1 bit 0 ADD<7:1>: 7-bit address Not used: Unused in this mode. Bit state is a "don't care". 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 287 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 288 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.0 ENHANCED UNIVERSAL SYNCHRONOUS ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER TRANSMITTER (EUSART) The PIC16F/LF/1946/47 devices have two EUSARTs. Therefore, all information in this section refers to both EUSART 1 and EUSART 2. These devices typically do not have internal clocks for baud rate generation and require the external clock signal provided by a master synchronous device. The EUSART module includes the following capabilities: * * * * * * * * * * Full-duplex asynchronous transmit and receive Two-character input buffer One-character output buffer Programmable 8-bit or 9-bit character length Address detection in 9-bit mode Input buffer overrun error detection Received character framing error detection Half-duplex synchronous master Half-duplex synchronous slave Programmable clock and data polarity Note: The Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) module is a serial I/O communications peripheral. It contains all the clock generators, shift registers and data buffers necessary to perform an input or output serial data transfer independent of device program execution. The EUSART, also known as a Serial Communications Interface (SCI), can be configured as a full-duplex asynchronous system or half-duplex synchronous system. Full-Duplex mode is useful for communications with peripheral systems, such as CRT terminals and personal computers. Half-Duplex Synchronous mode is intended for communications with peripheral devices, such as A/D or D/A integrated circuits, serial EEPROMs or other microcontrollers. The EUSART module implements the following additional features, making it ideally suited for use in Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus systems: * Automatic detection and calibration of the baud rate * Wake-up on Break reception * 13-bit Break character transmit Block diagrams of the EUSART transmitter and receiver are shown in Figure 24-1 and Figure 24-2. FIGURE 24-1: EUSART TRANSMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus TXxIE TXxIF LSb Interrupt TXxREG Register 8 MSb (8) TXx/CKx pin Pin Buffer and Control *** Transmit Shift Register (TSR) 0 TXEN Baud Rate Generator BRG16 +1 SPxBRGH SPxBRGL Multiplier SYNC BRGH BRG16 TRMT FOSC /n n x4 x16 x64 0 0 0 1X00 X110 X101 TX9D TX9 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 289 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 24-2: EUSART RECEIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM CREN OERR RCIDL RXx/DTx pin Pin Buffer and Control Baud Rate Generator BRG16 +1 SPxBRGH SPxBRGL Multiplier SYNC BRGH BRG16 x4 x16 x64 0 0 0 FERR 1X00 X110 X101 FOSC Data Recovery MSb Stop (8) 7 RSR Register LSb 0 START *** RX9 1 /n n FIFO RX9D RCxREG Register 8 Data Bus RCxIF RCxIE Interrupt The operation of the EUSART module is controlled through three registers: * Transmit Status and Control (TXxSTA) * Receive Status and Control (RCxSTA) * Baud Rate Control (BAUDxCON) These registers are detailed in Register 24-1, Register 24-2 and Register 24-3, respectively. For all modes of EUSART operation, the TRIS control bits corresponding to the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pins should be set to `1'. The EUSART control will automatically reconfigure the pin from input to output, as needed. When the receiver or transmitter section is not enabled then the corresponding RXx/DTx or TXx/CKx pin may be used for general purpose input and output. DS41414A-page 290 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.1 EUSART Asynchronous Mode 24.1.1.2 Transmitting Data The EUSART transmits and receives data using the standard non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format. NRZ is implemented with two levels: a VOH mark state which represents a `1' data bit, and a VOL space state which represents a `0' data bit. NRZ refers to the fact that consecutively transmitted data bits of the same value stay at the output level of that bit without returning to a neutral level between each bit transmission. An NRZ transmission port idles in the mark state. Each character transmission consists of one Start bit followed by eight or nine data bits and is always terminated by one or more Stop bits. The Start bit is always a space and the Stop bits are always marks. The most common data format is 8 bits. Each transmitted bit persists for a period of 1/(Baud Rate). An on-chip dedicated 8-bit/16-bit Baud Rate Generator is used to derive standard baud rate frequencies from the system oscillator. See Table 24-5 for examples of baud rate configurations. The EUSART transmits and receives the LSb first. The EUSART's transmitter and receiver are functionally independent, but share the same data format and baud rate. Parity is not supported by the hardware, but can be implemented in software and stored as the ninth data bit. A transmission is initiated by writing a character to the TXxREG register. If this is the first character, or the previous character has been completely flushed from the TSR, the data in the TXxREG is immediately transferred to the TSR register. If the TSR still contains all or part of a previous character, the new character data is held in the TXxREG until the Stop bit of the previous character has been transmitted. The pending character in the TXxREG is then transferred to the TSR in one TCY immediately following the Stop bit transmission. The transmission of the Start bit, data bits and Stop bit sequence commences immediately following the transfer of the data to the TSR from the TXxREG. 24.1.1.3 Transmit Data Polarity The polarity of the transmit data can be controlled with the CKTXP bit of the BAUDxCON register. The default state of this bit is `0' which selects high true transmit idle and data bits. Setting the CKTXP bit to `1' will invert the transmit data resulting in low true idle and data bits. The CKTXP bit controls transmit data polarity only in Asynchronous mode. In Synchronous mode the CKTXP bit has a different function. 24.1.1 EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMITTER 24.1.1.4 Transmit Interrupt Flag The EUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in Figure 24-1. The heart of the transmitter is the serial Transmit Shift Register (TSR), which is not directly accessible by software. The TSR obtains its data from the transmit buffer, which is the TXxREG register. 24.1.1.1 Enabling the Transmitter The EUSART transmitter is enabled for asynchronous operations by configuring the following three control bits: * TXEN = 1 * SYNC = 0 * SPEN = 1 All other EUSART control bits are assumed to be in their default state. Setting the TXEN bit of the TXxSTA register enables the transmitter circuitry of the EUSART. Clearing the SYNC bit of the TXxSTA register configures the EUSART for asynchronous operation. Setting the SPEN bit of the RCxSTA register enables the EUSART. The programmer must set the corresponding TRIS bit to configure the TX/CK I/O pin as an output. If the TXx/CKx pin is shared with an analog peripheral, the analog I/O function must be disabled by clearing the corresponding ANSEL bit. Note: The TXxIF transmitter interrupt flag is set when the TXEN enable bit is set. The TXxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR1/PIR3 register is set whenever the EUSART transmitter is enabled and no character is being held for transmission in the TXxREG. In other words, the TXxIF bit is only clear when the TSR is busy with a character and a new character has been queued for transmission in the TXxREG. The TXxIF flag bit is not cleared immediately upon writing TXxREG. TXxIF becomes valid in the second instruction cycle following the write execution. Polling TXxIF immediately following the TXxREG write will return invalid results. The TXxIF bit is read-only, it cannot be set or cleared by software. The TXxIF interrupt can be enabled by setting the TXxIE interrupt enable bit of the PIE1/PIE3 register. However, the TXxIF flag bit will be set whenever the TXxREG is empty, regardless of the state of TXxIE enable bit. To use interrupts when transmitting data, set the TXxIE bit only when there is more data to send. Clear the TXxIE interrupt enable bit upon writing the last character of the transmission to the TXxREG. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 291 PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.1.1.5 TSR Status 24.1.1.7 1. Asynchronous Transmission Set-up: The TRMT bit of the TXxSTA register indicates the status of the TSR register. This is a read-only bit. The TRMT bit is set when the TSR register is empty and is cleared when a character is transferred to the TSR register from the TXxREG. The TRMT bit remains clear until all bits have been shifted out of the TSR register. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit, so the user needs to poll this bit to determine the TSR status. Note: The TSR register is not mapped in data memory, so it is not available to the user. 2. 3. 4. 24.1.1.6 Transmitting 9-Bit Characters 5. 6. The EUSART supports 9-bit character transmissions. When the TX9 bit of the TXxSTA register is set the EUSART will shift 9 bits out for each character transmitted. The TX9D bit of the TXxSTA register is the ninth, and Most Significant, data bit. When transmitting 9-bit data, the TX9D data bit must be written before writing the 8 Least Significant bits into the TXxREG. All nine bits of data will be transferred to the TSR shift register immediately after the TXxREG is written. A special 9-bit Address mode is available for use with multiple receivers. See Section 24.1.2.8 "Address Detection" for more information on the Address mode. 7. 8. 9. Initialize the SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see Section 24.3 "EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)"). Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to `1'. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing the SYNC bit and setting the SPEN bit. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 control bit. A set ninth data bit will indicate that the 8 Least Significant data bits are an address when the receiver is set for address detection. Set the CKTXP control bit if inverted transmit data polarity is desired. Enable the transmission by setting the TXEN control bit. This will cause the TXxIF interrupt bit to be set. If interrupts are desired, set the TXxIE interrupt enable bit. An interrupt will occur immediately provided that the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register are also set. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded into the TX9D data bit. Load 8-bit data into the TXxREG register. This will start the transmission. FIGURE 24-3: Write to TXxREG BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx/CKx pin TXxIF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg. Empty Flag) ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Word 1 Start bit 1 TCY bit 0 bit 1 Word 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg DS41414A-page 292 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 24-4: Write to TXxREG BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx/CKx pin TXxIF bit (Interrupt Reg. Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) 1 TCY 1 TCY Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg Word 2 Transmit Shift Reg Word 1 Word 2 ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (BACK-TO-BACK) Start bit bit 0 bit 1 Word 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit Word 2 bit 0 Note: This timing diagram shows two consecutive transmissions. TABLE 24-1: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on page BAUD1CON BAUD2CON INTCON PIE1 PIE4 PIR1 PIR4 RC1STA RC2STA SP1BRGL SP1BRGH SP2BRGL SP2BRGH TX1REG TX1STA TX2REG TX2STA Legend: * ABDOVF ABDOVF GIE -- -- -- -- SPEN SPEN RCIDL RCIDL PEIE ADIE -- ADIF -- RX9 RX9 -- -- TMR0IE RC1IE RC2IE RC1IF RC2IF SREN SREN SCKP SCKP INTE TX1IE TX2IE TX1IF TX2IF CREN CREN BRG16 BRG16 IOCIE SSP1IE -- SSP1IF -- ADDEN ADDEN -- -- TMR0IF CCP1IE -- CCP1IF -- FERR FERR WUE WUE INTF TMR2IE BCL2IE TMR2IF BCL2IF OERR OERR ABDEN ABDEN IOCIF TMR1IE SSP2IE TMR1IF SSP2IF RX9D RX9D 300 300 89 90 93 94 93 299 299 301* 301* 301* 301* 291* EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte EUSART1 Transmit Register CSRC CSRC TX9 TX9 TXEN TXEN SYNC SYNC SENDB SENDB BRGH BRGH TRMT TRMT TX9D TX9D EUSART2 Transmit Register -- = unimplemented locations, read as `0'. Shaded bits are not used for asynchronous transmission. Page provides register information. 298 291* 298 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 293 PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.1.2 EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER 24.1.2.2 Receiving Data The Asynchronous mode would typically be used in RS-232 systems. The receiver block diagram is shown in Figure 24-2. The data is received on the RXx/DTx pin and drives the data recovery block. The data recovery block is actually a high-speed shifter operating at 16 times the baud rate, whereas the serial Receive Shift Register (RSR) operates at the bit rate. When all 8 or 9 bits of the character have been shifted in, they are immediately transferred to a two character First-In-First-Out (FIFO) memory. The FIFO buffering allows reception of two complete characters and the start of a third character before software must start servicing the EUSART receiver. The FIFO and RSR registers are not directly accessible by software. Access to the received data is via the RCxREG register. The receiver data recovery circuit initiates character reception on the falling edge of the first bit. The first bit, also known as the Start bit, is always a zero. The data recovery circuit counts one-half bit time to the center of the Start bit and verifies that the bit is still a zero. If it is not a zero then the data recovery circuit aborts character reception, without generating an error, and resumes looking for the falling edge of the Start bit. If the Start bit zero verification succeeds then the data recovery circuit counts a full bit time to the center of the next bit. The bit is then sampled by a majority detect circuit and the resulting `0' or `1' is shifted into the RSR. This repeats until all data bits have been sampled and shifted into the RSR. One final bit time is measured and the level sampled. This is the Stop bit, which is always a `1'. If the data recovery circuit samples a `0' in the Stop bit position then a framing error is set for this character, otherwise the framing error is cleared for this character. See Section 24.1.2.5 "Receive Framing Error" for more information on framing errors. Immediately after all data bits and the Stop bit have been received, the character in the RSR is transferred to the EUSART receive FIFO and the RCxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR1/PIR3 register is set. The top character in the FIFO is transferred out of the FIFO by reading the RCxREG register. Note: If the receive FIFO is overrun, no additional characters will be received until the overrun condition is cleared. See Section 24.1.2.6 "Receive Overrun Error" for more information on overrun errors. 24.1.2.1 Enabling the Receiver The EUSART receiver is enabled for asynchronous operation by configuring the following three control bits: * CREN = 1 * SYNC = 0 * SPEN = 1 All other EUSART control bits are assumed to be in their default state. Setting the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register enables the receiver circuitry of the EUSART. Clearing the SYNC bit of the TXxSTA register configures the EUSART for asynchronous operation. Setting the SPEN bit of the RCxSTA register enables the EUSART. The programmer must set the corresponding TRIS bit to configure the TX/CK I/O pin as an input. Note 1: If the RX/DT function is on an analog pin, the corresponding ANSEL bit must be cleared for the receiver to function. If the RXx/DTx pin is shared with an analog peripheral the analog I/O function must be disabled by clearing the corresponding ANSEL bit. 24.1.2.3 Receive Data Polarity The polarity of the receive data can be controlled with the DTRXP bit of the BAUDxCON register. The default state of this bit is `0' which selects high true receive idle and data bits. Setting the DTRXP bit to `1' will invert the receive data resulting in low true idle and data bits. The DTRXP bit controls receive data polarity only in Asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode the DTRXP bit has a different function. DS41414A-page 294 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.1.2.4 Receive Interrupts 24.1.2.7 Receiving 9-bit Characters The RCxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR1/PIR3 register is set whenever the EUSART receiver is enabled and there is an unread character in the receive FIFO. The RCxIF interrupt flag bit is read-only, it cannot be set or cleared by software. RCxIF interrupts are enabled by setting the following bits: * RCxIE interrupt enable bit of the PIE1/PIE3 register * PEIE peripheral interrupt enable bit of the INTCON register * GIE global interrupt enable bit of the INTCON register The RCxIF interrupt flag bit will be set when there is an unread character in the FIFO, regardless of the state of interrupt enable bits. The EUSART supports 9-bit character reception. When the RX9 bit of the RCxSTA register is set, the EUSART will shift 9 bits into the RSR for each character received. The RX9D bit of the RCxSTA register is the ninth and Most Significant data bit of the top unread character in the receive FIFO. When reading 9-bit data from the receive FIFO buffer, the RX9D data bit must be read before reading the 8 Least Significant bits from the RCxREG. 24.1.2.8 Address Detection A special Address Detection mode is available for use when multiple receivers share the same transmission line, such as in RS-485 systems. Address detection is enabled by setting the ADDEN bit of the RCxSTA register. Address detection requires 9-bit character reception. When address detection is enabled, only characters with the ninth data bit set will be transferred to the receive FIFO buffer, thereby setting the RCxIF interrupt bit. All other characters will be ignored. Upon receiving an address character, user software determines if the address matches its own. Upon address match, user software must disable address detection by clearing the ADDEN bit before the next Stop bit occurs. When user software detects the end of the message, determined by the message protocol used, software places the receiver back into the Address Detection mode by setting the ADDEN bit. 24.1.2.5 Receive Framing Error Each character in the receive FIFO buffer has a corresponding framing error Status bit. A framing error indicates that a Stop bit was not seen at the expected time. The framing error status is accessed via the FERR bit of the RCxSTA register. The FERR bit represents the status of the top unread character in the receive FIFO. Therefore, the FERR bit must be read before reading the RCxREG. The FERR bit is read-only and only applies to the top unread character in the receive FIFO. A framing error (FERR = 1) does not preclude reception of additional characters. It is not necessary to clear the FERR bit. Reading the next character from the FIFO buffer will advance the FIFO to the next character and the next corresponding framing error. The FERR bit can be forced clear by clearing the SPEN bit of the RCxSTA register which resets the EUSART. Clearing the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register does not affect the FERR bit. A framing error by itself does not generate an interrupt. Note: If all receive characters in the receive FIFO have framing errors, repeated reads of the RCxREG will not clear the FERR bit. 24.1.2.6 Receive Overrun Error The receive FIFO buffer can hold two characters. An overrun error will be generated If a third character, in its entirety, is received before the FIFO is accessed. When this happens the OERR bit of the RCxSTA register is set. The characters already in the FIFO buffer can be read but no additional characters will be received until the error is cleared. The error must be cleared by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register or by resetting the EUSART by clearing the SPEN bit of the RCxSTA register. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 295 PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.1.2.9 1. Asynchronous Reception Set-up: 24.1.2.10 9-bit Address Detection Mode Set-up Initialize the SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see Section 24.3 "EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)"). 2. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to `1'. 3. Enable the serial port by setting the SPEN bit and the RXx/DTx pin TRIS bit. The SYNC bit must be clear for asynchronous operation. 4. If interrupts are desired, set the RCxIE interrupt enable bit and set the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. 5. If 9-bit reception is desired, set the RX9 bit. 6. Set the DTRXP if inverted receive polarity is desired. 7. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. 8. The RCxIF interrupt flag bit will be set when a character is transferred from the RSR to the receive buffer. An interrupt will be generated if the RCxIE interrupt enable bit was also set. 9. Read the RCxSTA register to get the error flags and, if 9-bit data reception is enabled, the ninth data bit. 10. Get the received 8 Least Significant data bits from the receive buffer by reading the RCxREG register. 11. If an overrun occurred, clear the OERR flag by clearing the CREN receiver enable bit. This mode would typically be used in RS-485 systems. To set up an Asynchronous Reception with Address Detect Enable: 1. Initialize the SPxBRGH, SPxBRGL register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see Section 24.3 "EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)"). Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to `1'. Enable the serial port by setting the SPEN bit. The SYNC bit must be clear for asynchronous operation. If interrupts are desired, set the RCxIE interrupt enable bit and set the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. Enable 9-bit reception by setting the RX9 bit. Enable address detection by setting the ADDEN bit. Set the DTRXP if inverted receive polarity is desired. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. The RCxIF interrupt flag bit will be set when a character with the ninth bit set is transferred from the RSR to the receive buffer. An interrupt will be generated if the RCxIE interrupt enable bit was also set. Read the RCxSTA register to get the error flags. The ninth data bit will always be set. Get the received 8 Least Significant data bits from the receive buffer by reading the RCxREG register. Software determines if this is the device's address. If an overrun occurred, clear the OERR flag by clearing the CREN receiver enable bit. If the device has been addressed, clear the ADDEN bit to allow all received data into the receive buffer and generate interrupts. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. DS41414A-page 296 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 24-5: RXx/DTx pin Rcv Shift Reg Rcv Buffer Reg RCIDL Read Rcv Buffer Reg RCxREG RCxIF (Interrupt Flag) OERR bit CREN ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit bit 0 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 1 RCxREG Word 2 RCxREG Note: This timing diagram shows three words appearing on the RXx/DTx input. The RCxREG (receive buffer) is read after the third word, causing the OERR (overrun) bit to be set. TABLE 24-2: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page BAUD1CON BAUD2CON INTCON PIE1 PIE4 PIR1 PIR4 RC1REG RC1STA RC2REG RC2STA SP1BRGL SP1BRGH SP2BRGL SP2BRGH TRISC TX1STA TX2STA Legend: * ABDOVF ABDOVF GIE -- -- -- -- SPEN SPEN RCIDL RCIDL PEIE ADIE -- ADIF -- RX9 RX9 -- -- TMR0IE RC1IE RC2IE RC1IF RC2IF SREN SREN SCKP SCKP INTE TX1IE TX2IE TX1IF TX2IF CREN CREN BRG16 BRG16 IOCIE SSP1IE -- SSP1IF -- ADDEN ADDEN -- -- TMR0IF CCP1IE -- CCP1IF -- FERR FERR WUE WUE INTF TMR2IE BCL2IE TMR2IF BCL2IF OERR OERR ABDEN ABDEN IOCIF TMR1IE SSP2IE TMR1IF SSP2IF RX9D RX9D 300 300 89 90 93 94 93 294* 299 294* 299 301* 301* 301* 301* EUSART1 Receive Register EUSART2 Receive Register EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte TRISC7 CSRC CSRC TRISC6 TX9 TX9 TRISC5 TXEN TXEN TRISC4 SYNC SYNC TRISC3 SENDB SENDB TRISC2 BRGH BRGH TRISC1 TRMT TRMT TRISC0 TX9D TX9D 130 298 298 -- = unimplemented locations, read as `0'. Shaded bits are not used for asynchronous reception. Page provides register information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 297 PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.2 Clock Accuracy with Asynchronous Operation The first (preferred) method uses the OSCTUNE register to adjust the HFINTOSC output. Adjusting the value in the OSCTUNE register allows for fine resolution changes to the system clock source. See Section 5.2 "Clock Source Types" for more information. The other method adjusts the value in the Baud Rate Generator. This can be done automatically with the Auto-Baud Detect feature (see Section 24.3.1 "Auto-Baud Detect"). There may not be fine enough resolution when adjusting the Baud Rate Generator to compensate for a gradual change in the peripheral clock frequency. The factory calibrates the internal oscillator block output (HFINTOSC). However, the HFINTOSC frequency may drift as VDD or temperature changes, and this directly affects the asynchronous baud rate. Two methods may be used to adjust the baud rate clock, but both require a reference clock source of some kind. REGISTER 24-1: R/W-0 CSRC bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 TXxSTA: TRANSMIT STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 TX9 R/W-0 TXEN(1) R/W-0 SYNC R/W-0 SENDB R/W-0 BRGH R-1 TRMT R/W-0 TX9D bit 0 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown CSRC: Clock Source Select bit Asynchronous mode: Don't care Synchronous mode: 1 = Master mode (clock generated internally from BRG) 0 = Slave mode (clock from external source) TX9: 9-bit Transmit Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit transmission 0 = Selects 8-bit transmission TXEN: Transmit Enable bit(1) 1 = Transmit enabled 0 = Transmit disabled SYNC: EUSART Mode Select bit 1 = Synchronous mode 0 = Asynchronous mode SENDB: Send Break Character bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Send Sync Break on next transmission (cleared by hardware upon completion) 0 = Sync Break transmission completed Synchronous mode: Don't care BRGH: High Baud Rate Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = High speed 0 = Low speed Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode TRMT: Transmit Shift Register Status bit 1 = TSR empty 0 = TSR full TX9D: Ninth bit of Transmit Data Can be address/data bit or a parity bit. SREN/CREN overrides TXEN in Sync mode. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: DS41414A-page 298 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 24-2: R/W-0 SPEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown RCxSTA: RECEIVE STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 RX9 R/W-0 SREN R/W-0 CREN R/W-0 ADDEN R-0 FERR R-0 OERR R-x RX9D bit 0 SPEN: Serial Port Enable bit 1 = Serial port enabled (configures RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pins as serial port pins) 0 = Serial port disabled (held in Reset) RX9: 9-bit Receive Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit reception 0 = Selects 8-bit reception SREN: Single Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: Don't care Synchronous mode - Master: 1 = Enables single receive 0 = Disables single receive This bit is cleared after reception is complete. Synchronous mode - Slave Don't care CREN: Continuous Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Enables receiver 0 = Disables receiver Synchronous mode: 1 = Enables continuous receive until enable bit CREN is cleared (CREN overrides SREN) 0 = Disables continuous receive ADDEN: Address Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode 9-bit (RX9 = 1): 1 = Enables address detection, enable interrupt and load the receive buffer when RSR<8> is set 0 = Disables address detection, all bytes are received and ninth bit can be used as parity bit Asynchronous mode 8-bit (RX9 = 0): Don't care FERR: Framing Error bit 1 = Framing error (can be updated by reading RCxREG register and receive next valid byte) 0 = No framing error OERR: Overrun Error bit 1 = Overrun error (can be cleared by clearing bit CREN) 0 = No overrun error RX9D: Ninth bit of Received Data This can be address/data bit or a parity bit and must be calculated by user firmware. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 299 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 24-3: R-0/0 ABDOVF bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared ABDOVF: Auto-Baud Detect Overflow bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Auto-baud timer overflowed 0 = Auto-baud timer did not overflow Synchronous mode: Don't care RCIDL: Receive Idle Flag bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Receiver is Idle 0 = Start bit has been received and the receiver is receiving Synchronous mode: Don't care Unimplemented: Read as `0' SCKP: Synchronous Clock Polarity Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Transmit inverted data to the TXx/CKx pin 0 = Transmit non-inverted data to the TXx/CKx pin Synchronous mode: 1 = Data is clocked on rising edge of the clock 0 = Data is clocked on falling edge of the clock BRG16: 16-bit Baud Rate Generator bit 1 = 16-bit Baud Rate Generator is used 0 = 8-bit Baud Rate Generator is used Unimplemented: Read as `0' WUE: Wake-up Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Receiver is waiting for a falling edge. No character will be received, byte RCIF will be set. WUE will automatically clear after RCIF is set. 0 = Receiver is operating normally Synchronous mode: Don't care ABDEN: Auto-Baud Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Auto-Baud Detect mode is enabled (clears when auto-baud is complete) 0 = Auto-Baud Detect mode is disabled Synchronous mode: Don't care U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets BAUDxCON: BAUD RATE CONTROL REGISTER R-1/1 RCIDL U-0 -- R/W-0/0 SCKP R/W-0/0 BRG16 U-0 -- R/W-0/0 WUE R/W-0/0 ABDEN bit 0 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS41414A-page 300 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.3 EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG) If the system clock is changed during an active receive operation, a receive error or data loss may result. To avoid this problem, check the status of the RCIDL bit to make sure that the receive operation is Idle before changing the system clock. The Baud Rate Generator (BRG) is an 8-bit or 16-bit timer that is dedicated to the support of both the asynchronous and synchronous EUSART operation. By default, the BRG operates in 8-bit mode. Setting the BRG16 bit of the BAUDxCON register selects 16-bit mode. The SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair determines the period of the free running baud rate timer. In Asynchronous mode the multiplier of the baud rate period is determined by both the BRGH bit of the TXxSTA register and the BRG16 bit of the BAUDxCON register. In Synchronous mode, the BRGH bit is ignored. Example 24-1 provides a sample calculation for determining the desired baud rate, actual baud rate, and baud rate % error. Typical baud rates and error values for various asynchronous modes have been computed for your convenience and are shown in Table 24-5. It may be advantageous to use the high baud rate (BRGH = 1), or the 16-bit BRG (BRG16 = 1) to reduce the baud rate error. The 16-bit BRG mode is used to achieve slow baud rates for fast oscillator frequencies. Writing a new value to the SPxBRGH, SPxBRGL register pair causes the BRG timer to be reset (or cleared). This ensures that the BRG does not wait for a timer overflow before outputting the new baud rate. EXAMPLE 24-1: CALCULATING BAUD RATE ERROR For a device with FOSC of 16 MHz, desired baud rate of 9600, Asynchronous mode, 8-bit BRG: FOSC Desired Baud Rate = ------------------------------------------------------------------------64 [SPxBRGH:SPxBRG] + 1 Solving for SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL: FOSC -------------------------------------------Desired Baud Rate SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL = --------------------------------------------- - 1 64 16000000 ----------------------9600 = ----------------------- - 1 64 = 25.042 = 25 ActualBaudRate = -------------------------= 9615 Calc. Baud Rate - Desired Baud Rate Baud Rate % Error = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Desired Baud Rate 9615 - 9600 = ---------------------------------- = 0.16% 9600 16000000 64 25 + 1 TABLE 24-3: SYNC 0 0 0 0 1 1 Legend: BAUD RATE FORMULAS BRG16 0 0 1 1 0 1 BRGH 0 1 0 1 x x BRG/EUSART Mode 8-bit/Asynchronous 8-bit/Asynchronous 16-bit/Asynchronous 16-bit/Asynchronous 8-bit/Synchronous 16-bit/Synchronous FOSC/[4 (n+1)] Baud Rate Formula FOSC/[64 (n+1)] FOSC/[16 (n+1)] Configuration Bits x = Don't care, n = value of SPxBRGH, SPxBRGL register pair 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 301 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 24-4: Name BAUD1CON BAUD2CON RC1STA RC2STA SP1BRGL SP1BRGH SP2BRGL SP2BRGH TX1STA TX2STA Legend: * CSRC CSRC TX9 TX9 REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH BAUD RATE GENERATOR Bit 7 ABDOVF ABDOVF SPEN SPEN Bit 6 RCIDL RCIDL RX9 RX9 Bit 5 -- -- SREN SREN Bit 4 SCKP SCKP CREN CREN Bit 3 BRG16 BRG16 ADDEN ADDEN Bit 2 -- -- FERR FERR Bit 1 WUE WUE OERR OERR Bit 0 ABDEN ABDEN RX9D RX9D Reset Values on page 300 300 299 299 301* 301* 301* 301* EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte TXEN TXEN SYNC SYNC SENDB SENDB BRGH BRGH TRMT TRMT TX9D TX9D 298 298 -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded bits are not used by the BRG. Page provides register information. TABLE 24-5: BAUD RATE BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 FOSC = 32.000 MHz FOSC = 18.432 MHz Actual Rate -- 1200 2400 9600 10286 19.20k 57.60k -- % Error -- 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.26 0.00 0.00 -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- 239 119 29 27 14 7 -- FOSC = 16.000 MHz Actual Rate -- 1202 2404 9615 10417 19.23k -- -- % Error -- 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 -- -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- 207 103 25 23 12 -- -- FOSC = 11.0592 MHz Actual Rate -- 1200 2400 9600 10165 19.20k 57.60k -- % Error -- 0.00 0.00 0.00 -2.42 0.00 0.00 -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- 143 71 17 16 8 2 -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- -- 207 51 47 25 3 -- Actual Rate -- -- 2404 9615 10417 19.23k 55.55k -- % Error -- -- 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 -3.55 -- 300 1200 2400 9600 10417 19.2k 57.6k 115.2k SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate -- 1202 2404 9615 10417 -- -- -- % Error -- 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 -- -- -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- 103 51 12 11 -- -- -- FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate 300 1202 2404 -- 10417 -- -- -- % Error 0.16 0.16 0.16 -- 0.00 -- -- -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) 207 51 25 -- 5 -- -- -- FOSC = 3.6864 MHz Actual Rate 300 1200 2400 9600 -- 19.20k 57.60k -- % Error 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -- 0.00 0.00 -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) 191 47 23 5 -- 2 0 -- FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate 300 1202 -- -- -- -- -- -- % Error 0.16 0.16 -- -- -- -- -- -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) 51 12 -- -- -- -- -- -- 300 1200 2400 9600 10417 19.2k 57.6k 115.2k DS41414A-page 302 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 24-5: BAUD RATE BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES (CONTINUED) SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 FOSC = 32.000 MHz FOSC = 18.432 MHz Actual Rate -- -- -- 9600 10378 19.20k 57.60k 115.2k % Error -- -- -- 0.00 -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- -- -- 119 110 59 19 9 FOSC = 16.000 MHz Actual Rate -- -- -- 9615 10417 19.23k 58.82k 111.1k % Error -- -- -- 0.16 0.00 0.16 2.12 -3.55 SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- -- -- 103 95 51 16 8 FOSC = 11.0592 MHz Actual Rate -- -- -- 9600 10473 19.20k 57.60k 115.2k % Error -- -- -- 0.00 0.53 0.00 0.00 0.00 SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- -- -- 71 65 35 11 5 SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- -- -- 207 191 103 34 16 Actual Rate -- -- -- 9615 10417 19.23k 57.14k 117.64k % Error -- -- -- 0.16 0.00 0.16 -0.79 2.12 300 1200 2400 9600 10417 19.2k 57.6k 115.2k SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate -- -- 2404 9615 10417 19231 55556 -- % Error -- -- 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 -3.55 -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- -- 207 51 47 25 8 -- FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate -- 1202 2404 9615 10417 19.23k -- -- % Error -- 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 -- -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- 207 103 25 23 12 -- -- FOSC = 3.6864 MHz Actual Rate -- 1200 2400 9600 10473 19.2k 57.60k 115.2k % Error -- 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.53 0.00 0.00 0.00 SPxBRGL value (decimal) -- 191 95 23 21 11 3 1 FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate 300 1202 2404 -- 10417 -- -- -- % Error 0.16 0.16 0.16 -- 0.00 -- -- -- SPxBRGL value (decimal) 207 51 25 -- 5 -- -- -- 300 1200 2400 9600 10417 19.2k 57.6k 115.2k SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE FOSC = 32.000 MHz Actual Rate 300.0 1200.1 2401 9615 10417 19.23k 57.14k 117.6k % Error 0.00 0.02 -0.04 0.16 0.00 0.16 -0.79 2.12 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 6666 3332 832 207 191 103 34 16 FOSC = 18.432 MHz Actual Rate 300.0 1200 2400 9600 10378 19.20k 57.60k 115.2k % Error 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 3839 959 479 119 110 59 19 9 FOSC = 16.000 MHz Actual Rate 300.03 1200.5 2398 9615 10417 19.23k 58.82k 111.11k % Error 0.01 0.04 -0.08 0.16 0.00 0.16 2.12 -3.55 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 3332 832 416 103 95 51 16 8 FOSC = 11.0592 MHz Actual Rate 300.0 1200 2400 9600 10473 19.20k 57.60k 115.2k % Error 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.53 0.00 0.00 0.00 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 2303 575 287 71 65 35 11 5 300 1200 2400 9600 10417 19.2k 57.6k 115.2k 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 303 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 24-5: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES (CONTINUED) SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate 299.9 1199 2404 9615 10417 19.23k 55556 -- % Error -0.02 -0.08 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 -3.55 -- SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 1666 416 207 51 47 25 8 -- FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate 300.1 1202 2404 9615 10417 19.23k -- -- % Error 0.04 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 -- -- SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 832 207 103 25 23 12 -- -- FOSC = 3.6864 MHz Actual Rate 300.0 1200 2400 9600 10473 19.20k 57.60k 115.2k % Error 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.53 0.00 0.00 0.00 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 767 191 95 23 21 11 3 1 FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate 300.5 1202 2404 -- 10417 -- -- -- % Error 0.16 0.16 0.16 -- 0.00 -- -- -- SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 207 51 25 -- 5 -- -- -- 300 1200 2400 9600 10417 19.2k 57.6k 115.2k SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE FOSC = 32.000 MHz Actual Rate 300 1200 2400 9604 10417 19.18k 57.55k 115.9 % Error 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.04 0.00 -0.08 -0.08 0.64 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 26666 6666 3332 832 767 416 138 68 FOSC = 18.432 MHz Actual Rate 300.0 1200 2400 9600 10425 19.20k 57.60k 115.2k % Error 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 15359 3839 1919 479 441 239 79 39 FOSC = 16.000 MHz Actual Rate 300.0 1200.1 2399.5 9592 10417 19.23k 57.97k 114.29k % Error 0.00 0.01 -0.02 -0.08 0.00 0.16 0.64 -0.79 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 13332 3332 1666 416 383 207 68 34 FOSC = 11.0592 MHz Actual Rate 300.0 1200 2400 9600 10433 19.20k 57.60k 115.2k % Error 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 9215 2303 1151 287 264 143 47 23 300 1200 2400 9600 10417 19.2k 57.6k 115.2k SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate 300.0 1200 2401 9615 10417 19.23k 57.14k 117.6k % Error 0.00 -0.02 0.04 0.16 0.00 0.16 -0.79 2.12 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 6666 1666 832 207 191 103 34 16 FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate 300.0 1200 2398 9615 10417 19.23k 58.82k 111.1k % Error 0.01 0.04 0.08 0.16 0.00 0.16 2.12 -3.55 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 3332 832 416 103 95 51 16 8 FOSC = 3.6864 MHz Actual Rate 300.0 1200 2400 9600 10473 19.20k 57.60k 115.2k % Error 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.53 0.00 0.00 0.00 SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 3071 767 383 95 87 47 15 7 FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate 300.1 1202 2404 9615 10417 19.23k -- -- % Error 0.04 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 -- -- SPxBRGH: SPxBRGL (decimal) 832 207 103 25 23 12 -- -- 300 1200 2400 9600 10417 19.2k 57.6k 115.2k DS41414A-page 304 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.3.1 AUTO-BAUD DETECT The EUSART module supports automatic detection and calibration of the baud rate. In the Auto-Baud Detect (ABD) mode, the clock to the BRG is reversed. Rather than the BRG clocking the incoming RXx signal, the RXx signal is timing the BRG. The Baud Rate Generator is used to time the period of a received 55h (ASCII "U") which is the Sync character for the LIN bus. The unique feature of this character is that it has five rising edges including the Stop bit edge. Setting the ABDEN bit of the BAUDxCON register starts the auto-baud calibration sequence (Figure 24.3.2). While the ABD sequence takes place, the EUSART state machine is held in Idle. On the first rising edge of the receive line, after the Start bit, the SPxBRGL begins counting up using the BRG counter clock as shown in Table 24-6. The fifth rising edge will occur on the RXx/DTx pin at the end of the eighth bit period. At that time, an accumulated value totaling the proper BRG period is left in the SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair, the ABDEN bit is automatically cleared, and the RCxIF interrupt flag is set. A read operation on the RCxREG needs to be performed to clear the RCxIF interrupt. RCxREG content should be discarded. When calibrating for modes that do not use the SPxBRGH register the user can verify that the SPxBRGL register did not overflow by checking for 00h in the SPxBRGH register. The BRG auto-baud clock is determined by the BRG16 and BRGH bits as shown in Table 24-6. During ABD, both the SPxBRGH and SPxBRGL registers are used as a 16-bit counter, independent of the BRG16 bit setting. While calibrating the baud rate period, the SPxBRGH and SPxBRGL registers are clocked at 1/8th the BRG base clock rate. The resulting byte measurement is the average bit time when clocked at full speed. Note 1: If the WUE bit is set with the ABDEN bit, auto-baud detection will occur on the byte following the Break character (see Section 24.3.3 "Auto-Wake-up on Break"). 2: It is up to the user to determine that the incoming character baud rate is within the range of the selected BRG clock source. Some combinations of oscillator frequency and EUSART baud rates are not possible. 3: During the auto-baud process, the auto-baud counter starts counting at 1. Upon completion of the auto-baud sequence, to achieve maximum accuracy, subtract 1 from the SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair. TABLE 24-6: BRG16 0 0 1 1 Note: BRGH 0 1 0 1 BRG COUNTER CLOCK RATES BRG Base Clock FOSC/64 FOSC/16 FOSC/16 FOSC/4 BRG ABD Clock FOSC/512 FOSC/128 FOSC/128 FOSC/32 During the ABD sequence, SPxBRGL and SPxBRGH registers are both used as a 16-bit counter, independent of BRG16 setting. FIGURE 24-6: BRG Value RXx/DTx pin BRG Clock Set by User ABDEN bit RCIDL RCxIF bit (Interrupt) Read RCxREG SPxBRGL SPxBRGH Note 1: AUTOMATIC BAUD RATE CALIBRATION XXXXh 0000h Start Edge #1 bit 1 bit 0 Edge #2 bit 3 bit 2 Edge #3 bit 5 bit 4 Edge #4 bit 7 bit 6 001Ch Edge #5 Stop bit Auto Cleared XXh XXh The ABD sequence requires the EUSART module to be configured in Asynchronous mode. 1Ch 00h 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 305 PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.3.2 AUTO-BAUD OVERFLOW 24.3.3.1 Special Considerations During the course of automatic baud detection, the ABDOVF bit of the BAUDxCON register will be set if the baud rate counter overflows before the fifth rising edge is detected on the RX pin. The ABDOVF bit indicates that the counter has exceeded the maximum count that can fit in the 16 bits of the SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair. After the ABDOVF has been set, the counter continues to count until the fifth rising edge is detected on the RXx/DTx pin. Upon detecting the fifth RXx/DTx edge, the hardware will set the RCxIF interrupt flag and clear the ABDEN bit of the BAUDxCON register. The RCxIF flag can be subsequently cleared by reading the RCxREG. The ABDOVF flag can be cleared by software directly. To terminate the auto-baud process before the RCxIF flag is set, clear the ABDEN bit then clear the ABDOVF bit. The ABDOVF bit will remain set if the ABDEN bit is not cleared first. Break Character To avoid character errors or character fragments during a wake-up event, the wake-up character must be all zeros. When the wake-up is enabled the function works independent of the low time on the data stream. If the WUE bit is set and a valid non-zero character is received, the low time from the Start bit to the first rising edge will be interpreted as the wake-up event. The remaining bits in the character will be received as a fragmented character and subsequent characters can result in framing or overrun errors. Therefore, the initial character in the transmission must be all `0's. This must be 10 or more bit times, 13-bit times recommended for LIN bus, or any number of bit times for standard RS-232 devices. Oscillator Startup Time Oscillator start-up time must be considered, especially in applications using oscillators with longer start-up intervals (i.e., LP, XT or HS/PLL mode). The Sync Break (or wake-up signal) character must be of sufficient length, and be followed by a sufficient interval, to allow enough time for the selected oscillator to start and provide proper initialization of the EUSART. WUE Bit The wake-up event causes a receive interrupt by setting the RCxIF bit. The WUE bit is cleared by hardware by a rising edge on RXx/DTx. The interrupt condition is then cleared by software by reading the RCxREG register and discarding its contents. To ensure that no actual data is lost, check the RCIDL bit to verify that a receive operation is not in process before setting the WUE bit. If a receive operation is not occurring, the WUE bit may then be set just prior to entering the Sleep mode. 24.3.3 AUTO-WAKE-UP ON BREAK During Sleep mode, all clocks to the EUSART are suspended. Because of this, the Baud Rate Generator is inactive and a proper character reception cannot be performed. The Auto-Wake-up feature allows the controller to wake-up due to activity on the RXx/DTx line. This feature is available only in Asynchronous mode. The Auto-Wake-up feature is enabled by setting the WUE bit of the BAUDxCON register. Once set, the normal receive sequence on RXx/DTx is disabled, and the EUSART remains in an Idle state, monitoring for a wake-up event independent of the CPU mode. A wake-up event consists of a high-to-low transition on the RXx/DTx line. (This coincides with the start of a Sync Break or a wake-up signal character for the LIN protocol.) The EUSART module generates an RCxIF interrupt coincident with the wake-up event. The interrupt is generated synchronously to the Q clocks in normal CPU operating modes (Figure 24-7), and asynchronously if the device is in Sleep mode (Figure 24-8). The interrupt condition is cleared by reading the RCxREG register. The WUE bit is automatically cleared by the low-to-high transition on the RXx line at the end of the Break. This signals to the user that the Break event is over. At this point, the EUSART module is in Idle mode waiting to receive the next character. DS41414A-page 306 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 24-7: OSC1 WUE bit RXx/DTx Line RCxIF Note 1: The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set. Cleared due to User Read of RCxREG AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMING DURING NORMAL OPERATION Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Bit set by user Auto Cleared FIGURE 24-8: OSC1 AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING SLEEP Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Auto Cleared Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Bit Set by User WUE bit RXx/DTx Line RCxIF Sleep Command Executed Note 1: 2: Note 1 Sleep Ends Cleared due to User Read of RCxREG If the wake-up event requires long oscillator warm-up time, the automatic clearing of the WUE bit can occur while the stposc signal is still active. This sequence should not depend on the presence of Q clocks. The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 307 PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.3.4 BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE The EUSART module has the capability of sending the special Break character sequences that are required by the LIN bus standard. A Break character consists of a Start bit, followed by 12 `0' bits and a Stop bit. To send a Break character, set the SENDB and TXEN bits of the TXxSTA register. The Break character transmission is then initiated by a write to the TXxREG. The value of data written to TXxREG will be ignored and all `0's will be transmitted. The SENDB bit is automatically reset by hardware after the corresponding Stop bit is sent. This allows the user to preload the transmit FIFO with the next transmit byte following the Break character (typically, the Sync character in the LIN specification). The TRMT bit of the TXxSTA register indicates when the transmit operation is active or Idle, just as it does during normal transmission. See Figure 24-9 for the timing of the Break character sequence. When the TXxREG becomes empty, as indicated by the TXxIF, the next data byte can be written to TXxREG. 24.3.5 RECEIVING A BREAK CHARACTER The Enhanced EUSART module can receive a Break character in two ways. The first method to detect a Break character uses the FERR bit of the RCxSTA register and the Received data as indicated by RCxREG. The Baud Rate Generator is assumed to have been initialized to the expected baud rate. A Break character has been received when; * RCxIF bit is set * FERR bit is set * RCxREG = 00h The second method uses the Auto-Wake-up feature described in Section 24.3.3 "Auto-Wake-up on Break". By enabling this feature, the EUSART will sample the next two transitions on RXx/DTx, cause an RCxIF interrupt, and receive the next data byte followed by another interrupt. Note that following a Break character, the user will typically want to enable the Auto-Baud Detect feature. For both methods, the user can set the ABDEN bit of the BAUDxCON register before placing the EUSART in Sleep mode. 24.3.4.1 Break and Sync Transmit Sequence The following sequence will start a message frame header made up of a Break, followed by an auto-baud Sync byte. This sequence is typical of a LIN bus master. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Configure the EUSART for the desired mode. Set the TXEN and SENDB bits to enable the Break sequence. Load the TXxREG with a dummy character to initiate transmission (the value is ignored). Write `55h' to TXxREG to load the Sync character into the transmit FIFO buffer. After the Break has been sent, the SENDB bit is reset by hardware and the Sync character is then transmitted. FIGURE 24-9: Write to TXxREG BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx/CKx (pin) SEND BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE Dummy Write Start bit bit 0 bit 1 Break bit 11 Stop bit TXxIF bit (Transmit interrupt Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) SENDB (send Break control bit) SENDB Sampled Here Auto Cleared DS41414A-page 308 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.4 EUSART Synchronous Mode 24.4.1.2 Clock Polarity Synchronous serial communications are typically used in systems with a single master and one or more slaves. The master device contains the necessary circuitry for baud rate generation and supplies the clock for all devices in the system. Slave devices can take advantage of the master clock by eliminating the internal clock generation circuitry. There are two signal lines in Synchronous mode: a bidirectional data line and a clock line. Slaves use the external clock supplied by the master to shift the serial data into and out of their respective receive and transmit shift registers. Since the data line is bidirectional, synchronous operation is half-duplex only. Half-duplex refers to the fact that master and slave devices can receive and transmit data but not both simultaneously. The EUSART can operate as either a master or slave device. Start and Stop bits are not used in synchronous transmissions. A clock polarity option is provided for Microwire compatibility. Clock polarity is selected with the CKTXP bit of the BAUDxCON register. Setting the CKTXP bit sets the clock Idle state as high. When the CKTXP bit is set, the data changes on the falling edge of each clock and is sampled on the rising edge of each clock. Clearing the CKTXP bit sets the Idle state as low. When the CKTXP bit is cleared, the data changes on the rising edge of each clock and is sampled on the falling edge of each clock. 24.4.1.3 Synchronous Master Transmission Data is transferred out of the device on the RXx/DTx pin. The RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pin output drivers are automatically enabled when the EUSART is configured for synchronous master transmit operation. A transmission is initiated by writing a character to the TXxREG register. If the TSR still contains all or part of a previous character the new character data is held in the TXxREG until the last bit of the previous character has been transmitted. If this is the first character, or the previous character has been completely flushed from the TSR, the data in the TXxREG is immediately transferred to the TSR. The transmission of the character commences immediately following the transfer of the data to the TSR from the TXxREG. Each data bit changes on the leading edge of the master clock and remains valid until the subsequent leading clock edge. Note: The TSR register is not mapped in data memory, so it is not available to the user. 24.4.1 SYNCHRONOUS MASTER MODE The following bits are used to configure the EUSART for Synchronous Master operation: * * * * * SYNC = 1 CSRC = 1 SREN = 0 (for transmit); SREN = 1 (for receive) CREN = 0 (for transmit); CREN = 1 (for receive) SPEN = 1 Setting the SYNC bit of the TXxSTA register configures the device for synchronous operation. Setting the CSRC bit of the TXxSTA register configures the device as a master. Clearing the SREN and CREN bits of the RCxSTA register ensures that the device is in the Transmit mode, otherwise the device will be configured to receive. Setting the SPEN bit of the RCxSTA register enables the EUSART. If the RXx/DTx or TXx/CKx pins are shared with an analog peripheral the analog I/O functions must be disabled by clearing the corresponding ANSEL bits. The TRIS bits corresponding to the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pins should be set. 24.4.1.4 Data Polarity The polarity of the transmit and receive data can be controlled with the DTRXP bit of the BAUDxCON register. The default state of this bit is `0' which selects high true transmit and receive data. Setting the DTRXP bit to `1' will invert the data resulting in low true transmit and receive data. 24.4.1.1 Master Clock Synchronous data transfers use a separate clock line, which is synchronous with the data. A device configured as a master transmits the clock on the TXx/CKx line. The TXx/CKx pin output driver is automatically enabled when the EUSART is configured for synchronous transmit or receive operation. Serial data bits change on the leading edge to ensure they are valid at the trailing edge of each clock. One clock cycle is generated for each data bit. Only as many clock cycles are generated as there are data bits. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 309 PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.4.1.5 1. Synchronous Master Transmission Set-up: 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 2. 3. Initialize the SPxBRGH, SPxBRGL register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see Section 24.3 "EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)"). Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to `1'. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. Set the TRIS bits corresponding to the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx I/O pins. Disable Receive mode by clearing bits SREN and CREN. Enable Transmit mode by setting the TXEN bit. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 bit. If interrupts are desired, set the TXxIE, GIE and PEIE interrupt enable bits. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in the TX9D bit. Start transmission by loading data to the TXxREG register. FIGURE 24-10: RXx/DTx pin TXx/CKx pin (SCKP = 0) TXx/CKx pin (SCKP = 1) Write to TXxREG Reg TXxIF bit (Interrupt Flag) TRMT bit SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION bit 0 bit 1 Word 1 bit 2 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 Word 2 bit 7 Write Word 1 Write Word 2 TXEN bit Note: `1' Sync Master mode, SPxBRGL = 0, continuous transmission of two 8-bit words. `1' FIGURE 24-11: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (THROUGH TXEN) bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 6 bit 7 RXx/DTx pin TXx/CKx pin Write to TXxREG reg TXxIF bit TRMT bit TXEN bit DS41414A-page 310 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 24-7: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page BAUD1CON BAUD2CON INTCON PIE1 PIE4 PIR1 PIR4 RC1STA RC2STA SP1BRGL SP1BRGH SP2BRGL SP2BRGH TRISC TX1REG TX1STA TX2REG TX2STA Legend: * ABDOVF ABDOVF GIE -- -- -- -- SPEN SPEN RCIDL RCIDL PEIE ADIE -- ADIF -- RX9 RX9 -- -- TMR0IE RC1IE RC2IE RC1IF RC2IF SREN SREN SCKP SCKP INTE TX1IE TX2IE TX1IF TX2IF CREN CREN BRG16 BRG16 IOCIE SSP1IE -- SSP1IF -- ADDEN ADDEN -- -- TMR0IF CCP1IE -- CCP1IF -- FERR FERR WUE WUE INTF TMR2IE BCL2IE TMR2IF BCL2IF OERR OERR ABDEN ABDEN IOCIF TMR1IE SSP2IE TMR1IF SSP2IF RX9D RX9D 300 300 89 90 93 94 93 299 299 301* 301* 301* 301* EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte TRISC7 CSRC CSRC TRISC6 TX9 TX9 TRISC5 TXEN TXEN TRISC4 SYNC SYNC TRISC3 SENDB SENDB TRISC2 BRGH BRGH TRISC1 TRMT TRMT TRISC0 TX9D TX9D EUSART1 Transmit Register EUSART2 Transmit Register 130 291* 298 291* 298 -- = unimplemented locations, read as `0'. Shaded bits are not used for synchronous master transmission. Page provides register information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 311 PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.4.1.6 Synchronous Master Reception Data is received at the RXx/DTx pin. The RXx/DTx pin output driver must be disabled by setting the corresponding TRIS bits when the EUSART is configured for synchronous master receive operation. In Synchronous mode, reception is enabled by setting either the Single Receive Enable bit (SREN of the RCxSTA register) or the Continuous Receive Enable bit (CREN of the RCxSTA register). When SREN is set and CREN is clear, only as many clock cycles are generated as there are data bits in a single character. The SREN bit is automatically cleared at the completion of one character. When CREN is set, clocks are continuously generated until CREN is cleared. If CREN is cleared in the middle of a character the CK clock stops immediately and the partial character is discarded. If SREN and CREN are both set, then SREN is cleared at the completion of the first character and CREN takes precedence. To initiate reception, set either SREN or CREN. Data is sampled at the RXx/DTx pin on the trailing edge of the TXx/CKx clock pin and is shifted into the Receive Shift Register (RSR). When a complete character is received into the RSR, the RCxIF bit is set and the character is automatically transferred to the two character receive FIFO. The Least Significant eight bits of the top character in the receive FIFO are available in RCxREG. The RCxIF bit remains set as long as there are un-read characters in the receive FIFO. If the overrun occurred when the CREN bit is set then the error condition is cleared by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets the EUSART. 24.4.1.9 Receiving 9-bit Characters The EUSART supports 9-bit character reception. When the RX9 bit of the RCxSTA register is set the EUSART will shift 9-bits into the RSR for each character received. The RX9D bit of the RCxSTA register is the ninth, and Most Significant, data bit of the top unread character in the receive FIFO. When reading 9-bit data from the receive FIFO buffer, the RX9D data bit must be read before reading the 8 Least Significant bits from the RCxREG. 24.4.1.10 1. Synchronous Master Reception Set-up: 24.4.1.7 Slave Clock Synchronous data transfers use a separate clock line, which is synchronous with the data. A device configured as a slave receives the clock on the TXx/CKx line. The TXx/CKx pin output driver must be disabled by setting the associated TRIS bit when the device is configured for synchronous slave transmit or receive operation. Serial data bits change on the leading edge to ensure they are valid at the trailing edge of each clock. One data bit is transferred for each clock cycle. Only as many clock cycles should be received as there are data bits. 24.4.1.8 Receive Overrun Error The receive FIFO buffer can hold two characters. An overrun error will be generated if a third character, in its entirety, is received before RCxREG is read to access the FIFO. When this happens the OERR bit of the RCxSTA register is set. Previous data in the FIFO will not be overwritten. The two characters in the FIFO buffer can be read, however, no additional characters will be received until the error is cleared. The OERR bit can only be cleared by clearing the overrun condition. If the overrun error occurred when the SREN bit is set and CREN is clear then the error is cleared by reading RCxREG. Initialize the SPxBRGH, SPxBRGL register pair for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. 2. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to `1'. 3. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. Disable RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx output drivers by setting the corresponding TRIS bits. 4. Ensure bits CREN and SREN are clear. 5. If using interrupts, set the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register and set RCxIE. 6. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit RX9. 7. Start reception by setting the SREN bit or for continuous reception, set the CREN bit. 8. Interrupt flag bit RCxIF will be set when reception of a character is complete. An interrupt will be generated if the enable bit RCxIE was set. 9. Read the RCxSTA register to get the ninth bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. 10. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCxREG register. 11. If an overrun error occurs, clear the error by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets the EUSART. DS41414A-page 312 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 24-12: RXx/DTx pin TXx/CKx pin (SCKP = 0) TXx/CKx pin (SCKP = 1) Write to bit SREN SREN bit CREN bit `0' RCxIF bit (Interrupt) Read RCxREG Note: Timing diagram demonstrates Sync Master mode with bit SREN = 1 and bit BRGH = 0. `0' SYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION (MASTER MODE, SREN) bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 TABLE 24-8: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page BAUD1CON BAUD2CON INTCON PIE1 PIE4 PIR1 PIR4 RC1REG RC1STA RC2REG RC2STA SP1BRGL SP1BRGH SP2BRGL SP2BRGH TX1STA TX2STA Legend: * ABDOVF ABDOVF GIE -- -- -- -- SPEN SPEN RCIDL RCIDL PEIE ADIE -- ADIF -- RX9 RX9 -- -- TMR0IE RC1IE RC2IE RC1IF RC2IF SREN SREN SCKP SCKP INTE TX1IE TX2IE TX1IF TX2IF CREN CREN BRG16 BRG16 IOCIE SSP1IE -- SSP1IF -- ADDEN ADDEN -- -- TMR0IF CCP1IE -- CCP1IF -- FERR FERR WUE WUE INTF TMR2IE BCL2IE TMR2IF BCL2IF OERR OERR ABDEN ABDEN IOCIF TMR1IE SSP2IE TMR1IF SSP2IF RX9D RX9D 300 300 89 90 93 94 93 294* 299 294* 299 301* 301* 301* 301* EUSART1 Receive Register EUSART2 Receive Register EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte CSRC CSRC TX9 TX9 TXEN TXEN SYNC SYNC SENDB SENDB BRGH BRGH TRMT TRMT TX9D TX9D 298 298 -- = unimplemented locations, read as `0'. Shaded bits are not used for synchronous master reception. Page provides register information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 313 PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.4.2 SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE MODE The following bits are used to configure the EUSART for Synchronous slave operation: * * * * * SYNC = 1 CSRC = 0 SREN = 0 (for transmit); SREN = 1 (for receive) CREN = 0 (for transmit); CREN = 1 (for receive) SPEN = 1 If two words are written to the TXxREG and then the SLEEP instruction is executed, the following will occur: 1. 2. 3. 4. The first character will immediately transfer to the TSR register and transmit. The second word will remain in TXxREG register. The TXxIF bit will not be set. After the first character has been shifted out of TSR, the TXxREG register will transfer the second character to the TSR and the TXxIF bit will now be set. If the PEIE and TXxIE bits are set, the interrupt will wake the device from Sleep and execute the next instruction. If the GIE bit is also set, the program will call the Interrupt Service Routine. Setting the SYNC bit of the TXxSTA register configures the device for synchronous operation. Clearing the CSRC bit of the TXxSTA register configures the device as a slave. Clearing the SREN and CREN bits of the RCxSTA register ensures that the device is in the Transmit mode, otherwise the device will be configured to receive. Setting the SPEN bit of the RCxSTA register enables the EUSART. If the RXx/DTx or TXx/CKx pins are shared with an analog peripheral the analog I/O functions must be disabled by clearing the corresponding ANSEL bits. RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pin output drivers must be disabled by setting the corresponding TRIS bits. 5. 24.4.2.2 1. 2. 3. 4. Synchronous Slave Transmission Set-up: 24.4.2.1 EUSART Synchronous Slave Transmit The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes are identical (see Section 24.4.1.3 "Synchronous Master Transmission"), except in the case of the Sleep mode. 5. 6. 7. 8. Set the SYNC and SPEN bits and clear the CSRC bit. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to `1'. Clear the CREN and SREN bits. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register are set and set the TXxIE bit. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 bit. Enable transmission by setting the TXEN bit. If 9-bit transmission is selected, insert the Most Significant bit into the TX9D bit. Start transmission by writing the Least Significant 8 bits to the TXxREG register. DS41414A-page 314 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 24-9: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page BAUD1CON BAUD2CON INTCON PIE1 PIE4 PIR1 PIR4 RC1STA RC2STA SP1BRGL SP1BRGH SP2BRGL SP2BRGH TRISC TX1REG TX1STA TX2REG TX2STA Legend: * ABDOVF ABDOVF GIE -- -- -- -- SPEN SPEN RCIDL RCIDL PEIE ADIE -- ADIF -- RX9 RX9 -- -- TMR0IE RC1IE RC2IE RC1IF RC2IF SREN SREN SCKP SCKP INTE TX1IE TX2IE TX1IF TX2IF CREN CREN BRG16 BRG16 IOCIE SSP1IE -- SSP1IF -- ADDEN ADDEN -- -- TMR0IF CCP1IE -- CCP1IF -- FERR FERR WUE WUE INTF TMR2IE BCL2IE TMR2IF BCL2IF OERR OERR ABDEN ABDEN IOCIF TMR1IE SSP2IE TMR1IF SSP2IF RX9D RX9D 300 300 89 90 93 94 93 299 299 301* 301* 301* 301* EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte TRISC7 CSRC CSRC TRISC6 TX9 TX9 TRISC5 TXEN TXEN TRISC4 SYNC SYNC TRISC3 SENDB SENDB TRISC2 BRGH BRGH TRISC1 TRMT TRMT TRISC0 TX9D TX9D EUSART1 Transmit Register EUSART2 Transmit Register 130 291* 298 291* 298 -- = unimplemented locations, read as `0'. Shaded bits are not used for synchronous slave transmission. Page provides register information. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 315 PIC16F/LF1946/47 24.4.2.3 EUSART Synchronous Slave Reception 24.4.2.4 1. 2. 3. Synchronous Slave Reception Set-up: The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes is identical (Section 24.4.1.6 "Synchronous Master Reception"), with the following exceptions: * Sleep * CREN bit is always set, therefore the receiver is never Idle * SREN bit, which is a "don't care" in Slave mode A character may be received while in Sleep mode by setting the CREN bit prior to entering Sleep. Once the word is received, the RSR register will transfer the data to the RCxREG register. If the RCxIE enable bit is set, the interrupt generated will wake the device from Sleep and execute the next instruction. If the GIE bit is also set, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Set the SYNC and SPEN bits and clear the CSRC bit. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to `1'. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register are set and set the RCxIE bit. If 9-bit reception is desired, set the RX9 bit. Set the CREN bit to enable reception. The RCxIF bit will be set when reception is complete. An interrupt will be generated if the RCxIE bit was set. If 9-bit mode is enabled, retrieve the Most Significant bit from the RX9D bit of the RCxSTA register. Retrieve the 8 Least Significant bits from the receive FIFO by reading the RCxREG register. If an overrun error occurs, clear the error by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets the EUSART. TABLE 24-10: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Register on Page BAUD1CON BAUD2CON INTCON PIE1 PIE4 PIR1 PIR4 RC1REG RC1STA RC2REG RC2STA SP1BRGL SP1BRGH SP2BRGL SP2BRGH TX1STA TX2STA Legend: * ABDOVF ABDOVF GIE -- -- -- -- SPEN SPEN RCIDL RCIDL PEIE ADIE -- ADIF -- RX9 RX9 -- -- TMR0IE RC1IE RC2IE RC1IF RC2IF SREN SREN SCKP SCKP INTE TX1IE TX2IE TX1IF TX2IF CREN CREN BRG16 BRG16 IOCIE SSP1IE -- SSP1IF -- ADDEN ADDEN -- -- TMR0IF CCP1IE -- CCP1IF -- FERR FERR WUE WUE INTF TMR2IE BCL2IE TMR2IF BCL2IF OERR OERR ABDEN ABDEN IOCIF TMR1IE SSP2IE TMR1IF SSP2IF RX9D RX9D 300 300 89 90 93 94 93 294* 299 294* 299 301* 301* 301* 301* EUSART1 Receive Register EUSART2 Receive Register EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte CSRC CSRC TX9 TX9 TXEN TXEN SYNC SYNC SENDB SENDB BRGH BRGH TRMT TRMT TX9D TX9D 298 298 -- = unimplemented locations, read as `0'. Shaded bits are not used for synchronous slave reception. Page provides register information. DS41414A-page 316 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 25.0 CAPACITIVE SENSING MODULE The capacitive sensing module allows for an interaction with an end user without a mechanical interface. In a typical application, the capacitive sensing module is attached to a pad on a Printed Circuit Board (PCB), which is electrically isolated from the end user. When the end user places their finger over the PCB pad, a capacitive load is added, causing a frequency shift in the capacitive sensing module. The capacitive sensing module requires software and at least one timer resource to determine the change in frequency. Key features of this module include: * * * * * * * Analog MUX for monitoring multiple inputs Capacitive sensing oscillator Multiple Power modes High power range with variable voltage references Multiple timer resources Software control Operation during Sleep FIGURE 25-1: CAPACITIVE SENSING BLOCK DIAGRAM Timer0 Module CPSCH<3:0> CPSON(1) CPS0 CPS1 CPS2 CPS3 CPS4 CPS5 CPS6 CPS7 CPS8 CPS9 CPS10 CPS11 CPS12 CPS13 CPS14 CPS15 CPS16 Ref0 1 DAC 0 Ref+ 1 FVR Int. Ref. CPSCLK CPSOUT CPSRNG<1:0> CPSON Capacitive Sensing Oscillator CPSOSC T0CKI 0 1 T0XCS FOSC/4 0 1 TMR0CS TMR0 Overflow Set TMR0IF Timer1 Module T1CS<1:0> FOSC FOSC/4 T1OSC/ T1CKI T1GSEL<1:0> T1G SYNCC1OUT SYNCC2OUT Timer1 Gate Control Logic EN TMR1H:TMR1L CPSRM Note 1: If CPSON = 0, disabling capacitive sensing, no channel is selected. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 317 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 25-2: CAPACITIVE SENSING OSCILLATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM Oscillator Module VDD (1) + CPSx Analog Pin (1) (2) S (2) Q CPSCLK + R Internal References 0 1 0 Ref+ DAC 1 FVR Ref- CPSRM Note 1: 2: Module Enable and Power mode selections are not shown. Comparators remain active in Noise Detection mode. DS41414A-page 318 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 25.1 Analog MUX 25.3 Voltage References The capacitive sensing module can monitor up to 16 inputs. The capacitive sensing inputs are defined as CPS<15:0>. To determine if a frequency change has occurred the user must: * Select the appropriate CPS pin by setting the CPSCH<4:0> bits of the CPSCON1 register. * Set the corresponding ANSEL bit. * Set the corresponding TRIS bit. * Run the software algorithm. Selection of the CPSx pin while the module is enabled will cause the capacitive sensing oscillator to be on the CPSx pin. Failure to set the corresponding ANSEL and TRIS bits can cause the capacitive sensing oscillator to stop, leading to false frequency readings. The capacitive sensing oscillator uses voltage references to provide two voltage thresholds for oscillation. The upper voltage threshold is referred to as Ref+ and the lower voltage threshold is referred to as Ref-. The user can elect to use fixed voltage references, which are internal to the capacitive sensing oscillator, or variable voltage references, which are supplied by the Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) module and the Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) module. When the fixed voltage references are used, the VSS voltage determines the lower threshold level (Ref-) and the VDD voltage determines the upper threshold level (Ref+). When the variable voltage references are used, the DAC voltage determines the lower threshold level (Ref-) and the FVR voltage determines the upper threshold level (Ref+). An advantage of using these reference sources is that oscillation frequency remains constant with changes in VDD. Different oscillation frequencies can be obtained through the use of these variable voltage references. The more the upper voltage reference level is lowered and the more the lower voltage reference level is raised, the higher the capacitive sensing oscillator frequency becomes. Selection between the voltage references is controlled by the CPSRM bit of the CPSCON0 register. Setting this bit selects the variable voltage references and clearing this bit selects the fixed voltage references. Please see Section 14.0 "Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)" and Section 16.0 "Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module" for more information on configuring the variable voltage levels. 25.2 Capacitive Sensing Oscillator The capacitive sensing oscillator consists of a constant current source and a constant current sink, to produce a triangle waveform. The CPSOUT bit of the CPSCON0 register shows the status of the capacitive sensing oscillator, whether it is a sinking or sourcing current. The oscillator is designed to drive a capacitive load (single PCB pad) and at the same time, be a clock source to either Timer0 or Timer1. The oscillator has three different current settings as defined by CPSRNG<1:0> of the CPSCON0 register. The different current settings for the oscillator serve two purposes: * Maximize the number of counts in a timer for a fixed time base. * Maximize the count differential in the timer during a change in frequency. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 319 PIC16F/LF1946/47 25.4 Power Modes The capacitive sensing oscillator can operate in one of seven different power modes. The power modes are separated into two ranges; the low range and the high range. When the oscillator's low range is selected, the fixed internal voltage references of the capacitive sensing oscillator are being used. When the oscillator's high range is selected, the variable voltage references supplied by the FVR and DAC modules are being used. Selection between the voltage references is controlled by the CPSRM bit of the CPSCON0 register. See Section 25.3 "Voltage References" for more information. Within each range there are three distinct Power modes; low, medium and high. Current consumption is dependent upon the range and mode selected. Selecting Power modes within each range is accomplished by configuring the CPSRNG <1:0> bits in the CPSCON0 register. See Table 25-1 for proper Power mode selection. The remaining mode is a Noise Detection mode that resides within the high range. The Noise Detection mode is unique in that it disables the sinking and sourcing of current on the analog pin but leaves the rest of the oscillator circuitry active. This reduces the oscillation frequency on the analog pin to zero and also greatly reduces the current consumed by the oscillator module. When noise is introduced onto the pin, the oscillator is driven at the frequency determined by the noise. This produces a detectable signal at the comparator output, indicating the presence of activity on the pin. Figure 25-2 shows a more detailed drawing of the current sources and comparators associated with the oscillator. TABLE 25-1: CPSRM POWER MODE SELECTION Range CPSRNG<1:0> 00 01 10 11 00 01 10 11 Mode Off Low Medium High Noise Detection Low Medium High Nominal Current(1) 0.0 A 0.25 A 1.5 A 7.5 A 0.0 A 9 A 30 A 100 A 0 Low 1 High Note 1: See Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications" for more information. DS41414A-page 320 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 25.5 Timer Resources 25.7 Software Control To measure the change in frequency of the capacitive sensing oscillator, a fixed time base is required. For the period of the fixed time base, the capacitive sensing oscillator is used to clock either Timer0 or Timer1. The frequency of the capacitive sensing oscillator is equal to the number of counts in the timer divided by the period of the fixed time base. The software portion of the capacitive sensing module is required to determine the change in frequency of the capacitive sensing oscillator. This is accomplished by the following: * Setting a fixed time base to acquire counts on Timer0 or Timer1. * Establishing the nominal frequency for the capacitive sensing oscillator. * Establishing the reduced frequency for the capacitive sensing oscillator due to an additional capacitive load. * Set the frequency threshold. 25.6 Fixed Time Base To measure the frequency of the capacitive sensing oscillator, a fixed time base is required. Any timer resource or software loop can be used to establish the fixed time base. It is up to the end user to determine the method in which the fixed time base is generated. Note: The fixed time base can not be generated by the timer resource that the capacitive sensing oscillator is clocking. 25.7.1 NOMINAL FREQUENCY (NO CAPACITIVE LOAD) To determine the nominal frequency of the capacitive sensing oscillator: * Remove any extra capacitive load on the selected CPSx pin. * At the start of the fixed time base, clear the timer resource. * At the end of the fixed time base save the value in the timer resource. The value of the timer resource is the number of oscillations of the capacitive sensing oscillator for the given time base. The frequency of the capacitive sensing oscillator is equal to the number of counts on in the timer divided by the period of the fixed time base. 25.6.1 TIMER0 To select Timer0 as the timer resource for the capacitive sensing module: * Set the T0XCS bit of the CPSCON0 register. * Clear the TMR0CS bit of the OPTION register. When Timer0 is chosen as the timer resource, the capacitive sensing oscillator will be the clock source for Timer0. Refer to Section 19.0 "Timer0 Module" for additional information. 25.6.2 TIMER1 To select Timer1 as the timer resource for the capacitive sensing module, set the TMR1CS<1:0> of the T1CON register to `11'. When Timer1 is chosen as the timer resource, the capacitive sensing oscillator will be the clock source for Timer1. Because the Timer1 module has a gate control, developing a time base for the frequency measurement can be simplified by using the Timer0 overflow flag. It is recommend that the Timer0 overflow flag, in conjunction with the Toggle mode of the Timer1 Gate, be used to develop the fixed time base required by the software portion of the capacitive sensing module. Refer to Section 20.12 "Timer1 Gate Control Register" for additional information. 25.7.2 REDUCED FREQUENCY (ADDITIONAL CAPACITIVE LOAD) The extra capacitive load will cause the frequency of the capacitive sensing oscillator to decrease. To determine the reduced frequency of the capacitive sensing oscillator: * Add a typical capacitive load on the selected CPSx pin. * Use the same fixed time base as the nominal frequency measurement. * At the start of the fixed time base, clear the timer resource. * At the end of the fixed time base save the value in the timer resource. The value of the timer resource is the number of oscillations of the capacitive sensing oscillator with an additional capacitive load. The frequency of the capacitive sensing oscillator is equal to the number of counts on in the timer divided by the period of the fixed time base. This frequency should be less than the value obtained during the nominal frequency measurement. TABLE 25-2: TMR1ON 0 0 1 1 TIMER1 ENABLE FUNCTION TMR1GE 0 1 0 1 Timer1 Operation Off Off On Count Enabled by input 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 321 PIC16F/LF1946/47 25.7.3 FREQUENCY THRESHOLD The frequency threshold should be placed midway between the value of nominal frequency and the reduced frequency of the capacitive sensing oscillator. Refer to Application Note AN1103, "Software Handling for Capacitive Sensing" (DS01103) for more detailed information on the software required for capacitive sensing module. Note: For more information on general capacitive sensing refer to Application Notes: * AN1101, "Introduction to Capacitive Sensing" (DS01101) * AN1102, "Layout and Physical Design Guidelines for Capacitive Sensing" (DS01102) 25.8 Operation during Sleep The capacitive sensing oscillator will continue to run as long as the module is enabled, independent of the part being in Sleep. In order for the software to determine if a frequency change has occurred, the part must be awake. However, the part does not have to be awake when the timer resource is acquiring counts. Note: Timer0 does not operate when in Sleep, and therefore cannot be used for capacitive sense measurements in Sleep. DS41414A-page 322 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 25-1: R/W-0/0 CPSON bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared CPSON: Capacitive Sensing Module Enable bit 1 = Capacitive sensing module is enabled 0 = Capacitive sensing module is disabled CPSRM: Capacitive Sensing Reference Mode bit 1 = Capacitive Sensing module is in high range. DAC and FVR provide oscillator voltage references. 0 = Capacitive Sensing module is in the low range. Internal oscillator voltage references are used. Unimplemented: Read as `0' CPSRNG<1:0>: Capacitive Sensing Current Range If CPSRM = 0 (low range): 00 = Oscillator is off 01 = Oscillator is in Low Range. Charge/Discharge Current is nominally 0.1 A 10 = Oscillator is in Medium Range. Charge/Discharge Current is nominally 1.2 A 11 = Oscillator is in High Range. Charge/Discharge Current is nominally 18 A If CPSRM = 1 (high range): 00 = Oscillator is on. Noise Detection mode. No Charge/Discharge current is supplied. 01 = Oscillator is in Low Range. Charge/Discharge Current is nominally 9 A 10 = Oscillator is in Medium Range. Charge/Discharge Current is nominally 30 A 11 = Oscillator is in High Range. Charge/Discharge Current is nominally 100 A bit 1 CPSOUT: Capacitive Sensing Oscillator Status bit 1 = Oscillator is sourcing current (Current flowing out of the pin) 0 = Oscillator is sinking current (Current flowing into the pin) T0XCS: Timer0 External Clock Source Select bit If TMR0CS = 1: The T0XCS bit controls which clock external to the core/Timer0 module supplies Timer0: 1 = Timer0 clock source is the capacitive sensing oscillator 0 = Timer0 clock source is the T0CKI pin If TMR0CS = 0: Timer0 clock source is controlled by the core/Timer0 module and is FOSC/4 U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets CPSCON0: CAPACITIVE SENSING CONTROL REGISTER 0 U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R-0/0 CPSOUT R/W-0/0 T0XCS bit 0 CPSRNG<1:0> R/W-0/0 CPSRM bit 6 bit 5-4 bit 3-2 bit 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 323 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 25-2: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: CPSCON1: CAPACITIVE SENSING CONTROL REGISTER 1 U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 CPSCH<4:0> bit 0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-5 bit 4-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets Unimplemented: Read as `0' CPSCH<4:0>: Capacitive Sensing Channel Select bits If CPSON = 0: These bits are ignored. No channel is selected. If CPSON = 1: 00000 = channel 0, (CPS0) 00001 = channel 1, (CPS1) 00010 = channel 2, (CPS2) 00011 = channel 3, (CPS3) 00100 = channel 4, (CPS4) 00101 = channel 5, (CPS5) 00110 = channel 6, (CPS6) 00111 = channel 7, (CPS7) 01000 = channel 8, (CPS8) 01001 = channel 9, (CPS9) 01010 = channel 10, (CPS10) 01011 = channel 11, (CPS11) 01100 = channel 12, (CPS12) 01101 = channel 13, (CPS13) 01110 = channel 14, (CPS14) 01111 = channel 15, (CPS15) 10000 = channel 16, (CPS16) 10001 = Reserved. Do not use. . . . 11111 = Reserved. Do not use. DS41414A-page 324 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 25-3: Name ANSELA CPSCON0 CPSCON1 OPTION_REG T1CON TRISA TRISB TRISD SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CAPACITIVE SENSING Bit 7 -- CPSON -- WPUEN TRISA7 TRISB7 Bit 6 -- CPSRM -- INTEDG TRISA6 TRISB6 Bit 5 ANSA5 -- -- TMR0CS TRISA5 TRISB5 TMR0SE TRISA4 TRISB4 PSA T1OSCEN TRISA3 TRISB3 Bit 4 ANSA4 -- Bit 3 ANSA3 Bit 2 ANSA2 CPSCH<4:0> PS2 T1SYNC TRISA2 TRISB2 PS1 -- TRISA1 TRISB1 PS0 TMR1ON TRISA0 TRISB0 Bit 1 ANSA1 CPSOUT Bit 0 ANSA0 T0XCS Register on Page 125 323 324 189 199 124 127 133 CPSRNG<1:0> TMR1CS<1:0> T1CKPS<1:0> TRISD<7:0> Legend: -- = Unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the capacitive sensing module. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 325 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 326 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.0 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) DRIVER MODULE 26.1 * * * * * LCD Registers The module contains the following registers: LCD Control register (LCDCON) LCD Phase register (LCDPS) LCD Reference Ladder register (LCDRL) LCD Contrast Control register (LCDCST) LCD Reference Voltage Control register (LCDREF) * Up to 6 LCD Segment Enable registers (LCDSEn) * Up to 24 LCD data registers (LCDDATAn) The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) driver module generates the timing control to drive a static or multiplexed LCD panel. In the PIC16F/LF1946/47 device, the module drives the panels of up to four commons and up to 46 segments. The LCD module also provides control of the LCD pixel data. The LCD driver module supports: * Direct driving of LCD panel * Three LCD clock sources with selectable prescaler * Up to four common pins: - Static (1 common) - 1/2 multiplex (2 commons) - 1/3 multiplex (3 commons) - 1/4 multiplex (4 commons) * Segment pins up to: - 64 (PIC16F/LF1946/47) * Static, 1/2 or 1/3 LCD Bias FIGURE 26-1: LCD DRIVER MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus LCDDATAx Registers MUX SEG<23:0>(2) To I/O Pads(1) Timing Control LCDCON LCDPS LCDSEn COM<3:0> To I/O Pads(1) FOSC/256 T1OSC LFINTOSC Clock Source Select and Prescaler Note 1: 2: These are not directly connected to the I/O pads, but may be tri-stated, depending on the configuration of the LCD module. SEG<23:0> on PIC16F1947, SEG<15:0> on PIC16F1946/ PIC16LF1946. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 327 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 26-1: LCD SEGMENT AND DATA REGISTERS # of LCD Registers Device PIC16F/LF1946/47 Segment Enable 6 Data 24 The LCDCON register (Register 26-1) controls the operation of the LCD driver module. The LCDPS register (Register 26-2) configures the LCD clock source prescaler and the type of waveform; Type-A or Type-B. The LCDSEn registers (Register 26-5) configure the functions of the port pins. The following LCDSEn registers are available: * * * * * * LCDSE0 LCDSE1 LCDSE2 LCDSE3 LCDSE4 LCDSE5 SE<7:0> SE<15:8> SE<23:16>(1) SE<31:24> SE<39:32> SE<45:40> Once the module is initialized for the LCD panel, the individual bits of the LCDDATAn registers are cleared/set to represent a clear/dark pixel, respectively: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * LCDDATA0 LCDDATA1 LCDDATA2 LCDDATA3 LCDDATA4 LCDDATA5 LCDDATA6 LCDDATA7 LCDDATA8 LCDDATA9 LCDDATA10 LCDDATA11 LCDDATA12 LCDDATA13 LCDDATA14 LCDDATA15 LCDDATA16 LCDDATA17 LCDDATA18 LCDDATA19 LCDDATA20 LCDDATA21 LCDDATA22 LCDDATA23 SEG<7:0>COM0 SEG<15:8>COM0 SEG<23:16>COM0 SEG<7:0>COM1 SEG<15:8>COM1 SEG<23:16>COM1 SEG<7:0>COM2 SEG<15:8>COM2 SEG<23:16>COM2 SEG<7:0>COM3 SEG<15:8>COM3 SEG<23:16>COM3 SEG<31:24>COM0 SEG<39:32>COM0 SEG<45:40>COM0 SEG<31:24>COM1 SEG<39:32>COM1 SEG<45:40>COM1 SEG<31:24>COM2 SEG<39:32>COM2 SEG<45:40>COM2 SEG<31:24>COM3 SEG<39:32>COM3 SEG<45:40>COM3 LCDDATAn is detailed in As an example, Register 26-6. Once the module is configured, the LCDEN bit of the LCDCON register is used to enable or disable the LCD module. The LCD panel can also operate during Sleep by clearing the SLPEN bit of the LCDCON register. DS41414A-page 328 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 26-1: R/W-0/0 LCDEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared LCDEN: LCD Driver Enable bit 1 = LCD driver module is enabled 0 = LCD driver module is disabled SLPEN: LCD Driver Enable in Sleep Mode bit 1 = LCD driver module is disabled in Sleep mode 0 = LCD driver module is enabled in Sleep mode WERR: LCD Write Failed Error bit 1 = LCDDATAn register written while the WA bit of the LCDPS register = 0 (must be cleared in software) 0 = No LCD write error Unimplemented: Read as `0' CS<1:0>: Clock Source Select bits 00 = FOSC/256 01 = T1OSC (Timer1) 1x = LFINTOSC (31 kHz) LMUX<1:0>: Commons Select bits Maximum Number of Pixels LMUX<1:0> 00 01 10 11 Multiplex Static (COM0) 1/2 (COM<1:0>) 1/3 (COM<2:0>) 1/4 (COM<3:0>) PIC16F1946/47/ PIC16LF1946/47 46 92 138 184 Bias Static 1/2 or 1/3 1/2 or 1/3 1/3 U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets C = Only clearable bit LCDCON: LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) CONTROL REGISTER R/C-0/0 WERR U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 bit 0 CS<1:0> LMUX<1:0> R/W-0/0 SLPEN bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3-2 bit 1-0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 329 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 26-2: R/W-0/0 WFT bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets C = Only clearable bit LCDPS: LCD PHASE REGISTER R-0/0 LCDA R-0/0 WA R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 R/W-1/1 R/W-1/1 bit 0 LP<3:0> R/W-0/0 BIASMD WFT: Waveform Type bit 1 = Type-B phase changes on each frame boundary 0 = Type-A phase changes within each common type BIASMD: Bias Mode Select bit When LMUX<1:0> = 00: 0 = Static Bias mode (do not set this bit to `1') When LMUX<1:0> = 01: 1 = 1/2 Bias mode 0 = 1/3 Bias mode When LMUX<1:0> = 10: 1 = 1/2 Bias mode 0 = 1/3 Bias mode When LMUX<1:0> = 11: 0 = 1/3 Bias mode (do not set this bit to `1') LCDA: LCD Active Status bit 1 = LCD driver module is active 0 = LCD driver module is inactive WA: LCD Write Allow Status bit 1 = Writing to the LCDDATAn registers is allowed 0 = Writing to the LCDDATAn registers is not allowed LP<3:0>: LCD Prescaler Selection bits 1111 = 1:16 1110 = 1:15 1101 = 1:14 1100 = 1:13 1011 = 1:12 1010 = 1:11 1001 = 1:10 1000 = 1:9 0111 = 1:8 0110 = 1:7 0101 = 1:6 0100 = 1:5 0011 = 1:4 0010 = 1:3 0001 = 1:2 0000 = 1:1 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3-0 DS41414A-page 330 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 26-3: R/W-0/0 LCDIRE bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets C = Only clearable bit LCDREF: LCD REFERENCE VOLTAGE CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0/0 LCDIRI U-0 -- R/W-0/0 VLCD3PE R/W-0/0 VLCD2PE R/W-0/0 VLCD1PE U-0 -- bit 0 R/W-0/0 LCDIRS LCDIRE: LCD Internal Reference Enable bit 1 = Internal LCD Reference is enabled and connected to the Internal Contrast Control circuit 0 = Internal LCD Reference is disabled LCDIRS: LCD Internal Reference Source bit If LCDIRE = 1: 0 = Internal LCD Contrast Control is powered by VDD 1 = Internal LCD Contrast Control is powered by a 3.072V output of the FVR. If LCDIRE = 0: Internal LCD Contrast Control is unconnected. LCD bandgap buffer is disabled. LCDIRI: LCD Internal Reference Ladder Idle Enable bit Allows the Internal FVR buffer to shut down when the LCD Reference Ladder is in power mode `B' 1 = When the LCD Reference Ladder is in power mode `B', the LCD Internal FVR buffer is disabled. 0 = The LCD Internal FVR Buffer ignores the LCD Reference Ladder Power mode. Unimplemented: Read as `0' VLCD3PE: VLCD3 Pin Enable bit 1 = The VLCD3 pin is connected to the internal bias voltage LCDBIAS3(1) 0 = The VLCD3 pin is not connected VLCD2PE: VLCD2 Pin Enable bit 1 = The VLCD2 pin is connected to the internal bias voltage LCDBIAS2(1) 0 = The VLCD2 pin is not connected VLCD1PE: VLCD1 Pin Enable bit 1 = The VLCD1 pin is connected to the internal bias voltage LCDBIAS1(1) 0 = The VLCD1 pin is not connected Unimplemented: Read as `0' Normal pin controls of TRISx and ANSELx are unaffected. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 331 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 26-4: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-3 bit 2-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared Unimplemented: Read as `0' LCDCST<2:0>: LCD Contrast Control bits Selects the resistance of the LCD contrast control resistor ladder Bit Value = Resistor ladder 000 = Minimum Resistance (Maximum contrast). Resistor ladder is shorted. 001 = Resistor ladder is at 1/7th of maximum resistance 010 = Resistor ladder is at 2/7th of maximum resistance 011 = Resistor ladder is at 3/7th of maximum resistance 100 = Resistor ladder is at 4/7th of maximum resistance 101 = Resistor ladder is at 5/7th of maximum resistance 110 = Resistor ladder is at 6/7th of maximum resistance 111 = Resistor ladder is at maximum resistance (Minimum contrast). U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets C = Only clearable bit LCDCST: LCD CONTRAST CONTROL REGISTER U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 LCDCST<2:0> bit 0 R/W-0/0 DS41414A-page 332 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 26-5: R/W-0/0 SEn bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared SEn: Segment Enable bits 1 = Segment function of the pin is enabled 0 = I/O function of the pin is enabled U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets LCDSEn: LCD SEGMENT ENABLE REGISTERS R/W-0/0 SEn R/W-0/0 SEn R/W-0/0 SEn R/W-0/0 SEn R/W-0/0 SEn R/W-0/0 SEn bit 0 SEn R/W-0/0 REGISTER 26-6: R/W-x/u bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-0 LCDDATAn: LCD DATA REGISTERS R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u bit 0 R/W-x/u SEGx-COMy SEGx-COMy SEGx-COMy SEGx-COMy SEGx-COMy SEGx-COMy SEGx-COMy SEGx-COMy W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets SEGx-COMy: Pixel On bits 1 = Pixel on (dark) 0 = Pixel off (clear) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 333 PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.2 LCD Clock Source Selection The LCD module has 3 possible clock sources: * FOSC/256 * T1OSC * LFINTOSC The first clock source is the system clock divided by 256 (FOSC/256). This divider ratio is chosen to provide about 1 kHz output when the system clock is 8 MHz. The divider is not programmable. Instead, the LCD prescaler bits LP<3:0> of the LCDPS register are used to set the LCD frame clock rate. The second clock source is the T1OSC. This also gives about 1 kHz when a 32.768 kHz crystal is used with the Timer1 oscillator. To use the Timer1 oscillator as a clock source, the T1OSCEN bit of the T1CON register should be set. The third clock source is the 31 kHz LFINTOSC, which provides approximately 1 kHz output. The second and third clock sources may be used to continue running the LCD while the processor is in Sleep. Using bits CS<1:0> of the LCDCON register can select any of these clock sources. 26.2.1 LCD PRESCALER A 4-bit counter is available as a prescaler for the LCD clock. The prescaler is not directly readable or writable; its value is set by the LP<3:0> bits of the LCDPS register, which determine the prescaler assignment and prescale ratio. The prescale values are selectable from 1:1 through 1:16. FIGURE 26-2: LCD CLOCK GENERATION COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 /1, 2, 3, 4 Ring Counter FOSC /256 To Ladder Power Control /4 /2 Static 1/2 1/3, 1/4 LP<3:0> CS<1:0> 4-bit Prog Prescaler / 32 Counter Segment Clock T1OSC 32 kHz Crystal Osc. LFINTOSC Nominal = 31 kHz LMUX<1:0> DS41414A-page 334 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.3 LCD Bias Voltage Generation TABLE 26-2: LCD Bias 0 LCD Bias 1 LCD Bias 2 LCD Bias 3 LCD BIAS VOLTAGES Static Bias VSS -- -- VLCD3 1/2 Bias VSS 1/2 VDD 1/2 VDD VLCD3 1/3 Bias VSS 1/3 VDD 2/3 VDD VLCD3 The LCD module can be configured for one of three bias types: * Static Bias (2 voltage levels: VSS and VLCD) * 1/2 Bias (3 voltage levels: VSS, 1/2 VLCD and VLCD) * 1/3 Bias (4 voltage levels: VSS, 1/3 VLCD, 2/3 VLCD and VLCD) So that the user is not forced to place external components and use up to three pins for bias voltage generation, internal contrast control and an internal reference ladder are provided internally to the PIC16F/LF1946/47. Both of these features may be used in conjunction with the external VLCD<3:1> pins, to provide maximum flexibility. Refer to Figure 26-3. FIGURE 26-3: LCD BIAS VOLTAGE GENERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM VDD LCDIRE LCDIRS LCDA 1.024V from FVR x3 3.072V LCDIRE LCDIRS LCDA LCDCST<2:0> LCDRLP1 LCDRLP0 VLCD3PE VLCD3 LCDA lcdbias3 VLCD2PE VLCD2 lcdbias2 BIASMD VLCD1PE VLCD1 lcdbias1 lcdbias0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 335 PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.4 LCD Bias Internal Reference Ladder 26.4.2 POWER MODES The internal reference ladder may be operated in one of three power modes. This allows the user to trade off LCD contrast for power in the specific application. The larger the LCD glass, the more capacitance is present on a physical LCD segment, requiring more current to maintain the same contrast level. Three different power modes are available, LP, MP and HP. The internal reference ladder can also be turned off for applications that wish to provide an external ladder or to minimize power consumption. Disabling the internal reference ladder results in all of the ladders being disconnected, allowing external voltages to be supplied. Whenever the LCD module is inactive (LCDA = 0), the internal reference ladder will be turned off. The internal reference ladder can be used to divide the LCD bias voltage two or three equally spaced voltages that will be supplied to the LCD segment pins. To create this, the reference ladder consists of three matched resistors. Refer to Figure 26-3. 26.4.1 BIAS MODE INTERACTION When in 1/2 Bias mode (BIASMD = 1), then the middle resistor of the ladder is shorted out so that only two voltages are generated. The current consumption of the ladder is higher in this mode, with the one resistor removed. TABLE 26-3: Power Mode Low Medium High LCD INTERNAL LADDER POWER MODES (1/3 BIAS) Nominal Resistance of Entire Ladder 3 Mohm 300 kohm 30 kohm Nominal IDD 1 A 10 A 100 A DS41414A-page 336 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.4.3 AUTOMATIC POWER MODE SWITCHING As an LCD segment is electrically only a capacitor, current is drawn only during the interval where the voltage is switching. To minimize total device current, the LCD internal reference ladder can be operated in a different power mode for the transition portion of the duration. This is controlled by the LCDRL Register (Register 26-7). The LCDRL register allows switching between two power modes, designated `A' and `B'. `A' Power mode is active for a programmable time, beginning at the time when the LCD segments transition. `B' Power mode is the remaining time before the segments or commons change again. The LRLAT<2:0> bits select how long, if any, that the `A' Power mode is active. Refer to Figure 26-4. To implement this, the 5-bit prescaler used to divide the 32 kHz clock down to the LCD controller's 1 kHz base rate is used to select the power mode. FIGURE 26-4: LCD INTERNAL REFERENCE LADDER POWER MODE SWITCHING DIAGRAM - TYPE A Single Segment Time 32 kHz Clock Ladder Power Control Segment Clock LRLAT<2:0> Segment Data `H00 `H01 `H02 `H03 `H04 `H05 `H06 `H07 `H0E `H0F `H00 `H01 `H3 LRLAT<2:0> Power Mode Power Mode A Power Mode B Mode A COM0 V1 V0 V1 SEG0 V0 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 337 FIGURE 26-5: LCD INTERNAL REFERENCE LADDER POWER MODE SWITCHING DIAGRAM - TYPE A WAVEFORM (1/2 MUX, 1/2 BIAS DRIVE) Single Segment Time Single Segment Time DS41414A-page 338 PIC16F/LF1946/47 32 kHz Clock Ladder Power Control Segment Clock Segment Data `H00 `H01 `H02 `H03 `H04 `H05 `H06 `H07 `H0E `H0F `H00 `H01 `H02 `H03 `H04 `H05 `H06 `H07 `H0E `H0F Power Mode Power Mode A LRLAT<2:0> = 011 Power Mode B Power Mode A LRLAT<2:0> = 011 Power Mode B V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 -V2 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 26-6: LCD INTERNAL REFERENCE LADDER POWER MODE SWITCHING DIAGRAM - TYPE B WAVEFORM (1/2 MUX, 1/2 BIAS DRIVE) Single Segment Time Single Segment Time Single Segment Time Single Segment Time 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 32 kHz Clock Ladder Power Control Segment Clock `H00 `H01 `H02 `H03 `H0E `H0F `H10 `H11 `H12 `H13 `H1E `H1F `H00 `H01 `H02 `H03 `H0E `H0F `H10 `H11 `H12 `H13 `H1E `H1F Segment Data Power Mode Power Mode A LRLAT<2:0> = 011 Power Mode B Power Mode A LRLAT<2:0> = 011 Power Mode B Power Mode A LRLAT<2:0> = 011 Power Mode B Power Mode A LRLAT<2:0> = 011 Power Mode B Preliminary DS41414A-page 339 V2 V1 V0 COM0-SEG0 PIC16F/LF1946/47 -V1 -V2 PIC16F/LF1946/47 REGISTER 26-7: R/W-0/0 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit u = Bit is unchanged `1' = Bit is set bit 7-6 W = Writable bit x = Bit is unknown `0' = Bit is cleared LRLAP<1:0>: LCD Reference Ladder A Time Power Control bits During Time interval A (Refer to Figure 26-4): 00 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is powered down and unconnected 01 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is powered in low-power mode 10 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is powered in medium-power mode 11 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is powered in high-power mode LRLBP<1:0>: LCD Reference Ladder B Time Power Control bits During Time interval B (Refer to Figure 26-4): 00 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is powered down and unconnected 01 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is powered in low-power mode 10 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is powered in medium-power mode 11 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is powered in high-power mode Unimplemented: Read as `0' LRLAT<2:0>: LCD Reference Ladder A Time interval control bits Sets the number of 32 kHz clocks that the A Time interval power mode is active For type A waveforms (WFT = 0): 000 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is always in `B' power mode 001 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 1 clock and `B' power mode for 15 clocks 010 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 2 clocks and `B' power mode for 14 clocks 011 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 3 clocks and `B' power mode for 13 clocks 100 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 4 clocks and `B' power mode for 12 clocks 101 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 5 clocks and `B' power mode for 11 clocks 110 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 6 clocks and `B' power mode for 10 clocks 111 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 7 clocks and `B' power mode for 9 clocks For type B waveforms (WFT = 1): 000 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is always in `B' power mode. 001 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 1 clock and `B' power mode for 31 clocks 010 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 2 clocks and `B' power mode for 30 clocks 011 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 3 clocks and `B' power mode for 29 clocks 100 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 4 clocks and `B' power mode for 28 clocks 101 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 5 clocks and `B' power mode for 27 clocks 110 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 6 clocks and `B' power mode for 26 clocks 111 = Internal LCD Reference Ladder is in `A' power mode for 7 clocks and `B' power mode for 25 clocks U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets LRLAP<1:0> LCDRL: LCD REFERENCE LADDER CONTROL REGISTERS R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 U-0 -- R/W-0/0 R/W-0/0 LRLAT<2:0> bit 0 R/W-0/0 LRLBP<1:0> R/W-0/0 bit 5-4 bit 3 bit 2-0 DS41414A-page 340 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.4.4 CONTRAST CONTROL The LCD contrast control circuit consists of a seven-tap resistor ladder, controlled by the LCDCST bits. Refer to Figure 26-7. The contrast control circuit is used to decrease the output voltage of the signal source by a total of approximately 10%, when LCDCST = 111. Whenever the LCD module is inactive (LCDA = 0), the contrast control ladder will be turned off (open). FIGURE 26-7: VDDIO INTERNAL REFERENCE AND CONTRAST CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM 7 Stages R R R R 3.072V From FVR Buffer Analog MUX 7 To top of Reference Ladder 0 LCDCST<2:0> 3 Internal Reference Contrast control 26.4.5 INTERNAL REFERENCE 26.4.6 VLCD<3:1> PINS Under firmware control, an internal reference for the LCD bias voltages can be enabled. When enabled, the source of this voltage can be either VDDIO or a voltage 3 times the main fixed voltage reference (3.072V). When no internal reference is selected, the LCD contrast control circuit is disabled and LCD bias must be provided externally. Whenever the LCD module is inactive (LCDA = 0), the internal reference will be turned off. When the internal reference is enabled and the Fixed Voltage Reference is selected, the LCDIRI bit can be used to minimize power consumption by tieing into the LCD reference ladder automatic power mode switching. When LCDIRI = 1 and the LCD reference ladder is in Power mode `B', the LCD internal FVR buffer is disables. . Note: The LCD module automatically turns on the fixed voltage reference when needed. The VLCD<3:1> pins provide the ability for an external LCD bias network to be used instead of the internal ladder. Use of the VLCD<3:1> pins does not prevent use of the internal ladder. Each VLCD pin has an independent control in the LCDREF register (Register 26-3), allowing access to any or all of the LCD Bias signals. This architecture allows for maximum flexibility in different applications For example, the VLCD<3:1> pins may be used to add capacitors to the internal reference ladder, increasing the drive capacity. For applications where the internal contrast control is insufficient, the firmware can choose to only enable the VLCD3 pin, allowing an external contrast control circuit to use the internal reference divider. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 341 PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.5 LCD Multiplex Types 26.7 Pixel Control The LCD driver module can be configured into one of four multiplex types: * * * * Static (only COM0 is used) 1/2 multiplex (COM<1:0> are used) 1/3 multiplex (COM<2:0> are used) 1/4 multiplex (COM<3:0> are used) The LCDDATAx registers contain bits which define the state of each pixel. Each bit defines one unique pixel. Register 26-6 shows the correlation of each bit in the LCDDATAx registers to the respective common and segment signals. Any LCD pixel location not being used for display can be used as general purpose RAM. The LMUX<1:0> bit setting of the LCDCON register decides which of the LCD common pins are used (see Table 26-4 for details). If the pin is a digital I/O, the corresponding TRIS bit controls the data direction. If the pin is a COM drive, then the TRIS setting of that pin is overridden. 26.8 LCD Frame Frequency The rate at which the COM and SEG outputs change is called the LCD frame frequency. TABLE 26-5: TABLE 26-4: Multiplex Static 1/2 1/3 1/4 COMMON PIN USAGE COM3 Unused Unused Unused Active COM2 Unused Unused Active Active COM1 Unused Active Active Active Multiplex Static 1/2 1/3 1/4 Note: FRAME FREQUENCY FORMULAS Frame Frequency = LMUX <1:0> 00 01 10 11 Clock source/(4 x 1 x (LPD Prescaler) x 32)) Clock source/(2 x 2 x (LPD Prescaler) x 32)) Clock source/(1 x 3 x (LPD Prescaler) x 32)) Clock source/(1 x 4 x (LPD Prescaler) x 32)) Clock source is FOSC/256, T1OSC or LFINTOSC. 26.6 Segment Enables The LCDSEn registers are used to select the pin function for each segment pin. The selection allows each pin to operate as either an LCD segment driver or as one of the pin's alternate functions. To configure the pin as a segment pin, the corresponding bits in the LCDSEn registers must be set to `1'. If the pin is a digital I/O, the corresponding TRIS bit controls the data direction. Any bit set in the LCDSEn registers overrides any bit settings in the corresponding TRIS register. Note: On a Power-on Reset, these pins are configured as normal I/O, not LCD pins. TABLE 26-6: APPROXIMATE FRAME FREQUENCY (IN Hz) USING FOSC @ 8 MHz, TIMER1 @ 32.768 kHz OR LFINTOSC Static 122 81 61 49 41 35 1/2 122 81 61 49 41 35 1/3 162 108 81 65 54 47 1/4 122 81 61 49 41 35 LP<3:0> 2 3 4 5 6 7 DS41414A-page 342 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 26-7: LCD Function SEG0 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 SEG7 SEG8 SEG9 SEG10 SEG11 SEG12 SEG13 SEG14 SEG15 SEG16 SEG17 SEG18 SEG19 SEG20 SEG21 SEG22 SEG23 SEG24 SEG25 SEG26 SEG27 SEG28 SEG29 SEG30 SEG31 SEG32 SEG33 SEG34 SEG35 SEG36 SEG37 SEG38 SEG39 SEG40 SEG41 SEG42 SEG43 SEG44 SEG45 LCD SEGMENT MAPPING WORKSHEET COM0 COM1 LCD Segment LCDDATAx Address LCDDATA3, 0 LCDDATA3, 1 LCDDATA3, 2 LCDDATA3, 3 LCDDATA3, 4 LCDDATA3, 5 LCDDATA3, 6 LCDDATA3, 7 LCDDATA4, 0 LCDDATA4, 1 LCDDATA4, 2 LCDDATA4, 3 LCDDATA4, 4 LCDDATA4, 5 LCDDATA4, 6 LCDDATA4, 7 LCDDATA5, 0 LCDDATA5, 1 LCDDATA5, 2 LCDDATA5, 3 LCDDATA5, 4 LCDDATA5, 5 LCDDATA5, 6 LCDDATA5, 7 LCDDATA15, 0 LCDDATA15, 1 LCDDATA15, 2 LCDDATA15, 3 LCDDATA15, 4 LCDDATA15, 5 LCDDATA15, 6 LCDDATA15, 7 LCDDATA16, 0 LCDDATA16, 1 LCDDATA16, 2 LCDDATA16, 3 LCDDATA16, 4 LCDDATA16, 5 LCDDATA16, 6 LCDDATA16, 7 LCDDATA17, 0 LCDDATA17, 1 LCDDATA17, 2 LCDDATA17, 3 LCDDATA17, 4 LCDDATA17, 5 LCD Segment COM2 LCDDATAx Address LCDDATA6, 0 LCDDATA6, 1 LCDDATA6, 2 LCDDATA6, 3 LCDDATA6, 4 LCDDATA6, 5 LCDDATA6, 6 LCDDATA6, 7 LCDDATA7, 0 LCDDATA7, 1 LCDDATA7, 2 LCDDATA7, 3 LCDDATA7, 4 LCDDATA7, 5 LCDDATA7, 6 LCDDATA7, 7 LCDDATA8, 0 LCDDATA8, 1 LCDDATA8, 2 LCDDATA8, 3 LCDDATA8, 4 LCDDATA8, 5 LCDDATA8, 6 LCDDATA8, 7 LCDDATA18, 0 LCDDATA18, 1 LCDDATA18, 2 LCDDATA18, 3 LCDDATA18, 4 LCDDATA18, 5 LCDDATA18, 6 LCDDATA18, 7 LCDDATA19, 0 LCDDATA19, 1 LCDDATA19, 2 LCDDATA19, 3 LCDDATA19, 4 LCDDATA19, 5 LCDDATA19, 6 LCDDATA19, 7 LCDDATA20, 0 LCDDATA20, 1 LCDDATA20, 2 LCDDATA20, 3 LCDDATA20, 4 LCDDATA20, 5 LCD Segment COM3 LCDDATAx Address LCDDATA9, 0 LCDDATA9, 1 LCDDATA9, 2 LCDDATA9, 3 LCDDATA9, 4 LCDDATA9, 5 LCDDATA9, 6 LCDDATA9, 7 LCDDATA10, 0 LCDDATA10, 1 LCDDATA10, 2 LCDDATA10, 3 LCDDATA10, 4 LCDDATA10, 5 LCDDATA10, 6 LCDDATA10, 7 LCDDATA11, 0 LCDDATA11, 1 LCDDATA11, 2 LCDDATA11, 3 LCDDATA11, 4 LCDDATA11, 5 LCDDATA11, 6 LCDDATA11, 7 LCDDATA21, 0 LCDDATA21, 1 LCDDATA21, 2 LCDDATA21, 3 LCDDATA21, 4 LCDDATA21, 5 LCDDATA21, 6 LCDDATA21, 7 LCDDATA22, 0 LCDDATA22, 1 LCDDATA22, 2 LCDDATA22, 3 LCDDATA22, 4 LCDDATA22, 5 LCDDATA22, 6 LCDDATA22, 7 LCDDATA23, 0 LCDDATA23, 1 LCDDATA23, 2 LCDDATA23, 3 LCDDATA23, 4 LCDDATA23, 5 LCD Segment LCDDATAx Address LCDDATA0, 0 LCDDATA0, 1 LCDDATA0, 2 LCDDATA0, 3 LCDDATA0, 4 LCDDATA0, 5 LCDDATA0, 6 LCDDATA0, 7 LCDDATA1, 0 LCDDATA1, 1 LCDDATA1, 2 LCDDATA1, 3 LCDDATA1, 4 LCDDATA1, 5 LCDDATA1, 6 LCDDATA1, 7 LCDDATA2, 0 LCDDATA2, 1 LCDDATA2, 2 LCDDATA2, 3 LCDDATA2, 4 LCDDATA2, 5 LCDDATA2, 6 LCDDATA2, 7 LCDDATA12, 0 LCDDATA12, 1 LCDDATA12, 2 LCDDATA12, 3 LCDDATA12, 4 LCDDATA12, 5 LCDDATA12, 6 LCDDATA12, 7 LCDDATA13, 0 LCDDATA13, 1 LCDDATA13, 2 LCDDATA13, 3 LCDDATA13, 4 LCDDATA13, 5 LCDDATA13, 6 LCDDATA13, 7 LCDDATA14, 0 LCDDATA14, 1 LCDDATA14, 2 LCDDATA14, 3 LCDDATA14, 4 LCDDATA14, 5 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 343 PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.9 LCD Waveform Generation LCD waveforms are generated so that the net AC voltage across the dark pixel should be maximized and the net AC voltage across the clear pixel should be minimized. The net DC voltage across any pixel should be zero. The COM signal represents the time slice for each common, while the SEG contains the pixel data. The pixel signal (COM-SEG) will have no DC component and it can take only one of the two RMS values. The higher RMS value will create a dark pixel and a lower RMS value will create a clear pixel. As the number of commons increases, the delta between the two RMS values decreases. The delta represents the maximum contrast that the display can have. The LCDs can be driven by two types of waveform: Type-A and Type-B. In Type-A waveform, the phase changes within each common type, whereas in Type-B waveform, the phase changes on each frame boundary. Thus, Type-A waveform maintains 0 VDC over a single frame, whereas Type-B waveform takes two frames. Note 1: If Sleep has to be executed with LCD Sleep disabled (LCDCON FIGURE 26-8: TYPE-A/TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN STATIC DRIVE COM0 pin COM0 SEG0 pin V1 V0 V1 V0 V1 V0 V1 SEG1 pin COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (active) COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (inactive) 1 Frame V0 -V1 V0 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 DS41414A-page 344 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-9: TYPE-A WAVEFORMS IN 1/2 MUX, 1/2 BIAS DRIVE V2 COM1 COM0 pin V1 V0 V2 COM0 COM1 pin V1 V0 V2 SEG0 pin V1 V0 V2 SEG1 pin V1 V0 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 V2 V1 V0 -V1 -V2 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (inactive) 1 Frame V0 -V1 -V2 COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (active) 1 Segment Time Note: 1 Frame = 2 single segment times. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 345 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-10: TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN 1/2 MUX, 1/2 BIAS DRIVE COM1 COM0 pin V2 V1 V0 COM0 COM1 pin V2 V1 V0 SEG0 pin V2 V1 V0 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 pin V2 V1 V0 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (active) V0 -V1 -V2 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (inactive) 2 Frames V0 -V1 -V2 1 Segment Time Note: 1 Frame = 2 single segment times. DS41414A-page 346 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-11: TYPE-A WAVEFORMS IN 1/2 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE V3 COM1 COM0 pin V2 V1 V0 COM0 COM1 pin V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 SEG0 pin V2 V1 V0 V3 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 pin V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (active) V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (inactive) 1 Frame V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 1 Segment Time Note: 1 Frame = 2 single segment times. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 347 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-12: TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN 1/2 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE V3 COM1 COM0 pin V2 V1 V0 COM0 COM1 pin V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 SEG0 pin V2 V1 V0 V3 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 pin V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (active) V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (inactive) 2 Frames V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 1 Segment Time Note: 1 Frame = 2 single segment times. DS41414A-page 348 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-13: TYPE-A WAVEFORMS IN 1/3 MUX, 1/2 BIAS DRIVE V2 V1 V0 V2 COM2 COM1 pin V1 V0 COM1 COM0 COM2 pin V2 V1 V0 SEG0 and SEG2 pins V2 V1 V0 V2 SEG1 pin SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 V1 V0 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (inactive) V0 -V1 -V2 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (active) V0 -V1 -V2 1 Frame COM0 pin 1 Segment Time Note: 1 Frame = 2 single segment times. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 349 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-14: TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN 1/3 MUX, 1/2 BIAS DRIVE COM0 pin V2 V1 V0 COM2 COM1 pin COM1 COM0 V2 V1 V0 V2 V1 V0 V2 V1 V0 V2 V1 V0 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (inactive) V0 -V1 -V2 COM2 pin SEG0 pin SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 pin V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (active) 2 Frames V0 -V1 -V2 1 Segment Time Note: 1 Frame = 2 single segment times. DS41414A-page 350 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-15: TYPE-A WAVEFORMS IN 1/3 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE V3 COM0 pin V2 V1 V0 COM2 COM1 pin COM1 COM0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 COM2 pin V2 V1 V0 V3 SEG0 and SEG2 pins SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 V2 V1 V0 V3 SEG1 pin V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (inactive) V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (active) V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 1 Frame 1 Segment Time Note: 1 Frame = 2 single segment times. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 351 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-16: TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN 1/3 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE V3 COM0 pin V2 V1 V0 COM2 COM1 pin COM1 COM0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 COM2 pin V2 V1 V0 V3 SEG0 pin SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 V2 V1 V0 V3 SEG1 pin V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (inactive) V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (active) V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 2 Frames 1 Segment Time Note: 1 Frame = 2 single segment times. DS41414A-page 352 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-17: COM3 COM2 COM0 pin TYPE-A WAVEFORMS IN 1/4 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 COM1 COM0 COM1 pin COM2 pin COM3 pin SEG0 pin SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 pin COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (active) COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (inactive) 1 Frame 1 Segment Time Note: 1 Frame = 2 single segment times. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 353 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-18: COM3 COM0 pin COM2 TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN 1/4 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 COM1 COM0 COM1 pin COM2 pin COM3 pin SEG0 pin SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 pin COM0-SEG0 segment voltage (active) COM0-SEG1 segment voltage (inactive) 2 Frames 1 Segment Time Note: 1 Frame = 2 single segment times. DS41414A-page 354 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.10 LCD Interrupts The LCD module provides an interrupt in two cases. An interrupt when the LCD controller goes from active to inactive controller. An interrupt also provides unframe boundaries for Type B waveform. The LCD timing generation provides an interrupt that defines the LCD frame timing. 26.10.1 LCD INTERRUPT ON MODULE SHUTDOWN An LCD interrupt is generated when the module completes shutting down (LCDA goes from `1' to `0'). 26.10.2 LCD FRAME INTERRUPTS A new frame is defined to begin at the leading edge of the COM0 common signal. The interrupt will be set immediately after the LCD controller completes accessing all pixel data required for a frame. This will occur at a fixed interval before the frame boundary (TFINT), as shown in Figure 26-19. The LCD controller will begin to access data for the next frame within the interval from the interrupt to when the controller begins to access data after the interrupt (TFWR). New data must be written within TFWR, as this is when the LCD controller will begin to access the data for the next frame. When the LCD driver is running with Type-B waveforms and the LMUX<1:0> bits are not equal to `00' (static drive), there are some additional issues that must be addressed. Since the DC voltage on the pixel takes two frames to maintain zero volts, the pixel data must not change between subsequent frames. If the pixel data were allowed to change, the waveform for the odd frames would not necessarily be the complement of the waveform generated in the even frames and a DC component would be introduced into the panel. Therefore, when using Type-B waveforms, the user must synchronize the LCD pixel updates to occur within a subframe after the frame interrupt. To correctly sequence writing while in Type-B, the interrupt will only occur on complete phase intervals. If the user attempts to write when the write is disabled, the WERR bit of the LCDCON register is set and the write does not occur. Note: The LCD frame interrupt is not generated when the Type-A waveform is selected and when the Type-B with no multiplex (static) is selected. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 355 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-19: WAVEFORMS AND INTERRUPT TIMING IN QUARTER-DUTY CYCLE DRIVE (EXAMPLE - TYPE-B, NON-STATIC) LCD Interrupt Occurs COM0 Controller Accesses Next Frame Data V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 COM1 COM2 COM3 2 Frames TFINT Frame Boundary TFWR = TFRAME/2*(LMUX<1:0> + 1) + TCY/2 TFINT = (TFWR/2 - (2 TCY + 40 ns)) minimum = 1.5(TFRAME/4) - (2 TCY + 40 ns) (TFWR/2 - (1 TCY + 40 ns)) maximum = 1.5(TFRAME/4) - (1 TCY + 40 ns) Frame Boundary TFWR Frame Boundary DS41414A-page 356 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.11 Operation During Sleep The LCD module can operate during Sleep. The selection is controlled by bit SLPEN of the LCDCON register. Setting the SLPEN bit allows the LCD module to go to Sleep. Clearing the SLPEN bit allows the module to continue to operate during Sleep. If a SLEEP instruction is executed and SLPEN = 1, the LCD module will cease all functions and go into a very low-current Consumption mode. The module will stop operation immediately and drive the minimum LCD voltage on both segment and common lines. Figure 26-20 shows this operation. The LCD module can be configured to operate during Sleep. The selection is controlled by bit SLPEN of the LCDCON register. Clearing SLPEN and correctly configuring the LCD module clock will allow the LCD module to operate during Sleep. Setting SLPEN and correctly executing the LCD module shutdown will disable the LCD module during Sleep and save power. If a SLEEP instruction is executed and SLPEN = 1, the LCD module will immediately cease all functions, drive the outputs to Vss and go into a very low-current mode. The SLEEP instruction should only be executed after the LCD module has been disabled and the current cycle completed, thus ensuring that there are no DC voltages on the glass. To disable the LCD module, clear the LCDEN bit. The LCD module will complete the disabling process after the current frame, clear the LCDA bit and optionally cause an interrupt. The steps required to properly enter Sleep with the LCD disabled are: * Clear LCDEN * Wait for LCDA = 0 either by polling or by interrupt * Execute SLEEP If SLPEN = 0 and SLEEP is executed while the LCD module clock source is FOSC/4, then the LCD module will halt with the pin driving the last LCD voltage pattern. Prolonged exposure to a fixed LCD voltage pattern will cause damage to the LCD glass. To prevent LCD glass damage, either perform the proper LCD module shutdown prior to Sleep, or change the LCD module clock to allow the LCD module to continue operation during Sleep. If a SLEEP instruction is executed and SLPEN = 0 and the LCD module clock is either T1OSC or LFINTOSC, the module will continue to display the current contents of the LCDDATA registers. While in Sleep, the LCD data cannot be changed. If the LCDIE bit is set, the device will wake from Sleep on the next LCD frame boundary. The LCD module current consumption will not decrease in this mode; however, the overall device power consumption will be lower due to the shutdown of the CPU and other peripherals. Table 26-8 shows the status of the LCD module during a Sleep while using each of the three available clock sources. Note: When the LCDEN bit is cleared, the LCD module will be disabled at the completion of frame. At this time, the port pins will revert to digital functionality. To minimize power consumption due to floating digital inputs, the LCD pins should be driven low using the PORT and TRIS registers. If a SLEEP instruction is executed and SLPEN = 0, the module will continue to display the current contents of the LCDDATA registers. To allow the module to continue operation while in Sleep, the clock source must be either the LFINTOSC or T1OSC external oscillator. While in Sleep, the LCD data cannot be changed. The LCD module current consumption will not decrease in this mode; however, the overall consumption of the device will be lower due to shut down of the core and other peripheral functions. Table 26-8 shows the status of the LCD module during Sleep while using each of the three available clock sources: TABLE 26-8: Clock Source T1OSC LFINTOSC FOSC/4 LCD MODULE STATUS DURING SLEEP SLPEN 0 1 0 1 0 1 Operational During Sleep Yes No Yes No No No Note: The LFINTOSC or external T1OSC oscillator must be used to operate the LCD module during Sleep. If LCD interrupts are being generated (Type-B waveform with a multiplex mode not static) and LCDIE = 1, the device will awaken from Sleep on the next frame boundary. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 357 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 26-20: SLEEP ENTRY/EXIT WHEN SLPEN = 1 V3 V2 V1 COM0 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM1 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM2 V0 V3 V2 V1 SEG0 2 Frames SLEEP Instruction Execution Wake-up V0 DS41414A-page 358 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 26.12 Configuring the LCD Module The following is the sequence of steps to configure the LCD module. 1. 2. 3. Select the frame clock prescale using bits LP<3:0> of the LCDPS register. Configure the appropriate pins to function as segment drivers using the LCDSEn registers. Configure the LCD module for the following using the LCDCON register: - Multiplex and Bias mode, bits LMUX<1:0> - Timing source, bits CS<1:0> - Sleep mode, bit SLPEN Write initial values to pixel data registers, LCDDATA0 through LCDDATA23. Clear LCD Interrupt Flag, LCDIF bit of the PIR2 register and if desired, enable the interrupt by setting bit LCDIE of the PIE2 register. Configure bias voltages by setting the LCDRL, LCDREF and the associated ANSELx registers as needed. Enable the LCD module by setting bit LCDEN of the LCDCON register. 26.14 LCD Current Consumption When using the LCD module the current consumption consists of the following three factors: * Oscillator Selection * LCD Bias Source * Capacitance of the LCD segments The current consumption of just the LCD module can be considered negligible compared to these other factors. 26.14.1 OSCILLATOR SELECTION 4. 5. The current consumed by the clock source selected must be considered when using the LCD module. See Section 29.0 "Electrical Specifications" for oscillator current consumption information. 26.14.2 LCD BIAS SOURCE 6. 7. The LCD bias source, internal or external, can contribute significantly to the current consumption. Use the highest possible resistor values while maintaining contrast to minimize current. 26.14.3 26.13 Disabling the LCD Module To disable the LCD module, write all `0's to the LCDCON register. CAPACITANCE OF THE LCD SEGMENTS The LCD segments which can be modeled as capacitors which must be both charged and discharged every frame. The size of the LCD segment and its technology determines the segment's capacitance. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 359 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 26-9: Name INTCON LCDCON LCDCST LCDDATA0 LCDDATA1 LCDDATA2 LCDDATA3 LCDDATA4 LCDDATA5 LCDDATA6 LCDDATA7 LCDDATA8 LCDDATA9 LCDDATA10 LCDDATA11 LCDDATA12 LCDDATA13 LCDDATA14 LCDDATA15 LCDDATA16 LCDDATA17 LCDDATA18 LCDDATA19 LCDDATA20 LCDDATA21 Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH LCD OPERATION Bit 7 GIE LCDEN -- SEG7 COM0 SEG15 COM0 SEG23 COM0 SEG7 COM1 SEG15 COM1 SEG23 COM1 SEG7 COM2 SEG15 COM2 SEG23 COM2 SEG7 COM3 SEG15 COM3 SEG23 COM3 SEG31 COM0 SEG39 COM0 -- SEG31 COM1 SEG39 COM1 -- SEG31 COM2 SEG39 COM2 -- SEG31 COM3 Bit 6 PEIE SLPEN -- SEG6 COM0 SEG14 COM0 SEG22 COM0 SEG6 COM1 SEG14 COM1 SEG22 COM1 SEG6 COM2 SEG14 COM2 SEG22 COM2 SEG6 COM3 SEG14 COM3 SEG22 COM3 SEG30 COM0 SEG38 COM0 -- SEG30 COM1 SEG38 COM1 -- SEG30 COM2 SEG38 COM2 -- SEG30 COM3 Bit 5 TMR0IE WERR -- SEG5 COM0 SEG13 COM0 SEG21 COM0 SEG5 COM1 SEG13 COM1 SEG21 COM1 SEG5 COM2 SEG13 COM2 SEG21 COM2 SEG5 COM3 SEG13 COM3 SEG21 COM3 SEG29 COM0 SEG37 COM0 SEG45 COM0 SEG29 COM1 SEG37 COM1 SEG45 COM1 SEG29 COM2 SEG37 COM2 SEG45 COM2 SEG29 COM3 Bit 4 INTE -- -- SEG4 COM0 SEG12 COM0 SEG20 COM0 SEG4 COM1 SEG12 COM1 SEG20 COM1 SEG4 COM2 SEG12 COM2 SEG20 COM2 SEG4 COM3 SEG12 COM3 SEG20 COM3 SEG28 COM0 SEG36 COM0 SEG44 COM0 SEG28 COM1 SEG36 COM1 SEG44 COM1 SEG28 COM2 SEG36 COM2 SEG44 COM2 SEG28 COM3 -- SEG3 COM0 SEG11 COM0 SEG19 COM0 SEG3 COM1 SEG11 COM1 SEG19 COM1 SEG3 COM2 SEG11 COM2 SEG19 COM2 SEG3 COM3 SEG11 COM3 SEG19 COM3 SEG27 COM0 SEG35 COM0 SEG43 COM0 SEG27 COM1 SEG35 COM1 SEG43 COM1 SEG27 COM2 SEG35 COM2 SEG43 COM2 SEG27 COM3 SEG2 COM0 SEG10 COM0 SEG18 COM0 SEG2 COM1 SEG10 COM1 SEG18 COM1 SEG2 COM2 SEG10 COM2 SEG18 COM2 SEG2 COM3 SEG10 COM3 SEG18 COM3 SEG26 COM0 SEG34 COM0 SEG42 COM0 SEG26 COM1 SEG34 COM1 SEG42 COM1 SEG26 COM2 SEG34 COM2 SEG42 COM2 SEG26 COM3 Bit 3 IOCIE Bit 2 TMR0IF Bit 1 INTF Bit 0 IOCIF Register on Page 89 329 332 SEG0 COM0 SEG8 COM0 SEG16 COM0 SEG0 COM1 SEG8 COM1 SEG16 COM1 SEG0 COM2 SEG8 COM2 SEG16 COM2 SEG0 COM3 SEG8 COM3 SEG16 COM3 SEG24 COM0 SEG32 COM0 SEG40 COM0 SEG24 COM1 SEG32 COM1 SEG40 COM1 SEG24 COM2 SEG32 COM2 SEG40 COM2 SEG24 COM3 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 333 CS<1:0> LMUX<1:0> LCDCST<2:0> SEG1 COM0 SEG9 COM0 SEG17 COM0 SEG1 COM1 SEG9 COM1 SEG17 COM1 SEG1 COM2 SEG9 COM2 SEG17 COM2 SEG1 COM3 SEG9 COM3 SEG17 COM3 SEG25 COM0 SEG33 COM0 SEG41 COM0 SEG25 COM1 SEG33 COM1 SEG41 COM1 SEG25 COM2 SEG33 COM2 SEG41 COM2 SEG25 COM3 -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the LCD module. DS41414A-page 360 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 26-9: Name LCDDATA22 LCDDATA23 LCDPS LCDREF LCDRL LCDSE0 LCDSE1 LCDSE2 LCDSE3 LCDSE4 LCDSE5 PIE2 PIR2 T1CON Legend: -- OSFIE OSFIF -- C2IE C2IF C1IE C1IF EEIE EEIF SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH LCD OPERATION (CONTINUED) Bit 7 SEG39 COM3 -- WFT LCDIRE Bit 6 SEG38 COM3 -- BIASMD LCDIRS Bit 5 SEG37 COM3 SEG45 COM3 LCDA LCDIRI Bit 4 SEG36 COM3 SEG44 COM3 WA -- VLCD3PE -- SE<7:0> SE<15:8> SE<23:16> SE<31:24> SE<39:32> SE<45:40> BCLIE BCLIF T1OSCEN LCDIE LCDIF T1SYNC -- -- -- CCP2IE CCP2IF TMR1ON Bit 3 SEG35 COM3 SEG43 COM3 Bit 2 SEG34 COM3 SEG42 COM3 Bit 1 SEG33 COM3 SEG41 COM3 Bit 0 SEG32 COM3 SEG40 COM3 Register on Page 333 333 330 -- 331 340 333 333 333 333 333 333 91 95 199 LP<3:0> VLCD2PE VLCD1PE LRLAT<2:0> LRLAP<1:0> LRLBP<1:0> TMR1CS<1:0> T1CKPS<1:0> -- = unimplemented location, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the LCD module. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 361 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 362 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 27.0 IN-CIRCUIT SERIAL PROGRAMMINGTM (ICSPTM) ICSPTM programming allows customers to manufacture circuit boards with unprogrammed devices. Programming can be done after the assembly process allowing the device to be programmed with the most recent firmware or a custom firmware. Five pins are needed for ICSPTM programming: * ICSPCLK * ICSPDAT * MCLR/VPP * VDD * VSS In Program/Verify mode the Program Memory, User IDs and the Configuration Words are programmed through serial communications. The ICSPDAT pin is a bidirectional I/O used for transferring the serial data and the ICSPCLK pin is the clock input. For more information on ICSPTM refer to the "PIC16F193X/LF193X/PIC16F194X/LF194X Memory Programming Specification" (DS41397). 27.1 High-Voltage Programming Entry Mode The device is placed into High-Voltage Programming Entry mode by holding the ICSPCLK and ICSPDAT pins low then raising the voltage on MCLR/VPP to VIHH. Some programmers produce VPP greater than VIHH (9.0V), an external circuit is required to limit the VPP voltage. See Figure 27-1 for example circuit. FIGURE 27-1: VPP LIMITER EXAMPLE CIRCUIT RJ11-6PIN VPP VDD VSS ICSP_DATA ICSP_CLOCK NC RJ11-6PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 To MPLAB(R) ICD 2 R1 270 Ohm LM431BCMX 1 2A K 3 A U1 6A NC 4 7A NC 5 VREF 8 To Target Board R2 R3 10k 1% 24k 1% 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 363 PIC16F/LF1946/47 27.3 Note: The ICD 2 produces a VPP voltage greater than the maximum VPP specification of the PIC16F/LF1946/47. Common Programming Interfaces 27.2 Low-Voltage Programming Entry Mode Connection to a target device is typically done through an ICSPTM header. A commonly found connector on development tools is the RJ-11 in the 6P6C (6 pin, 6 connector) configuration. See Figure 27-2. The Low-Voltage Programming Entry mode allows the PIC16F/LF1946/47 devices to be programmed using VDD only, without high voltage. When the LVP bit of Configuration Word 2 is set to `1', the low-voltage ICSP programming entry is enabled. To disable the Low-Voltage ICSP mode, the LVP bit must be programmed to `0'. Entry into the Low-Voltage Programming Entry mode requires the following steps: 1. 2. MCLR is brought to VIL. A 32-bit key sequence is presented on ICSPDAT, while clocking ICSPCLK. FIGURE 27-2: ICD RJ-11 STYLE CONNECTOR INTERFACE VDD ICSPDAT NC 246 ICSPCLK 13 5 Target VSS VPP/MCLR PC Board Bottom Side Once the key sequence is complete, MCLR must be held at VIL for as long as Program/Verify mode is to be maintained. If low-voltage programming is enabled (LVP = 1), the MCLR Reset function is automatically enabled and cannot be disabled. See Section 6.3 "MCLR" for more information. The LVP bit can only be reprogrammed to `0' by using the High-Voltage Programming mode. Pin Description* 1 = VPP/MCLR 2 = VDD Target 3 = VSS (ground) 4 = ICSPDAT 5 = ICSPCLK 6 = No Connect Another connector often found in use with the PICkitTM programmers is a standard 6-pin header with 0.1 inch spacing. Refer to Figure 27-3. FIGURE 27-3: PICkitTM STYLE CONNECTOR INTERFACE Pin 1 Indicator Pin Description* 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 = VPP/MCLR 2 = VDD Target 3 = VSS (ground) 4 = ICSPDAT 5 = ICSPCLK 6 = No Connect * The 6-pin header (0.100" spacing) accepts 0.025" square pins. DS41414A-page 364 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 For additional interface recommendations, refer to your specific device programmer manual prior to PCB design. It is recommended that isolation devices be used to separate the programming pins from other circuitry. The type of isolation is highly dependent on the specific application and may include devices such as resistors, diodes, or even jumpers. See Figure 27-4 for more information. FIGURE 27-4: TYPICAL CONNECTION FOR ICSPTM PROGRAMMING External Programming Signals VDD VPP VSS Data Clock VDD Device to be Programmed VDD MCLR/VPP VSS ICSPDAT ICSPCLK * * * To Normal Connections * Isolation devices (as required). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 365 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 366 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 28.0 INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY 28.1 Read-Modify-Write Operations Each PIC16 instruction is a 14-bit word containing the operation code (opcode) and all required operands. The opcodes are broken into three broad categories. * Byte Oriented * Bit Oriented * Literal and Control The literal and control category contains the most varied instruction word format. Table 28-3 lists the instructions recognized by the MPASMTM assembler. All instructions are executed within a single instruction cycle, with the following exceptions, which may take two or three cycles: * Subroutine takes two cycles (CALL, CALLW) * Returns from interrupts or subroutines take two cycles (RETURN, RETLW, RETFIE) * Program branching takes two cycles (GOTO, BRA, BRW, BTFSS, BTFSC, DECFSZ, INCSFZ) * One additional instruction cycle will be used when any instruction references an indirect file register and the file select register is pointing to program memory. One instruction cycle consists of 4 oscillator cycles; for an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz, this gives a nominal instruction execution rate of 1 MHz. All instruction examples use the format `0xhh' to represent a hexadecimal number, where `h' signifies a hexadecimal digit. Any instruction that specifies a file register as part of the instruction performs a Read-Modify-Write (R-M-W) operation. The register is read, the data is modified, and the result is stored according to either the instruction, or the destination designator `d'. A read operation is performed on a register even if the instruction writes to that register. TABLE 28-1: Field f W b k x OPCODE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Description Register file address (0x00 to 0x7F) Working register (accumulator) Bit address within an 8-bit file register Literal field, constant data or label Don't care location (= 0 or 1). The assembler will generate code with x = 0. It is the recommended form of use for compatibility with all Microchip software tools. Destination select; d = 0: store result in W, d = 1: store result in file register f. Default is d = 1. FSR or INDF number. (0-1) Pre-post increment-decrement mode selection d n mm TABLE 28-2: Field PC TO C DC Z PD ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTIONS Description Program Counter Time-out bit Carry bit Digit carry bit Zero bit Power-down bit 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 367 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 28-1: GENERAL FORMAT FOR INSTRUCTIONS 0 Byte-oriented file register operations 13 876 OPCODE d f (FILE #) d = 0 for destination W d = 1 for destination f f = 7-bit file register address Bit-oriented file register operations 13 10 9 76 OPCODE b (BIT #) f (FILE #) b = 3-bit bit address f = 7-bit file register address Literal and control operations General 13 OPCODE 8 7 k (literal) 0 0 k = 8-bit immediate value CALL and GOTO instructions only 13 11 10 OPCODE k (literal) k = 11-bit immediate value MOVLP instruction only 13 OPCODE 0 7 6 k (literal) 0 k = 7-bit immediate value MOVLB instruction only 13 OPCODE k = 5-bit immediate value BRA instruction only 13 OPCODE 54 k (literal) 0 9 8 k (literal) 0 k = 9-bit immediate value FSR Offset instructions 13 OPCODE 7 6 n 5 k (literal) 0 n = appropriate FSR k = 6-bit immediate value FSR Increment instructions 13 OPCODE n = appropriate FSR m = 2-bit mode value OPCODE only 13 OPCODE 3 21 0 n m (mode) 0 DS41414A-page 368 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 28-3: Mnemonic, Operands PIC16F/LF1946/47 ENHANCED INSTRUCTION SET Description Cycles 14-Bit Opcode MSb LSb Status Affected Notes BYTE-ORIENTED FILE REGISTER OPERATIONS ADDWF ADDWFC ANDWF ASRF LSLF LSRF CLRF CLRW COMF DECF INCF IORWF MOVF MOVWF RLF RRF SUBWF SUBWFB SWAPF XORWF f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d f - f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d f f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d Add W and f Add with Carry W and f AND W with f Arithmetic Right Shift Logical Left Shift Logical Right Shift Clear f Clear W Complement f Decrement f Increment f Inclusive OR W with f Move f Move W to f Rotate Left f through Carry Rotate Right f through Carry Subtract W from f Subtract with Borrow W from f Swap nibbles in f Exclusive OR W with f Decrement f, Skip if 0 Increment f, Skip if 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1(2) 1(2) 00 11 00 11 11 11 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 00 00 00 00 0111 1101 0101 0111 0101 0110 0001 0001 1001 0011 1010 0100 1000 0000 1101 1100 0010 1011 1110 0110 dfff dfff dfff dfff dfff dfff lfff 0000 dfff dfff dfff dfff dfff 1fff dfff dfff dfff dfff dfff dfff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff 00xx ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff C, DC, Z C, DC, Z Z C, Z C, Z C, Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z C C C, DC, Z C, DC, Z Z 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1, 2 1, 2 BYTE ORIENTED SKIP OPERATIONS DECFSZ INCFSZ 1011 dfff ffff 1111 dfff ffff BIT-ORIENTED FILE REGISTER OPERATIONS BCF BSF f, b f, b Bit Clear f Bit Set f 1 1 01 01 00bb bfff ffff 01bb bfff ffff 2 2 BIT-ORIENTED SKIP OPERATIONS BTFSC BTFSS ADDLW ANDLW IORLW MOVLB MOVLP MOVLW SUBLW XORLW f, b f, b k k k k k k k k Bit Test f, Skip if Clear Bit Test f, Skip if Set Add literal and W AND literal with W Inclusive OR literal with W Move literal to BSR Move literal to PCLATH Move literal to W Subtract W from literal Exclusive OR literal with W 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 01 11 11 11 00 11 11 11 11 10bb bfff ffff 11bb bfff ffff 1110 1001 1000 0000 0001 0000 1100 1010 kkkk kkkk kkkk 001k 1kkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk C, DC, Z Z Z 1, 2 1, 2 LITERAL OPERATIONS C, DC, Z Z Note 1: If the Program Counter (PC) is modified, or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. 2: If this instruction addresses an INDF register and the MSb of the corresponding FSR is set, this instruction will require one additional instruction cycle. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 369 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 28-3: Mnemonic, Operands PIC16F/LF1946/47 ENHANCED INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED) Description Cycles 14-Bit Opcode MSb 11 00 10 00 10 00 11 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 00 11 00 11 001k 0000 0kkk 0000 1kkk 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 1111 0000 1111 kkkk 0000 kkkk 0000 kkkk 0000 kkkk 0000 0110 0000 0110 0000 0110 0110 0nkk 0001 0nkk 0001 1nkk LSb kkkk 1011 kkkk 1010 kkkk 1001 kkkk 1000 0100 TO, PD 0000 0010 0001 0011 TO, PD 0fff kkkk 0nmm Z kkkk Z 1nmm kkkk Status Affected Notes CONTROL OPERATIONS BRA BRW CALL CALLW GOTO RETFIE RETLW RETURN CLRWDT NOP OPTION RESET SLEEP TRIS ADDFSR MOVIW MOVWI k - k - k k k - - - - - - f n, k n k[n] n k[n] Relative Branch Relative Branch with W Call Subroutine Call Subroutine with W Go to address Return from interrupt Return with literal in W Return from Subroutine Clear Watchdog Timer No Operation Load OPTION_REG register with W Software device Reset Go into Standby mode Load TRIS register with W Add Literal k to FSR, n = FSR0 or FSR1 Move Indirect to W, n = FSR0 or FSR1, with pre/post inc/dec modifier. Move INDFn to W, Indexed Indirect. Move W to Indirect, n = FSR0 or FSR1, with pre/post inc/dec modifier. Move W to INDFn, Indexed Indirect. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 INHERENT OPERATIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C-COMPILER OPTIMIZED 2 2 2 2 Note 1: If the Program Counter (PC) is modified, or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. 2: If this instruction addresses an INDF register and the MSb of the corresponding FSR is set, this instruction will require one additional instruction cycle. DS41414A-page 370 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 28.2 Instruction Descriptions Add Literal to FSRn [ label ] ADDFSR FSRn, k -32 k 31 n [ 0, 1] FSR(n) + k FSR(n) None The signed 6-bit literal `k' is added to the contents of the FSRnH:FSRnL register pair. FSRn is limited to the range 0000h FFFFh. Moving beyond these bounds will cause the FSR to wrap around. ADDFSR Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: ANDLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: AND literal with W [ label ] ANDLW 0 k 255 (W) .AND. (k) (W) Z The contents of W register are AND'ed with the eight-bit literal `k'. The result is placed in the W register. k ADDLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Add literal and W [ label ] ADDLW 0 k 255 (W) + k (W) C, DC, Z The contents of the W register are added to the eight-bit literal `k' and the result is placed in the W register. k ANDWF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: AND W with f [ label ] ANDWF 0 f 127 d 0,1 (W) .AND. (f) (destination) Z AND the W register with register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f'. f,d ADDWF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Add W and f [ label ] ADDWF 0 f 127 d 0,1 (W) + (f) (destination) C, DC, Z Add the contents of the W register with register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f'. f,d ASRF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Arithmetic Right Shift [ label ] ASRF 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f<7>) dest<7> (f<7:1>) dest<6:0>, (f<0>) C, C, Z The contents of register `f' are shifted one bit to the right through the Carry flag. The MSb remains unchanged. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f'. register f C f {,d} Status Affected: Description: ADDWFC Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: ADD W and CARRY bit to f [ label ] ADDWFC 0 f 127 d [0,1] (W) + (f) + (C) dest C, DC, Z Add W, the Carry flag and data memory location `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed in data memory location `f'. f {,d} 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 371 PIC16F/LF1946/47 BCF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Bit Clear f [ label ] BCF 0 f 127 0b7 0 (f) None Bit `b' in register `f' is cleared. f,b BTFSC Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Bit Test f, Skip if Clear [ label ] BTFSC f,b 0 f 127 0b7 skip if (f) = 0 None If bit `b' in register `f' is `1', the next instruction is executed. If bit `b', in register `f', is `0', the next instruction is discarded, and a NOP is executed instead, making this a 2-cycle instruction. BRA Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Relative Branch [ label ] BRA label [ label ] BRA $+k -256 label - PC + 1 255 -256 k 255 (PC) + 1 + k PC None Add the signed 9-bit literal `k' to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 1 + k. This instruction is a two-cycle instruction. This branch has a limited range. BTFSS Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Bit Test f, Skip if Set [ label ] BTFSS f,b 0 f 127 0b<7 skip if (f) = 1 None If bit `b' in register `f' is `0', the next instruction is executed. If bit `b' is `1', then the next instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a 2-cycle instruction. BRW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Relative Branch with W [ label ] BRW None (PC) + (W) PC None Add the contents of W (unsigned) to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 1 + (W). This instruction is a two-cycle instruction. BSF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Bit Set f [ label ] BSF 0 f 127 0b7 1 (f) None Bit `b' in register `f' is set. f,b DS41414A-page 372 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 CALL Syntax: Operands: Operation: Call Subroutine [ label ] CALL k 0 k 2047 (PC)+ 1 TOS, k PC<10:0>, (PCLATH<4:3>) PC<12:11> None Call Subroutine. First, return address (PC + 1) is pushed onto the stack. The eleven-bit immediate address is loaded into PC bits <10:0>. The upper bits of the PC are loaded from PCLATH. CALL is a two-cycle instruction. CLRWDT Syntax: Operands: Operation: Clear Watchdog Timer [ label ] CLRWDT None 00h WDT 0 WDT prescaler, 1 TO 1 PD TO, PD CLRWDT instruction resets the Watchdog Timer. It also resets the prescaler of the WDT. Status bits TO and PD are set. Status Affected: Description: Status Affected: Description: CALLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Subroutine Call With W [ label ] CALLW None (PC) +1 TOS, (W) PC<7:0>, (PCLATH<6:0>) PC<14:8> None Subroutine call with W. First, the return address (PC + 1) is pushed onto the return stack. Then, the contents of W is loaded into PC<7:0>, and the contents of PCLATH into PC<14:8>. CALLW is a two-cycle instruction. COMF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Complement f [ label ] COMF 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f) (destination) Z The contents of register `f' are complemented. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f'. f,d Status Affected: Description: CLRF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Clear f [ label ] CLRF 0 f 127 00h (f) 1Z Z The contents of register `f' are cleared and the Z bit is set. f DECF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Decrement f [ label ] DECF f,d 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f) - 1 (destination) Z Decrement register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f'. CLRW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Clear W [ label ] CLRW None 00h (W) 1Z Z W register is cleared. Zero bit (Z) is set. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 373 PIC16F/LF1946/47 DECFSZ Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Decrement f, Skip if 0 [ label ] DECFSZ f,d 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f) - 1 (destination); skip if result = 0 None The contents of register `f' are decremented. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f'. If the result is `1', the next instruction is executed. If the result is `0', then a NOP is executed instead, making it a 2-cycle instruction. INCFSZ Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Increment f, Skip if 0 [ label ] INCFSZ f,d 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f) + 1 (destination), skip if result = 0 None The contents of register `f' are incremented. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f'. If the result is `1', the next instruction is executed. If the result is `0', a NOP is executed instead, making it a 2-cycle instruction. GOTO Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Unconditional Branch [ label ] GOTO k 0 k 2047 k PC<10:0> PCLATH<4:3> PC<12:11> None GOTO is an unconditional branch. The eleven-bit immediate value is loaded into PC bits <10:0>. The upper bits of PC are loaded from PCLATH<4:3>. GOTO is a two-cycle instruction. IORLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Inclusive OR literal with W [ label ] IORLW k 0 k 255 (W) .OR. k (W) Z The contents of the W register are OR'ed with the eight-bit literal `k'. The result is placed in the W register. INCF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Increment f [ label ] INCF f,d 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f) + 1 (destination) Z The contents of register `f' are incremented. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f'. IORWF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Inclusive OR W with f [ label ] IORWF f,d 0 f 127 d [0,1] (W) .OR. (f) (destination) Z Inclusive OR the W register with register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f'. DS41414A-page 374 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 LSLF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Logical Left Shift [ label ] LSLF 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f<7>) C (f<6:0>) dest<7:1> 0 dest<0> C, Z The contents of register `f' are shifted one bit to the left through the Carry flag. A `0' is shifted into the LSb. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f'. C register f 0 f {,d} MOVF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Move f [ label ] MOVF f,d 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f) (dest) Z The contents of register f is moved to a destination dependent upon the status of d. If d = 0, destination is W register. If d = 1, the destination is file register f itself. d = 1 is useful to test a file register since status flag Z is affected. 1 1 MOVF FSR, 0 After Instruction W = value in FSR register Z=1 Status Affected: Description: Words: Cycles: Example: LSRF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Logical Right Shift [ label ] LSLF 0 f 127 d [0,1] 0 dest<7> (f<7:1>) dest<6:0>, (f<0>) C, C, Z The contents of register `f' are shifted one bit to the right through the Carry flag. A `0' is shifted into the MSb. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f'. 0 register f C f {,d} Status Affected: Description: 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 375 PIC16F/LF1946/47 MOVIW Syntax: Move INDFn to W [ label ] MOVIW ++FSRn [ label ] MOVIW --FSRn [ label ] MOVIW FSRn++ [ label ] MOVIW FSRn-[ label ] MOVIW k[FSRn] n [0,1] -32 k 31 If not present, k = 0. INDFn W Effective address is determined by * FSR + 1 (preincrement) * FSR - 1 (predecrement) * FSR + k (relative offset) After the Move, the FSR value will be either: * FSR + 1 (all increments) * FSR - 1 (all decrements) * Unchanged Z MOVLP Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Move literal to PCLATH [ label ] MOVLP k 0 k 127 k PCLATH None The seven-bit literal `k' is loaded into the PCLATH register. Operands: Operation: MOVLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Move literal to W [ label ] k (W) None The eight-bit literal `k' is loaded into W register. The "don't cares" will assemble as `0's. 1 1 MOVLW 0x5A 0x5A After Instruction W= MOVLW k 0 k 255 Status Affected: Words: Mode Preincrement Predecrement Postincrement Postdecrement Description: Syntax ++FSRn --FSRn FSRn++ FSRn-Cycles: Example: MOVWF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Move W to f [ label ] (W) (f) None Move data from W register to register `f'. 1 1 MOVWF OPTION = = = = 0xFF 0x4F 0x4F 0x4F Before Instruction OPTION W After Instruction OPTION W MOVWF f 0 f 127 This instruction is used to move data between W and one of the indirect registers (INDFn). Before/after this move, the pointer (FSRn) is updated by pre/post incrementing/decrementing it. Note: The INDFn registers are not physical registers. Any instruction that accesses an INDFn register actually accesses the register at the address specified by the FSRn. FSRn is limited to the range 0000h FFFFh. Incrementing/decrementing it beyond these bounds will cause it to wrap around. Words: Cycles: Example: MOVLB Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Move literal to BSR [ label ] MOVLB k 0 k 15 k BSR None The five-bit literal `k' is loaded into the Bank Select Register (BSR). DS41414A-page 376 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 MOVWI Syntax: Move W to INDFn [ label ] MOVWI ++FSRn [ label ] MOVWI --FSRn [ label ] MOVWI FSRn++ [ label ] MOVWI FSRn-[ label ] MOVWI k[FSRn] n [0,1] -32 k 31 If not present, k = 0. W INDFn Effective address is determined by * FSR + 1 (preincrement) * FSR - 1 (predecrement) * FSR + k (relative offset) After the Move, the FSR value will be either: * FSR + 1 (all increments) * FSR - 1 (all decrements) Unchanged None Mode Preincrement Predecrement Postincrement Postdecrement Syntax ++FSRn --FSRn FSRFn++ FSRn-- NOP Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Words: Cycles: Example: No Operation [ label ] None No operation None No operation. 1 1 NOP NOP Operands: Operation: OPTION Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Load OPTION_REG Register with W [ label ] OPTION None (W) OPTION_REG None Move data from W register to OPTION_REG register. Status Affected: RESET Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Software Reset [ label ] RESET None Execute a device Reset. Resets the nRI flag of the PCON register. None This instruction provides a way to execute a hardware Reset by software. Description: This instruction is used to move data between W and one of the indirect registers (INDFn). Before/after this move, the pointer (FSRn) is updated by pre/post incrementing/decrementing it. Note: The INDFn registers are not physical registers. Any instruction that accesses an INDFn register actually accesses the register at the address specified by the FSRn. FSRn is limited to the range 0000h FFFFh. Incrementing/decrementing it beyond these bounds will cause it to wrap around. The increment/decrement operation on FSRn WILL NOT affect any Status bits. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 377 PIC16F/LF1946/47 RETFIE Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Return from Interrupt [ label ] None TOS PC, 1 GIE None Return from Interrupt. Stack is POPed and Top-of-Stack (TOS) is loaded in the PC. Interrupts are enabled by setting Global Interrupt Enable bit, GIE (INTCON<7>). This is a two-cycle instruction. 1 2 RETFIE After Interrupt PC = GIE = TOS 1 RETFIE k RETURN Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Return from Subroutine [ label ] None TOS PC None Return from subroutine. The stack is POPed and the top of the stack (TOS) is loaded into the program counter. This is a two-cycle instruction. RETURN Words: Cycles: Example: RETLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Return with literal in W [ label ] RETLW k 0 k 255 k (W); TOS PC None The W register is loaded with the eight bit literal `k'. The program counter is loaded from the top of the stack (the return address). This is a two-cycle instruction. 1 2 CALL TABLE;W contains table ;offset value * ;W now has table value * * ADDWF PC ;W = offset RETLW k1 ;Begin table RETLW k2 ; * * * RETLW kn ; End of table Before Instruction W= After Instruction W= RLF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Rotate Left f through Carry [ label ] 0 f 127 d [0,1] See description below C The contents of register `f' are rotated one bit to the left through the Carry flag. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f'. C Register f RLF f,d Words: Cycles: Example: Words: Cycles: Example: 1 1 RLF REG1,0 = = = = = 1110 0110 0 1110 0110 1100 1100 1 Before Instruction REG1 C After Instruction REG1 W C TABLE 0x07 value of k8 DS41414A-page 378 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 RRF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Rotate Right f through Carry [ label ] RRF f,d 0 f 127 d [0,1] See description below C The contents of register `f' are rotated one bit to the right through the Carry flag. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f'. C Register f SUBLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Subtract W from literal [ label ] SUBLW k 0 k 255 k - (W) W) C, DC, Z The W register is subtracted (2's complement method) from the eight-bit literal `k'. The result is placed in the W register. C=0 C=1 DC = 0 DC = 1 Wk Wk W<3:0> k<3:0> W<3:0> k<3:0> SLEEP Syntax: Operands: Operation: Enter Sleep mode [ label ] None 00h WDT, 0 WDT prescaler, 1 TO, 0 PD TO, PD The power-down Status bit, PD is cleared. Time-out Status bit, TO is set. Watchdog Timer and its prescaler are cleared. The processor is put into Sleep mode with the oscillator stopped. SLEEP SUBWF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Subtract W from f [ label ] SUBWF f,d 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f) - (W) destination) C, DC, Z Subtract (2's complement method) W register from register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f. Status Affected: Description: C=0 C=1 DC = 0 DC = 1 Wf Wf W<3:0> f<3:0> W<3:0> f<3:0> SUBWFB Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Subtract W from f with Borrow SUBWFB 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f) - (W) - (B) dest C, DC, Z Subtract W and the BORROW flag (CARRY) from register `f' (2's complement method). If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f'. f {,d} 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 379 PIC16F/LF1946/47 SWAPF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Swap Nibbles in f [ label ] SWAPF f,d 0 f 127 d [0,1] (f<3:0>) (destination<7:4>), (f<7:4>) (destination<3:0>) None The upper and lower nibbles of register `f' are exchanged. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is placed in register `f'. XORLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Exclusive OR literal with W [ label ] XORLW k 0 k 255 (W) .XOR. k W) Z The contents of the W register are XOR'ed with the eight-bit literal `k'. The result is placed in the W register. TRIS Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Load TRIS Register with W [ label ] TRIS f 5f7 (W) TRIS register `f' None Move data from W register to TRIS register. When `f' = 5, TRISA is loaded. When `f' = 6, TRISB is loaded. When `f' = 7, TRISC is loaded. XORWF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Description: Exclusive OR W with f [ label ] XORWF f,d 0 f 127 d [0,1] (W) .XOR. (f) destination) Z Exclusive OR the contents of the W register with register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in the W register. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f'. DS41414A-page 380 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.0 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Absolute Maximum Ratings() Ambient temperature under bias....................................................................................................... -40C to +125C Storage temperature ........................................................................................................................ -65C to +150C Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS ................................................................................................... -0.3V to +6.5V Voltage on VCAP pin with respect to VSS.............................................................................................. -0.3V to +4.0V Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS ................................................................................................... -0.3V to +4.0V Voltage on MCLR with respect to Vss ................................................................................................. -0.3V to +9.0V Voltage on all other pins with respect to VSS ........................................................................... -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V) Total power dissipation(1) ............................................................................................................................... 800 mW Maximum current out of VSS pin, -40C TA +85C for industrial............................................................... 425 mA Maximum current out of VSS pin, -40C TA +125C for extended ............................................................ 175 mA Maximum current into VDD pin, -40C TA +85C for industrial.................................................................. 425 mA Maximum current into VDD pin, -40C TA +125C for extended ............................................................... 175 mA Clamp current, IK (VPIN < 0 or VPIN > VDD)20 mA Maximum output current sunk by any I/O pin.................................................................................................... 25 mA Maximum output current sourced by any I/O pin .............................................................................................. 25 mA Note 1: Power dissipation is calculated as follows: PDIS = VDD x {IDD - IOH} + {(VDD - VOH) x IOH} + (VOl x IOL). NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure above maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 381 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 29-1: 5.5 PIC16F/LF1946/47 VOLTAGE FREQUENCY GRAPH, -40C TA +125C VDD (V) 3.6 2.5 2.0 1.8 0 4 10 Frequency (MHz) Note 1: The shaded region indicates the permissible combinations of voltage and frequency. 2: Refer to Table 29-1 for each Oscillator mode's supported frequencies. 16 32 FIGURE 29-2: PIC16F/LF1946/47 VOLTAGE FREQUENCY GRAPH, -40C TA +125C VDD (V) 3.6 2.5 2.3 2.0 1.8 0 4 10 Frequency (MHz) 16 32 Note 1: The shaded region indicates the permissible combinations of voltage and frequency. 2: Refer to Table 29-1 for each Oscillator mode's supported frequencies. DS41414A-page 382 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 29-3: 125 5% 85 Temperature (C) 2.5% 60 HFINTOSC FREQUENCY ACCURACY OVER DEVICE VDD AND TEMPERATURE 25 2% 0 -20 -40 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 5% 4.0 VDD (V) 4.5 5.0 5.5 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 383 PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.1 DC Characteristics: PIC16F/LF1946/47-I/E (Industrial, Extended) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended PIC16F1946/47 Param. No. D001 Sym. VDD Characteristic Supply Voltage PIC16LF1946/47 D001 D002* D002* VPOR* VPORR* VDR PIC16F1946/47 RAM Data Retention Voltage(1) PIC16LF1946/47 PIC16F1946/47 Power-on Reset Release Voltage Power-on Reset Rearm Voltage PIC16LF1946/47 PIC16F1946/47 D003 VADFVR Fixed Voltage Reference Voltage for ADC, Initial Accuracy -- -- -6 -7 -7 -8 -7 -8 -7 -8 -8 -9 -8 -8 -9 -9.5 -- -- 0.05 0.8 1.7 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -130 0.270 -- -- -- 4 4 6 6 4 4 5 5 7 7 4 4 9 9 -- -- -- V V % Device in Sleep mode Device in Sleep mode 1.024V, VDD 1.8V, 85C(3) 1.024V, VDD 1.8V, 125C(3) 2.048V, VDD 2.5V, 85C 2.048V, VDD 2.5V, 125C 4.096V, VDD 4.75V, 85C 4.096V, VDD 4.75V, 125C 1.024V, VDD 1.8V, 85C 1.024V, VDD 1.8V, 125C 2.048V, VDD 2.5V, 85C 2.048V, VDD 2.5V, 125C 4.096V, VDD 4.75V, 85C 4.096V, VDD 4.75V, 125C 3.072V, VDD 3.6V, 85C 3.072V, VDD 3.6V, 125C 1.5 1.7 -- -- -- 1.6 -- -- -- V V V Device in Sleep mode Device in Sleep mode 1.8 2.3 1.8 2.3 -- -- -- -- 3.6 3.6 5.5 5.5 V V V V FOSC 16 MHz: FOSC 32 MHz (NOTE 2) FOSC 16 MHz: FOSC 32 MHz (NOTE 2) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions D003A VCDAFVR Fixed Voltage Reference Voltage for Comparator and DAC, Initial Accuracy % D003B VLCDFVR Fixed Voltage Reference Voltage for LCD Bias, Initial Accuracy Temperature Coefficient, Fixed Voltage Reference Line Regulation, Fixed Voltage Reference VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal % ppm/C %/V V/ms D003C* TCVFVR D003D* VFVR/ VIN D004* * Note SVDD See Section 6.1 "Power-on Reset (POR)" for details. These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.3V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. 1: This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered in Sleep mode without losing RAM data. 2: PLL required for 32 MHz operation. 3: Selection not usable as ADC reference voltage. DS41414A-page 384 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 29-4: VDD VPOR VPORR POR AND POR REARM WITH SLOW RISING VDD VSS NPOR POR REARM VSS TVLOW(2) Note 1: 2: 3: TPOR(3) When NPOR is low, the device is held in Reset. TPOR 1 s typical. TVLOW 2.7 s typical. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 385 PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.2 DC Characteristics: PIC16F/LF1946/47-I/E (Industrial, Extended) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions VDD Note PIC16LF1946/47 PIC16F1946/47 Param No. Device Characteristics Supply Current (IDD)(1, 2) D009 LDO Regulator -- -- -- -- D010 -- -- D010 -- -- -- D010A -- -- D010A -- -- -- D011 D011 -- -- -- -- -- D012 D012 -- -- -- -- -- Note 1: 2: 350 50 30 5 7.0 9.0 24 30 32 7.0 9.0 24 30 32 75 150 95 170 390 210 390 230 410 930 -- -- -- -- 16 20 40 45 50 -- -- -- -- -- 150 225 175 250 690 350 700 450 800 1320 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A -- -- -- -- 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 HS, EC OR INTOSC/INTOSCIO (8-16 MHZ) Clock modes with all VCAP pins disabled All VCAP pins disabled VCAP enabled on RF0 LP Clock mode and Sleep (requires FVR and BOR to be disabled) FOSC = 32 kHz LP Oscillator mode (Note 4), -40C TA +85C FOSC = 32 kHz LP Oscillator mode (Note 4, 5), -40C TA +85C FOSC = 32 kHz LP Oscillator mode (Note 4) -40C TA +125C FOSC = 32 kHz LP Oscillator mode (Note 4, 5) -40C TA +125C FOSC = 1 MHz XT Oscillator mode FOSC = 1 MHz XT Oscillator mode (Note 5) FOSC = 4 MHz XT Oscillator mode FOSC = 4 MHz XT Oscillator mode (Note 5) 3: 4: 5: 6: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can be extended by the formula IR = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k FVR and BOR are disabled. 0.1 F capacitor on VCAP (RF0). 8 MHz crystal oscillator with 4x PLL enabled. DS41414A-page 386 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.2 DC Characteristics: PIC16F/LF1946/47-I/E (Industrial, Extended) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions VDD Note PIC16LF1946/47 PIC16F1946/47 Param No. Device Characteristics Supply Current (IDD)(1, 2) D013 D013 -- -- -- -- -- D014 -- -- D014 -- -- -- D015 D015 D016 D016 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Note 1: 2: 25 45 40 60 225 190 330 220 350 980 2.6 3.2 2.6 6.0 5 8 21 27 28 50 90 110 200 350 350 600 450 700 1390 4.5 5.0 4.5 8.0 12 16 35 40 45 A A A A A A A A A A mA mA mA mA A A A A A 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 3.0 3.6 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 FOSC = 500 kHz EC Oscillator Low-Power mode FOSC = 500 kHz EC Oscillator Low-Power mode (Note 5) FOSC = 4 MHz EC Oscillator mode Medium Power mode FOSC = 4 MHz EC Oscillator mode (Note 5) Medium Power mode FOSC = 32 MHz EC Oscillator High-Power mode FOSC = 32 MHz EC Oscillator High-Power mode (Note 5) FOSC = 32 kHz LFINTOSC mode, 85C FOSC = 32 kHz LFINTOSC mode, 85C (Note 5) 3: 4: 5: 6: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can be extended by the formula IR = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k FVR and BOR are disabled. 0.1 F capacitor on VCAP (RF0). 8 MHz crystal oscillator with 4x PLL enabled. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 387 PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.2 DC Characteristics: PIC16F/LF1946/47-I/E (Industrial, Extended) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions VDD Note PIC16LF1946/47 PIC16F1946/47 Param No. D017 Device Characteristics Supply Current (IDD)(1, 2) -- -- D017 -- -- -- D018 D018 -- -- -- -- -- D019 D019 -- -- -- -- -- D020 D020 -- -- -- -- -- D021 D021 Note 1: 2: -- -- -- -- 130 190 150 210 270 610 990 0.650 1.1 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.1 1.6 3.1 200 350 240 370 860 2.6 3.2 2.6 6.0 175 250 250 345 425 1000 1500 1.1 1.6 2.8 1.5 2.5 1.6 2.6 4.6 350 550 400 650 1350 4.5 5.0 4.5 8.0 A A A A A A A mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA A A A A A mA mA mA mA 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 3.0 3.6 3.0 5.0 FOSC = 500 kHz MFINTOSC mode FOSC = 500 kHz MFINTOSC mode (Note 5) FOSC = 8 MHz HFINTOSC mode FOSC = 8 MHz HFINTOSC mode (Note 5) FOSC = 16 MHz HFINTOSC mode FOSC = 16 MHz HFINTOSC mode (Note 5) FOSC = 4 MHz EXTRC mode (Note 3, Note 5) FOSC = 4 MHz EXTRC mode (Note 3, Note 5) FOSC = 32 MHz HS Oscillator mode (Note 6) FOSC = 32 MHz HS Oscillator mode (Note 5, Note 6) 3: 4: 5: 6: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can be extended by the formula IR = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k FVR and BOR are disabled. 0.1 F capacitor on VCAP (RF0). 8 MHz crystal oscillator with 4x PLL enabled. DS41414A-page 388 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.3 DC Characteristics: PIC16F/LF1946/47-I/E (Power-Down) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Min. (IPD)(2) -- -- D023 -- -- -- D024 D024 -- -- -- -- -- D025 D025 -- -- -- -- -- D026 D026 D027 D027 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- * Legend: Note 1: 0.06 0.08 15 18 19 0.5 0.8 16 19 20 8.5 8.5 32 39 70 7.5 34 67 0.6 1.8 16 21 25 1 2 35 40 45 6 7 35 40 45 23 26 50 72 120 TBD 57 100 5 6 35 40 45 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 3.0 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 T1OSC Current (Note 1) T1OSC Current (Note 1) BOR Current (Note 1) BOR Current (Note 1, Note 4) FVR current (Note 4) FVR current LPWDT Current (Note 1) LPWDT Current (Note 1) WDT, BOR, FVR, and T1OSC disabled, all Peripherals Inactive WDT, BOR, FVR, and T1OSC disabled, all Peripherals Inactive Typ Max. +85C Max. +125C Units Conditions VDD Note PIC16LF1946/47 PIC16F1946/47 Param No. Device Characteristics Power-down Base Current D023 2: 3: 4: These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. TBD = To Be Determined The peripheral current is the sum of the base IDD or IPD and the additional current consumed when this peripheral is enabled. The peripheral current can be determined by subtracting the base IDD or IPD current from this limit. Max values should be used when calculating total current consumption. The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD. A/D oscillator source is FRC. 0.1 F capacitor on VCAP (RF0). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 389 PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.3 DC Characteristics: PIC16F/LF1946/47-I/E (Power-Down) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Min. (2) PIC16LF1946/47 PIC16F1946/47 Param No. Device Characteristics Typ Max. +85C Max. +125C Units Conditions VDD 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 1.8 3.0 1.8 3.0 5.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 LCD Bias Ladder, Low-power LCD Bias Ladder, Medium-power LCD Bias Ladder, High-power LCD Bias Ladder, Low-power LCD Bias Ladder, Medium-power LCD Bias Ladder, High-power Cap Sense, Low Power mode Cap Sense, Low Power mode A/D Current (Note 1, Note 3), conversion in progress A/D Current (Note 1, Note 3, Note 4), conversion in progress Note A/D Current (Note 1, Note 3), no conversion in progress A/D Current (Note 1, Note 3), no conversion in progress Power-down Base Current (IPD) D028 D028 -- -- -- -- -- 0.1 0.1 16 21 25 250 250 280 280 280 3.5 7 17 21 22 1 10 100 1.7 17 170 5 6 35 40 50 -- -- -- -- -- 7 9 38 50 70 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D029 D029 -- -- -- -- -- D030 D030 -- -- -- -- -- D031 -- -- -- D031 -- -- -- * Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. TBD = To Be Determined The peripheral current is the sum of the base IDD or IPD and the additional current consumed when this peripheral is enabled. The peripheral current can be determined by subtracting the base IDD or IPD current from this limit. Max values should be used when calculating total current consumption. The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD. A/D oscillator source is FRC. 0.1 F capacitor on VCAP (RF0). DS41414A-page 390 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.4 DC Characteristics: PIC16F/LF1946/47-I/E DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions Sym. VIL Characteristic Input Low Voltage I/O PORT: with TTL buffer with Schmitt Trigger buffer with I2CTM levels with SMBus levels D032 D032A D033 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.8 0.15 VDD 0.2 VDD 0.3 VDD 0.8 0.2 VDD 0.3 VDD V V V V V V V 4.5V VDD 5.5V 1.8V VDD 4.5V 2.0V VDD 5.5V 2.7V VDD 5.5V D034 D034A VIH D040 D040A D041 MCLR, OSC1 (RC mode)(1) OSC1 (HS mode) Input High Voltage I/O ports: with TTL buffer 2.0 0.25 VDD + 0.8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5 5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 125 1000 200 200 300 V V V V V V V V nA nA nA 4.5V VDD 5.5V 1.8V VDD 4.5V 2.0V VDD 5.5V 2.7V VDD 5.5V with Schmitt Trigger buffer with I2CTM levels with SMBus levels 0.8 VDD 0.7 VDD 2.1 0.8 VDD 0.7 VDD 0.9 VDD -- D042 D043A D043B IIL D060 MCLR OSC1 (HS mode) OSC1 (RC mode) Input Leakage Current(2) I/O ports (Note 1) VSS VPIN VDD, Pin at highimpedance @ 85C 125C VSS VPIN VDD @ 85C VDD = 3.3V, VPIN = VSS VDD = 5.0V, VPIN = VSS IOL = 8mA, VDD = 5V IOL = 6mA, VDD = 3.3V IOL = 1.8mA, VDD = 1.8V IOH = 3.5mA, VDD = 5V IOH = 3mA, VDD = 3.3V IOH = 1mA, VDD = 1.8V D061 IPUR D070* VOL D080 MCLR(3) Weak Pull-up Current -- 25 25 50 100 140 A Output Low Voltage(4) I/O ports -- -- 0.6 V VOH D090 Output High Voltage(4) I/O ports VDD - 0.7 -- -- V Legend: * Note 1: 2: 3: 4: TBD = To Be Determined These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLKIN pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended to use an external clock in RC mode. Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input voltages. Including OSC2 in CLKOUT mode. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 391 PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.4 DC Characteristics: PIC16F/LF1946/47-I/E (Continued) DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. D101* Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial -40C TA +125C for extended Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions Sym. Characteristic Capacitive Loading Specs on Output Pins COSC2 OSC2 pin -- -- 15 pF In XT, HS and LP modes when external clock is used to drive OSC1 D101A* CIO D102 D102A Legend: All I/O pins VCAP Capacitor Charging Charging current Source/sink capability when charging complete -- -- -- -- 200 0.0 50 -- -- pF A mA * Note 1: 2: 3: 4: TBD = To Be Determined These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLKIN pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended to use an external clock in RC mode. Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input voltages. Including OSC2 in CLKOUT mode. DS41414A-page 392 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.5 Memory Programming Requirements Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +125C Characteristic Program Memory Programming Specifications D110 D111 D112 D113 VPEW DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Sym. Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions VIHH IDDP Voltage on MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin Supply Current during Programming VDD for Bulk Erase VDD for Write or Row Erase 8.0 -- 2.7 VDD min. -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 9.0 10 VDD max. VDD max. 1.0 5.0 V mA V V mA mA (Note 3, Note 4) D114 D115 D116 D117 D118 D119 IPPPGM Current on MCLR/VPP during Erase/ Write IDDPGM Current on VDD during Erase/Write Data EEPROM Memory ED VDRW TDEW Byte Endurance VDD for Read/Write Erase/Write Cycle Time 100K VDD min. -- -- -- VDD max. E/W V ms Year -40C to +85C -- 20 4.0 -- 5.0 -- TRETD Characteristic Retention -40C to +55C Provided no other specifications are violated -40C to +85C D120 TREF Number of Total Erase/Write Cycles before Refresh(2) Program Flash Memory Cell Endurance VDD for Read Self-timed Write Cycle Time 1M 10M -- E/W D121 D122 D123 D124 EP VPR TIW 10K VDD min. -- -- -- VDD max. E/W V ms Year -40C to +85C (Note 1) -- 40 2 -- 2.5 -- TRETD Characteristic Retention Provided no other specifications are violated Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: Self-write and Block Erase. 2: Refer to Section 11.2 "Using the Data EEPROM" for a more detailed discussion on data EEPROM endurance. 3: Required only if single-supply programming is disabled. 4: The MPLAB ICD 2 does not support variable VPP output. Circuitry to limit the ICD 2 VPP voltage must be placed between the ICD 2 and target system when programming or debugging with the ICD 2. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 393 PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.6 Thermal Considerations Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +125C Param No. TH01 TH02 TH03 TH04 TH05 TH06 TH07 Sym. JA JC TJMAX PD PI/O PDER Characteristic Thermal Resistance Junction to Ambient Thermal Resistance Junction to Case Maximum Junction Temperature Power Dissipation I/O Power Dissipation Derated Power Typ. 48.3 28 26.1 0.24 150 -- -- -- -- Units C/W C/W C/W C/W C W W W W PD = PINTERNAL + PI/O PINTERNAL = IDD x VDD(1) PI/O = (IOL * VOL) + (IOH * (VDD - VOH)) PDER = PDMAX (TJ - TA)/JA(2) Conditions 64-pin TQFP package 64-pin QFN package 64-pin TQFP package 64-pin QFN package PINTERNAL Internal Power Dissipation Note 1: IDD is current to run the chip alone without driving any load on the output pins. 2: TA = Ambient Temperature 3: TJ = Junction Temperature DS41414A-page 394 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.7 Timing Parameter Symbology The timing parameter symbols have been created with one of the following formats: 1. TppS2ppS 2. TppS T F Frequency Lowercase letters (pp) and their meanings: pp cc CCP1 ck CLKOUT cs CS di SDI do SDO dt Data in io I/O PORT mc MCLR Uppercase letters and their meanings: S F Fall H High I Invalid (High-impedance) L Low T Time osc rd rw sc ss t0 t1 wr OSC1 RD RD or WR SCK SS T0CKI T1CKI WR P R V Z Period Rise Valid High-impedance FIGURE 29-5: LOAD CONDITIONS Load Condition Pin CL VSS Legend: CL = 50 pF for all pins, 15 pF for OSC2 output 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 395 PIC16F/LF1946/47 29.8 AC Characteristics: PIC16F/LF1946/47-I/E CLOCK TIMING Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 FIGURE 29-6: OSC1/CLKIN OS02 OS03 OSC2/CLKOUT (LP,XT,HS Modes) OS04 OS04 OSC2/CLKOUT (CLKOUT Mode) TABLE 29-1: CLOCK OSCILLATOR TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +125C Param No. OS01 Sym. FOSC Characteristic External CLKIN Frequency(1) Min. DC DC DC Oscillator Frequency(1) -- 0.1 1 1 DC OS02 TOSC External CLKIN Period(1) 27 250 50 31.25 Oscillator Period(1) -- 250 50 250 OS03 OS04* TCY TosH, TosL TosR, TosF Instruction Cycle Time(1) External CLKIN High, External CLKIN Low External CLKIN Rise, External CLKIN Fall 200 2 100 20 OS05* 0 0 0 * Typ -- -- -- 32.768 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 30.5 -- -- -- TCY -- -- -- -- -- -- Max. 0.5 4 32 -- 4 4 20 4 -- 10,000 1,000 -- DC -- -- -- Units MHz MHz MHz kHz MHz MHz MHz MHz s ns ns ns s ns ns ns ns s ns ns ns ns ns Conditions EC Oscillator mode (low) EC Oscillator mode (medium) EC Oscillator mode (high) LP Oscillator mode XT Oscillator mode HS Oscillator mode, VDD 2.5V HS Oscillator mode, VDD > 2.5V RC Oscillator mode LP Oscillator mode XT Oscillator mode HS Oscillator mode EC Oscillator mode LP Oscillator mode XT Oscillator mode HS Oscillator mode RC Oscillator mode TCY = 4/FOSC LP oscillator XT oscillator HS oscillator LP oscillator XT oscillator HS oscillator These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at "min" values with an external clock applied to OSC1 pin. When an external clock input is used, the "max" cycle time limit is "DC" (no clock) for all devices. DS41414A-page 396 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-2: OSCILLATOR PARAMETERS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40C TA +125C Param No. OS08 Sym. HFOSC Characteristic Internal Calibrated HFINTOSC Frequency(2) Freq. Tolerance 2% 2.5 5% OS08A MFOSC Internal Calibrated MFINTOSC Frequency(2) 2% 2.5% 5% OS10* TIOSC ST HFINTOSC Wake-up from Sleep Start-up Time MFINTOSC Wake-up from Sleep Start-up Time -- -- Min. -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ 16.0 16.0 16.0 500 500 500 5 20 Max. -- -- -- -- -- -- 8 30 Units MHz MHz MHz kHz kHz kHz s s Conditions 0C TA +60C, VDD 2.5V 60C TA +85C, VDD 2.5V -40C TA +125C 0C TA +60C, VDD 2.5V 60C TA +85C, VDD 2.5V -40C TA +125C These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at "min" values with an external clock applied to the OSC1 pin. When an external clock input is used, the "max" cycle time limit is "DC" (no clock) for all devices. 2: To ensure these oscillator frequency tolerances, VDD and VSS must be capacitively decoupled as close to the device as possible. 0.1 F and 0.01 F values in parallel are recommended. 3: By design. * TABLE 29-3: Param No. F10 F11 F12 F13* Sym. PLL CLOCK TIMING SPECIFICATIONS (VDD = 2.7V TO 5.5V) Characteristic Min. 4 16 -- -0.25% Typ -- -- -- -- Max. 8 32 2 +0.25% Units MHz MHz ms % Conditions FOSC Oscillator Frequency Range FSYS TRC CLK On-Chip VCO System Frequency PLL Start-up Time (Lock Time) CLKOUT Stability (Jitter) * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 5V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 397 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 29-7: Cycle CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING Write Q4 Fetch Q1 Read Q2 Execute Q3 FOSC OS11 CLKOUT OS19 OS13 I/O pin (Input) OS15 I/O pin (Output) Old Value OS18, OS19 OS14 New Value OS17 OS20 OS21 OS16 OS18 OS12 DS41414A-page 398 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-4: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING PARAMETERS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40C TA +125C Param No. OS11 OS12 OS13 OS14 OS15 OS16 OS17 OS18 OS19 Sym. TosH2ckL TckL2ioV TioV2ckH TosH2ioV TosH2ioI TioV2osH TioR TioF Characteristic FOSC to CLKOUT (1) (1) (1) Min. -- -- -- TOSC + 200 ns -- 50 20 -- -- -- -- 25 25 Typ -- -- -- -- 50 -- -- 40 15 28 15 -- -- Max. 70 72 20 -- 70* -- -- 72 32 55 30 -- -- Units ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Conditions VDD = 3.3-5.0V VDD = 3.3-5.0V TosH2ckH FOSC to CLKOUT CLKOUT to Port out valid Port input valid before CLKOUT(1) Fosc (Q1 cycle) to Port out valid Fosc (Q2 cycle) to Port input invalid (I/O in hold time) Port input valid to Fosc(Q2 cycle) (I/O in setup time) Port output rise time(2) Port output fall time(2) VDD = 3.3-5.0V VDD = 3.3-5.0V VDD = 1.8V VDD = 3.3-5.0V VDD = 1.8V VDD = 3.3-5.0V INT pin input high or low time Interrupt-on-change new input level time * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. Note 1: Measurements are taken in RC mode where CLKOUT output is 4 x TOSC. 2: Includes OSC2 in CLKOUT mode. OS20* Tinp OS21* Tioc FIGURE 29-8: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND POWER-UP TIMER TIMING VDD MCLR Internal POR PWRT Time-out OSC Start-Up Time Internal Reset(1) Watchdog Timer Reset(1) 34 I/O pins Note 1: Asserted low. 31 34 33 32 30 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 399 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 29-9: VDD VBOR VBOR and VHYST BROWN-OUT RESET TIMING AND CHARACTERISTICS (Device in Brown-out Reset) (Device not in Brown-out Reset) 37 Reset (due to BOR) 33(1) Note 1: 64 ms delay only if PWRTE bit in the Configuration Word register is programmed to `0'. 2 ms delay if PWRTE = 0 and VREGEN = 1. DS41414A-page 400 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-5: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER AND BROWN-OUT RESET PARAMETERS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40C TA +125C Param No. 30 31 32 33* 34* 35 36* 37* * Note 1: Sym. TMCL Characteristic MCLR Pulse Width (low) Min. 2 5 10 -- 40 -- 2.38 1.80 0 1 Typ -- -- 18 1024 65 -- 2.5 1.9 25 3 Max. -- -- 27 -- 140 2.0 2.73 2.11 50 5 Units s s ms Conditions VDD = 3.3-5V, -40C to +85C VDD = 3.3-5V VDD = 3.3V-5V TWDTLP Low-Power Watchdog Timer Time-out Period (No Prescaler) TOST TPWRT TIOZ VBOR VHYST Oscillator Start-up Timer Period(1), (2) Power-up Timer Period, PWRTE = 0 I/O high-impedance from MCLR Low or Watchdog Timer Reset Brown-out Reset Voltage Brown-out Reset Hysteresis Tosc (Note 3) ms s V mV s BORV=2.5V BORV=1.9V -40C to +85C VDD VBOR TBORDC Brown-out Reset DC Response Time 2: 3: 4: These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at "min" values with an external clock applied to the OSC1 pin. When an external clock input is used, the "max" cycle time limit is "DC" (no clock) for all devices. By design. Period of the slower clock. To ensure these voltage tolerances, VDD and VSS must be capacitively decoupled as close to the device as possible. 0.1 F and 0.01 F values in parallel are recommended. FIGURE 29-10: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMINGS T0CKI 40 42 41 T1CKI 45 47 TMR0 or TMR1 46 49 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 401 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-6: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40C TA +125C Param No. 40* 41* 42* Sym. TT0H TT0L TT0P Characteristic T0CKI High Pulse Width T0CKI Low Pulse Width T0CKI Period No Prescaler With Prescaler No Prescaler With Prescaler Min. 0.5 TCY + 20 10 0.5 TCY + 20 10 Greater of: 20 or TCY + 40 N 0.5 TCY + 20 15 30 0.5 TCY + 20 15 30 Greater of: 30 or TCY + 40 N 60 32.4 2 TOSC Typ -- -- -- -- -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- Units ns ns ns ns ns N = prescale value (2, 4, ..., 256) Conditions 45* TT1H T1CKI High Synchronous, No Prescaler Time Synchronous, with Prescaler Asynchronous T1CKI Low Time Synchronous, No Prescaler Synchronous, with Prescaler Asynchronous -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ns ns ns ns ns ns ns N = prescale value (1, 2, 4, 8) 46* TT1L 47* TT1P T1CKI Input Synchronous Period Asynchronous -- 32.768 -- -- 33.1 7 TOSC ns kHz -- Timers in Sync mode 48 49* * FT1 Timer1 Oscillator Input Frequency Range (oscillator enabled by setting bit T1OSCEN) TCKEZTMR1 Delay from External Clock Edge to Timer Increment These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. FIGURE 29-11: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM TIMINGS (CCP) CCPx (Capture mode) CC01 CC03 Note: Refer to Figure 29-5 for load conditions. CC02 TABLE 29-7: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM REQUIREMENTS (CCP) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40C TA +125C Param Sym. No. CC01* TccL CC02* TccH CC03* TccP * Characteristic CCPx Input Low Time CCPx Input High Time CCPx Input Period No Prescaler With Prescaler No Prescaler With Prescaler Min. 0.5TCY + 20 20 0.5TCY + 20 20 3TCY + 40 N Typ -- -- -- -- -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- Units ns ns ns ns ns N = prescale value (1, 4 or 16) Conditions These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. DS41414A-page 402 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-8: PIC16F/LF1946/47 A/D CONVERTER (ADC) CHARACTERISTICS: Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +125C Param Sym. No. AD01 AD02 AD03 AD04 AD05 AD06 AD07 AD08 * Note 1: 2: 3: 4: NR EIL EDL Characteristic Resolution Integral Error Differential Error Min. -- -- -- -- -- 1.8 VSS -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max. 10 1.7 1 2 1.5 VDD VREF 50 Units bit LSb VREF = 3.0V LSb No missing codes VREF = 3.0V LSb VREF = 3.0V LSb VREF = 3.0V V V Conditions EOFF Offset Error EGN VAIN ZAIN Gain Error Full-Scale Range Recommended Impedance of Analog Voltage Source VREF Reference Voltage(3) k Can go higher if external 0.01F capacitor is present on input pin. These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Total Absolute Error includes integral, differential, offset and gain errors. The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage and has no missing codes. ADC VREF is from external VREF, VDD pin or FVREF, whichever is selected as reference input. When ADC is off, it will not consume any current other than leakage current. The power-down current specification includes any such leakage from the ADC module. TABLE 29-9: PIC16F/LF1946/47 A/D CONVERSION REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +125C Param No. Sym. Characteristic A/D Clock Period A/D Internal RC Oscillator Period AD131 TCNV Conversion Time (not including Acquisition Time)(1) Acquisition Time Min. 1.0 1.0 -- -- Typ -- 1.6 11 5.0 Max. 9.0 6.0 -- -- Units s s TAD s TOSC-based ADCS<1:0> = 11 (ADRC mode) Set GO/DONE bit to conversion complete Conditions AD130* TAD AD132* TACQ * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: The ADRES register may be read on the following TCY cycle. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 403 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 29-12: PIC16F/LF1946/47 A/D CONVERSION TIMING (NORMAL MODE) 1 TCY AD131 AD130 A/D CLK A/D Data ADRES ADIF GO Sample AD132 Sampling Stopped 7 6 OLD_DATA 5 4 3 2 1 0 NEW_DATA 1 TCY DONE BSF ADCON0, GO AD134 Q4 (TOSC/2(1)) Note 1: If the A/D clock source is selected as RC, a time of TCY is added before the A/D clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed. FIGURE 29-13: PIC16F/LF1946/47 A/D CONVERSION TIMING (SLEEP MODE) BSF ADCON0, GO AD134 Q4 A/D CLK A/D Data ADRES ADIF GO Sample AD132 Sampling Stopped 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NEW_DATA 1 TCY DONE (TOSC/2 + TCY(1)) AD131 AD130 1 TCY OLD_DATA Note 1: If the A/D clock source is selected as RC, a time of TCY is added before the A/D clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed. DS41414A-page 404 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-10: COMPARATOR SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: 1.8V < VDD < 5.5V, -40C < TA < +125C (unless otherwise stated). Param No. CM01 CM02 CM03 CM04 CM05 CM06 * Note 1: Sym. VIOFF VICM CMRR TRESP TMC2OV Characteristics Input Offset Voltage Input Common Mode Voltage Common Mode Rejection Ratio Response Time Comparator Mode Change to Output Valid* Min. -- 0 -- -- -- -- Typ. 7.5 -- 50 150 -- 65 Max. 60 VDD -- 400 10 -- Units mV V dB ns s mV Note 1 Comments CHYSTER Comparator Hysteresis These parameters are characterized but not tested. Response time measured with one comparator input at VDD/2, while the other input transitions from VSS to VDD. TABLE 29-11: DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER (DAC) SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: 1.8V < VDD < 5.5V, -40C < TA < +125C (unless otherwise stated). Param No. DAC01* DAC02* DAC03* DAC04* Sym. CLSB CACC CR CST Characteristics Step Size(2) Absolute Accuracy Unit Resistor Value (R) Settling Time(1) Min. -- -- -- -- Typ. VDD/32 -- TBD -- Max. -- 1/2 -- 10 Units V LSb s Comments * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: Settling time measured while DACR<4:0> transitions from `0000' to `1111'. FIGURE 29-14: USART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING CK US121 DT US120 Note: Refer to Figure 29-5 for load conditions. US122 US121 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 405 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-12: USART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40C TA +125C Param. No. Symbol Characteristic 3.0-5.5V 1.8-5.5V 3.0-5.5V 1.8-5.5V 3.0-5.5V 1.8-5.5V Min. -- -- -- -- -- -- Max. 80 100 45 50 45 50 Units ns ns ns ns ns ns Conditions US120 TCKH2DTV SYNC XMIT (Master and Slave) Clock high to data-out valid US121 TCKRF US122 TDTRF Clock out rise time and fall time (Master mode) Data-out rise time and fall time FIGURE 29-15: CK DT USART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING US125 US126 Note: Refer to Figure 29-5 for load conditions. TABLE 29-13: USART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature -40C TA +125C Param. No. Symbol Characteristic Min. 10 15 Max. -- -- Units ns ns Conditions US125 TDTV2CKL SYNC RCV (Master and Slave) Data-hold before CK (DT hold time) US126 TCKL2DTL Data-hold after CK (DT hold time) DS41414A-page 406 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 29-16: SS SP70 SCK (CKP = 0) SP71 SP72 SP78 SCK (CKP = 1) SP79 SP80 SDO MSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 SP75, SP76 SDI MSb In SP74 SP73 Note: Refer to Figure 29-5 for load conditions. bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In LSb SP78 SP79 SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 0, SMP = 0) FIGURE 29-17: SS SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 1, SMP = 1) SP81 SCK (CKP = 0) SP71 SP73 SCK (CKP = 1) SP80 SP78 LSb SP72 SP79 SDO MSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 SP75, SP76 SDI MSb In SP74 bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In Note: Refer to Figure 29-5 for load conditions. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 407 PIC16F/LF1946/47 FIGURE 29-18: SS SP70 SCK (CKP = 0) SP71 SP72 SP78 SCK (CKP = 1) SP79 SP80 SDO MSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 SP75, SP76 SDI MSb In SP74 SP73 Note: Refer to Figure 29-5 for load conditions. bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In LSb SP77 SP78 SP79 SP83 SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 0) FIGURE 29-19: SS SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 1) SP82 SP70 SCK (CKP = 0) SP71 SCK (CKP = 1) SP80 SP72 SP83 SDO MSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 SP75, SP76 LSb SP77 SDI MSb In SP74 bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In Note: Refer to Figure 29-5 for load conditions. DS41414A-page 408 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-14: SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS Param No. Symbol Characteristic Min. TCY TCY + 20 TCY + 20 100 100 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 3.0-5.5V 1.8-5.5V -- -- Tcy -- 1.5TCY + 40 3.0-5.5V 1.8-5.5V Typ -- -- -- -- -- 10 25 10 -- 10 25 10 -- -- -- -- -- Max. Units Conditions -- -- -- -- -- 25 50 25 50 25 50 25 50 145 -- 50 -- ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns SP70* TSSL2SCH, SS to SCK or SCK input TSSL2SCL SP71* TSCH SP72* TSCL SCK input high time (Slave mode) SCK input low time (Slave mode) SP73* TDIV2SCH, Setup time of SDI data input to SCK edge TDIV2SCL SP74* TSCH2DIL, TSCL2DIL SP75* TDOR SP76* TDOF SP77* TSSH2DOZ SP78* TSCR SP79* TSCF Hold time of SDI data input to SCK edge SDO data output rise time SDO data output fall time SS to SDO output high-impedance SCK output rise time (Master mode) SCK output fall time (Master mode) 3.0-5.5V 1.8-5.5V SP80* TSCH2DOV, SDO data output valid after TSCL2DOV SCK edge SP81* TDOV2SCH, SDO data output setup to SCK edge TDOV2SCL SP82* TSSL2DOV SDO data output valid after SS edge SP83* TSCH2SSH, SS after SCK edge TSCL2SSH * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. FIGURE 29-20: I2CTM BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING SCL SP91 SP90 SDA SP92 SP93 Start Condition Note: Refer to Figure 29-5 for load conditions. Stop Condition 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 409 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-15: I2CTM BUS START/STOP BITS REQUIREMENTS Param No. SP90* SP91* SP92* SP93 * Symbol TSU:STA THD:STA TSU:STO Characteristic Start condition Setup time Start condition Hold time Stop condition Setup time THD:STO Stop condition Hold time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode Min. 4700 600 4000 600 4700 600 4000 600 Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max. Units -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ns ns ns ns Conditions Only relevant for Repeated Start condition After this period, the first clock pulse is generated These parameters are characterized but not tested. FIGURE 29-21: I2CTM BUS DATA TIMING SP103 SP100 SP101 SP102 SCL SP90 SP91 SP106 SP107 SP92 SP110 SDA In SP109 SDA Out Note: Refer to Figure 29-5 for load conditions. SP109 DS41414A-page 410 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-16: I2CTM BUS DATA REQUIREMENTS Param. No. Symbol Characteristic Clock high time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode SSP module SP101* TLOW Clock low time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode SSP module SP102* TR SDA and SCL rise time SDA and SCL fall time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode Min. 4.0 0.6 1.5TCY 4.7 1.3 1.5TCY -- 20 + 0.1CB -- 20 + 0.1CB 0 0 250 100 -- -- 4.7 1.3 -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- -- 1000 300 250 250 -- 0.9 -- -- 3500 -- -- -- 400 ns ns ns ns ns s ns ns ns ns s s pF Time the bus must be free before a new transmission can start (Note 1) (Note 2) CB is specified to be from 10-400 pF CB is specified to be from 10-400 pF s s Device must operate at a minimum of 1.5 MHz Device must operate at a minimum of 10 MHz Units s s Conditions Device must operate at a minimum of 1.5 MHz Device must operate at a minimum of 10 MHz SP100* THIGH SP103* TF SP106* THD:DAT SP107* TSU:DAT SP109* TAA SP110* TBUF Data input hold time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode Data input setup time Output valid from clock Bus free time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode SP111 * Note 1: 2: CB Bus capacitive loading These parameters are characterized but not tested. As a transmitter, the device must provide this internal minimum delay time to bridge the undefined region (min. 300 ns) of the falling edge of SCL to avoid unintended generation of Start or Stop conditions. A Fast mode (400 kHz) I2CTM bus device can be used in a Standard mode (100 kHz) I2C bus system, but the requirement TSU:DAT 250 ns must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the low period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the low period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line TR max. + TSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard mode I2C bus specification), before the SCL line is released. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 411 PIC16F/LF1946/47 TABLE 29-17: CAP SENSE OSCILLATOR SPECIFICATIONS Param. No. CS01 Symbol ISRC Characteristic Current Source High Medium Low CS02 ISNK Current Sink High Medium Low CS03 CS04 CS05 VCTH VCTL Cap Threshold Cap Threshold High Medium Low Min. -3 -0.8 -0.1 2.5 0.6 0.1 -- -- 350 250 175 Typ -8 -1.5 -0.3 7.5 1.5 0.25 0.8 0.4 525 375 300 Max. -15 -3 -0.4 14 2.9 0.6 -- -- 725 500 \425 Units A A A A A A mV mV mV mV mV Conditions VCHYST Cap Hysteresis (VCTH-VCTL) * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 3.0V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. FIGURE 29-22: CAP SENSE OSCILLATOR VCTH VCTL ISRC Enabled ISNK Enabled DS41414A-page 412 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 30.0 DC AND AC CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHS AND CHARTS Graphs and charts are not available at this time. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 413 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 414 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 31.0 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT 31.1 The PIC(R) microcontrollers are supported with a full range of hardware and software development tools: * Integrated Development Environment - MPLAB(R) IDE Software * Assemblers/Compilers/Linkers - MPASMTM Assembler - MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers - MPLINKTM Object Linker/ MPLIBTM Object Librarian - MPLAB ASM30 Assembler/Linker/Library * Simulators - MPLAB SIM Software Simulator * Emulators - MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator - MPLAB REAL ICETM In-Circuit Emulator * In-Circuit Debugger - MPLAB ICD 2 * Device Programmers - PICSTART(R) Plus Development Programmer - MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer - PICkitTM 2 Development Programmer * Low-Cost Demonstration and Development Boards and Evaluation Kits MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software The MPLAB IDE software brings an ease of software development previously unseen in the 8/16-bit microcontroller market. The MPLAB IDE is a Windows(R) operating system-based application that contains: * A single graphical interface to all debugging tools - Simulator - Programmer (sold separately) - Emulator (sold separately) - In-Circuit Debugger (sold separately) * A full-featured editor with color-coded context * A multiple project manager * Customizable data windows with direct edit of contents * High-level source code debugging * Visual device initializer for easy register initialization * Mouse over variable inspection * Drag and drop variables from source to watch windows * Extensive on-line help * Integration of select third party tools, such as HI-TECH Software C Compilers and IAR C Compilers The MPLAB IDE allows you to: * Edit your source files (either assembly or C) * One touch assemble (or compile) and download to PIC MCU emulator and simulator tools (automatically updates all project information) * Debug using: - Source files (assembly or C) - Mixed assembly and C - Machine code MPLAB IDE supports multiple debugging tools in a single development paradigm, from the cost-effective simulators, through low-cost in-circuit debuggers, to full-featured emulators. This eliminates the learning curve when upgrading to tools with increased flexibility and power. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 415 PIC16F/LF1946/47 31.2 MPASM Assembler 31.5 The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal macro assembler for all PIC MCUs. The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel(R) standard HEX files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines and generated machine code and COFF files for debugging. The MPASM Assembler features include: * Integration into MPLAB IDE projects * User-defined macros to streamline assembly code * Conditional assembly for multi-purpose source files * Directives that allow complete control over the assembly process MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker and Librarian MPLAB ASM30 Assembler produces relocatable machine code from symbolic assembly language for dsPIC30F devices. MPLAB C30 C Compiler uses the assembler to produce its object file. The assembler generates relocatable object files that can then be archived or linked with other relocatable object files and archives to create an executable file. Notable features of the assembler include: * * * * * * Support for the entire dsPIC30F instruction set Support for fixed-point and floating-point data Command line interface Rich directive set Flexible macro language MPLAB IDE compatibility 31.6 MPLAB SIM Software Simulator 31.3 MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers The MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 Code Development Systems are complete ANSI C compilers for Microchip's PIC18 and PIC24 families of microcontrollers and the dsPIC30 and dsPIC33 family of digital signal controllers. These compilers provide powerful integration capabilities, superior code optimization and ease of use not found with other compilers. For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE debugger. The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator allows code development in a PC-hosted environment by simulating the PIC MCUs and dsPIC(R) DSCs on an instruction level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from a comprehensive stimulus controller. Registers can be logged to files for further run-time analysis. The trace buffer and logic analyzer display extend the power of the simulator to record and track program execution, actions on I/O, most peripherals and internal registers. The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator fully supports symbolic debugging using the MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers, and the MPASM and MPLAB ASM30 Assemblers. The software simulator offers the flexibility to develop and debug code outside of the hardware laboratory environment, making it an excellent, economical software development tool. 31.4 MPLINK Object Linker/ MPLIB Object Librarian The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable objects created by the MPASM Assembler and the MPLAB C18 C Compiler. It can link relocatable objects from precompiled libraries, using directives from a linker script. The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and modification of library files of precompiled code. When a routine from a library is called from a source file, only the modules that contain that routine will be linked in with the application. This allows large libraries to be used efficiently in many different applications. The object linker/library features include: * Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many smaller files * Enhanced code maintainability by grouping related modules together * Flexible creation of libraries with easy module listing, replacement, deletion and extraction DS41414A-page 416 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 31.7 MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance In-Circuit Emulator 31.9 MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger Microchip's In-Circuit Debugger, MPLAB ICD 2, is a powerful, low-cost, run-time development tool, connecting to the host PC via an RS-232 or high-speed USB interface. This tool is based on the Flash PIC MCUs and can be used to develop for these and other PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs. The MPLAB ICD 2 utilizes the in-circuit debugging capability built into the Flash devices. This feature, along with Microchip's In-Circuit Serial ProgrammingTM (ICSPTM) protocol, offers costeffective, in-circuit Flash debugging from the graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment. This enables a designer to develop and debug source code by setting breakpoints, single stepping and watching variables, and CPU status and peripheral registers. Running at full speed enables testing hardware and applications in real time. MPLAB ICD 2 also serves as a development programmer for selected PIC devices. The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator is intended to provide the product development engineer with a complete microcontroller design tool set for PIC microcontrollers. Software control of the MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator is advanced by the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment, which allows editing, building, downloading and source debugging from a single environment. The MPLAB ICE 2000 is a full-featured emulator system with enhanced trace, trigger and data monitoring features. Interchangeable processor modules allow the system to be easily reconfigured for emulation of different processors. The architecture of the MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator allows expansion to support new PIC microcontrollers. The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator system has been designed as a real-time emulation system with advanced features that are typically found on more expensive development tools. The PC platform and Microsoft(R) Windows(R) 32-bit operating system were chosen to best make these features available in a simple, unified application. 31.10 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal, CE compliant device programmer with programmable voltage verification at VDDMIN and VDDMAX for maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display (128 x 64) for menus and error messages and a modular, detachable socket assembly to support various package types. The ICSPTM cable assembly is included as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program PIC devices without a PC connection. It can also set code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3 connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable. The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and optimized algorithms for quick programming of large memory devices and incorporates an SD/MMC card for file storage and secure data applications. 31.8 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System is Microchip's next generation high-speed emulator for Microchip Flash DSC and MCU devices. It debugs and programs PIC(R) Flash MCUs and dsPIC(R) Flash DSCs with the easy-to-use, powerful graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE), included with each kit. The MPLAB REAL ICE probe is connected to the design engineer's PC using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target with either a connector compatible with the popular MPLAB ICD 2 system (RJ11) or with the new high-speed, noise tolerant, LowVoltage Differential Signal (LVDS) interconnection (CAT5). MPLAB REAL ICE is field upgradeable through future firmware downloads in MPLAB IDE. In upcoming releases of MPLAB IDE, new devices will be supported, and new features will be added, such as software breakpoints and assembly code trace. MPLAB REAL ICE offers significant advantages over competitive emulators including low-cost, full-speed emulation, real-time variable watches, trace analysis, complex breakpoints, a ruggedized probe interface and long (up to three meters) interconnection cables. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 417 PIC16F/LF1946/47 31.11 PICSTART Plus Development Programmer The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is an easy-to-use, low-cost, prototype programmer. It connects to the PC via a COM (RS-232) port. MPLAB Integrated Development Environment software makes using the programmer simple and efficient. The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer supports most PIC devices in DIP packages up to 40 pins. Larger pin count devices, such as the PIC16C92X and PIC17C76X, may be supported with an adapter socket. The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is CE compliant. 31.13 Demonstration, Development and Evaluation Boards A wide variety of demonstration, development and evaluation boards for various PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs allows quick application development on fully functional systems. Most boards include prototyping areas for adding custom circuitry and provide application firmware and source code for examination and modification. The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs, temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232 interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional EEPROM memory. The demonstration and development boards can be used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom circuits and for learning about various microcontroller applications. In addition to the PICDEMTM and dsPICDEMTM demonstration/development board series of circuits, Microchip has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software for analog filter design, KEELOQ(R) security ICs, CAN, IrDA(R), PowerSmart battery management, SEEVAL(R) evaluation system, Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate sensing, plus many more. Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com) for the complete list of demonstration, development and evaluation kits. 31.12 PICkit 2 Development Programmer The PICkitTM 2 Development Programmer is a low-cost programmer and selected Flash device debugger with an easy-to-use interface for programming many of Microchip's baseline, mid-range and PIC18F families of Flash memory microcontrollers. The PICkit 2 Starter Kit includes a prototyping development board, twelve sequential lessons, software and HI-TECH's PICCTM Lite C compiler, and is designed to help get up to speed quickly using PIC(R) microcontrollers. The kit provides everything needed to program, evaluate and develop applications using Microchip's powerful, mid-range Flash memory family of microcontrollers. DS41414A-page 418 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 32.0 32.1 PACKAGING INFORMATION Package Marking Information 64-Lead QFN (9x9x1mm) Example XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN PIC16F1947 -I/PT 0610017 64-Lead TQFP (10x10x1mm) Example XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN PIC16F1946 -I/PT 0610017 Legend: XX...X Y YY WW NNN e3 * Note: Customer-specific information Year code (last digit of calendar year) Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year) Week code (week of January 1 is week `01') Alphanumeric traceability code Pb-free JEDEC designator for Matte Tin (Sn) This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 ) can be found on the outer packaging for this package. In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available characters for customer-specific information. * Standard PICmicro(R) device marking consists of Microchip part number, year code, week code and traceability code. For PICmicro device marking beyond this, certain price adders apply. Please check with your Microchip Sales Office. For QTP devices, any special marking adders are included in QTP price. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 419 PIC16F/LF1946/47 32.2 Package Details The following sections give the technical details of the packages. Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging DS41414A-page 420 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 421 PIC16F/LF1946/47 /HDG 3ODVWLF 7KLQ 4XDG )ODWSDFN 37 [[ PP %RG\ PP >74)3@ 1RWH )RU WKH PRVW FXUUHQW SDFNDJH GUDZLQJV SOHDVH VHH WKH 0LFURFKLS 3DFNDJLQJ 6SHFLILFDWLRQ ORFDWHG DW KWWSZZZPLFURFKLSFRPSDFNDJLQJ D D1 E e E1 N b NOTE 1 123 NOTE 2 A c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page 422 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 /HDG 3ODVWLF 7KLQ 4XDG )ODWSDFN 37 [[ PP %RG\ PP >74)3@ 1RWH )RU WKH PRVW FXUUHQW SDFNDJH GUDZLQJV SOHDVH VHH WKH 0LFURFKLS 3DFNDJLQJ 6SHFLILFDWLRQ ORFDWHG DW KWWSZZZPLFURFKLSFRPSDFNDJLQJ 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 423 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 424 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 APPENDIX A: Revision A Original release (3/2010). DATA SHEET REVISION HISTORY APPENDIX B: MIGRATING FROM OTHER PIC(R) DEVICES This shows a comparison of features in the migration from the PIC16F917 device to the PIC16F1946 family of devices. B.1 PIC16F917 to PIC16F1946 FEATURE COMPARISON PIC16F917 20 MHz 8K 368 10-bit 2/1 4 Y RB<7:0> RB<7:4> 2 1/0 Y N 30 kHz 8 MHz Y N 2/0 N 0/1 Y PIC16F1946 32 MHz 8K 512 10-bit 4/1 8 Y RB<7:0> RB<7:0> 2 0/2 Y Y 31 kHz 16 MHz Y Y 2/3 Y 2/0 Y Feature TABLE B-1: Max. Operating Speed Max. Program Memory (Words) Max. SRAM (Bytes) A/D Resolution Timers (8/16-bit) Oscillator Modes Brown-out Reset Internal Pull-ups Interrupt-on-change Comparator AUSART/EUSART Extended WDT Software Control Option of WDT/BOR INTOSC Frequencies Clock Switching Capacitive Sensing CCP/ECCP Enhanced PIC16 CPU MSSP/SSP LCD 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 425 PIC16F/LF1946/47 NOTES: DS41414A-page 426 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 INDEX A A/D Specifications............................................................ 403 Absolute Maximum Ratings (PIC16F/LF1946/47) ............ 381 AC Characteristics Industrial and Extended ............................................ 396 Load Conditions ........................................................ 395 ACKSTAT ......................................................................... 270 ACKSTAT Status Flag ...................................................... 270 ADC .................................................................................. 153 Acquisition Requirements ......................................... 163 Associated registers.................................................. 165 Block Diagram........................................................... 153 Calculating Acquisition Time..................................... 163 Channel Selection..................................................... 154 Configuration............................................................. 154 Configuring Interrupt ................................................. 158 Conversion Clock...................................................... 154 Conversion Procedure .............................................. 158 Internal Sampling Switch (RSS) Impedance.............. 163 Interrupts................................................................... 156 Operation .................................................................. 157 Operation During Sleep ............................................ 157 Port Configuration ..................................................... 154 Reference Voltage (VREF)......................................... 154 Source Impedance.................................................... 163 Special Event Trigger................................................ 157 Starting an A/D Conversion ...................................... 156 ADCON0 Register....................................................... 32, 159 ADCON1 Register....................................................... 32, 160 ADDFSR ........................................................................... 371 ADDWFC .......................................................................... 371 ADRESH Register............................................................... 32 ADRESH Register (ADFM = 0) ......................................... 161 ADRESH Register (ADFM = 1) ......................................... 162 ADRESL Register (ADFM = 0).......................................... 161 ADRESL Register (ADFM = 1).......................................... 162 Alternate Pin Function....................................................... 121 Analog-to-Digital Converter. See ADC ANSELA Register ............................................................. 125 ANSELE Register ............................................................. 137 ANSELF Register.............................................................. 141 APFCON Register............................................................. 122 Assembler MPASM Assembler................................................... 416 EUSART Receive ..................................................... 290 EUSART Transmit .................................................... 289 External RC Mode ...................................................... 62 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM)................................. 70 Generic I/O Port........................................................ 121 Interrupt Logic............................................................. 83 LCD Bias Voltage Generation .................................. 335 LCD Clock Generation.............................................. 334 On-Chip Reset Circuit................................................. 75 Peripheral Interrupt Logic ........................................... 84 PIC16F/LF1946/47 ............................................... 10, 18 PWM (Enhanced) ..................................................... 216 Resonator Operation .................................................. 61 Timer0 ...................................................................... 187 Timer1 ...................................................................... 191 Timer1 Gate.............................................. 196, 197, 198 Timer2/4/6 ................................................................ 203 Voltage Reference.................................................... 151 Voltage Reference Output Buffer Example .............. 170 BORCON Register.............................................................. 77 BRA .................................................................................. 372 Break Character (12-bit) Transmit and Receive ............... 308 Brown-out Reset (BOR)...................................................... 77 Specifications ........................................................... 401 Timing and Characteristics ....................................... 400 C C Compilers MPLAB C18.............................................................. 416 MPLAB C30.............................................................. 416 CALL................................................................................. 373 CALLW ............................................................................. 373 Capacitive Sensing ........................................................... 317 Associated registers w/ Capacitive Sensing............. 325 Specifications ........................................................... 412 Capture Module. See Enhanced Capture/Compare/ PWM(ECCP) Capture/Compare/PWM ................................................... 207 Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) Associated Registers w/ Capture ............................. 209 Associated Registers w/ Compare ........................... 211 Associated Registers w/ PWM ......................... 215, 228 Capture Mode........................................................... 208 CCPx Pin Configuration............................................ 208 Compare Mode......................................................... 210 CCPx Pin Configuration.................................... 210 Software Interrupt Mode ........................... 208, 210 Special Event Trigger ....................................... 210 Timer1 Mode Resource ............................ 208, 210 Prescaler .................................................................. 208 PWM Mode Duty Cycle ........................................................ 213 Effects of Reset ................................................ 215 Example PWM Frequencies and Resolutions, 20 MHZ ................................ 214 Example PWM Frequencies and Resolutions, 32 MHZ ................................ 214 Example PWM Frequencies and Resolutions, 8 MHz .................................. 214 Operation in Sleep Mode.................................. 215 Resolution ........................................................ 214 System Clock Frequency Changes .................. 215 PWM Operation ........................................................ 212 PWM Overview......................................................... 212 B BAUDCON Register.......................................................... 300 BF ............................................................................. 270, 272 BF Status Flag .......................................................... 270, 272 Block Diagram Capacitive Sensing ........................................... 317, 318 Block Diagrams (CCP) Capture Mode Operation ............................... 208 ADC .......................................................................... 153 ADC Transfer Function ............................................. 164 Analog Input Model ........................................... 164, 177 CCP PWM................................................................. 212 Clock Source............................................................... 59 Comparator ............................................................... 174 Compare Mode Operation ........................................ 210 Crystal Operation .................................................. 61, 62 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)............................ 169 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 427 PIC16F/LF1946/47 PWM Period .............................................................. 213 PWM Setup ............................................................... 213 CCP1CON Register ...................................................... 36, 37 CCPR1H Register ......................................................... 36, 37 CCPR1L Register.......................................................... 36, 37 CCPTMRS0 Register ........................................................ 230 CCPTMRS1 Register ........................................................ 231 CCPxAS Register.............................................................. 232 CCPxCON (ECCPx) Register ........................................... 229 Clock Accuracy with Asynchronous Operation ................. 298 Clock Sources External Modes ........................................................... 60 EC ....................................................................... 60 HS ....................................................................... 60 LP........................................................................ 60 OST..................................................................... 61 RC....................................................................... 62 XT ....................................................................... 60 Internal Modes ............................................................ 63 HFINTOSC.......................................................... 63 Internal Oscillator Clock Switch Timing............... 65 LFINTOSC .......................................................... 64 MFINTOSC ......................................................... 63 Clock Switching................................................................... 67 CMOUT Register............................................................... 179 CMxCON0 Register .......................................................... 178 CMxCON1 Register .......................................................... 179 Code Examples A/D Conversion ......................................................... 158 Changing Between Capture Prescalers .................... 208 Initializing PORTA ..................................................... 123 Initializing PORTB ..................................................... 126 Initializing PORTC..................................................... 129 Initializing PORTD..................................................... 132 Initializing PORTE ..................................................... 135 Initializing PORTF ..................................................... 138 Initializing PORTG .................................................... 142 Write Verify ............................................................... 117 Writing to Flash Program Memory ............................ 115 Comparator Associated Registers ................................................ 180 Operation .................................................................. 173 Comparator Module .......................................................... 173 Cx Output State Versus Input Conditions ................. 175 Comparator Specifications ................................................ 405 Comparators C2OUT as T1 Gate ................................................... 193 Compare Module. See Enhanced Capture/ Compare/PWM (ECCP) CONFIG1 Register.............................................................. 54 CONFIG2 Register.............................................................. 56 Core Registers .................................................................... 31 CPSCON0 Register .......................................................... 323 CPSCON1 Register .......................................................... 324 Customer Change Notification Service ............................. 435 Customer Notification Service........................................... 435 Customer Support ............................................................. 435 Reading .................................................................... 108 Writing ...................................................................... 108 Data Memory ................................................................ 22, 25 DC and AC Characteristics............................................... 413 DC Characteristics Extended and Industrial (PIC16F/LF1946/47-I/E)..... 391 Industrial and Extended (PIC16F/LF1946/47) .......... 384 Development Support ....................................................... 415 Device Configuration .......................................................... 53 Code Protection .......................................................... 57 Configuration Word..................................................... 53 User ID ................................................................. 57, 58 Device Overview........................................................... 9, 103 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) ................................... 167 Associated Registers ................................................ 172 Effects of a Reset ..................................................... 169 Specifications ........................................................... 405 E ECCP/CCP. See Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM EEADR Registers ............................................................. 107 EEADRH Registers........................................................... 107 EEADRL Register ............................................................. 118 EEADRL Registers ........................................................... 107 EECON1 Register..................................................... 107, 119 EECON2 Register..................................................... 107, 120 EEDATH Register............................................................. 118 EEDATL Register ............................................................. 118 EEPROM Data Memory Avoiding Spurious Write ........................................... 108 Write Verify ............................................................... 117 Effects of Reset PWM mode ............................................................... 215 Electrical Specifications (PIC16F/LF1946/47) .................. 381 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP)..................... 207 Enhanced PWM Mode.............................................. 216 Auto-Restart ..................................................... 224 Auto-shutdown.................................................. 223 Direction Change in Full-Bridge Output Mode.. 222 Full-Bridge Application...................................... 220 Full-Bridge Mode .............................................. 220 Half-Bridge Application ..................................... 219 Half-Bridge Application Examples .................... 225 Half-Bridge Mode.............................................. 219 Output Relationships (Active-High and Active-Low)............................................... 217 Output Relationships Diagram.......................... 218 Programmable Dead Band Delay..................... 225 Shoot-through Current ...................................... 225 Start-up Considerations .................................... 227 Specifications ........................................................... 402 Enhanced Mid-range CPU.................................................. 17 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) .............................. 289 Errata .................................................................................... 7 EUSART ........................................................................... 289 Asynchronous Mode ................................................. 291 12-bit Break Transmit and Receive .................. 308 Associated Registers, Receive......................... 297 Associated Registers, Transmit ........................ 293 Auto-Wake-up on Break ................................... 306 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) ............................ 301 Clock Accuracy................................................. 298 Receiver ........................................................... 294 Setting up 9-bit Mode with Address Detect ...... 296 Transmitter ....................................................... 291 D DACCON0 (Digital-to-Analog Converter Control 0) Register..................................................................... 171 DACCON1 (Digital-to-Analog Converter Control 1) Register..................................................................... 171 Data EEPROM Memory .................................................... 107 Associated Registers ................................................ 120 Code Protection ........................................................ 108 DS41414A-page 428 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) Associated Registers ........................................ 302 Auto Baud Rate Detect ..................................... 305 Baud Rate Error, Calculating ............................ 301 Baud Rates, Asynchronous Modes .................. 302 Formulas ........................................................... 301 High Baud Rate Select (BRGH Bit) .................. 301 Clock polarity Synchronous Mode ........................................... 309 Data Polarity Asynchronous Receive ..................................... 294 Data polarity Asynchronous Transmit .................................... 291 Synchronous Mode ........................................... 309 Interrupts Asynchronous Receive ..................................... 295 Asynchronous Transmit .................................... 291 Synchronous Master Mode ............................... 309, 314 Associated Registers, Receive ......................... 313 Associated Registers, Transmit ................ 310, 315 Reception.......................................................... 312 Transmission .................................................... 309 Synchronous Slave Mode Associated Registers, Receive ......................... 316 Reception.......................................................... 316 Transmission .................................................... 314 Extended Instruction Set ADDFSR ................................................................... 371 Stop Condition Timing .............................................. 274 INDF Register ...... 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45 Indirect Addressing ............................................................. 49 Instruction Format............................................................. 368 Instruction Set................................................................... 367 ADDLW..................................................................... 371 ADDWF .................................................................... 371 ADDWFC.................................................................. 371 ANDLW..................................................................... 371 ANDWF .................................................................... 371 BRA .......................................................................... 372 CALL......................................................................... 373 CALLW ..................................................................... 373 LSLF ......................................................................... 375 LSRF ........................................................................ 375 MOVF ....................................................................... 375 MOVIW ..................................................................... 376 MOVLB ..................................................................... 376 MOVWI ..................................................................... 377 OPTION.................................................................... 377 RESET...................................................................... 377 SUBWFB .................................................................. 379 TRIS ......................................................................... 380 BCF .......................................................................... 372 BSF........................................................................... 372 BTFSC...................................................................... 372 BTFSS ...................................................................... 372 CALL......................................................................... 373 CLRF ........................................................................ 373 CLRW ....................................................................... 373 CLRWDT .................................................................. 373 COMF ....................................................................... 373 DECF........................................................................ 373 DECFSZ ................................................................... 374 GOTO ....................................................................... 374 INCF ......................................................................... 374 INCFSZ..................................................................... 374 IORLW ...................................................................... 374 IORWF...................................................................... 374 MOVLW .................................................................... 376 MOVWF.................................................................... 376 NOP.......................................................................... 377 RETFIE..................................................................... 378 RETLW ..................................................................... 378 RETURN................................................................... 378 RLF........................................................................... 378 RRF .......................................................................... 379 SLEEP ...................................................................... 379 SUBLW..................................................................... 379 SUBWF..................................................................... 379 SWAPF..................................................................... 380 XORLW .................................................................... 380 XORWF .................................................................... 380 INTCON Register................................................................ 89 Internal Oscillator Block INTOSC Specifications ................................................... 397 Internal Sampling Switch (RSS) Impedance ..................... 163 Internet Address ............................................................... 435 Interrupt-On-Change......................................................... 147 Associated Registers................................................ 149 Interrupts ............................................................................ 83 ADC .......................................................................... 158 Associated registers w/ Interrupts .............................. 98 F Fail-Safe Clock Monitor....................................................... 70 Fail-Safe Condition Clearing ....................................... 70 Fail-Safe Detection ..................................................... 70 Fail-Safe Operation..................................................... 70 Reset or Wake-up from Sleep..................................... 70 Firmware Instructions........................................................ 367 Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) Associated Registers ................................................ 152 Flash Program Memory .................................................... 107 Erasing...................................................................... 112 Modifying................................................................... 116 Writing....................................................................... 112 FSR Register ...... 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45 FVRCON (Fixed Voltage Reference Control) Register ..... 152 I I2C Mode (MSSPx) Acknowledge Sequence Timing................................ 274 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition ................... 279 During a Stop Condition.................................... 280 Effects of a Reset...................................................... 275 I2C Clock Rate w/BRG.............................................. 282 Master Mode Operation .......................................................... 266 Reception.......................................................... 272 Start Condition Timing .............................. 268, 269 Transmission .................................................... 270 Multi-Master Communication, Bus Collision and Arbitration ......................................................... 275 Multi-Master Mode .................................................... 275 Read/Write Bit Information (R/W Bit) ........................ 251 Slave Mode Transmission .................................................... 256 Sleep Operation ........................................................ 275 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 429 PIC16F/LF1946/47 Configuration Word w/ Clock Sources ................ 74, 141 Configuration Word w/ LDO ........................................ 99 TMR1 ........................................................................ 195 INTOSC Specifications ..................................................... 397 IOCBF Register................................................................. 148 IOCBN Register ................................................................ 148 IOCBP Register................................................................. 148 I2C Mode .................................................................. 246 I2C Mode Operation.................................................. 247 SPI Mode .................................................................. 238 SSPxBUF Register ................................................... 241 SSPxSR Register ..................................................... 241 O OPCODE Field Descriptions............................................. 367 OPTION ............................................................................ 377 OPTION Register.............................................................. 189 OSCCON Register.............................................................. 72 Oscillator Associated Registers .................................................. 74 Oscillator Module ................................................................ 59 EC............................................................................... 59 HS............................................................................... 59 INTOSC ...................................................................... 59 LP ............................................................................... 59 RC .............................................................................. 59 XT ............................................................................... 59 Oscillator Parameters ....................................................... 397 Oscillator Specifications.................................................... 396 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) Specifications ........................................................... 401 Oscillator Switching Fail-Safe Clock Monitor .............................................. 70 Two-Speed Clock Start-up.......................................... 68 OSCSTAT Register ............................................................ 73 OSCTUNE Register............................................................ 74 L LATA Register................................................................... 124 LATB Register................................................................... 127 LATC Register................................................................... 130 LATD Register................................................................... 133 LATE Register................................................................... 137 LATF Register ................................................................... 140 LATG Register .................................................................. 143 LCD Associated Registers ................................................ 360 Bias Voltage Generation ................................... 335, 336 Clock Source Selection ............................................. 334 Configuring the Module ............................................. 359 Disabling the Module ................................................ 359 Frame Frequency...................................................... 342 Interrupts ................................................................... 355 LCDCON Register .................................................... 327 LCDPS Register........................................................ 327 Multiplex Types ......................................................... 342 Operation During Sleep ............................................ 357 Pixel Control.............................................................. 342 Prescaler ................................................................... 334 Segment Enables...................................................... 342 Waveform Generation ............................................... 344 LCDCON Register..................................................... 327, 329 LCDCST Register ............................................................. 332 LCDDATAx Registers ............................................... 333, 340 LCDPS Register........................................................ 327, 330 LP Bits....................................................................... 334 LCDREF Register ............................................................. 331 LCDRL Register ................................................................ 340 LCDSEn Registers ............................................................ 333 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Driver .................................. 327 Load Conditions ................................................................ 395 LSLF.................................................................................. 375 LSRF ................................................................................. 375 P P1A/P1B/P1C/P1D.See Enhanced Capture/Compare/ PWM (ECCP)............................................................ 216 Packaging ......................................................................... 419 Marking ............................................................. 419, 420 PDIP Details ............................................................. 420 PCL and PCLATH............................................................... 18 PCL Register ...... 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45 PCLATH Register ...... 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45 PCON Register ............................................................. 32, 81 PICSTART Plus Development Programmer..................... 418 PIE1 Register................................................................ 32, 90 PIE2 Register................................................................ 32, 91 PIE3 Register................................................................ 32, 92 PIE4 Register...................................................................... 32 Pin Diagram PIC16F/LF1946/47, 64-pin TQFP/QFN ........................ 3 Pinout Descriptions PIC16F/LF1946/47 ..................................................... 11 PIR1 Register ............................................................... 31, 94 PIR2 Register ............................................................... 31, 95 PIR3 Register ............................................................... 31, 96 PIR4 Register ......................................................... 31, 93, 97 PORTA ............................................................................. 123 ANSELA Register ..................................................... 123 Associated Registers ................................................ 125 Configuration Word w/ PORTA................................. 125 LATA Register ............................................................ 33 PORTA Register ......................................................... 31 Specifications ........................................................... 399 PORTA Register ............................................................... 124 PORTB ............................................................................. 126 Associated Registers ................................................ 128 Interrupt-on-Change ................................................. 126 M Master Synchronous Serial Port. See MSSPx MCLR .................................................................................. 78 Internal ........................................................................ 78 Memory Organization Data ...................................................................... 22, 25 Program ...................................................................... 19 Microchip Internet Web Site .............................................. 435 Migrating from other PIC Microcontroller Devices............. 425 MOVIW.............................................................................. 376 MOVLB.............................................................................. 376 MOVWI.............................................................................. 377 MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker, Librarian ................... 416 MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger.................................... 417 MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance Universal In-Circuit Emulator .................................................... 417 MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software .. 415 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer..................................... 417 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System................. 417 MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian ................ 416 MSSPx .............................................................................. 235 DS41414A-page 430 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 LATB Register............................................................. 33 P1B/P1C/P1D.See Enhanced Capture/Compare/ PWM+ (ECCP+) ............................................... 126 Pin Functions and Output Priorities .......................... 126 PORTB Register ......................................................... 31 PORTB Register ............................................................... 127 PORTC ............................................................................. 129 Associated Registers ................................................ 131 LATC Register ............................................................ 33 P1A.See Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM+ (ECCP+) ........................................................... 129 Pin Functions and Output Priorities .......................... 129 PORTC Register ......................................................... 31 Specifications............................................................ 399 PORTC Register ............................................................... 130 PORTD ............................................................................. 132 Associated Registers ................................................ 134 LATD Register ............................................................ 33 P1B/P1C/P1D.See Enhanced Capture/Compare/ PWM+ (ECCP+) ............................................... 132 Pin Functions and Output Priorities .......................... 132 PORTD Register ......................................................... 31 PORTD Register ............................................................... 133 PORTE.............................................................................. 135 ANSELE Register ..................................................... 135 Associated Registers ................................................ 137 LATE Register............................................................. 33 Pin Functions and Output Priorities .......................... 135 PORTE Register ......................................................... 31 PORTE Register ............................................................... 136 PORTF .............................................................................. 138 ANSELF Register...................................................... 138 Associated Registers ................................................ 141 LATF Register............................................................. 38 Pin Functions and Output Priorities .......................... 139 PORTF Register ......................................................... 36 PORTF Register ............................................................... 140 PORTG ............................................................................. 142 ANSELG Register ..................................................... 142 Associated Registers ................................................ 145 LATG Register ............................................................ 38 Pin Descriptions and Output Priorities ...................... 142 PORTG Register......................................................... 36 PORTG Register ............................................................... 143 Power-Down Mode (Sleep) ............................................... 101 Associated Registers ................................................ 102 Power-on Reset .................................................................. 76 Power-up Timer (PWRT) .................................................... 76 Specifications............................................................ 401 PR2 Register................................................................. 31, 39 Precision Internal Oscillator Parameters........................... 397 Program Memory ................................................................ 19 Map and Stack ............................................................ 25 Map and Stack (PIC16F/LF1946/47) .................... 20, 25 Map and Stack (PIC16F1946) .................................... 20 Map and Stack (PIC16F1947) .................................... 20 Map and Stack PIC16F/LF1946/47) ........................... 19 Programming Mode Exit ..................................................... 78 Programming, Device Instructions .................................... 367 PSTRxCON Register ........................................................ 234 PWM (ECCP Module) PWM Steering........................................................... 226 Steering Synchronization .......................................... 227 PWM Mode. See Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM ...... 216 PWM Steering ................................................................... 226 PWMxCON Register......................................................... 233 R RC2REG Register .............................................................. 40 RC2STA Register ............................................................... 40 RCREG............................................................................. 296 RCREG Register ................................................................ 34 RCSTA Register ......................................................... 34, 299 Reader Response............................................................. 436 Read-Modify-Write Operations ......................................... 367 Register RCREG Register ...................................................... 305 Registers ADCON0 (ADC Control 0) ........................................ 159 ADCON1 (ADC Control 1) ........................................ 160 ADRESH (ADC Result High) with ADFM = 0) .......... 161 ADRESH (ADC Result High) with ADFM = 1) .......... 162 ADRESL (ADC Result Low) with ADFM = 0)............ 161 ADRESL (ADC Result Low) with ADFM = 1)............ 162 ANSELA (PORTA Analog Select) ............................ 125 ANSELE (PORTE Analog Select) ............................ 137 ANSELF (PORTF Analog Select)............................. 141 APFCON (Alternate Pin Function Control) ............... 122 BAUDCON (Baud Rate Control)............................... 300 BORCON Brown-out Reset Control) .......................... 77 CCPTMRS0 (PWM Timer Selection Control 0) ........ 230 CCPTMRS1 (PWM Timer Selection Control 1) ........ 231 CCPxAS (CCPx Auto-Shutdown Control) ................ 232 CCPxCON (ECCPx Control) .................................... 229 CMOUT (Comparator Output) .................................. 179 CMxCON0 (Cx Control) ............................................ 178 CMxCON1 (Cx Control 1)......................................... 179 Configuration Word 1.................................................. 54 Configuration Word 2.................................................. 56 CPSCON0 (Capacitive Sensing Control Register 0) ........................................................ 323 CPSCON1 (Capacitive Sensing Control Register 1) ........................................................ 324 DACCON0 ................................................................ 171 DACCON1 ................................................................ 171 EEADRL (EEPROM Address) .................................. 118 EECON1 (EEPROM Control 1) ................................ 119 EECON2 (EEPROM Control 2) ................................ 120 EEDATH (EEPROM Data) ....................................... 118 EEDATL (EEPROM Data) ........................................ 118 FVRCON .................................................................. 152 INTCON (Interrupt Control) ........................................ 89 IOCBF (Interrupt-on-Change Flag)........................... 148 IOCBN (Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge).......... 148 IOCBP (Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge)............ 148 LATA (Data Latch PORTA) ...................................... 124 LATB (Data Latch PORTB) ...................................... 127 LATC (Data Latch PORTC) ...................................... 130 LATD (Data Latch PORTD) ...................................... 133 LATE (Data Latch PORTE) ...................................... 137 LATF (Data Latch PORTF)....................................... 140 LATG (Data Latch PORTG)...................................... 143 LCDCON (LCD Control) ........................................... 329 LCDCST (LCD Contrast Control) ............................. 332 LCDDATAx (LCD Data) .................................... 333, 340 LCDPS (LCD Phase)................................................ 330 LCDREF (LCD Reference Voltage Control) ............. 331 LCDRL (LCD Reference Voltage Control)................ 340 LCDSEn (LCD Segment Enable) ............................. 333 OPTION_REG (OPTION)......................................... 189 OSCCON (Oscillator Control)..................................... 72 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 431 PIC16F/LF1946/47 OSCSTAT (Oscillator Status) ..................................... 73 OSCTUNE (Oscillator Tuning) .................................... 74 PCON (Power Control Register) ................................. 81 PCON (Power Control) ............................................... 81 PIE1 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 1) ........................... 90 PIE2 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 2) ........................... 91 PIE3 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 3) ........................... 92 PIR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Register 1) ........................ 94 PIR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Request 2) ........................ 95 PIR3 (Peripheral Interrupt Request 3) ........................ 96 PIR4 (Peripheral Interrupt Request 4) .................. 93, 97 PORTA...................................................................... 124 PORTB...................................................................... 127 PORTC ..................................................................... 130 PORTD ..................................................................... 133 PORTE...................................................................... 136 PORTF ...................................................................... 140 PORTG ..................................................................... 143 PSTRxCON (PWM Steering Control) ....................... 234 PWMxCON (Enhanced PWM Control) ..................... 233 RCxSTA (Receive Status and Control) ..................... 299 Special Function, Summary ........................................ 31 SRCON0 (SR Latch Control 0) ................................. 183 SRCON1 (SR Latch Control 1) ................................. 184 SSPxADD (MSSPx Address and Baud Rate, I2C Mode).......................................................... 287 SSPxCON1 (MSSPx Control 1) ................................ 284 SSPxCON2 (SSPx Control 2) ................................... 285 SSPxCON3 (SSPx Control 3) ................................... 286 SSPxMSK (SSPx Mask) ........................................... 287 SSPxSTAT (SSPx Status) ........................................ 283 STATUS ...................................................................... 23 T1CON (Timer1 Control)........................................... 199 T1GCON (Timer1 Gate Control) ............................... 200 TRISA (Tri-State PORTA) ......................................... 124 TRISB (Tri-State PORTB) ......................................... 127 TRISC (Tri-State PORTC) ........................................ 130 TRISD (Tri-State PORTD) ........................................ 133 TRISE (Tri-State PORTE) ......................................... 136 TRISF (Tri-State PORTF) ......................................... 140 TRISG (Tri-State PORTG) ........................................ 143 TXCON ..................................................................... 205 TXxSTA (Transmit Status and Control) .................... 298 WDTCON (Watchdog Timer Control)........................ 105 WPUB (Weak Pull-up PORTB) ................................. 128 WPUG (Weak Pull-up PORTG) ................................ 144 RESET .............................................................................. 377 Reset Instruction ................................................................. 78 Resets ................................................................................. 75 Associated Registers .................................................. 82 Revision History ................................................................ 425 SRCON0 Register ............................................................ 183 SRCON1 Register ............................................................ 184 SSP1ADD Register............................................................. 35 SSP1BUF Register ............................................................. 35 SSP1CON1 Register .......................................................... 35 SSP1CON2 Register .......................................................... 35 SSP1CON3 Register .......................................................... 35 SSP1MSK Register ............................................................ 35 SSP1STAT Register ........................................................... 35 SSP2ADD Register............................................................. 35 SSP2BUF Register ............................................................. 35 SSP2CON1 Register .......................................................... 35 SSP2CON2 Register .......................................................... 35 SSP2CON3 Register .......................................................... 35 SSP2MSK Register ............................................................ 35 SSP2STAT Register ........................................................... 35 SSPxADD Register........................................................... 287 SSPxCON1 Register ........................................................ 284 SSPxCON2 Register ........................................................ 285 SSPxCON3 Register ........................................................ 286 SSPxMSK Register........................................................... 287 SSPxOV............................................................................ 272 SSPxOV Status Flag ........................................................ 272 SSPxSTAT Register ......................................................... 283 R/W Bit ..................................................................... 251 Stack................................................................................... 47 Accessing ................................................................... 47 Reset .......................................................................... 49 Stack Overflow/Underflow .................................................. 78 STATUS Register ............................................................... 23 SUBWFB .......................................................................... 379 T T1CON Register ......................................................... 31, 199 T1GCON Register ............................................................ 200 T2CON Register ........................................................... 31, 39 Thermal Considerations (PIC16F/LF1946/47).................. 394 Timer0............................................................................... 187 Associated Registers ................................................ 189 Operation .................................................................. 187 Specifications ........................................................... 402 Timer1............................................................................... 191 Associated registers ................................................. 201 Asynchronous Counter Mode ................................... 193 Reading and Writing ......................................... 193 Clock Source Selection............................................. 192 Interrupt .................................................................... 195 Operation .................................................................. 192 Operation During Sleep ............................................ 195 Oscillator................................................................... 193 Prescaler .................................................................. 193 Specifications ........................................................... 402 Timer1 Gate Selecting Source .............................................. 193 TMR1H Register ....................................................... 191 TMR1L Register........................................................ 191 Timer2 Associated registers ................................................. 206 Timer2/4/6......................................................................... 203 Associated registers ................................................. 206 Timers Timer1 T1CON ............................................................. 199 T1GCON........................................................... 200 Timer2/4/6 TXCON ............................................................. 205 S Shoot-through Current ...................................................... 225 Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM)..................................... 416 SP2BRG Register ............................................................... 40 SPBRG.............................................................................. 301 SPBRG Register ........................................................... 33, 34 SPBRGH ........................................................................... 301 Special Event Trigger........................................................ 157 Special Function Registers (SFRs) ..................................... 31 SPI Mode (MSSPx) Associated Registers ................................................ 245 SPI Clock .................................................................. 241 SR Latch ........................................................................... 181 Associated registers w/ SR Latch ............................. 185 DS41414A-page 432 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 Timing Diagrams A/D Conversion......................................................... 404 A/D Conversion (Sleep Mode) .................................. 404 Acknowledge Sequence ........................................... 274 Asynchronous Reception .......................................... 297 Asynchronous Transmission..................................... 292 Asynchronous Transmission (Back to Back) ............ 293 Auto Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Normal Operation . 307 Auto Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Sleep .................... 307 Automatic Baud Rate Calculator............................... 306 Baud Rate Generator with Clock Arbitration ............. 267 BRG Reset Due to SDA Arbitration During Start Condition .................................................. 278 Brown-out Reset (BOR) ............................................ 400 Brown-out Reset Situations ........................................ 77 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition (Case 1) ............................................................ 279 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition (Case 2) ............................................................ 279 Bus Collision During a Start Condition (SCL = 0) ..... 278 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 1) ....... 280 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 2) ....... 280 Bus Collision During Start Condition (SDA only) ...... 277 Bus Collision for Transmit and Acknowledge............ 276 CLKOUT and I/O....................................................... 398 Clock Synchronization .............................................. 264 Clock Timing ............................................................. 396 Comparator Output ................................................... 173 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) ............. 402 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) ................................. 71 First Start Bit Timing ................................................. 268 Full-Bridge PWM Output ........................................... 221 Half-Bridge PWM Output .................................. 219, 225 I2C Bus Data ............................................................. 410 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits.............................................. 409 I2C Master Mode (7 or 10-Bit Transmission) ............ 271 I2C Master Mode (7-Bit Reception)........................... 273 I2C Stop Condition Receive or Transmit Mode ......... 275 INT Pin Interrupt.......................................................... 87 Internal Oscillator Switch Timing................................. 66 LCD Interrupt Timing in Quarter-Duty Cycle Drive.... 356 LCD Sleep Entry/Exit when SLPEN = 1 or CS = 00......................................................... 358 PWM Auto-shutdown ................................................ 224 Firmware Restart .............................................. 224 PWM Direction Change ............................................ 222 PWM Direction Change at Near 100% Duty Cycle ... 223 PWM Output (Active-High)........................................ 217 PWM Output (Active-Low) ........................................ 218 Repeat Start Condition.............................................. 269 Reset Start-up Sequence............................................ 79 Reset, WDT, OST and Power-up Timer ................... 399 Send Break Character Sequence ............................. 308 SPI Master Mode (CKE = 1, SMP = 1) ..................... 407 SPI Mode (Master Mode).......................................... 241 SPI Slave Mode (CKE = 0) ....................................... 408 SPI Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ....................................... 408 Synchronous Reception (Master Mode, SREN) ....... 313 Synchronous Transmission....................................... 310 Synchronous Transmission (Through TXEN) ........... 310 Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock ........................... 401 Timer1 Incrementing Edge........................................ 195 Two Speed Start-up .................................................... 69 Type-A in 1/2 Mux, 1/2 Bias Drive ............................ 345 Type-A in 1/2 Mux, 1/3 Bias Drive ............................ 347 Type-A in 1/3 Mux, 1/2 Bias Drive ............................ 349 Type-A in 1/3 Mux, 1/3 Bias Drive ............................ 351 Type-A in 1/4 Mux, 1/3 Bias Drive ............................ 353 Type-A/Type-B in Static Drive .................................. 344 Type-B in 1/2 Mux, 1/2 Bias Drive ............................ 346 Type-B in 1/2 Mux, 1/3 Bias Drive ............................ 348 Type-B in 1/3 Mux, 1/2 Bias Drive ............................ 350 Type-B in 1/3 Mux, 1/3 Bias Drive ............................ 352 Type-B in 1/4 Mux, 1/3 Bias Drive ............................ 354 USART Synchronous Receive (Master/Slave) ......... 406 USART Synchronous Transmission (Master/Slave) .................................................. 405 Wake-up from Interrupt............................................. 102 Timing Diagrams and Specifications PLL Clock ................................................................. 397 Timing Parameter Symbology .......................................... 395 Timing Requirements I2C Bus Data............................................................. 411 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits............................................. 410 SPI Mode.................................................................. 409 TMR0 Register.................................................................... 31 TMR1H Register ................................................................. 31 TMR1L Register.................................................................. 31 TMR2 Register.............................................................. 31, 39 TRIS ................................................................................. 380 TRISA Register........................................................... 32, 124 TRISB ............................................................................... 126 TRISB Register........................................................... 32, 127 TRISC ............................................................................... 129 TRISC Register........................................................... 32, 130 TRISD ............................................................................... 132 TRISD Register........................................................... 32, 133 TRISE ............................................................................... 135 TRISE Register........................................................... 32, 136 TRISF ............................................................................... 138 TRISF Register ........................................................... 37, 140 TRISG............................................................................... 142 TRISG Register .......................................................... 37, 143 Two-Speed Clock Start-up Mode........................................ 68 TX2REG Register ............................................................... 40 TX2STA Register................................................................ 40 TXCON (Timer2/4/6) Register .......................................... 205 TXREG ............................................................................. 291 TXREG Register ................................................................. 34 TXSTA Register.......................................................... 34, 298 BRGH Bit .................................................................. 301 U USART Synchronous Master Mode Requirements, Synchronous Receive .............. 406 Requirements, Synchronous Transmission...... 406 Timing Diagram, Synchronous Receive ........... 406 Timing Diagram, Synchronous Transmission... 405 V VREF. SEE ADC Reference Voltage W Wake-up on Break ............................................................ 306 Wake-up Using Interrupts ................................................. 102 Watchdog Timer (WDT)...................................................... 78 Modes....................................................................... 104 Specifications ........................................................... 401 WCOL ....................................................... 267, 270, 272, 274 WCOL Status Flag.................................... 267, 270, 272, 274 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 433 PIC16F/LF1946/47 WDTCON Register............................................................ 105 WPUB Register ................................................................. 128 WPUG Register................................................................. 144 Write Protection................................................................... 57 WWW Address.................................................................. 435 WWW, On-Line Support........................................................ 7 DS41414A-page 434 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means to make files and information easily available to customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet browser, the web site contains the following information: * Product Support - Data sheets and errata, application notes and sample programs, design resources, user's guides and hardware support documents, latest software releases and archived software * General Technical Support - Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, online discussion groups, Microchip consultant program member listing * Business of Microchip - Product selector and ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases, listing of seminars and events, listings of Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory representatives CUSTOMER SUPPORT Users of Microchip products can receive assistance through several channels: * * * * * Distributor or Representative Local Sales Office Field Application Engineer (FAE) Technical Support Development Systems Information Line Customers should contact their distributor, representative or field application engineer (FAE) for support. Local sales offices are also available to help customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is included in the back of this document. Technical support is available through the web site at: http://support.microchip.com CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION SERVICE Microchip's customer notification service helps keep customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers will receive e-mail notification whenever there are changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a specified product family or development tool of interest. To register, access the Microchip web site at www.microchip.com, click on Customer Change Notification and follow the registration instructions. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 435 PIC16F/LF1946/47 READER RESPONSE It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip product. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150. Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document. To: RE: Technical Publications Manager Reader Response Total Pages Sent ________ From: Name Company Address City / State / ZIP / Country Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________ Application (optional): Would you like a reply? Y N Literature Number: DS41414A FAX: (______) _________ - _________ Device: PIC16F/LF1946/47 Questions: 1. What are the best features of this document? 2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs? 3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why? 4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject? 5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness? 6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)? 7. How would you improve this document? DS41414A-page 436 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16F/LF1946/47 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office. PART NO. Device X Temperature Range /XX Package XXX Pattern Examples: a) b) PIC16LF1946 - I/P = Industrial temp., Plastic DIP package, low-voltage VDD limits. PIC16F1947 - I/PT = Industrial temp., TQFP package, standard VDD limits. Device: PIC16F1946, PIC16LF1946, PIC16F1946T, PIC16LF1946T(1) PIC16F1947, PIC16LF1947, PIC16F1947T, PIC16LF1947T(1) I E MR PT = = = = -40C to +85C -40C to +125C Micro Lead Frame (QFN) TQFP (Thin Quad Flatpack) Temperature Range: Package: Pattern: 3-Digit Pattern Code for QTP (blank otherwise) Note 1: 2: F = Standard Voltage Range LF = Low Voltage Range T = In tape and reel for QFN and TQFP packages only. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41414A-page 437 WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE AMERICAS Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://support.microchip.com Web Address: www.microchip.com Atlanta Duluth, GA Tel: 678-957-9614 Fax: 678-957-1455 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Cleveland Independence, OH Tel: 216-447-0464 Fax: 216-447-0643 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 248-538-2260 Kokomo Kokomo, IN Tel: 765-864-8360 Fax: 765-864-8387 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 Santa Clara Santa Clara, CA Tel: 408-961-6444 Fax: 408-961-6445 Toronto Mississauga, Ontario, Canada Tel: 905-673-0699 Fax: 905-673-6509 ASIA/PACIFIC Asia Pacific Office Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tower 6, The Gateway Harbour City, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 61-2-9868-6755 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8528-2100 Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8665-5511 Fax: 86-28-8665-7889 China - Chongqing Tel: 86-23-8980-9588 Fax: 86-23-8980-9500 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 China - Nanjing Tel: 86-25-8473-2460 Fax: 86-25-8473-2470 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8203-2660 Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7252 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 China - Xiamen Tel: 86-592-2388138 Fax: 86-592-2388130 China - Zhuhai Tel: 86-756-3210040 Fax: 86-756-3210049 ASIA/PACIFIC India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-3090-4444 Fax: 91-80-3090-4123 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-4160-8631 Fax: 91-11-4160-8632 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 Japan - Yokohama Tel: 81-45-471- 6166 Fax: 81-45-471-6122 Korea - Daegu Tel: 82-53-744-4301 Fax: 82-53-744-4302 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or 82-2-558-5934 Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur Tel: 60-3-6201-9857 Fax: 60-3-6201-9859 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-227-8870 Fax: 60-4-227-4068 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Fax: 63-2-634-9069 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Fax: 65-6334-8850 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-6578-300 Fax: 886-3-6578-370 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-536-4818 Fax: 886-7-536-4803 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2500-6610 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Fax: 66-2-694-1350 EUROPE Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-39 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5869 Fax: 44-118-921-5820 01/05/10 DS41414A-page 438 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. |
Price & Availability of PIC16F1946-EMR
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |